Quantum Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

QUANTUM® Q1000 Multifunction Meter Technical Reference Guide Maximum Flexibility

SchlumbergerSema Utilities Electricity 313-B North Highway 11 West Union, SC 29696 USA Tel : 864-638-8300 Fax : 864-638-4950

EL - 0012.1 - GB - 09.01 © Copyright 1999, 2001 Schlumberger Resource Management Services, Inc.

QUANTUM® Q1000 Multimeasurement Meter Technical Reference Guide Revision 2.0 Effective Date: December 31, 2001

Proprietary Rights Notice This manual is an unpublished work and contains the trade secrets and confidential information of Schlumberger Resource Management Services, Inc., which are not to be divulged to third parties and may not be reproduced or transmitted in whole or part, in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical for any purpose, without the express written permission of Schlumberger RMS, Inc. All rights to designs or inventions disclosed herein, including the right to manufacture, are reserved to Schlumberger RMS, Inc. The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. Schlumberger RMS, Inc. reserves the right to change the product specifications at any time without incurring any obligations.

Trademarks Used in This Manual EnergyPAC is a trademark of Schlumberger Resource Management Services, Inc. FULCRUM, QUANTUM and PC-PRO+ are registered trademarks of Schlumberger Resource Management Services, Inc. Protocol Editor is a trademark of Schlumberger Resource Management Services, Inc. Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. LonWorks and LonTalk are trademarks of Echelon Corporation. Hyperterminal is a copyright of Hilgraeve, Inc. Hayes, Smartcom, Smartmodem, Accura, & Optima, are trademarks of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc. USRobotics, Sportster, Megahertz, Courier, & RapidComm are trademarks of U.S. Robotics.

QUANTUM® Q1000 Multimeasurement Meter Technical Reference Guide EL-0012.1-GB-12.01 SchlumbergerSema - Utilities 313-B North Highway 11 West Union, SC 29696 Tel: (864) 638-8300 Fax: (864) 638-4950

ii

Copyright© 2000, 2001 Schlumberger Resource Management Services, Inc. All rights reserved.

Compliance With FCC Regulations FCC Part 68, Class B Registration This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. The label affixed to this equipment contains, among other information, the FCC Registration Number and Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment. Upon request, you must provide this information to your telephone company. The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices you can connect to your telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your telephone number is called. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the RENs of all devices connected to one line should not exceed five (5.0). To determine the number of devices your can connect to your line in your calling area—as determined by the REN—contact your local telephone company. The following jacks must be ordered from the telephone company to interconnect this product with the public communication network: RJ31. If your telephone equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the Telephone Company can discontinue your service temporarily. If possible, they will notify you in advance. If advance notice is not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC. Your telephone company can make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the proper function of your equipment. If they do, you will be notified in advance. You will then have an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If you have trouble with this equipment, please contact us at the address below for information on obtaining service or repairs. The telephone company may ask that you disconnect this equipment from the network until the problem has been corrected or until you are sure that the equipment is not malfunctioning. This product is not field-repairable; however, the maintenance section of this manual described troubleshooting steps that you can take in the even of equipment problems.This equipment can not be used on coin service lines provided by the telephone company. Connections to party lines are subject to state tariffs. Contact your local telephone company if you plan to use this equipment on party lines. The installation of this product does not require any connections or changes to the internal wiring of other registered terminal equipment.

iii

Factory Repair of Meters SchlumbergerSema recommends that all repairs be performed at the factory. Certain repairs may be performed by the user; however, unauthorized repairs will void any existing warranty. All surface mounted parts must be replaced by the factory.

Repair of Meters Under Warranty If the meter is under warranty, then SchlumbergerSema will repair the meter at no charge if the meter has failed due to components or workmanship. A return authorization number must be obtained before the equipment can be sent back to the factory. Contact your SchlumbergerSema RMS Sales Representative for assistance.

Repair of Meters Not Under Warranty The same procedure as above applies. SchlumbergerSema will charge for the necessary repairs based on the failure.

Replacement Parts Refer to Chapter 10 for a list of available parts and SchlumbergerSema part numbers.

Service Return Address

SchlumbergerSema Customer Repair Department 313 North Highway 11 Dock C West Union, SC 29696

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions manual, this equipment can cause interference to radio communications. The equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to FCC Part 15, Class A registration of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. The user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help

ATTENTION The product you have purchased contains a battery (or batteries), circuit boards, and switches. The batteries are recyclable. At the end of the meter’s useful life, under various state and local laws, it may be illegal to dispose of certain components into the municipal waste system. Check with your local solid waste officials for details about recycling options or proper disposal.

iv

North American Business Offices United States

SchlumbergerSema - Utilities 313-B North Highway 11 West Union, SC 29696 Tel: 864-638-8300 Fax: 864-638-4950

v

Electricity Technical Support For support subscriptions, please contact your local SchlumbergerSema Sales Representative. Contact Numbers

866-877-2007

Toll-free in the U.S. and Canada

770-368-3532

Direct-dial number

Email Address

[email protected] Hours of Operation

vi

8 A.M. - 6 P.M. EST

Monday through Thursday

8 A.M. - 5 P.M. EST

Friday

Table of Contents Proprietary Rights Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii Trademarks Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii Compliance With FCC Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii FCC Part 68, Class B Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Factory Repair of Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Repair of Meters Under Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Repair of Meters Not Under Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Service Return Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Electricity Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi Contact Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi Email Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi Hours of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi

Chapter 1

General Information

How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 General Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Register Data and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Load Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Totalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Voltage Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Harmonic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Time Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 System Loss Compensation (SLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Billing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Time of Use/Multi-Tariff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Co-Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Interruptible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Real Time Pricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Web-based Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Compensated Billing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Summary Billing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Conjunctive Billing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Timekeeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

vii

Table of Contents

Auxiliary Power and Meter Rated Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Burdens (Per Element) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Universal Plug and Play Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 ANSI Plug and Play Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 IEC Plug and Play Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Meter-to-Meter Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 I/O Binding Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 I/O Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29 I/O Module Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 Data Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 LonWorks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 System Measurements, Planning, and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39 Load Balancing and Feeder Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39 Transformer Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39 SCADA Interfacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39 System Loss Compensating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39 System Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40

Chapter 2

Installation

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Meters with Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Meter Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Site Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Meter Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 A-base Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Socket Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Case Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 DIN Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Installing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Connecting the Standard Single Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Socket, A-Base, DIN, Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Rackmount Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 PC-PRO+ 98 Programming Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Site Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Auxiliary Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Socket Base Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 DIN Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

viii

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Table of Contents

A-base Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Case Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meter Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meter Enclosure and Meter Enclosure Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single-Point Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example Ground Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection to Ground Grid Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Case Ground of the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CT and VT Circuit Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . At the CTs and VTs in the Substation Yard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . At the Test Block Below the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Meter Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q1000 Meter DB-25 Connector (Meter Interface Connector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications Splitter Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Post-December 1999 Version Q1000 Communications Splitter Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-December 1999 Version Q1000 Communications Splitter Cable (Discontinued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q1000 Programming Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Modem Connection—A-base, DIN, and Socket Base Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Modem Connection—Switchboard and Rackmount Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS-485 Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIN Flushmount Adapter Installation Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Modem Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Modem Installation in Socket Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Modem Installation in DIN/A-base Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Modem Installation in Switchboard Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Modem Installation in Rackmount Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Modem and Internal RS-485 Boards in Pre-December 1999 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal RS-485 Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS-485 / RS-232 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal RS-485 Board Installation in Socket Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal RS-485 Board Installation in DIN/A-base Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal RS-485 Board Installation in Switchboard Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal RS-485 Board Installation in Rackmount Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a Display Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Socket Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIN/A-base Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switchboard Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rackmount Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a Power Supply Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Socket Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIN/A-base Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-15 2-16 2-17 2-23 2-25 2-25 2-25 2-25 2-26 2-26 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-28 2-28 2-28 2-30 2-31 2-32 2-32 2-35 2-36 2-36 2-37 2-38 2-39 2-40 2-40 2-40 2-40 2-44 2-46 2-48 2-50 2-51 2-53 2-55 2-55 2-56 2-58 2-60 2-61 2-63 2-63 2-63 2-65 2-66 2-67 2-67 2-67 2-69 ix

Table of Contents

Switchboard Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 Rackmount Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71 Installing QUANTUM Q1000 Switchboard Meter at QUANTUM STQ Switchboard Meter Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72

Chapter 3

Operating Instructions

Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Application of Power/Power-Up Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Power Down Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Normal Turn-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Power Outage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Cold Load Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Interval Make-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Recovery Power-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Normal Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Alternate Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Remote Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Display Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Scroll Lock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Demand Reset Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Alternate Display Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Test Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Infrared LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 DIP Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Security Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Implementing Security Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Clearing Security Codes—Customer Default Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Contrast Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Three Button Reset—Customer Default Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Energy Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Demand Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Present Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Previous Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Projected Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Cumulative Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Continuous Cumulative Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Minimum Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Maximum Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Load Profile Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Instantaneous Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Non-Register Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Communication Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 I/O Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Meter Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 x

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Table of Contents

Metering Point Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time-of-Use Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Data Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time-of-Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quantity Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Register Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device Multipliers/CT and VT Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Loss Compensation (SLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displayable Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normal Mode Register Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Mode Register Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Load Profile Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time-of-Use Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Event Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold Alarm Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Window Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Phone Home Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Phone Home Event Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Self Read Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Data Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Module Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Module Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IEC 2-wire KY Pulse Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IEC 2-Wire KY or KYZ Pulse Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Output Module Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loss of Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QUANTUM Q1000 Meter Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Firmware Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Firmware Upgrade Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Helpful Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-26 3-27 3-28 3-28 3-29 3-30 3-32 3-32 3-32 3-33 3-33 3-34 3-40 3-41 3-41 3-42 3-42 3-43 3-44 3-44 3-45 3-47 3-49 3-51 3-53 3-54 3-55 3-57 3-58 3-60 3-61 3-63 3-64 3-66 3-67 3-67 3-67 3-69 3-70 3-71 3-74 3-74 3-76 3-78 3-79 3-80 3-81 3-85

xi

Table of Contents

CT/VT Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85

Chapter 4

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

Memory Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Standard Load Profile Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Interval Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Channel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Pulse Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Example Calculation of kWh Pulse Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Standard Load Profile Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Bit Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Data Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Extended Load Profile Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Meter Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Timekeeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Adjusting Meter Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 GPS Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Time Synchronization Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Message Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Example Message Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 GPS Port Baud Rate Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Data Backup During Power Outage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Auxiliary Power Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Event Summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Time-of-Use Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 TOU Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Implementing TOU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Event Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 TOU Calendar Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 TOU Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Import/Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 TOU Energy Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 TOU Demand Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Chapter 5

Power Quality

Voltage Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Voltage Interruptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Voltage Sags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Voltage Sag Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Voltage Swells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Voltage Swell Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Voltage Imbalances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Voltage Imbalance Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Voltage Imbalance Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Voltage Imbalance Example 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Voltage Imbalance Example 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 xii

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Table of Contents

Harmonic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . THD Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fundamental Power Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Harmonic Registers and Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Harmonics Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Amplitude Harmonics Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Phase Angle Harmonics Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Amplitude Harmonics Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Phase Angle Harmonics Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6

5-10 5-11 5-12 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-15 5-16

Communications

Simultaneous Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Optical Port (OPT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Dual Port RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Internal Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 External Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 External Modem Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Practical Peripherals P114MT II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Hayes Accura 144 + Fax 144 Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 U.S. Robotics Sportster 336 Faxmodem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 RS-485 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 RS-232 to RS-485 Converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 B&B Electronics—485TBLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Aten—IC-485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 IC-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Default Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 BPS Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Off-Hook Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Call Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Answer Delays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Answer in Call Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Answer Outside Call Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Ring Answer Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Tip and Ring Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Telephone Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Dedicated Phone Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Parallel Off-Hook Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Dialing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Retry Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Number of Redials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Minutes to Wait Between Retry Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Phone Home on Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 Changing Meter Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 Programming Software Time Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 Advanced Protocol Time Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 GPS Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

xiii

Table of Contents

Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Basic Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 Mini-DLMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 QDIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 IEC 1107 (SIRP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 SCS (factory use only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 Advanced Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 DNP 3.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 IEC 60870-5-102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 IEC 60870-5-102 Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 MODBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 Protocol Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 Input and Output Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26 Pulse Outputs (KYZ, or IEC 2-wire KY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26 Digital State Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 Pulse Inputs (KYZ, or IEC 2-wire KY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 Digital State Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 Input / Output Modules (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33 I/O Network Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34 LonTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34 LonWorks Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34 I/O Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35 I/O Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35 Meter Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35 I/O Module Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35 Binding Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36 I/O Module Functionality for the Plug and Play Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37 Network Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39 I/O Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39

Chapter 7

System Loss Compensation

System Loss Compensation - Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Elements of System Loss Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Transformer Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 No-load Var Loss Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Full-load Var Loss Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Transmission Line Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Substation Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Total System Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Calculation of System Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Transformer Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Calculation of Transformer Var Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Transmission Line Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Substation Conductor Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Total System Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 xiv

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Table of Contents

Three-Phase, 4-Wire Meter Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Watt Loss Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Var Loss Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three-Wire, Delta Load, 2-Element Meter Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-Element Meter Percentage Loss Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing Meters with System Loss Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Element Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Element Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition of Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8

7-11 7-12 7-13 7-14 7-15 7-16 7-16 7-18 7-18

Theory of Operation

Major Function Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 VTs and MOV Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 CTs and Transducer Board (Front End) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Main Board (Back End) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Data Calculation and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Downloadable Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 LonWorks Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Optical Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 RS-232 with Multiple Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Measurement Techniques and Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Active Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Fixed Sampling and FFTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Front End / Back End: Calculations and Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Calculated Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Energy Quantity IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Demand Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Voltage Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 System Loss Compensation (SLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Totalized Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 External Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Load Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Power Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Voltage Imbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Voltage Interruptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Voltage Sags and Swells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Time-of-Use (TOU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Chapter 9

Testing and Maintenance

General Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Battery Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

xv

Table of Contents

Battery Handling Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 System Error Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Diagnostics Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Fatal Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Non-Fatal Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Meter Operations Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Register Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Infrared LED Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 KYZ Pulse Output Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Demand Reset Lockout Time Verifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Alternate Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Field Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Verification of Bidirectional Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Cold Load Pickup (Demand Delay) Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Battery Carryover Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 General Display Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Infrared LED/Test Pulse Adapter Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Energy Register Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Meter Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Accuracy Equations and Load Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Loss of Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 No Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Display Frozen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Infrared LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Not Pulsing Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Infrared LED Is Not Operational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Reset Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 RESET Push Button Does Not Initiate Demand Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 ALT Push Button Does Not Initiate Alternate Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 SCROLL Push Button Mechanism Does Not Initiate a Scroll Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Remote Demand Reset Not Operational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Initialization of Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Cannot Initialize Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Meter Loses Its Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 System Loss Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 System Loss Compensation Not Operating Properly in Field Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Input/Output (I/O) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 No Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 No Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 No KYZ Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Communication Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Optical Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Direct Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 RS-485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

xvi

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Table of Contents

Chapter 10

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Meter Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications Splitter Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical Port Programming Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q1000 Optional Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modem Retrofit Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS-485 Retrofit Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug and Play Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawings and Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix A

10-1 10-3 10-3 10-3 10-4 10-4 10-4 10-4 10-5

Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Appendix B

Status Codes

Harmonics Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Quality Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Load Profile Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Load Profile Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

B-1 B-2 B-4 B-5

xvii

Table of Contents

Notes:

xviii

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

List of Figures Figure

Figure Titles

Page

1.1

Q1000 Meter Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

1.2 1.3

Q1000 Product Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29 Meter Dimensions Socket Base Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

1.4

Meter Dimensions DIN Base Meter with Short Terminal Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

1.5 1.6 1.7

Meter Dimensions DIN Base Meter with Extended Terminal Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31 Meter Dimensions DIN Flushmount Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32 Meter Dimensions A-base/Bottom Connected Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32

1.8

Meter Dimensions Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33

1.9

Meter Dimensions Rackmount Meter Without Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34

1.10

Dimensions Rackmount Case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35

1.11

Input/Output Module Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36

1.12

Typical Q1000 I/O Module - Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38

1.13 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13 2.14 2.15 2.16 2.17 2.18 2.19 2.20 2.21 2.22 2.23 2.24 2.25 2.26 2.27 2.28 2.29 2.30 2.31 2.32 2.33 2.34 2.35

Typical Q1000 I/O Module - Front and Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 Standard Single Battery - All Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Dual Battery Configuration - Socket Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Access Door Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Dual Socket Meter Battery - Side 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Dual Socket Meter Battery - Side 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Battery Access Door - DIN, A-base Meters (Hatch Closed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Battery Access Door - DIN, A-base Meters (Hatch Open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Installing the Standard Battery (Socket Meter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Installing the Standard Battery (DIN Meter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Standard Battery Cable Connection (DIN Meter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Installing the Standard Battery (Switchboard Meter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Installing the Standard Battery (Switchboard Meter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Installing the Standard Battery (Rackmount Meter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Installing the Standard Battery (Rackmount Meter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Socket Base Meter with Auxiliary External Power Plug-in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 9S Socket Base Meter with Auxiliary Power Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 DIN Meter with Auxiliary Power Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 A-base Auxiliary Power Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Auxiliary Power Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Q1000 Socket Meter Form 5 Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Q1000 Socket Meter Form 9 Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Q1000 A-base Meter Form 5 Service Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Q1000 A-base Meter Form 9 Service Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Q1000 DIN Meter Form 5 Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Q1000 DIN Meter Form 9 Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Q1000 Switchboard Meter Form 5 Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Q1000 Switchboard Meter Form 9 Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Q1000 Rackmount Meter Form 5 Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Q1000 Rackmount Meter Form 9 Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 I/O Module (3 Dimensional View). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 I/O Modules Mounted on DIN Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Meter Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Example Ground Bar for Meter Cabinet “Single Point” Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 IEC Optical Probe Example Cable and Meter’s Optical Port Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 ANSI Optical Probe Example Cable and Meter’s Optical Port Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

xix

List of Figures

Figure

xx

Figure Titles

Page

2.36

Standard Q1000 Communications Splitter Cable, Terminated Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

2.37 2.38 2.39 2.40 2.41 2.42 2.43 2.44 2.45 2.46 2.47

Pre-December 1999 Communications Splitter Cable, Unterminated Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Socket Meter with Internal Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 A-base Meter with Internal Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Modem Connection on Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Modem Connection on Rackmount Meter Case (2 meters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 DIN Flushmount Adapter Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Flush Mounting Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 DIN Meter in Flushmount Kit - Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 DIN Meter in Flushmount Kit - Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Meter Panel Cut Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Completed Flush Mounting Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44

2.48

Internal Modem Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

2.49 2.50 2.51 2.52 2.53 2.54 2.55 2.56 2.57 2.58 2.59 2.60 2.61 2.62

Modem Module Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 Modem Module Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 DIN/A-base Modem Board Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 DIN/A-base Modem J2 and J3 Connector Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Switchboard Modem Board Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Switchboard J2, J3, and J4 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Rackmount Modem Board Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Rackmount Modem Board Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 RS-485 Board Configuration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55 RS-485 Board Insertion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56 RS-485 Board Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 DIN/A-base RS-485 Board Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 DIN/A-base RS-485 Board J2 and J3 Connector Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 Switchboard RS-485 Board Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

2.63

Switchboard J1, J2, and J3 Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61

2.64 2.65 2.66 2.67 2.68 2.69 2.70 2.71 2.72 2.73 2.74

Rackmount RS-485 Board Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 Rackmount RS-485 Board Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 Display Board (Bottom View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 Display Board Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 DIN/A-base Display Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66 Switchboard Display Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 Power Supply Board Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68 Power Supply Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68 Rear Plate Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 Power Supply Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 Switchboard Power Supply Board Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71

3.1 3.2

Controls and Indicators, Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Controls and Indicators, DIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

3.3 3.4

Warning Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Test Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

3.5

Example Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11

Status Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Q1000 DIP Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Device Security Codes Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Contrast Adjustment, DIN Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Contrast Adjustment, Socket Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Q1000 Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

3.12 3.13

Quantity Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 PC-PRO+ 98 Device Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

List of Figures

Figure

Figure Titles

Page

3.14 3.15 3.16 3.17

Normal Mode Threshold Alarm Example 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inverted Mode Threshold Alarm Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normal Mode Threshold Alarm Example 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inverted Mode Threshold Alarm Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.18 3.19

I/O Module Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67 I/O Module Terminal Strip Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68

3.20 3.21 3.22

I/O Module Center Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68 I/O Module Power Supply Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69 IEC 2-wire KY Output Board DIP Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70

3.23

Pulse Input Module Input Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72

3.24 3.25 3.26 4.1

Pulse Input Board Jumper Locations (JP1 & JP4-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 Pulse Input Board Jumper Locations (JP2 & JP3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 DIP Switch and Jumper Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77 Time Synchronization Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

4.2

GPS Synchronization Message Timeline Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

4.3 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.8 5.9 5.10 5.13 5.14 5.15 5.16 5.17 6.1

Time Synchronization Message Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Voltage Interruptions Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Voltage Interruptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Voltage Sags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Voltage Sag Example of One Phase Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Voltage Sag Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Voltage Swells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Voltage Swell Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Voltage Imbalances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Voltage Imbalance Example of VA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Harmonics Configuration—General Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Harmonics Configuration—Voltage Amplitude Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Harmonics Configuration—Voltage Phase Angle Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Harmonics Configuration—Current Amplitude Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Harmonics Configuration—Current Phase Angle Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Q1000 Phone Line Multi-drop Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.2

RS-485 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 9.1

Three Communication Rates for Modem Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Internal Modem Off-Hook Detect Enable/Disable Jumper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Dedicated Phone Line Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Meter Sharing Customer Phone Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 I/O Module Mounted on DIN Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33 I/O Network with Terminated QUANTUM Q1000 (at one of the bus ends) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39 I/O Network with Unterminated QUANTUM Q1000 (in between) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40 I/O Network with Two Unterminated Q1000 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40 System Loss Compensation Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 SLC Basic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Diagram of QUANTUM Q1000 SLC Metering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Simplified Transformer Equivalent Circuit and Loss Power Triangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 System Schematic; 3-Phase 3-Wire with 2-Element QUANTUM Q1000 Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Rear of Display Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7

Typical Q1000 Class 2 Amp Load Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 ANSI Meter; Class 2 Amp Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Typical Q1000 Class 10 Amp Load Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 IEC Meter; Class 5 (10) Amp Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Typical Q1000 Class 20 Amp Load Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 ANSI Meter; Class 20 Amp Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-55 3-56 3-56 3-56

xxi

List of Figures

Figure 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 10.9 10.10 10.11 10.12 10.13 10.14 10.15 10.16 10.17 10.18

xxii

Figure Titles

Page

Main Board Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Display Board Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Modem Board Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 RS-485 Board Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Transducer Board Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Power Supply Board Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 MOV Board Diagram (S-Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 MOV Board Diagram (DIN/A-base/Switchboard/Rackmount). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Digital State Outputs (1-8) Module 1 (Universal Binding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Digital State Outputs (9-16) Module 2 (Universal Binding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Digital Pulse Outputs KYZ (1-4) and Digital State Output 1 Module 3 (Universal Binding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Digital Pulse Outputs IEC 2-Wire KY (5-8) and Digital State Outputs (1-4) Module 4 (Universal Binding). . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Analog Outputs (1-4) Module 5 (Universal Binding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Analog Outputs (5-8) Module 6 (Universal Binding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Digital Pulse Inputs KYZ or IEC 2-wire KY (1-4) Module 7 (Universal Binding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Digital Pulse Inputs KYZ or IEC 2-wire KY (5-8) Module 8 (Universal Binding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Digital State Inputs (1-8) Module 11 (Universal Binding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Digital State Inputs (9-16) Module 12 (Universal Binding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

List of Tables Table 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 1.14 1.15 1.16 1.17 1.18 1.19 1.20 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 3.17

Table Titles

Page

Manual Chapter Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Meter Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Time Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Meter Rated Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Q1000 Meter High Current Error Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Q1000 Meter Low Current Error Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 DIN, DIN Flushmount, A-base, Switchboard, Rackmount Meter Burden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Socket Meter Burden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 I/O Module Power Supply Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Pulse and State Output Module Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Output Pulse Rate Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Pulse and State Input Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Input Pulse Rate Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Relative Value to Physical Output Translation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 I/O Module Current Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 I/O Module Voltage Ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 Loss of Communication Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 Q1000 Weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36 Error Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 Battery Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 QUANTUM Q1000 Meter Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 External Meter Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 External Meter Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Q1000 Meter DB-25 Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Standard Q1000 Communication Splitter Cable Part Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Standard Q1000 Communications Splitter Cable Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Pre-December 1999 Communications Splitter Cable Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Switchboard and Rackmount DB-9 Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Internal Modem Kit Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 Internal RS-485 Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55 Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Status Line Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 DIP Switch Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Q1000 Security Code Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Q1000 Energy Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Energy Registers (Watthours, Varhours, VAhours, Qhours). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Energy Registers (volthours, amphours) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Parameters, Device Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Parameters, Time-of-Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Quantity Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Communication Setup Dialog Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 General Tab Parameters, Communications Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 Optical Port Tab Parameters, Communications Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Serial Ports Tab Parameters, Communications Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Advanced Protocols Tab Parameters, Communications Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39 Time Synchronization Tab Parameters, Communications Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39 Parameters, Device Multipliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

xxiii

List of Tables

Table 3.18 3.19 3.20 3.21 3.22 3.23 3.24 3.25 3.26 3.27 3.28 3.29 3.30 3.31 3.32 3.33 3.34 3.35 3.36 3.37 3.38 3.39 3.40 3.41 3.42 3.43 3.44 3.45 3.46 3.47 3.48 3.49 3.50 3.51 3.52 4.1 4.2 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 7.1 7.2 9.1 9.2 A.1 B.1 B.2 B.3

xxiv

Table Titles

Page

Parameters, Basic System Loss Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 Parameters, Display Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 Parameters, Displayable Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 Parameters, Normal Mode Register Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 Parameters, Test Mode Register Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 Parameters, Switch Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 Parameters, LED Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 Parameters, Standard Load Profile Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45 Parameters, Voltage Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 Parameters, Harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 Time-of-Use Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51 Parameters, Event Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53 Parameters, Threshold Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55 Parameters, Output Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57 Parameters, Input Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59 Parameters, Call Window Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60 Parameters, Phone Home Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 Parameters, Phone Home Event Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63 Parameters, Self-Read Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64 Parameters, Service Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66 Parameters, User Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67 IEC 2-wire KY Pulse Output Module DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70 Pulse Input KYZ or IEC 2-wire KY Jumper Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71 Wetting Voltage Jumper Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71 Input Pulse Duration Jumper Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72 Relative Value to Physical Output Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74 I/O Module Current Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75 I/O Module Voltage Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76 Loss of Communication Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76 Output Type DIP Switch and Jumper Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77 Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77 Time Out Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78 Firmware Revisions as of December 2001. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79 Firmware Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80 LOADER Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82 Standard Load Profile Data Recording Capacity (in days) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Time Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 B&B Electronics—485TBLED RS-485 Converter Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Aten—IC-485 RS-485 Converter Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 IC-11 RS-485 Converter Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Default Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Dial Modifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Phone Home Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 QDIP Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 System Losses Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Definition of Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Coil Factors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Balance Restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 Harmonics Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Voltage Quality Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 Voltage Interruption Reset Reasons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

List of Tables

Table B.4 B.5

Table Titles

Page

Standard Load Profile Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 Extended Load Profile Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

xxv

List of Tables

Notes:

xxvi

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Chapter 1

General Information This instruction manual explains the installation, operation, and maintenance of the SchlumbergerSema QUANTUM® Q1000 Multimeasurement Meter (hereafter referred to simply as the meter or Q1000). SchlumbergerSema urges you to read the entire manual before attempting installation, tests, operations, or maintenance. To operate Schlumberger’s PC-PRO+® 98 Programming Software, refer to the PCPRO+® 98 Getting Started Guide, the PC-PRO+ 98 Online Help, and the PCPRO+® 98 Online Manual. To configure any of the Advanced Protocols, refer to the Protocol Editor™ software, the Protocol Editor Online Help, and the Protocol Editor Getting Started Guide.

How to Use This Manual This manual includes development updates through PC-PRO+ 98 Version 2.3 software and Firmware Version 5.x.1 The following information is contained in this manual. Table 1.1 Manual Chapter Layout Chapter

1.

Title

Description

1

General Information

Provides a general description of the Q1000 meter, information about the meter’s features, metering applications, meter specifications, and system planning.

2

Installation

Provides instructions for storing, unpacking, and installing the Q1000 meter, including wiring, and option module connections.

3

Operating Instructions

Provides instructions for operating the meter including meter displays, DIP switches, reset mechanisms, calibration, and programmable functions. Also provides information on optional Input/Output Modules and the MeterKey feature.

4

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-ofUse, Meter Time, event Log, and Log Summary

Provides information about the capabilities of Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use metering, meter timekeeping and time synchronization, the Event Log , and Event Log Summaries.

5

Power Quality

Provides information about power quality measurement, including voltage quality sags, swells, imbalances, and interruptions as well as information on harmonic analysis and recording.

The final version of the 5.x firmware was not available at the time of publishing.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

1-1

General Information

Table 1.1 Manual Chapter Layout Chapter

Title

Description

6

Communications

Provides information about meter communications, the Modem Module, the RS-485 Module, and Basic and Advanced Protocols. Also provides information on I/O networks and bi9ndings.

7

System Loss Compensation

Provides information about system loss compensation including calculations, examples, and SLC testing procedures.

8

Theory of Operation

Provides high-level descriptions of circuit board functionality as well as information on measurement techniques and power quality analysis.

9

Testing and Maintenance

Provides procedures for testing, troubleshooting, and maintaining the Q1000 meter.

10

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Provides part numbers for standard and replacement parts and communication cables, and block diagrams of the circuit boards.

Appendix A

Diagnostic Errors

Provides a complete list of all Q1000 diagnostic errors, including descriptions and causes of the errors as well as additional detailed information and recommended user actions.

Appendix B

Status Code

Provides a complete list of all Q1000 status codes, including Harmonics, Voltage Quality, and Standard and Extended Load Profile statuses.

Glossary

Provides a description of some of the most commonly used Q1000-related terms.

Index

Along with the Table of Contents, List of Figures, and List of Tables, the Index provides a tool to assist users in locating information in this manual.

General Product Description The QUANTUM Q1000 intelligent electronic device (IED) is an unsurpassed accurate solid-state electronic multimeasurement meter designed to be used at bulk power flow points including power plants, substations, intertie points, and large commercial and industrial sites. The QUANTUM Q1000 was designed for maximum flexibility. PC-PRO+ 98, the Windows® based programming software, is both easy to use and flexible. This software can be used to create a program whether the software is connected to a meter or not. This allows greater flexibility to customers needing to work on programs in the shop for meters that will be installed at a future time. User downloadable firmware makes it possible to upgrade the meter’s internal software with future enhancements. Dynamic allocation of the meter’s memory at program time allows the user to allocate memory to the features being used at each metering point, resulting in maximum utilization of the resources available. As the needs of today’s electric industry change and grow, the QUANTUM Q1000 is ready to grow to answer those needs.

1-2

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

General Information

The Q1000 can be programmed to display over 300 user-selected parameters on a versatile four line dot matrix liquid crystal display (LCD). The display can be customized to display alphanumeric characters and ID codes. There are over 1,000 display quantities from which to choose. Flexibility is the rule here, too. This allows users to build displays to fit their needs—even label quantities in Spanish, French, or Portuguese to simplify display reading in non-English locations. The Q1000 meter is a totally solid state, multimeasurement, transformer-rated, polyphase meter. It measures and displays the per phase real and reactive power in all four quadrants. It is capable of local and/or remote programming and interrogation. Register information is displayed on a four line liquid crystal display and recorded interval data is available for translation by an external computer. Data may also be retrieved through one of the many protocols supported in the Q1000 meter, allowing versatile communication to a wide variety of systems and equipment. Because the device can measure bidirectional power flow, quantities such as Watts, Vars, and VA can be metered in all four quadrants. Power Quality can be measured, recorded and acted upon utilizing subcycle voltage and individual harmonic measurements. The Load Profile capabilities of the Q1000 meter take data storage to a new level. Two types of load profiles are supported—standard load profile and extended load profile. The standard load profile includes two fully independent load profile recorders, with independent interval lengths and 24 channels each. The extended load profile includes eight additional load profiles each with up to 24 additional channels of data. The extended load profiles also include some new abilities. For more details, see Chapter 4. Maximum flexibility of load profile recording combined with Schlumberger’s EnergyAudit™ software provides a complete solution for monitoring customer loads. The meter features a modular design, consisting of electronic circuit boards that fit together to perform various functions including: •

Transformer input for voltage and current

•

Analog to digital conversion, and measurement processing

•

Register, load profile, real time clock and communications processing

•

Inputs and Outputs for pulse, digital state, and analog data

•

Internal telephone modem function

•

Simultaneous communication ports, allowing WEB/RTU/SCADA/PC data management system communication interface functions

A full complement of intelligent input/output modules, including pulse inputs and outputs, digital state inputs and outputs and analog inputs and outputs, are all available or under development. I/O modules are separate from the meter and communicate over a LONWORKs® twisted pair network.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

1-3

General Information

Packaging The Q1000 meter is available in Socket, DIN, A-base, Switchboard and Rackmount configurations.

DIN Meter w/IEC Optical Port (shown with short terminal cover; long cover also available)

A-base Meter w/IEC Optical Port

Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Meter w/ANSI Optical Port

Socket Meter w/ANSI Optical Port

19” Rackmount Meter (shown with two meters) w/IEC Optical Port Note: The case of the Rackmount meter will hold 2 meters side-by-side (shown here). If only one meter is ordered, then a blank plate will cover the empty slot in the case. Figure 1.1 Q1000 Meter Packages

1-4

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

General Information

Features Register Data and Display The QUANTUM Q1000 allows over 300 displayable items from a selection of thousands on the four line liquid crystal display. The display annunciators and data are fully programmable by the user. The meter is capable of measuring and displaying the following registers: Energy:

Wh (net, delivered, received, per phase, aggregate) varh (net, delivered, received, 4 quadrant varh, per phase, aggregate) VAh (Vectorial and Arithmetic, 4 quadrant VAh, delivered, received, per phase, aggregate, distortion unbalance) Pfh (per phase and aggregate) Hzh Qh (net, delivered, received) Vh (per phase, average) Ah (per phase, Neutral, average) %THD Ah (per phase, ANSI, IEC) %THD Vh (per phase, ANSI, IEC) Fundamental and Compensated SLC values Totalized Quantity hours Input Quantity hours

Demand:

Maximum demand Minimum demand Present demand Previous demand Projected demand Cumulative demand Continuous cumulative demand User-selected groups of 4 coincident demand values (Block/Rolling/Thermal) Block and Rolling demand intervals with programmable interval and subinterval lengths Demand intervals are synchronized to an internal clock. Additionally, the calculation of thermal demand is available

Instantaneous:

Watts (net, delivered, received, per phase, aggregate) vars (net, delivered and received and 4 quadrant var, per phase, aggregate) VA (Vectorial and Arithmetic, 4 quadrant VA, delivered, received, per phase, aggregate, distortion unbalance) Q (net, delivered, received) Volts (per phase, average) Amperes (per phase, Neutral, average) Power Factor (per phase and 3 phase) Instantaneous registers update at sub-second frequency (except for compensated instantaneous registers, which are updated once every second) Instantaneous peaks and minimums are also available for display

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

1-5

General Information

Self Read:

The self-read function is available to freeze register data at programmed times. 32 sets of self-read data can be stored in the QUANTUM Q1000. A self read can be programmed to occur via a number of ways, including: at a regular interval, after a demand reset, at test mode entry and exit, at season change (TOU meters only), and/or triggered by an external input.

Power Quality:

The magnitude and phase angle of all individual harmonics through the 20th are available for retrieval and display, including the calculation of percent total harmonic distortion (% THD). Both types of % THD are supported—ANSI and IEC. Harmonics Avg. per phase Fundamental current Avg. per phase Fundamental voltage Avg. per phase Fundamental current phase angle Avg. per phase Fundamental voltage phase angle Avg. Harmonic current Avg. Harmonic voltage Avg. per phase Harmonic current phase angle Avg. per phase Harmonic voltage phase angle Avg. per phase Harmonic voltage % of Fundamental Avg. per phase Harmonic current % of Fundamental Instantaneous per phase %THD European (IEC) current Instantaneous per phase %THD European (IEC) voltage Instantaneous per phase Fundamental current Instantaneous per phase Fundamental voltage Instantaneous per phase Fundamental power Instantaneous per phase Fundamental current phase angle Instantaneous per phase Fundamental voltage phase angle Instantaneous per phase %THD U.S. (ANSI) current Instantaneous per phase %THD U.S. (ANSI) voltage Instantaneous per phase Harmonic current Instantaneous per phase Harmonic voltage Instantaneous per phase Harmonic current phase angle Instantaneous per phase Harmonic voltage phase angle Instantaneous per phase Harmonic voltage % of Fundamental Instantaneous per phase Harmonic current % of Fundamental

1-6

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

General Information

Power Quality: (continued)

The most recent voltage quality events and count values pertaining to voltage quality events are also available for retrieval and display. Voltage Quality Imbalances Imbalance Count Imbalance per phase Last Avg. % Imbalance per phase Last Duration Imbalance per phase Last End Date Imbalance per phase Last End Time Imbalance per phase Last Start Date Imbalance per phase Last Start Time Imbalance per phase Pending Imbalance per phase Pending Avg. % Imbalance per phase Pending Start Date Imbalance per phase Pending Start Time Voltage Quality Interruptions (Classes 1, 2 and 3) Interruption Class 1/2/3 Count Interruption Class 1/2/3 Last Duration Interruption Class 1/2/3 End Date Interruption Class 1/2/3 End Time Interruption Class 1/2/3 Reason Interruption Class 1/2/3 Start Date Interruption Class 1/2/3 Start Time Voltage Quality Sags/Swells (Levels 1 and 2) Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Pending Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Pending Duration Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Pending End Date Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Pending End Time Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Pending Start Date Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Pending Start Time Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Pending Voltage Extreme Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Pending Average Current Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Count Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Last Average Current Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Last Duration Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Last End Date Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Last End Time Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Last Start Date Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Last Start Time Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Last Voltage Extreme

CT/VT Correction

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

CT/VT Correction allows the meter to correct for the errors in the current and voltage instrument transformers on a per phase basis.

1-7

General Information

Load Profile The Q1000 has 240 channels of load profile split into two standard load profiles of 24 channels per profile and 8 extended load profiles of 24 channels per profile. Channels are available for totalized registers as well as registers for the recording of pulse input information. Virtually every measured quantity can be recorded in load profile. Both load profiles can have their own interval lengths (i.e. one interval length of 15 minutes could be used for billing and a second interval length of 5 minutes for load study data gathering). Each standard load profile interval length is programmable from 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20, or 30 seconds or 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30, or 60 minutes. Standard load profile intervals of data retains a maximum of 65,535 pulses, or 16 bit resolution; this extended degree of resolution allows for a significant improvement in billing data accuracy. Interval data and time is maintained by a battery during power outages or through the use of the optional (AC/DC) Auxiliary Power Supply. Battery carryover life is a minimum of 180 days. For more information about Extended Load Profile, see Chapter 4. Interval data storage is maintained in the meter’s RAM storage. The meter has around 440 Kbytes of dynamically allocated RAM available. This memory is shared between load profile, the event log, power quality information, self reads, and register storage. This flexibility allows the user to customize the meter’s memory usage to each metering point. Important load profile quantities include:

1.

1-8

•

Wh (delivered and received, net, per phase or 3 phase)

•

Varh (delivered and received, net, per phase or 3 phase)

•

Varh Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 (per phase or 3 phase)

•

Vh, V2h (average or per phase)

•

Ah, I2h (average or per phase)

•

Neutral Ah

•

Qh

•

%THD Ah and Vh (per phase, ANSI or IEC)

•

fundamental Wh and Varh (all values available as per phase or 3 phase)

•

SLC values

•

Hzh

•

Pfh (per phase or 3 phase)

•

VAh Vectorial (delivered and received, per phase or 3 phase)

•

VAh Vectorial Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 (per phase and 3 phase)

•

VAh Arithmetic (delivered and received, per phase or 3 phase)

•

VAh Arithmetic Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 (per phase and 3 phase)

•

VAh Arithmetic Unbalance

•

VAh Arithmetic Distortion

•

Eight (Totalized Quantity) h

•

Eight (Pulse Input) h

•

Eight (Analog Input) h1

Analog Inputs are not currently available in the Q1000 meter. They are a planned enhancement for a future release.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

General Information

Totalization The QUANTUM Q1000 meter is capable of maintaining up to 8 totalized registers. Each totalized register may be programmed to add or subtract internally calculated quantities as well as external pulse inputs. In addition, a new button is being added in the 4.01i Q1000 firmware and PC-PRO+98 v2.1 software release to enable the totalized quantities to perform a Pythagorean Theorem calculation, i.e., a square root of the sum of the squares. Totalized registers are treated just like any other register quantity and can be stored to energy, demand and/or load profile registers.

Voltage Quality The QUANTUM Q1000 is capable of measuring subcycle voltage quality events of sags, swells, interruptions and imbalances. Each event type has an independently programmable magnitude threshold, hysteresis and minimum duration of the event. Pertinent information is stored with each event, such as duration, minimum/ maximum extreme values and a time stamp to mark when the event occurred. The number of events to be recorded is also programmable. Sag and swell measurements are based on a half-cycle, sliding window algorithm. Two levels of sag and swell events may be programmed.

Harmonic Analysis The QUANTUM Q1000 measures and provides user definable recording and display of individual harmonics for each phase of voltage and current up to the 20th harmonic using Fast Fourier Transforms (FFT). Both magnitude and phase angle measurements are calculated and stored as part of the harmonic analysis. The QUANTUM Q1000 calculates average and instantaneous percent total harmonic distortion (%THD) for each phase of voltage and current using both ANSI and IEC formulas. The time averaged value of harmonic voltage and currents up to the 20th harmonic may be recorded and displayed. The QUANTUM Q1000 energy and demand measurements include harmonic content up to the 32nd harmonic.

Communications The meter provides five-port, multiple protocol communications support. Port 1 is a RS-232 port. Port 2 is selectable between RS-232, or an internal modem, or a RS485 port.1 The third port is an IEC 1107 or ANSI optical port located on the device cover. The fourth port is a LONWORKS port that can be expanded to support 64 inputs and outputs.2 The fifth port is the LEDs of the meter face. Simultaneous communication on all five ports is supported.

1. 2.

•

OPTICAL PORT—The meter is capable of being interrogated through an IEC 1107 or ANSI GE Opticom optical port located on the cover at 9600 bits/ second. The meter supports all communication protocols through this userconfigurable port.

•

RS-232—The meter comes standard with two RS-232 ports which operate at rates up to 115,200 bits/second.

The internal modem or RS-485 port require their respective internal option boards that can either be ordered with the meter or ordered later as a kit. Separate LonWorks I/O modules can either be ordered with the meter or ordered later as a kit. Up to 12 modules are supported.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

1-9

General Information

The meter supports multi-drop physical networks through the use of external devices (fiber optic modems, frame relay, radios, and dial-up telephones). Several of the protocols support multi-drop operation. •

RS-485 - The optional RS-485 module provides either 1 RS-485 port or 1 RS232 port. The data rate can be up to 115,200 bits per second for either type. An internal RS-485 board is always connected to through Port 2. The RS-485 port supports a multi-drop network of up to 32 devices with a cable length of up to 4000 feet. The RS-232 port supports up to 255 devices with a cable length of up to 50 feet (normal wiring) or more depending on communication technology (fiber, radio, and so forth).

•

MODEM—The optional internal modem is software programmable to operate at rates from 1,200 up to 33,600 bits/second with autobaud sensing capability. The internal modem is configured as either an auto-answer or an auto-dial unit. If the unit is programmed to be an auto-answer unit, it will answer incoming calls. If it is programmed to be an auto-dial unit, it will initiate and receive phone calls. An internal modem is always connected to through Port 2. The internal modem has off-hook detect capabilities; it will not dial if an extension phone is off hook. The modem releases the phone line if an extension phone is picked up and the handset is toggled once. The meter has the ability to perform an auto-dial function to a PC central station, based on a programmable set of events such as loss of potential, demand reset, and digital state input.

•

LONWORKS NETWORK—The inputs to and outputs from the meter utilize a LONWORKS Network connection. This easily expandable twisted pair technology allows multiple signals to be passed between devices about every second.

•

LEDs—Two LEDs are supported on the meter face. Any energy value can be programmed to these LEDs and different energy quantities can be programmed in Normal and Test modes. The LEDs can be ordered either Infrared or Visible. The visible light LED is red.

Inputs and Outputs The Q1000 has a flexible LONWORKS compatible networked I/O subsystem. The standard configuration allows up to 12 SchlumbergerSema I/O modules to be connected to one meter with plug-and-play connections. Optional I/O module selections include: 16 digital state outputs, 8 pulse outputs, 8 analog outputs, 16 digital state inputs, 8 pulse inputs and 8 analog inputs1.

Time Adjustment The time in the meter can be adjusted in several ways. Meter initialization will set the time in the meter to the time in the PC being used. In the event of an initialization, the time can be set to any time regardless of the previous meter setting. Initialization clears all meter data.2 A second method for changing the time in the meter is the time adjustment; this adjustment can be made in several ways. The PC-PRO+ 98 programming software can be used, or one of several Advanced Protocols can be used, or the GPS time 1. 2.

1-10

Analog Inputs are not currently available in the Q1000 meter. They are a planned enhancement for a future release. Billing data may be retained or discarded using a prompt in the initialization process.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

General Information

synchronization capability can be used. When a time adjustment is performed, the meter’s time can be changed forward or backward up to one hour each time (depending on the method used); multiple time adjustments can be done. During a time adjustment, demand and load profile data are maintained but are modified to accommodate the time change. In this way, the load profile structure remains consistent in spite of the time change. If time is moved backward, the ending time for the current interval remains the same as it was before the adjustment, so it will simply be extended to make a larger interval. When the meter’s time reaches the time for end of interval, the meter will begin with normal interval lengths again. The extended interval will be flagged to indicate the time adjustment. If time is moved forward, the old interval ending times will be maintained and empty intervals will be added to fill in the time that was skipped. Each affected interval will be flagged to indicate the time adjustment occurrence. Additional time adjustment methods are included in several of the Advanced Protocols. Refer to the respective protocol for more information. GPS time synchronization allows for sophisticated control and setup of time changes. Frequencies of daily, hourly, and 5 minutes are supported, as well as 61 world time zones. 5 GPS message formats are simultaneously monitored, and four time adjustment windows may be configured. Time can be adjusted up to +/- 30 minutes using this method. See Chapter 4 for more information.

Programming The software for programming this meter (PC-PRO+ 98) is a 32-bit Windows 95/NT application. User definable security codes in both the programming software and the meter prevent unauthorized reprogramming of the meter. In addition, a programming lockout switch is provided on the meter to prevent reprogramming regardless of security codes used. Programming and/or interrogation of the meters can be accomplished locally or remotely in several ways, including a direct link via the RS-232 or RS-485 connection, an internal or external telephone modem communication link, or through the optical port using a laptop PC. The meter also has downloadable firmware allowing for easy upgrades to the meter.

System Loss Compensation (SLC) The Q1000 meter is capable of providing system loss compensation. System loss compensation for active and reactive power losses includes transformer, bus, conductor, transmission line, and auxiliary equipment losses. Transformer no-load core losses, and load losses for winding resistance and leakage reactance are included. Transmission line resistive and inductive load loss calculations, and charging current vars may also be included. For QUANTUM STQ meter users, the values entered into the QUANTUM Q1000 meter are the same as the ones used in the QUANTUM STQ meter.1

1.

If you are a PC-PRO+ Version 1.0 users, call your SchlumbergerSema Representative. Version 1.0 worked differently; Versions 2.0 and above work as described.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

1-11

General Information

All compensated registers are updated once every second. The meter allows for measurement, recording, and display of both compensated and uncompensated registers simultaneously. See Chapter 7 for more information.

Applications The QUANTUM Q1000 is designed to be used for revenue billing, power quality, information collection and retrieval, and system measurement applications. The meter’s capability for complex measurements is ideal for large commercial, industrial, and utility power exchange points. A metering point’s system accuracy can be affected by: 1

The meter’s accuracy.

2

The CT/VT accuracy.

3

The difference in readings between the metering point and the billing point.

The Q1000 has the capability to meet these potential concerns to allow the user to have the most accurate billing data available on the market today. The in-depth voltage quality and individual harmonic measurements allow ongoing power quality studies to be performed on a proactive basis allowing the user to perform traditional billing functions while simultaneously studying the other aspects of a metering site. The per phase measurement and recording capability and the multi-port, multi-protocol interfaces can provide real-time information to allow the user the ability to run their operations efficiently to monitor load usage and PF (and so forth) to help reduce power bills. A flexible architecture and superior meter features combined with state of the art programming and data retrieval software make the QUANTUM Q1000 the meter of choice for the deregulated market place.

Billing The QUANTUM Q1000 provides unsurpassed accuracy for applications in revenue billing. For customers billed on any number of rate structures, a time-of-use rate, an interruptible rate, a real time pricing rate, with or without transformer loss compensation, all traditional billing quantities are provided by the Q1000 in addition to the extended features which extend meter capabilities to new heights. Nonvolatile memory retains critical billing registers during power outages. Security passwords, meter seals, and lockout switches protect register and profile data. On-site and remotely accessed error conditions including a time tagged event log provide a high degree of confidence and protection of critical information.

Time of Use/Multi-Tariff The QUANTUM Q1000 provides support for basic and extended time-of-use rate structures including variations on the active/reactive energy and demand rates used for industrial customer applications.1 See Chapter 4 for more information.

Co-Generation The Q1000 meter is ideal for large and small utilities or industrial customers whose exchanges of power must be measured precisely. The QUANTUM Q1000 meter provides on-line measurement of bi-directional power flow including watts, vars, 1.

1-12

Time-of-use is a planned enhancement to the Q1000 meter. It is currently planned for release in 2001.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

General Information

volt-amperes, and power factor. Register multipliers and scale factors of kilo(k) and mega(M) can be selected to display actual primary readings rather than secondary readings that must be multiplied manually. Register self read capabilities combined with on-line measurements of bi-directional power flow make real-time energy pricing data available to the utility. Data can be retrieved from load profile memory for interval by interval analysis of system performance such as changes in power flow. Increased capability of pulse output functionality provides for up to 40 pulses per second of any energy value, thereby increasing pulse resolution. Per phase measurements coupled with standard energy, demand and instantaneous register data make the Q1000 meter a complete measurement package for intertie points.

Interruptible Interruptible rates provide industrial customers a signal to reduce load under a contracted demand at critical times. To comply with the contract and receive the rate benefit, the customer must dynamically reduce loading by turning off unnecessary loads or, more drastically, shutting down production lines. Overshooting and undershooting the load reduction can be detrimental to both the utility and the customer. The Q1000’s projected demand quantities and Schlumberger’s wide range of application software combine to provide for on-site access to metering data allowing the dynamic ability to be constantly aware of contract compliance. This information provides for accurate load reduction while minimizing the impact on the customer’s business. By ensuring proper load reduction per contract, large penalties may also be avoided. Additionally, at large installations, multiple delivery points are likely. Using one Q1000 as a master meter, inputs from other site meters can be combined allowing for the projected demand to be calculated from a coincident demand for more accurate load reduction.

Real Time Pricing There are trends in competitive markets for real time pricing or day before hourly pricing driving a need for greater communications. Also, in a deregulated market, enhanced communications capabilities are needed throughout the industrial segment allowing simultaneous reading by both the utility and customer. Load profile information can be utilized by both entities to calculate month to date billing as well as forecast upcoming load impact of the real time pricing structure. The Q1000 meter meets these needs.

Web-based Information In today’s fast paced electricity marketplace, loads and generation are often distributed over non-contiguous areas. SchlumbergerSema and the Q1000 meter offer exciting web solutions to your data access needs. Consolidate your generation levels and customer loads on fast, targeted web screens customized to meet your needs for operation in real-time.

Compensated Billing System Loss Compensation is a metering scheme that provides for adding (or subtracting) losses to meter registration when it is more economical to install the metering equipment at a point that is different from the contractual billing point. Often called “transformer loss compensation,” it is more accurately called “system loss compensation” to recognize the inclusion of transmission line and station losses. These losses can be quite significant.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

1-13

General Information

When rate schedules and service contracts permit, many metering installations are placed on the low voltage side of the transformer. A significant savings in the installed cost of the lower voltage instrument transformers as compared to the cost of the higher voltage instrument transformers is achieved. Also, the metering point may be located a considerable distance from the billing point. The associated transformer, bus, auxiliary power usage, line, and/or conductor losses can be included in the Q1000 meter readings. Additionally, phase angle and ratio error corrections associated with the instrument CT and VT transformers affecting the overall accuracy of the metering point can also be applied to the meter registers in the Q1000, increasing the accuracy of the load information by a substantial factor.

Summary Billing Summary billing is simply adding energy usage together from several users. With its multiple communications options and ability to totalize many inputs, the Q1000 is ideally suited for this new billing application. One meter can act as the overall billing meter for a site. This meter will receive inputs from other meters and provide summarized or totalized usage figures. For summary billing of sites in different locations, see your SchlumbergerSema Sales Representative to learn about exciting options for correlating your data through software retrieval and PC display or web presentation of data.

Conjunctive Billing As the impact of deregulation continues to affect large industrial accounts, rates begin to allow a customer to benefit from a diversified demand. When supplied at multiple delivery points, individually metered demands are likely non-coincident in time. Providing for inputs from these individual meters, a Q1000 master meter can calculate a true conjunctive or coincident demand for site billing. This conjunctive demand provides for both internal additive or subtractive totalization thus supporting even the most complicated rates. When metering point locations prohibit the use of a master meter to calculate conjunctive demand on site, the standard Q1000 provides up to 48 channels of load profile allowing the easy calculation of conjunctive demand by the reading system at the end of the billing cycle. With two independent load profiles, the use of one profile for billing recorded at the billing demand interval length eliminates the interference with system loading studies that are likely being performed on a fine time resolution. Time synchronization among these multiple meters can be provided through the use of a global end-of-interval signal.

1-14

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

General Information

Specifications Operating Conditions Table 1.2 Meter Operating Conditions Temperature

-40 to + 85 degrees C

Humidity:

0 to 95%, non-condensing

Frequency

57-63 hertz (60 Hz model) or 47-53 hertz (50 Hz model). a

Current Rating

ANSI: Class 10 or 20 (Current maximum = 22A) ANSI: Class 2 (Current maximum = 6A) IEC: IN = 5A, IMAX = 20A (Current maximum = 22A) IEC: IN = 1A, IMAX = 6A (Current maximum = 6A)

Power Supply Voltage Input

The power supply can be connected internally to the voltage phases or brought out through an optional external auxiliary AC or DC power source. b Socket power supply is single phase. DIN/A-base/Switchboard/ Rackmount power supply is three phase. c

Optional Auxiliary Power Supply Inputd

AC or DC supply, 100 to 240V +25%, -20%

Starting Current

1A Meters—Prior to current reaching 1mA. 10A Meters—Prior to current reaching 5mA. 20A Meters—Prior to current reaching 5mA.

a

b

c

d

All Q1000 meters can be programmed for 60 or 50 Hz, but the meters are calibrated at the factory at the Frequency selected on the Hardware Specification Form. This connection is made at the factory from a choice made on the Hardware Specification Form; it cannot be changed in the field. Socket meters without auxiliary power are powered from the A phase voltage terminals. DIN, A-base, Switchboard, and Rackmount meters have a three-phase power supply. Without auxiliary power, these meter forms are powered from any of the three phases A, B, or C phase voltage terminals. A meter with Aux Power Supply is always powered through this method. A common field implementation method for improving reliability of the meter’s power supply voltage source is to use a throwover scheme to use an AC supply to power the meter’s auxiliary terminals normally and a DC supply to power the meter during outages to the AC source.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

1-15

General Information

Timekeeping The QUANTUM Q1000 real time clock is either synchronized to line frequency or its own crystal. The crystal allows accurate time keeping to be maintained in the event of an outage or a location with line varying frequency. Table 1.3 Time Accuracy Time Accuracy

Temperature

+/-0.0022%

-10°C to +45°C

+/-0.02%

-40°C to +85°C

The time in the meter can be updated via communication ports at any time using a variety of methods.

Batteries See "Meters with Batteries" on page 2-2 and "Main Board (Back End)" on page 8-3 for battery option information.

Auxiliary Power and Meter Rated Voltage The Auxiliary Power option allows the meter to be powered from an external source and does not rely on line voltage to power the meter. A meter with the Auxiliary Power option is always powered from the Auxiliary Power terminals1 and works for both AC and DC; the same hardware is used for both types. The auxiliary power supply has an auto-ranging input allowing voltages from 100-240 V AC or DC across the auxiliary terminals. Table 1.4 Meter Rated Voltage Meter Rated Voltage Table a Form 5 [3 phase, 3 wire delta (2 element)] Phase to Phase Voltage Socket

o 58-69Vb

o 100-120V

o 220-240V

DIN/DIN Flushmount/A-base/Switchboard/Rackmount

o 58-69Vb

o 100-120V

o 220-240V

Form 9 [3 phase, 4 wire wye (3 element)] Phase to Neutral Voltage Socket

o 58-69Vb

o 100-120V

o 220-240V

DIN/DIN Flushmount/A-base/Switchboard/Rackmount

o 58-69V

1.

1-16

o 100-120V

o 220-240Vb

A meter with Aux Power Supply is always powered through this method. A common implementation method is to use a throwover scheme to use an AC supply normally and a DC supply to power the meter during outages to the AC source.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

General Information

a

b

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Meter Rated Voltage is the nominal voltage that is to be measured by the voltage sensing circuitry within the meter. This choice has no effect on the meter’s hardware; however, this choice will determine the voltage that the meter is calibrated at in the factory, and it will impact the nameplate data. Meters operating within these ranges are only available when ordered with Auxiliary Power.

1-17

General Information

Accuracy The QUANTUM Q1000 meter Class 10, Class 20, 5(10), 5(20) amp meters meet the error limits in Table 1.5. Table 1.5 Q1000 Meter High Current Error Limits Measured Quantity

1-18

Phase Angle

% Error of Reading

Volts (0.75Vn - 1.15Vn)

All Phase Angles

±0.2%

Amps (0.1A - 0.25A)

All Phase Angles

±0.4%

Amps (0.25A - 20A)

All Phase Angles

±0.2%

Watts (0.05A - 0.25A)

0°, 180°

±0.2%

Watts (0.25A - 20A)

0°, 180°

±0.1%

Watts (0.1A 0.5A)

-60°, +60°, -120°, +120°

±0.3%

Watts (0.5A - 20A)

-60°, +60°, -120°, +120°

±0.2%

Vars (0.05A - 0.25A)

-90°, 90°

±0.2%

Vars (0.25A - 20A)

-90°, 90°

±0.1%

Vars (0.1A 0.5A)

-30°, +30°, -150°, +150°

±0.3%

Vars (0.5A - 20A)

-30°, +30°, -150°, +150°

±0.3%

Q (0.1A - 0.25A)

-60°, 120°

±0.4%

Q (0.25A - 20A)

-60°, 120°

±0.3%

Q (0.1A 0.5A)

-30°, +30°, -150°, +150°

±0.6%

Q (0.5A - 20A)

-30°, +30°, -150°, +150°

±0.4%

VA arithmetic (0.1A 0.5A)

All Phase Angles

±0.3%

VA arithmetic (0.5A - 20A)

All Phase Angles

±0.2%

VA vectorial (0.1A - 0.25A)

-30°, +30°, -150°, +150° -60°, +60°, -120°, +120°

±0.4%

VA vectorial (0.25A - 20A)

-30°, +30°, -150°, +150° -60°, +60°, -120°, +120°

±0.3%

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

General Information

The Q1000 Class 2, 1(6) amp meters meet the error limits in Table 1.6. Table 1.6 Q1000 Meter Low Current Error Limits Measured Quantity

Phase Angle

% Error of Reading

Volts (0.75Vn - 1.15Vn)

All Phase Angles

±0.2%

Amps (0.02A - 0.1A)

All Phase Angles

±0.4%

Amps (0.1A - 6A)

All Phase Angles

±0.2%

Watts (0.01A - 0.02A)

0°, 180°

±0.4%

Watts (0.02A - 0.1A)

0°, 180°

±0.2%

Watts (0.1A - 6A)

0°, 180°

±0.1%

Watts (0.02A - 0.04A)

-60°, +60°, -120°, +120°

±0.5%

Watts (0.04A 0.2A)

-60°, +60°, -120°, +120°

±0.3%

Watts (0.2A - 6A)

-60°, +60°, -120°, +120°

±0.2%

Vars (0.01A - 0.02A)

-90°, 90°

±0.4%

Vars (0.02A - 0.1A)

-90°, 90°

±0.2%

Vars (0.1A - 6A)

-90°, 90°

±0.1%

Vars (0.02A - 0.04A)

-30°, +30°, -150°, +150°

±0.5%

Vars (0.04A 0.2A)

-30°, +30°, -150°, +150°

±0.3%

Vars (0.2A - 6A)

-30°, +30°, -150°, +150°

±0.3%

Q (0.02A - 0.05A)

-60°, 120°

±0.4%

Q (0.05A - 6A)

-60°, 120°

±0.3%

Q (0.02A - 0.1A)

-30°, +30°, -150°, +150°

±0.6%

Q (0.1A - 6A)

-30°, +30°, -150°, +150°

±0.4%

VA arithmetic (0.02A - 0.1A)

All Phase Angles

±0.3%

VA arithmetic (0.1A - 6A)

All Phase Angles

±0.2%

VA vectorial (0.02A - 0.1A)

-30°, +30°, -150°, +150° -60°, +60°, -120°, +120°

±0.4%

VA vectorial (0.1A - 6A)

-30°, +30°, -150°, +150° -60°, +60°, -120°, +120°

±0.3%

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

1-19

General Information

Reference conditions for Rated Accuracy: Voltage:

Rated Voltage ±3%

Frequency:

As Rated (50 or 60 Hz)

Waveform:

Distortion Factor less than 3%

Ambient Temperature:

23°C ± 3°C

The above accuracy specifications apply upon completion of 2 hour warmup period. Prior to completion of the warmup period, the meter conforms to IEC Publication 60687 Class 0.2 and ANSI C12.20.

Burdens (Per Element) Table 1.7 DIN, DIN Flushmount, A-base, Switchboard, Rackmount Meter Burden Parameter

5D With Auxiliary Power

5D Without Auxiliary Power

9D With Auxiliary Power

9D Without Auxiliary Power

Watts Loss - Auxiliary Supply

9

-

9

-

Watt Loss Potential Circuit A

.05

5

.05

3.5

Watt Loss Potential Circuit B

-

-

.05

3.5

Watt Loss Potential Circuit C

.05

5

.05

3.5

VA Loss - Auxiliary Supply

10

-

10

-

VA Loss Potential Circuit A

.05

6

.05

4

VA Loss Potential Circuit B

-

-

.05

4

VA Loss Potential Circuit C

.05

6

.05

4

VA Loss Current Circuit A

.05

.05

.05

.05

VA Loss Current Circuit B

-

-

.05

.05

VA Loss Current Circuit C

.05

.05

.05

.05

These meter forms have a true polyphase power supply. The power for the meter is pulled from all of the voltage inputs so that the meter can power from any phase. These typical values in the above tables are taken when the meter is in singlephase operation.

1-20

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

General Information

Table 1.8 Socket Meter Burden Parameter

5S With Auxiliary Power

5S Without Auxiliary Power

9S With Auxiliary Power

9S Without Auxiliary Power

Watts Loss - Auxiliary Supply

9

-

9

-

Watt Loss Potential Circuit A

.05

9

.05

9

Watt Loss Potential Circuit B

-

-

.05

.05

Watt Loss Potential Circuit C

.05

.05

.05

.05

VA Loss - Auxiliary Supply

10

-

10

10

VA Loss Potential Circuit A

.05

10

.05

-

VA Loss Potential Circuit B

-

-

.05

.05

VA Loss Potential Circuit C

.05

.05

.05

.05

VA Loss Current Circuit A

.05

.05

.05

.05

VA Loss Current Circuit B

-

-

.05

.05

VA Loss Current Circuit C

.05

.05

.05

.05

For meters without auxiliary power, the meter’s power supply is connected to phase A in the socket-base version. The losses listed in Table 1.7 and Table 1.8 are typical values measured with input voltages of 120V and currents of 5A. The QUANTUM Q1000 meter is much more than just a kWh type of electronic metering device. It provides the user with extensive circuitry to measure, store and display many functions not commonly found on an electronic meter. Some of these functions include the ability to measure several hundred different energy quantums. The total number of measurement quantities available in the Q1000 is in the thousands. In addition to these quantities, the meter also provides the ability to perform Network Analysis, Harmonic Analysis, Voltage Quality Analysis, up to 240 channels of Load Profile Recording, Event Recording, Threshold Alarm Recording, as well as a host of other functions. The computing power required to calculate these additional quantities is much higher than a typical electronic meter. In order to provide the additional computations, the meter design incorporates a pair of microprocessors that dissipate substantially more power than a typical electronic meter, which in turn results in an increase in the meter's burden on the voltage source.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

1-21

General Information

Standards The QUANTUM Q1000 meter passes the following standards: Table 1.9 Standards Standard ANSI C12.1: 1995a

Code for Electrical Metering

ANSI C12.20: 1998

Accuracy Class 0.2 and 0.5

ANSI C37.90.1: 1989

Surge Withstand Capability for Protective Relays

ANSI C62.41: 1991

Surge Voltage in Low Voltage Power Circuits

ANSI/UL 50: 1992

Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

ASTM B117: 1994

Salt Spray, Fog Testing

ASTM D999: 1991

Vibration Testing of Shipping Containers

FCC Part 15

Conducted and Radiated Emissions

FCC Part 68

REN Telephone Interface

IEC 60687 (1992-06)

Active Energy Class 0.2

IEC 61000-4-2 (1995-01)

Electrostatic Discharge

IEC 61000-4-4 (1995-01)

Electrical Fast Transients

IEC 60068-2-6 (1995-03)

Vibration (Sinusoidal)

IEC 60068-2-27 (1987-06)

Shock Test

IEC 61268 (1995)

Reactive Energy for Class 2.

Industry Canada CS03

Canadian Telephone Interface

NSTA Project 1A: 1990

Pre-shipment Procedures - Drop and Vibration

SLB-QTS 3.2 and 4.1

SchlumbergerSema Qualification Test Specification for Solid State Metering Products

a

1-22

Description

The Q1000 meets ANSI C12.1 with the exception of Section 4.7.2.8 “Meter losses” and Section 4.7.2.13 “Radio frequency conducted and radiated emission”.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

General Information

Approvals At the time of publishing, the QUANTUM Q1000 had received the following approvals: •

California ISO, USA

•

New England ISO, USA

•

Texas ISO - ERCOT, USA

•

Red Eléctrica De España, Spain

•

KEMA, Registered Quality B.V. Calibration Laboratory, The Netherlands

•

Measurement Canada, Canada

•

Comision Federal De Electricidad, Mexico

•

Electricité De France, France

•

Ontario IMO, Canada

•

LAPEM, Mexico

•

INTI, Argentina

•

Demand Side Solutions, Inc., USA

•

IRAM, Argentina

•

Subnet Solutions, Inc., Canada

Inputs and Outputs Almost any quantity, event or value can be assigned to an I/O point. For example a demand reset or end-of-interval may be assigned to state output, energy may be assigned to pulses, and instantaneous volts/current to an analog output. A standard configured Q1000 meter can have up to 64 I/Os. These I/Os are provided on 12 optional I/O modules. One of each type of I/O module may be attached to the meter. Each module is available in 120v and 240v. Three different I/O configurations are currently available.

Q1000 meters and I/O modules of the three plug and play bindings will appear nearly identical. For this reason, the specification or part number on each meter and I/O module is used to identify the binding configuration of the device. On meters, the specification number appears on the meter nameplate. On I/O modules, this part number is printed on a label and applied to the top of the I/O module on older modules (pre-July 2001) and on the front on newer modules. I/O modules of one LonWorks binding configuration cannot be mixed with I/O modules or meters of any other LonWorks binding configuration. QUANTUM Q1000 meters and their I/O modules are currently offered in three standard plug and play binding configurations. These plug and play bindings allow up to twelve I/O modules to be connected to one meter. Two or more I/O modules of the same module number cannot be connected to the same meter. For example, a LonWorks® network may use one I/O module #1 and one I/O module #2 to total 16 digital state outputs, but two I/O module #1s will not work. All three Plug and Play Bindings below allow one meter to be configured with up to 64 I/Os. See Chapter 6 for a graphical representation of these bindings. A Meter-to-Meter binding is also available.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

1-23

General Information

Universal Plug and Play Binding Twelve (12) I/O modules can be used with the Universal Plug and Play Binding. The following ten are currently available: two digital state output modules, one KYZ digital pulse output module, one IEC 2-wire KY digital pulse output module, two analog output modules, two digital pulse input modules, and two digital state input modules.1

ANSI Plug and Play Binding The ANSI Plug and Play Binding incorporates all features of the Universal Plug and Play binding with two exceptions. The IEC 2-wire KY digital pulse output module is replaced with an additional KYZ digital pulse output module and the IEC 2-wire KY digital pulse input module is configured as an additional KYZ digital pulse input module. This configuration allows for a total of eight KYZ digital pulse inputs and outputs, in addition to the other I/O types.1

IEC Plug and Play Binding The IEC Plug and Play Binding incorporates all features of the Universal Plug and Play binding with two exceptions. The KYZ digital pulse output module is replaced with an additional IEC 2-wire KY digital pulse output module and the KYZ digital pulse input module is configured as an additional IEC 2-wire KY digital pulse input module. This configuration allows for a total of eight IEC 2-wire KY digital pulse inputs and outputs, in addition to the other I/O types.1

Meter-to-Meter Binding The Meter-to-Meter Binding adds the ability to have two Q1000 meters communicating directly over the same twisted pair I/O network. Each meter can be configured to send the other one four energy values without I/O modules. In addition, each meter also supports 10 I/O modules. The 10 supported I/O modules in this configuration are: two digital state output modules, one KYZ digital pulse output module, two analog output modules, one digital pulse input module, and two digital state input modules.1

I/O Binding Identification Meter Part Numbers The part numbers of the meters always follow a predefined pattern: 36 xxx yyyy-000

1.

1-24

xxx

Determines the physical characteristics of the meter (i.e., voltage, current rating, form, and so forth.)

yyyy

Signifies the binding of the meter.

This binding includes the Analog input module. When this optional hardware is available, it can be added to a LonWorks network with this binding.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

General Information

I/O Module Part Numbers The part numbers of the I/O modules always follow a predefined pattern: 369xxyyyy-000 xx

Determines the physical characteristics of the module (i.e., Digital State Output, Digital Pulse Input, and so forth.)

yyyy

Signifies the binding of the I/O module.

Binding Codes The I/O binding options and the respective binding codes are:

a

Binding Option

Binding Code

Meter-to-Meter

005A, 005Ba

ANSI Plug and Play

0004

IEC Plug and Play

0003

Universal Plug and Play

0000

Meter-to-Meter Binding is one binding. One meter and its 10 I/O modules have binding 005A; the second meter and its 10 I/O modules have binding 005B.

I/O Module Specifications Table 1.10 I/O Module Power Supply Specifications Voltage 120V version 240V Version

AC: 100 to 120 Volts; DC: 125 Volts ±10% AC: 200 to 240 Volts

Frequency

50 or 60 Hz ±5 Hz

Temperature

-40° to +85°C

Table 1.11 Pulse and State Output Module Specifications Output Voltage (solid state relay)

120 VAC 170 VDC

Output Current (solid state relay)

100 mA AC 100 mA DC

Output Power (solid state relay)

12 VA AC 17 VA DC

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

1-25

General Information

Table 1.12 Output Pulse Rate Specifications Output Pulse Rate: KY

Output Pulse Rate: KYZ

Pulse Length

Maximum Pulse Rate

10 ms

40 Hz

20 ms

25 Hz

40 ms

12 Hz

80 ms

6 Hz

40 Hz maximum

Table 1.13 Pulse and State Input Module Specifications Input Voltage Rating (open circuit)

10 VDC Nominal

Input Current Rating (open circuit)

5 mA DC Nominal

Table 1.14 Input Pulse Rate Specifications Input Pulse Rate: KY Pulse Length

Maximum Pulse Rate

10 ms

40 Hz

20 ms

25 Hz

40 ms

12 Hz

80 ms

6 Hz

Input Pulse Rate: KYZ

40 Hz maximum

Analog Output Ranges Each channel can be configured to output a DC voltage or a DC current, selectable by hooking up analog wires to the correct terminals and by a DIP switch on a perchannel basis. Regardless of which configuration you select, you should disconnect the unused wires from the I/O module terminal strip. The current terminals are separate from the voltage terminals. When you select a current output, the voltages on the voltage terminals outputs have undefined values; you should not connect any device to the voltage terminal outputs to limit susceptibility to transients. When you select a voltage output, the current on the current terminals outputs have undefined values; you should not connect any device to the current terminal outputs to limit susceptibility to transients. You need to short the unused current terminals to preserve immunity to transient influences. Shorting tabs are shipped with the module.

1-26

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

General Information

The meter sends values between -100% and 100% to the module. These values must be translated into physical current or voltage on the module's terminals. The generic (linear) transfer function is shown in Table 1.15. Table 1.15 Relative Value to Physical Output Translation Network Variable Value

Current or Voltage Output Value

-100%

Range’s “Min Value”

0%

Range’s “Zero Value”

100 %

Range's “Max Value”

When power is not applied to the module, the output goes to a “Zero Value”. The “Min Value”, “Max Value”, “Zero Value” are described in the next paragraphs. Current Ranges These selections are available when the “Current / Voltage” DIP switch is on the “Current” position. The range selection is on a per-channel basis (2 DIP switches per channel). You can select between 3 current ranges using the switches on the module. Table 1.16 I/O Module Current Ranges

a

Range ID

Min Value

Zero Value

Max Value

Range 0

0 mA

0 mA

1 mA

Range 1

-1 mA

0 mA

1 mA

Range 2 a

4 mA (0 mA)

12 mA (4 mA)

20 mA (20 mA)

The 4 mA to 20 mA range may be used either of these two ways.

Voltage Ranges These selections are available for analog voltage outputs. The user is able to select 3 voltage ranges with switches on the module. Table 1.17 I/O Module Voltage Ranges Range ID

Min Value

Zero Value

Max Value

Range 0

0V

0V

5V

Range 1

0V

0V

10 V

Range 2

-5 V

0V

5V

The I/O Modules receive network variable updates from the Q1000 meter. After the network variable is received, the analog output (current or voltage) will reach a stable level in 500 milliseconds or less. This time includes the firmware processing

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

1-27

General Information

of the network variable value, the correction with calibration parameters, and communication with the Digital to Analog converter and the converter’s settling time. The meter updates each channel of the module every second. Loss of Communication When the module loses communications with the meter, the behavior of the analog output is controlled by two LC (Loss of Communication) switches. Table 1.18 shows the configurations of the switches that are available. Table 1.18 Loss of Communication Switch Settings Setting

Switches

Zero after 10 seconds

OFF, OFF

Zero after 20 seconds

OFF, ON

Zero after 60 seconds

ON, OFF

Maintain Value

ON, ON

Comments Factory Default

Output stays at last update’s value

In the “ON, ON” position, the module outputs the last value received from the meter. This value is maintained until the power is removed or communication is reestablished. In the other positions, the module maintains the value for a predefined time, and then the value goes to the “Zero Value”. This behavior is defined for ALL channels by these two switches. However, the channels are independent and maintain an interval timer (in firmware) to keep track of the updates. This means that a particular channel may time out and set its value to the “Zero Value” without affecting the other channels.

Processing The Q1000 combines the power of two 32-bit microprocessors: one specialized for digital signal processing (DSP) of the line signal and one specialized in multi-port, multi-protocol communications. Four megabytes of program memory and around 440 kilobytes of data memory provide room for expansion and storage of large amounts of data.

Measurements Active transformer technology combined with a 14-bit analog to digital converter produces fundamental accuracy of the meter of 0.1% of reading. The meter samples at 64 samples per line cycle synchronous to the line for a fixed sampling rate of 3840 samples/sec at 60Hz line frequency. The Q1000’s measurements include harmonics up to the 32nd. The DSP processor performs a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) to provide the user with a Harmonic Analysis of the waveform up to the 20th harmonic. Voltage Quality (sags, swells, interruptions, and imbalances) Events can also be captured or used to trigger alarms. 340 quantities are calculated for use in energy registers and demand values and two independent standard load profiles enable the user to specify different interval lengths for different uses each using up to 24 channels.

1-28

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

General Information

Communications The meter includes the choice of standard ANSI or IEC optical ports and two independent, high-speed RS-232 ports that allow multiple simultaneous interrogations. In addition, every meter is equipped with a two wire twisted pair LONWORKs network that can be used to allow a meter to exchange up to 64 inputs and outputs with other devices. An optional internal 1200 to 33,600 baud modem is available to provide high speed telephone communications. An optional 4-wire RS-485 board allows interfacing with RS-485 networks. A new 4 line LCD allows for simultaneous display of up to four metering quantities or other status messages. Two infrared LEDs provide fully programmable pulse outputs for meter testing.

Dimensions Dimension drawings for all QUANTUM Q1000 meter types are shown below. Dimensions are in inches (and millimeters).

Figure 1.2 Q1000 Product Family

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

1-29

General Information

Figure 1.3 Meter Dimensions Socket Base Meter

Figure 1.4 Meter Dimensions DIN Base Meter with Short Terminal Cover

1-30

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

General Information

12.2 [309.8]

3.9 [99.9]

7.0 [178.0]

Side View Front View

6.0 [153.9]

Top View Figure 1.5 Meter Dimensions DIN Base Meter with Extended Terminal Cover

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

1-31

General Information

Figure 1.6 Meter Dimensions DIN Flushmount Frame

Figure 1.7 Meter Dimensions A-base/Bottom Connected Meter

1-32

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

General Information

Rear View

Screws

Side View

Screws

Rear View

Front View Meter Panel Cut Out

Figure 1.8 Meter Dimensions Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Meter

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

1-33

General Information

4.13 (63)

8.37 (212.5)

5.08 (129)

5.08 (105)

Front View

8.03 (204)

Rear View 10.75 (273) 0.13 (3.2)

1.34 (34)

1.18 (30)

Side View Figure 1.9 Meter Dimensions Rackmount Meter Without Case

1-34

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

General Information

Front View

Top View

3D View

Figure 1.10 Dimensions Rackmount Case

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

1-35

General Information

I/O Module Dimensions

DIN Rail Mounting Slot—see kits for DIN Rail Mounting Kit information (see Figure 6.7 on page 6-33)

Figure 1.11 Input/Output Module Dimensions

Weights Weights for the Q1000 meter are shown in Table 1.19. Table 1.19 Q1000 Weights Meter Weight

Shipping Weighta

5 lb 5 oz

9 lb 1 oz

6 lb

8 lb 14 oz

A-base Meter

5 lb 3 oz

8 lb

Switchboard Meter

6 lb 13 oz

10 lb 9 oz

Switchboard Meter in Case

17 lb 8 oz

21 lb 4 oz

Rackmount Meter

6 lb 2 oz

8 lb 15 oz

Rackmount Meter in Case

18 lb 2 oz

23 lb 1 oz

Typical I/O Module

1 lb 10 oz

1 lb 15 oz

Meter Type Socket Meter DIN Meter

a

1-36

Complete with box, packing materials, cables, and so forth.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

General Information

Battery Data in the memory and the real time clock will be preserved during power outages by battery back-up. The battery is a 2/3A package, lithium carbonmonofluoride non-rechargeable 3.0V battery. The battery is designed to maintain data continuously for a minimum of 180 days under rated operating conditions. As with any battery technology, high temperatures and high humidity can cause an increase in internal battery self-discharge and thus reduced battery life. The battery is designed to maintain data for a minimum of 180 days under rated operating conditions and has a 10 year shelf life. The battery voltage is monitored by the Transducer Board. It provides an ongoing profile of the Battery Voltage and therefore enables the Register Board to judge the remaining battery life. Due to the battery technology, the battery terminal voltage alone is not sufficient to measure the battery’s life. To further enhance battery life estimates, the firmware also includes an accumulated time on battery.

Data Integrity As a further enhancement of data security, critical metering data is stored in NOVRAM. The NOVRAM retains its data even in the event of loss of power and the loss of battery back-up. NOVRAM is an EEPROM in RAM that is written to automatically at power down. The meter performs a number of self-diagnostic checks daily to confirm proper operation. The types of errors are defined as: Table 1.20 Error Types Fatal Errors:

These errors will cause the meter to discontinue normal operation.a

Non-Fatal Errors:

The meter shall display the corresponding error code for each mode in which non-fatal error codes are chosen for display. During the time the error condition exists, the meter shall continue to operate. The error message will be displayed until the error condition is cleared.a

a

PC-PRO+ 98 allows the user to Lock, Scroll, or Ignore fatal and non-fatal errors on the meter’s display; see Appendix A for descriptions of these error codes.

Grounding The QUANTUM Q1000 meter complies with many standards (high potential dielectric, surge withstand capability, fast transient, static discharge, EMI, EMC, etc.) as specified in the hardware specification section. However, the meter must be installed in the substation, at the customer metering location, and in the laboratory during testing by the user in such a way that the protection circuitry and isolation practices of the meter function as they were intended. The Socket/DIN/Abase meters have been designed to be ungrounded. The Switchboard and Rackmount meters have been designed to use external grounding connections.

LONWORKs LONWORKs technology is a complete platform for implementing control network systems. These networks consist of intelligent devices or nodes that interact with their environment, and communicate with one another over a variety of communications media using a common, message-based control protocol.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

1-37

General Information

The LONWORKs port allows for a meter to communicate with I/O modules. Traditional “I/O in the meter” devices would require 124 wires at the meter to connect all of the I/Os available through the two wires of the LONWORKs network. In addition to less wiring, the LONWORKs solution is more flexible and easier to integrate into a system. Sub-module Type Part Number

I/O Module

Module Type Description

Nominal Voltage

I/O Module Specification Number I/O Module Serial Number

I/O Module Number

*Shown here on I/O modules after October 2001; older I/O modules have the specification number on a label on the top of the module. Figure 1.12 Typical Q1000 I/O Module - Front View Specification Number on Label

Figure 1.13 Typical Q1000 I/O Module - Front and Top View

1-38

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

General Information

System Measurements, Planning, and Controls The QUANTUM Q1000 can assist utilities in improving the efficiency of the existing power delivery infrastructure. A small incremental investment for additional capabilities in a revenue meter can allow a utility to avoid large capital expenditures through targeting expenditures to areas in greatest need. The system measurement and controls capability of the QUANTUM Q1000 meter allows the user to determine, in real time, the existing circuit loading on a per phase basis as well as control capacitor banks for proper VAR loading. The planning application features such as load profiling on a per phase basis are targeted at providing the needed substation loading history information.

Load Balancing and Feeder Monitoring Bus loading and feeder loading can be monitored on an instantaneous per phase basis with the QUANTUM Q1000 meter. Per phase power factor information can be utilized for a power factor correction program. Additional power delivery capacity can be obtained with the use of per phase voltage, current, watt, VAR, and VA measurements to more evenly distribute the load.

Transformer Loading Per-phase information, both recorded and real time can help the utility extend the life of existing transformers through proper loading. The QUANTUM Q1000 per phase voltage, current, and energy measurements can be provided in real time to allow the user to dynamically reallocate loads in order for the system’s transformers operate at the most efficient loading. The harmonics measurement capability can also provide information to determine if there is excessive harmonics present which could overload the power transformer.

SCADA Interfacing Efficiency of the utility is becoming an important goal today and will remain important in the future. In regulated and deregulated markets, the Distribution, Transmission, and Generation companies must have real-time data to maximize their efficiency. The QUANTUM Q1000, utilizing protocols such as DNP 3.0, IEC 60870-5-102, and MODBUS RTU can provide digital readings directly into SCADA systems which can be utilized to manage the efficiency of the distribution and generation systems. For older SCADA systems, where digital inputs are not available, an output from the meter can be provided to the local RTU to provide real time voltage, current and power measurements. Information directly from the meter to the SCADA system proves to be a more accurate and less costly alternative to the high calibration maintenance of individual transducers.

System Loss Compensating In order to improve the efficiency of a system, a user must first understand the problem areas. By strategically locating the QUANTUM Q1000 meters, a user can measure the actual power transformer and transmission line losses versus Planning’s calculated losses. Reduction in these losses results in reduced system loading, increased system power factor and increased revenues since more real power is able to be delivered to the end customer through the existing electrical system. In addition, electrical system capital upgrade projects may be postponed resulting in additional savings.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

1-39

General Information

System Planning To properly forecast areas of growth for new construction, information needs to be accurate and up to date. In order to forecast system peak demands, load research data is used to build models of the system peaks. Hourly load research estimates for each customer segment are summed to simulate system hourly load shapes, and statistical models are utilized to project changes in class peak contributions. The QUANTUM Q1000 is designed for installation at the large industrial customer and bulk power flow points. By utilizing the load profile capability, historical studies can be performed and analyzed on these customer classes using actual data. In addition, long term studies can be performed on transformer efficiency and loading with per phase recording of voltage and current.

1-40

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Chapter 2

Installation This section provides information and instructions to correctly store, unpack, and install all versions of the QUANTUM Q1000 meter.

Storage Store the Q1000 meter in a clean, dry environment. Temperatures should remain between -40° C and +85° C (-40° F and +185° F). Avoid prolonged storage, for more than one year, in temperatures above +70° C (+158° F). If the meter is to be stored, verify that the battery is disconnected and store in a separate place if storage is to exceed 45 days. Or, if the battery is to be connected to the meter sealed, but not installed for more than 45 days, then power the meter through the phase or auxiliary voltage connections to prevent excess drain on the battery. Inspect damaged cartons upon receipt and check contents prior to storage.

Unpacking As with all precision electronic instruments, the Q1000 meter should be handled with care; however, special handling is unnecessary. A demand reset mechanism is supplied and is secured with a wire seal. Do not remove the seal until necessary. The meter should be inspected for damage. If reshipment is necessary, use the original cardboard box and packing material.

Inspection Upon receipt of the meter, inspect the meter as follows: 1

Inspect for shipping damage to the cover, demand reset mechanism, ALT and SCROLL LOCK buttons.

2

Ensure that the RESET mechanism, ALT, and SCROLL LOCK buttons are secure and operational.

3

Ensure that the optical port is connected to the meter and not damaged.

4

From the meter nameplate, verify that the following information is specified as per the order: •

Meter type

•

Current Class

•

Service Type

•

Voltage (Range)

•

Form

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-1

Installation

5

•

LONWORKS Terminated or Unterminated

•

Test Amps

•

Frequency

•

Serial Number

•

Bar Code Data

•

Options Installed—Modem or RS-485 board, etc.

Ensure that the Communications Splitter Cable is the correct type and that its connectors are not damaged.

If the meter appears to be defective, or proves to be defective upon installation, notify your SchlumbergerSema Sales Representative.

Meters with Batteries The Q1000 battery is available in a single-battery or dual-battery configuration. The battery is packaged with the meter. To preserve the capacity of the battery, the battery is not connected to the meter during shipping. Upon receipt of the meter, take the following steps: 1

Inspect for obvious shipping damage to the battery and the connector.

2

If desired, the battery voltage can be checked prior to installation by placing the probes of a voltmeter directly onto the soldered terminal connection of the battery. The measured voltage should be between 2.95 and 3.30 volts. If the voltage is below 2.95 volts, then replace the battery.

3

Three different battery choices are available depending on the meter’s form. The first battery is the standard one and normally comes with all meter forms (see Figure 2.1 and Figure 2.8 through Figure 2.14). The second battery is optional and is available for the Socket form. It doubles the life of the standard battery (see Figure 2.2). The third battery is optional and is available for the DIN and A-base forms. This battery is installed in the meter’s cover using the battery access hatch and allows the battery to be replaced without breaking the meter’s seal. The battery access hatch can also be sealed. This battery is smaller than the standard, single battery and has one-half the battery life (see Figure 2.6). Table 2.1 Battery Options Meter Type

Standard Single Battery

Dual Battery

Meter Cover Battery

Socket

Yes

Yes

No

DIN

Yes

No

Yes

A-base

Yes

No

Yes

Switchboard

Yes

No

No

Rackmount

Yes

No

No

After you connect the new battery, it is important to set the number of minutes on the battery to zero. This is done using the PC-PRO+ 98 programming software.

2-2

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

Ensure that the voltmeter probes do not short the battery terminals and that the voltmeter is set to the proper voltage range.

The product you have purchased contains a lithium battery. The battery is recyclable. At the end of its useful life, under various country, state, and local laws, it may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste system. Check with your local area solid waste officials for details about recycling options or proper disposal.

Figure 2.1 Standard Single Battery - All Meters

Figure 2.2 Dual Battery Configuration - Socket Meter

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-3

Installation

Figure 2.3 Access Door Battery

Battery #1

Figure 2.4 Dual Socket Meter Battery - Side 1

2-4

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

Battery Connection

Battery #2

Figure 2.5 Dual Socket Meter Battery - Side 2

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-5

Installation

Figure 2.6 Battery Access Door - DIN, A-base Meters (Hatch Closed)

Figure 2.7 Battery Access Door - DIN, A-base Meters (Hatch Open)

2-6

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

Meter Preparation Site Selection The Q1000 meter should be installed and operated in environments where the meter’s temperature does not exceed -40° C and +85° C (-40° F and +185° F) and the humidity does not exceed 0-95%, non-condensing. Installation and operation in moderate temperatures increases reliability and product life. Product reliability can also be improved by avoiding installation in direct sunlight.

Do not power up the meter without the protective cover in place. High voltages are present in the meter.

Meter Cover Removal To gain access to the meter electronics, the meter cover must first be removed.

A-base Meters 1

Remove the meter seal(s) (if installed).

2

Remove the terminal block cover.

3

Slide the cover bracket to the right and pull off. This will expose the meter cover’s screws.

4

Unscrew the cover screws and remove the cover.

5

To reinstall the cover, reverse the procedure.

Socket Meters 1

Check the bottom of the meter for a meter seal. Remove the seal (if one is installed).

2

Turn the cover counterclockwise to release the cover from the base.

3

Slowly remove the cover.

4

To reinstall the cover, reverse the procedure.

Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Case Meters 1

Remove the meter seal (if one is installed).

2

Turn the cover retaining screw counterclockwise to release the bottom of the cover from the base.

3

Lift the cover from the meter.

4

With the cover off, grasp and pull the interconnection paddles from the top and bottom of the meter case.

5

Release the upper and lower thumb latches; then pull the meter assembly straight from its case.

6

To reinstall the meter, reverse the procedure.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-7

Installation

DIN Meters 1

Remove the meter seal(s) (if installed).

2

For DIN meters, unscrew the two faceplate screws to release the cover from the base.

3

To reinstall the cover, reverse the procedure.

Installing the Battery If the battery is plugged into the meter with the meter power turned off, the meter should be powered up at least once in the first five minutes to initialize the meter’s battery circuitry. This initial power up allows the battery input circuitry in the meter to reset itself to a low power state. Failure to power the meter up will result in the battery remaining in a drain state which will discharge the battery prematurely.

The battery must be connected to the Main Board before you program the meter. As part of programming, the number of minutes on the battery must be set to zero. If this is not done correctly, the meter may show a LO BAT message on the display. Leave the battery connected as long as the meter remains in service. The battery provides backup during power outages. Additionally, if auxiliary power is used, this source (either AC or DC) would maintain power to the whole meter in case of the loss of voltage from the VTs at the metering point.

Connecting the Standard Single Battery Removing battery without power (All Models) or before the second new battery is connected (Rackmount only) will result in loss of meter data including Mass Memory (Load Profile) data.

Socket, A-Base, DIN, Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Models 1

Remove the cover.

2

Snap the battery into the battery housing.

3

Plug the 2-pin connector into the circuit board at the location labeled “BATTERY”. The connector is keyed to ensure proper orientation of the connector.

Rackmount Model

2-8

1

Remove meter from case.

2

Remove the 12 screws on the sides and back of the meter with a Phillips head screwdriver.

3

Insert new battery 2-pin connector into the available battery connection at the rear of the meter. Remove old battery (if present). Snap new battery into battery location.

4

Reverse steps 1 and 2 to reinstall meter.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

Battery Connection

Battery Slot

Figure 2.8 Installing the Standard Battery (Socket Meter)

Battery Connector routed through hole here

Battery Slot

Figure 2.9 Installing the Standard Battery (DIN Meter)

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-9

Installation

Battery Connection

Battery Connector comes out of hole here

Figure 2.10 Standard Battery Cable Connection (DIN Meter)

Battery Connection

Battery Slot

Figure 2.11 Installing the Standard Battery (Switchboard Meter)

2-10

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

Battery Slot

Battery Connection

Figure 2.12 Installing the Standard Battery (Switchboard Meter)

Battery Connections

Battery Slot

Figure 2.13 Installing the Standard Battery (Rackmount Meter)

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-11

Installation

Battery Connections

Battery Slot

Figure 2.14 Installing the Standard Battery (Rackmount Meter)

Two battery connections are provided in the Rackmount meter. Use either connection when initially installing the battery. When replacing an old battery, be sure to connect the new battery to the second (unused) connection prior to disconnecting the old battery to ensure meter data is retained.

PC-PRO+ 98 Programming Software The Q1000 meter may be programmed using the Windows-based PC-PRO+ 98 software via the modem, optical port, RS-232, or RS-485 serial port connections. Be sure to install the battery prior to programming the meter and set the number of minutes on battery to zero during programming.

Before programming or interrogation by the PC can occur, power must be applied to the meter electronics.

Use an optical probe to communicate through the meter’s optical port.

Select the optical cable type that you will use in the PC-PRO+ 98 software.

Use a null modem cable to communicate through the meter’s RS-232 serial ports.

2-12

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

Site Installation The Q1000 meter is available in five mounting types: •

Socket base

•

DIN

•

A-base

•

Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount case

•

Rackmount

Compatible with transformer-rated electromechanical polyphase meters, the Q1000 meter is available in the configurations detailed in Table 1.4. Table 2.2 QUANTUM Q1000 Meter Configurations Current Rating (ANSI)

ANSI Class 2, ANSI Class 10, ANSI Class 20 a

Current Rating (IEC)

IEC In=1A, Imax = 6A; IEC In=5A, Imax = 10A; IEC In=5A, Imax = 20A a

A-base

Forms 5A (3PH, 3W, Delta), 9A (3PH, 4W, Wye)

Socket base

Forms 5S (3PH, 3W, Delta), 9S (3PH, 4W, Wye)

Switchboard

Forms 5F (3PH, 3W, Delta), 9F (3PH, 4W, Wye)

DIN

Forms 5D (3PH, 3W, Delta), 9D (3PH, 4W, Wye)

Rackmount

Forms 5R (3PH, 3W, Delta), 9R (3PH, 4W, Wye)

a

The Rackmount meter is available only in the low current and 10A versions.

Auxiliary Power The Q1000 Socket base, A-base, DIN, and Switchboard case and Rackmount type meters may be ordered with an auxiliary power supply, supporting AC or DC voltage inputs. The auxiliary power supply has an autoranging input allowing nominal voltages from 100 - 240V AC or DC across the terminals. The auxiliary power input may be connected to a separate source or may be connected to any phase that is attached to the meter.

Socket Base Meters A Socket base Q1000 meter is installed in the same manner as a socket base transformer rated electromechanical polyphase meter. To install, place the meter in the socket. For internally (non-auxiliary) powered meters, the meter is powered off phase A. Socket base meters can be ordered with auxiliary power through a pigtail or through the fourteenth and fifteenth potential terminal (see Figure 2.16). This configuration allows for a cleaner installation at sites where the meter socket can be wired for the AUX connectors. Those meters ordered with the auxiliary power through the pigtail will have a two prong plug-in on a cable extending from the meter’s base (see Figure 2.15). This configuration allows a meter with AUX to be added to an installation where it is not desirable to re-wire an existing meter socket.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-13

Installation

Figure 2.15 Socket Base Meter with Auxiliary External Power Plug-in

Auxiliary Power Terminals

Figure 2.16 9S Socket Base Meter with Auxiliary Power Terminals

DIN Meters The DIN meter may be either powered internally or through a separate auxiliary input. If it uses auxiliary power, the fifteenth and seventeenth terminals on the right of the terminal block are connected to the auxiliary power source. These two terminals power the meter. Connect the two terminals to an auxiliary AC or DC circuit or jumper them to any of the phase voltages.

2-14

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

For meters without the AUX power connection, the DIN meter comes with a three phase power supply. DIN meters with this configuration are automatically powered from any one of the three phases.

Auxiliary Power Terminals (15 & 17)

Figure 2.17 DIN Meter with Auxiliary Power Terminals

A-base Meters An A-base Q1000 meter may be powered internally or through a separate auxiliary power input. If it uses auxiliary power, the two center terminals on the lower row of a fifteen terminal base are connected to the auxiliary power source. These two terminals power the meter. Connect the two terminals to an auxiliary AC or DC circuit or jumper them to any of the phase voltages. For meter without the AUX power connection, the A-base meter comes with a three phase power supply. A-base meters with this configuration are automatically powered from any one of the three phases.

Auxiliary Power Terminals

Figure 2.18 A-base Auxiliary Power Terminals

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-15

Installation

Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Case Meters Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount case Q1000 meters may be powered internally or through a separate auxiliary power input. If it uses auxiliary power, connect the auxiliary AC or DC power source to the two auxiliary power terminals (terminals 15 & 16) on the back of the meter case, or jumper them to any of the phase voltages. For meter without the AUX power connection, the Switchboard meter comes with a three phase power supply. Switchboard meters with this configuration are automatically powered from any one of the three phases. Auxiliary Power Terminal 15

Auxiliary Power Terminal 16

Figure 2.19 Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Auxiliary Power Terminals

2-16

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

Service Connections The figures in this section show the various Q1000 service connections.

Figure 2.20 Q1000 Socket Meter Form 5 Service Connections

Figure 2.21 Q1000 Socket Meter Form 9 Service Connections

The neutrals of the Socket meter are tied together. The Auxiliary Power supply is isolated from the A, B, and C phase inputs in the meter. The Auxiliary Power may be fed from any of the phases if desired. The user should remember to open the A, B, and C phase inputs to power down the meter. A meter with Auxiliary Power will also need to have the Auxiliary terminals opened as well to power down the meter.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-17

Installation

Figure 2.22 Q1000 A-base Meter Form 5 Service Connections

Figure 2.23 Q1000 A-base Meter Form 9 Service Connections

2-18

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

The neutrals of the DIN, A-base, Switchboard, and Rackmount meters that are without Auxiliary Power are tied together. The power supply in these meters is three-phase redundant and will continue to power the meter with the loss of any phase or loss of any two phases. If the user desires a meter without the neutrals tied together, then use a meter with Auxiliary Power. The Auxiliary Power supply is isolated from the A, B, and C phase inputs in the meter. The Auxiliary Power may be fed from any of the phases if desired. The user should remember to open the A, B, and C phase inputs to power down the meter. A meter with Auxiliary Power will also need to have the Auxiliary terminals opened as well to power down the meter.

Form 5D

Figure 2.24 Q1000 DIN Meter Form 5 Service Connections

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-19

Installation

Figure 2.25 Q1000 DIN Meter Form 9 Service Connections

The neutrals of the DIN, A-base, Switchboard, and Rackmount meters that are without Auxiliary Power are tied together. The power supply in these meters is three-phase redundant and will continue to power the meter with the loss of any phase or loss of any two phases. If the user desires a meter without the neutrals tied together, then use a meter with Auxiliary Power. The Auxiliary Power supply is isolated from the A, B, and C phase inputs in the meter. The Auxiliary Power may be fed from any of the phases if desired. The user should remember to open the A, B, and C phase inputs to power down the meter. A meter with Auxiliary Power will also need to have the Auxiliary terminals opened as well to power down the meter.

2-20

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

Figure 2.26 Q1000 Switchboard Meter Form 5 Service Connections

Figure 2.27 Q1000 Switchboard Meter Form 9 Service Connections

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-21

Installation

The neutrals of the DIN, A-base, Switchboard, and Rackmount meters that are without Auxiliary Power are tied together. The power supply in these meters is three-phase redundant and will continue to power the meter with the loss of any phase or loss of any two phases. If the user desires a meter without the neutrals tied together, then use a meter with Auxiliary Power. The Auxiliary Power supply is isolated from the A, B, and C phase inputs in the meter. The Auxiliary Power may be fed from any of the phases if desired. The user should remember to open the A, B, and C phase inputs to power down the meter. A meter with Auxiliary Power will also need to have the Auxiliary terminals opened as well to power down the meter.

Figure 2.28 Q1000 Rackmount Meter Form 5 Service Connections

2-22

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

Figure 2.29 Q1000 Rackmount Meter Form 9 Service Connections

The neutrals of the DIN, A-base, Switchboard, and Rackmount meters that are without Auxiliary Power are tied together. The power supply in these meters is three-phase redundant and will continue to power the meter with the loss of any phase or loss of any two phases. If the user desires a meter without the neutrals tied together, then use a meter with Auxiliary Power. The Auxiliary Power supply is isolated from the A, B, and C phase inputs in the meter. The Auxiliary Power may be fed from any of the phases if desired. The user should remember to open the A, B, and C phase inputs to power down the meter. A meter with Auxiliary Power will also need to have the Auxiliary terminals opened as well to power down the meter.

Meter Inputs and Outputs The optional I/O modules used with the Q1000 meter reside outside of the meter. This improved design allows for up to 64 I/Os to be connected to the Q1000. If using more than one module, SchlumbergerSema recommends a UL Level 4, 22 AWG shielded twisted pair of cable to connect the modules together. The maximum number of modules that can be used with the Q1000 standard “plug and play” versions is 12. The modules and meters interface to one another through a LONWORKs network. To properly install the LONWORKS Network, the physical ends of the network need to be terminated. The standard maximum distance between terminated ends is 500 feet. The network may be set up to start with the Q1000 meter and end with an I/O module, where both meter and last I/O module need to be terminated. Or, the network may also start with an I/O module and end with an I/O module, where the last modules, beginning and ending, need to be terminated. Refer to Chapter 6, Communications for more system connection information.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-23

Installation

The standard Q1000 meter comes terminated; however, the meter can be ordered with or without termination. If you wish to terminate an existing unterminated meter, you will need to use an external LONWORKS network termination connector. Also, you will need to specify unterminated on your meter order. Refer to Chapter 10, Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings. For more information, see Chapter 6, Communications.

DIN Rail Mounting Groove

Also see Figure 6.7 on page 6-33 and Figure 1.11 on page 1-36.

Figure 2.30 I/O Module (3 Dimensional View)

2-24

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

Mounting I/O modules mount on a DIN rail. See "Q1000 Optional Kits" on page 10-3 for information on a kit to mount the modules. Figure 2.31 shows two I/O modules mounted on a DIN rail.

Figure 2.31 I/O Modules Mounted on DIN Rail

Configuration Some of the I/O modules have internal jumpers or DIP switches that can be set by the user. See "Drawings and Schematics" on page 10-5 for more information.

A maximum of three I/O modules can be mounted on a single DIN rail.

Grounding This section is intended as a reference for the grounding of QUANTUM Q1000 meters. For more information on general grounding practices, refer to the Installation and Grounding of the QUANTUM Meters: A Suggested Practice Guide. This publication has extensive information on general grounding techniques both for the QUANTUM meter as well as other electronic meters. This section presents grounding and bonding practices for meter enclosures and various types of circuits.

Meter Enclosure and Meter Enclosure Bonding It is recommended that the meter be installed in a steel meter enclosure or steel equipment rack since steel provides both electric and magnetic field protection. The steel meter enclosure or equipment rack should be properly treated and coated (painted) so that it does not rust, or the enclosure or rack should be made of a non-rusting type of steel (though not necessarily stainless steel). An aluminum enclosure is acceptable, but while it does provide electric protection, it does not provide the protection against magnetic fields that a steel enclosure provides. The meter enclosure must be solidly bonded to the grounding system where the meter is mounted in the substation, power pole, power plant, or industrial plant site.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-25

Installation

The ground wire from the meter enclosure or equipment rack to the ground grid should be a large (i.e. #4/0 AWG) stranded wire, and it should connect to the ground grid with a good connector (i.e. Burndy type clamping connector or Cadwelded connection). The ground connection should not be simply wrapped around the ground grid’s conductor. The bonding wire from the ground grid of the substation to the meter enclosure should terminate on the outside of the meter enclosure on and in a Burndy type connector that goes through a hole in the meter enclosure.

Ground here only if CTs and VTs are not grounded outside in the yard!

Figure 2.32 Meter Enclosure

Equipment Racks When the Q1000 is installed in an equipment rack within the substation, that rack is usually already bonded to the station ground grid before the user (Meter Department personnel) arrives at the site. The grounding of the rack is accomplished by a copper bus bar that runs through the rack and through all of the adjacent racks. In this case the “single-point” ground becomes a bolt, or series of adjacent bolts and screws, tapped into the bus bar running the length of the racks.

Single-Point Ground Inside the meter enclosure the stud of the Burndy type connector that comes through the wall of the meter enclosure becomes the “single-point” ground that will be referred to in the rest of this section. As will be described below, a series of bonding wires are terminated at this “singlepoint”. Therefore, some method of terminating a series of wires needs to be developed by the user. Suggestion: Take a strip of copper bus bar about 1 inch wide, about 3/8 inch thick, and about eight to twelve inches long and drill a big hole in one end for the Burndy connector. Then drill about a dozen smaller holes in a row (or staggered pattern) for the bonding wires that will be brought to this bus bar. The user can develop other similar, acceptable methods of terminating all of the ground wires to one point.

2-26

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

Example Ground Bar

1 inch wide 3/8 inch thick 8 to 12 inches long Figure 2.33 Example Ground Bar for Meter Cabinet “Single Point” Ground

Connection to Ground Grid Wires The wire (# 4/]0 AWG, stranded, copper) from the meter enclosure or equipment rack to the wires of the ground grid should be connected to the wires of the ground grid with either a Burndy type connector or Cadwelded. The wire from the meter enclosure or equipment rack should not be connected to the wires of the ground grid by simply wrapping the wires or strands together. The wire from the meter enclosure or equipment rack to the ground grid of the substation (or ground rod) should be connected in the most direct way. Twists, bends and turns should be avoided or minimized, since these twists, bends and turns add inductance to the ground wire and add reactive impedance to the impedance of the ground wire. This reactive impedance resists the flow of the noise and the surges down the ground line to the ground grid. A large wire with no twists or bends is used for this connection in order to develop a very, very low impedance path for noise to go to ground.

Case Ground of the Meter The Socket, DIN, and A-Base forms of the Q1000 meter have been designed to not require case grounds for the meter. The Switchboard and Rackmount forms have a case ground. This point on the meter should be connected to the “single-point” ground in the meter enclosure or equipment rack. This wire shall be #10 AWG or larger, stranded, copper and properly terminated in a spade or ring lug connector. The wire should be included in the laced bundle of wires (CT, VT, Auxiliary Power) in the meter enclosure. The grounding wire should not be dangling through the meter enclosure. Also, this ground wire, including the laced bundle, should be as near to the metal wall of the meter enclosure or equipment rack as possible. The case ground terminal should not be used as a Common point for any other circuits (VT, CT, Auxiliary Power Circuits, telephone protection devices, shield grounds). These other circuits should have their shields and safety grounds tied directly to the “single-point” grounding stud in the meter enclosure or equipment rack.

CT and VT Circuit Grounding The CT and VT circuits must be grounded at one point, and they must not be grounded at more than one point. If these circuits are grounded at more than one point, then ground currents can develop, and the overall metering accuracy of the installation is compromised. Also the CTs (in the meter and in the yard) may saturate if there is a DC component in the ground currents.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-27

Installation

Users must choose the point of grounding of the CT and VT circuits based upon their company’s safety and operating practices. There are two acceptable locations for the grounds, but the circuits can be grounded at only one point (not both). Users usually have a tradition of grounding at one location or the other. This tradition should not be changed lightly, for change now may result in confusion for meter and wire persons in the future as they have to work on many different installations of varying practices.

At the CTs and VTs in the Substation Yard This method will ground the CT and VT circuits in the yard, and so confine fault currents to the yard. However, this method will present high voltages inside the meter enclosure (where personnel are likely to be working) during faults and switching transients.

These high voltages could result in flash-overs between the wires, equipment, enclosures, and racks.

At the Test Block Below the Meter This method will ground the CTs and VTs at the test switch in the metering enclosure or equipment rack. The advantage of this method is that the meter enclosure and the circuits are at about the same potential during a fault or switching transient so that if personnel are working on or near the metering installation at the time of the fault they are not exposed to high voltages and possibly flash-overs. This method requires that the CT and VT circuits are brought into the meter enclosure and control house ungrounded. This connection method permits easier testing in the meter enclosure or control house, and it permits easier re-wiring of the metering installation if new equipment is added or existing equipment is changed.

External Meter Connections All Q1000 meters come equipped with the following external connectors: •

an optical port

•

a 25 pin connector (DB-25)

If a Q1000 meter is ordered with the optional modem board, then an additional external connector will be provided, phone connector RJ-11 or DB-9, depending on the meter configuration. The Rackmount and Switchboard meters have a DB-9 connector. The Socket, DIN, and A-base meters have an RJ-11 connector on a cable coming out of the meter base. The optional internal modem board also has connections to start a RS-485 4-wire bus plus ground wire that is used for multidrop phone line connections. See Chapter 6 for more information. The Socket base meter can also be ordered with an optional auxiliary AC/DC power input. This optional feature comes in several versions. Refer to "Auxiliary Power" on page 2-13 for more information.

2-28

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

If the meter is ordered with the optional RS-485 board (which can be configured to have a RS-485 port or a RS-232 port), then a 4-wire RS-485 bus plus ground wire is also available. The availability and function of each of the above connectors is listed in Table 2.4.

RS-232 COM 1 Port

RS-232 COM 2 Port

Optional Internal Modem Compatible?a b c

Meter External Modem Connection

Optional Internal RS-485 Compatible?a c d

Optional Ext. Aux Power Cable Option Available?

RS-485 4-Wire Bus Compatible?a c

Socket

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

RJ-11

Yes

Yes

Yes

DIN

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

RJ-11

Yes

No

Yes

A-base

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

RJ-11

Yes

No

Yes

Switchboard

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

DB-9 (Female)

Yes

No

Yes

Rackmount

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

DB-9 (Male)

Yes

No

Yes

Meter Type

Optical Port

Table 2.3 External Meter Communication Options

a

b

c

d

All meters built since December 17, 1999 are internal modem board, internal RS-485 board, and RS-485 bus compatible. Meters built prior to this date must be returned to the factory for upgrading. Consult your SchlumbergerSema Sales Representative. The internal modem, when installed, uses the COM 2 port. In this configuration, the RS-232 on COM 2 is not available. The Q1000 meter has one internal option board slot. Either the modem board or the RS-485 board may be installed, but not both. The RS-485 bus is used by both the internal modem or the internal RS-485 board. See Chapter 6 for more information. The RS-485 option board is configurable to be either a RS-485 port or a RS-232 port.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-29

Installation

Table 2.4 External Meter Connections Connector (with Connection Type)

Rate

Function

Optical Port on meter front

19.2 Kbps maximuma

Direct connect to PC

DB-25 Connector, DB-25 Connectors on Communications Splitter Cable and meter’s DB-25 Connector

115.2 Kbps maximum

Direct RS-232 connection to any hardware utilizing RS-232 communication

I/O Network, Twisted Pair(s)

1.25 Mbps

Meter to I/O module(s) connection for pulse, digital state, and analog connections

Internal Modem, DB-9 or RJ-1 Connector

1.2 up to 33.6 Kbps

Internal modem connection to phone system wiring

RS-485 bus, Loose Wires (5) from Communications Splitter Cable

115.2 Kbps maximum

Direct RS-485 connection to local RS-485 bus or into master Q1000 meter with modem connection to phone system

a

The Q1000 optical port hardware can operate up to 19,200 bps, but some optical port cables limit communication to 9600 bps.

Optical Port The optical port is mounted on the meter cover. The optical port is a communication interface from the meter to a PC. Interface to a PC is accomplished through an optical probe cable, which plugs into the optical port on one end and the PC’s serial port on the other end. All five meter types may be ordered with either the ANSI or IEC optical port.

Figure 2.34 IEC Optical Probe Example Cable and Meter’s Optical Port Connection

2-30

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

Figure 2.35 ANSI Optical Probe Example Cable and Meter’s Optical Port Connection

Q1000 Meter DB-25 Connector (Meter Interface Connector) All Q1000 meters have a DB-25 connector. This connector contains the majority of the communication wiring. Users can either connect directly to this connector using a Q1000 Programming Cable, or they can connect to the Communications Splitter Cable. Both cables are described in the following sections. The pin-outs for the DB-25 Connector are described in Table 2.5. On the A-base and DIN meter, this connector is located on the right hand side of the meter’s base. On the Socket base meter, a cable extends through the base and terminates in the DB-25 connector. On the Switchboard and Rackmount cases, the connector is on the back of the meter case. Table 2.5 Q1000 Meter DB-25 Connector Pin Assignments Meter DB-25 Pin

Meter Signal Name

Meter Port Number

Signal Description

1

Shield

Modem/RS-485a

Common for RS-485 Busb

2

TXD 1

1

Transmitted Data for Port 1

3

RXD 1

1

Received Data for Port 1

4

RTS 1

1

Request To Send for Port 1

5

Not Used

6

Not Used

7

GND 1

1

Signal Ground for Port 1

8

DCD 1

1

Data Carrier Detect for Port 1

9

TXD Y

Modem/RS-485

Transmitted Data (Y), RS-485 4-wire Bus

10

TXD Z

Modem/RS-485

Transmitted Data (Z), RS-485 4-wire Bus

11

RXD B

Modem/RS-485

Received Data (B), RS-485 4-wire Bus

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-31

Installation

Table 2.5 Q1000 Meter DB-25 Connector Pin Assignments

a

b

c

Meter DB-25 Pin

Meter Signal Name

Meter Port Number

Signal Description

12

DCD 2

2

Data Carrier Detect for Port 2

13

Not Used

14

TXD 2

2

Transmitted Data for Port 2

15

RXD A

Modem/RS-485

Received Data (A), RS-485 4-wire Bus

16

RXD 2

2

Received Data for Port 2

17

Not Used

18

GND 2

2

Signal Ground for Port 2

19

RXD 2

2

Request To Send for Port 2

20

Not Used

21c

NN_OUT-

I/O

I/O Network

22

Not Used

23c

NN_OUT+

I/O

I/O Network

24c

NN_IN-

I/O

I/O Network

25c

NN_IN+

I/O

I/O Network

The RS-485 bus is used by both the internal modem and/or the internal RS-485 board. See Chapter 6 for more information. Ground this common wire at only one end. See "Grounding" on page 2-25 and the publication “Installation and Grounding of the QUANTUM Meters: A Suggested Practice Guide” for more information. Pins 24 and 25 are used with standard, terminated Q1000 meters. Pins 21, 23, 24 and 25 are used with unterminated Q1000 meters.

Communications Splitter Cable There are two versions of the Q1000 Communications Splitter Cable; a version that was manufactured prior to December 1999, and a version that was manufactured after that date. The following sections describe these cables.

Post-December 1999 Version Q1000 Communications Splitter Cable Q1000 meters manufactured after December 17, 1999 can be retrofitted to support the internal modem option or internal RS-485 option. The "Internal Modem Kit" on page 2-44 shows the Modem Retrofit Kit part numbers. "Internal RS-485 Kit" on page 2-55 shows the RS-485 Retrofit Kit part numbers for each meter type. Both kits may be field-retrofitted in newer meters. Meters built before this date must be returned to the factory for upgrading—consult your SchlumbergerSema Sales Representative. To determine if your Q1000 was manufactured before this date,

2-32

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

check the date code on the right side of the meter’s nameplate. Depending on the type of meter you have, the nameplate will be above or below the TEST switch. The date code is in the format mmyy. Standard Q1000 Communications Splitter Cable

DB-25 Connector attaches to Q1000 meter’s DB-25 Connector

Serial Port 1

Serial Port 2

I/O Pigtail

RS-485 Pigtail

Figure 2.36 Standard Q1000 Communications Splitter Cable, Terminated Meter

The Standard Q1000 Communications Splitter Cable comes in the box with new meter purchases. It splits the output from the meter’s DB-25 connector into two RS-232 ports1, RS-485 pigtail and a LonWorks twisted pair pigtail. Use Table 2.6 to find the appropriate part number. The two RS-232 ports are identifiable by the color sleeve.

Serial Port 1 has either a Tan or White sleeve and Serial Port 2 has a Black sleeve.

Table 2.6 Standard Q1000 Communication Splitter Cable Part Numbers

1.

Part Number

Meter Form

Meter Network Internal Connection Type

441885-001

Socket, DIN, DIN Flushmount, A-Base, Rackmount

Terminated

441885-003

Socket, DIN, DIN Flushmount, A-Base, Rackmount

Unterminated

441885-005

Switchboard

Terminated

441885-006

Switchboard

Unterminated

The serial port 1 sleeve is either white (as shown in Figure 2.36) or tan.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-33

Installation

Table 2.7 Standard Q1000 Communications Splitter Cable Pin Assignments Meter DB-25 Pin

Meter Signal Name

Meter Port Number

Signal Description

Splitter Cable Pin RS-232 Port 1 (DB-25) White or Tan Sleeve

2

TXD 1

1

Transmitted Data

2

3

RXD 1

1

Received Data

3

4

RTS 1

1

Request To Send

4

7

GND 1

1

Signal Ground

7

8

DCD 1

1

Data Carrier Detect

8 RS-232 Port 2 (DB-25) Black Sleeve

14

TXD 2

2

Transmitted Data

2

16

RXD 2

2

Received Data

3

19

RTS 2

2

Request To Send

4

18

GND 2

2

Signal Ground

7

12

DCD 2

2

Data Carrier Detect

8 (5-Wire) Black Sleeve

1

SHLD

RS-485

Shield

Yellow/White

9

TXD Y

RS-485

Transmitted Data (Y)

White/Brown

10

TXD Z

RS-485

Transmitted Data (Z)

Brown/White

15

RXD A

RS-485

Received Data (A)

Red/White

11

RXD B

RS-485

Received Data (B)

White/Red

Twisted Pair

a

(2 or 4-Wire) Black Sleeve

21a

NN_OUT-

I/O

LonWorks I/O Network

Violet

23a

NN_OUT+

I/O

LonWorks I/O Network

Brown

24a

NN_IN-

I/O

LonWorks I/O Network

Black/White

25a

NN_IN+

I/O

LonWorks I/O Network

White/Orange

Pins 24 and 25 are used with standard, terminated Q1000 meters. Pins 21, 23, 24, and 25 are used with unterminated Q1000 meters.

2-34

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

Pre-December 1999 Version Q1000 Communications Splitter Cable (Discontinued)

Serial Port 2

Serial Port 1

I/O Pigtails

Figure 2.37 Pre-December 1999 Communications Splitter Cable, Unterminated Meter

This cable splits the output from the meter interface connector into two RS-232 ports and a LONWORKs twisted pair pigtail. This cable is also available with a second LONWORKs twisted pair pigtail for unterminated meters. The pin-outs for this cable are shown in Table 2.8.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-35

Installation

Table 2.8 Pre-December 1999 Communications Splitter Cable Pin Assignments Meter DB-25 Pin

Signal Name

Port Number

Description

Splitter Cable Pin RS-232 Port 1 (DB-25) Tan Sleeve

2

TXD1

1

Transmitted Data

2

3

RXD1

1

Received Data

3

4

RTS1

1

Request To Send

4

7

GND1

1

Signal Ground

7

8

DCD1

1

Data Carrier Detect

8 RS-232 Port 2 (DB-25) Black Sleeve

14

TXD2

2

Transmitted Data

2

16

RXD2

2

Received Data

3

19

RTS2

2

Request To Send

4

18

GND2

2

Signal Ground

7

12

DCD2

2

Data Carrier Detect

8

21a

NN_OUT-

I/O

LonWorks I/O Network

Violet

23a

NN_OUT+

I/O

LonWorks I/O Network

Brown

24a

NN_IN-

I/O

LonWorks I/O Network

Black/White

25a

NN_IN+

I/O

LonWorks I/O Network

White/Orange

Twisted Pair

a

Pins 24 and 25 are used with standard, terminated Q1000 meters. Pins 21, 23, 24, and 25 are used with unterminated Q1000 meters.

Q1000 Programming Cable The Q1000 meter has been designed to allow out-of-the-box programming. Meters are shipped in the Customer Default Mode which puts Mini-DLMS protocol on all three ports. Use an optical port cable or a null modem cable to log on to the meter’s optical port or COM port 1, respectively.

I/O Network The Q1000 meter uses LonWorks to connect the meter to its optional, external I/O modules. The meter’s DB-25 connector has the LonWorks twisted pair(s). These wires are split off in the Communication Splitter Cable. See "I/O Network Protocol" on page 6-34 for more information on LonWorks, I/Os, and connection information.

2-36

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

Internal Modem Connection—A-base, DIN, and Socket Base Meters Meters ordered with an internal modem are shipped with a modem cable extending from the body of the meter. This cable protrudes from the base of the Socket Base meters and from the right hand side of the A-base and DIN meters. This cable is equipped with a RJ-11 connector. Meters ordered without internal modems may be retrofitted using the Internal Modem Retrofit Kit. Holes are provided with removable plugs on all meters for this purpose.

Figure 2.38 Socket Meter with Internal Modem

Figure 2.39 A-base Meter with Internal Modem

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-37

Installation

Internal Modem Connection—Switchboard and Rackmount Meters The Switchboard and Rackmount meters also have a 9 pin connector that is used for modem communication. The meter can interface to the phone line through this connector. The DB-9 connector is mounted on the rear of the switchboard (Figure 2.40) meter cases. Refer to Table 2.9 for pin assignment. Table 2.9 Switchboard and Rackmount DB-9 Connector Switchboard Meter Connections

Rackmount Meter Connections

Phone Line

Pin

Function

Pin

Function

Function

5

Tip

3

Tip

Tip

4

Ring

2

Ring

Ring

If a modem is ordered with a switchboard or rackmount meter, a DB-9 to RJ-11 cable will be shipped with the meter. This cable has a DB-9 connector on one end and a RJ-11 connector on the other end. If an internal modem is desired after the purchase of the meter, this cable will be provided in the Internal Modem Retrofit Kit.

DB-9 Connector

DB-25 Connector

Figure 2.40 Modem Connection on Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Meter

2-38

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

DB-9 Connectors

DB-25 Connectors Figure 2.41 Modem Connection on Rackmount Meter Case (2 meters)

RS-485 Bus Meters manufactured after December 1999 are “RS-485 bus” ready. The RS-485 4-wire bus may be used in two ways. 1

With an internal RS-485 board, the RS-485 bus is used as a means to make a direct connection to the meter.

2

With an internal modem board, the RS-485 bus is started on the internal modem in the Q1000 meter (master meter). With Firmware Version 5.X or greater, up to 31 Q1000 meters (with RS-485 boards) can be connected together on the RS-485 bus and share the one phone line attached to the meter with the internal modem (master meter).

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-39

Installation

Kits The following sections describe each of the kits available for the Q1000 meter.

DIN Flushmount Adapter Installation Kit DIN Flushmount adapter (part number K442177-001) may be used with the DIN meter package.

M6 Nut (large)

M4 Nut (small) Frame

Washers

Hexagonal Rods

Figure 2.42 DIN Flushmount Adapter Kit

Components The DIN Flushmount Adapter Kit consists of the following components: Component

Quantity

Frame

1

Hexagon Rod

3

M6 Nut

3

M4 Nut

3

Washer

3

Installation

2-40

1

Drill three locating holes and cut out a section on the meter panel where the meter will mount as shown in Figure 2.44 and Figure 2.46. The diameter of the holes are 0.55 inches (14mm).

2

Position the frame on the meter panel over the cut out. Line up locating holes in the meter panel with threaded recesses in the frame.

3

Screw the M6 nut into the half length position of the hexagon rod's M6 thread.

4

Screw the hexagon rod (M6 thread side) onto the frame from the rear of the meter panel. Do not overtighten, as this may damage the frame (4-6 turns only).

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

5

Turn the M6 nut in the counter-clockwise direction until the nut is tight to the frame.

6

The hexagon rods should now be attached to the frame (90° to meter panel).

7

Install the meter onto the hexagon rods. (Ensure the wiring of the meter has been completed.)

8

Install the washers onto the hexagon rods' M4 thread side (behind base of meter) and then install the M4 nuts in the clockwise direction until the nuts tighten on the meter base. Refer to Figure 2.47 for completed installation drawings.

Figure 2.43 Flush Mounting Frame

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-41

Installation

Figure 2.44 DIN Meter in Flushmount Kit - Front View

2-42

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

Figure 2.45 DIN Meter in Flushmount Kit - Side View

Figure 2.46 Meter Panel Cut Out

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-43

Installation

Figure 2.47 Completed Flush Mounting Installation

Internal Modem Kit An Internal Modem Kit is available for all five Q1000 meter forms. Table 2.10 Internal Modem Kit Part Numbers

2-44

Meter Type

Internal Modem Kit Part Number

Socket

K442123-001

DIN / A-base

K442123-002

Switchboard

K442123-003

Socket (Canada)

K442123-007

DIN / A-base (Canada)

K442123-008

Rackmount

K442123-009

Rackmount (Canada)

K442123-010

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

Switchboard/Rackmount Cable (DB-9 to RJ-11)

Socket/DIN/A-base Cable

Ribbon Cable

FCC Label

Modem Board Strain Relief Bushing

Figure 2.48 Internal Modem Kit

The Internal Modem Kit consists of the following components:

Table 2-1 Internal Modem Kit Components Description

Part Number

Socket

DIN

A-base

Switchboard

Rackmount

Modem Board

442192-001

X

X

X

X

X

Ribbon Cable

512736-001

X

X

X

X

X

Modem Cable

441342-

006

007

007

-

012

Modem Cable

440927-002

-

-

-

X

-

Strain Relief Bushing

511899-002

X

X

X

-

-

FCC Label

512411-005

X

X

X

X

X

D.O.C. Certification Labela

CA34898-003

X

X

X

X

X

a

D.O.C. Certification Label included instead of FCC label on Canadian meters.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-45

Installation

Internal Modem Installation in Socket Meter To install an internal modem, follow these steps: 1

Power down the meter.

2

Remove the meter’s external cover, the two internal cover panels on each side, the nameplate, the display cover panel, and the display board. The two internal cover panels are identical except for a small hole near the meter’s front on one of the panels. This hole provides access to the LCD contrast adjustment potentiometer. When reinstalling the cover panels, be sure to install the panel with the hole on the correct side of the meter.

3

Slide the internal modem into the available slot on the left side of the meter, as shown in Figure 2.49.

Option Board Mounting Slots

Figure 2.49 Modem Module Insertion

2-46

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

RS-485 Bus Cable

RJ-11 Phone Line Connection

Ribbon Cable

Figure 2.50 Modem Module Installed

4

With the modem in place, connect the ribbon cable from the connector J3 at the front of the modem board to the left serial port connector J4 on the underside of the meter.

When re-installing the cover, be careful not to pinch the modem ribbon cable.

5

Connect the modem cable to the connector J2 at the lower front of the modem board.

6

(Optional) If a RS-485 bus connection is needed, then connect the RS-485 bus cable to J4.

7

Replace the Display Board, internal cover panels, nameplate, and external cover.

Reverse this process to remove the internal modem. Meter Programming 1

Launch the PC-PRO+ 98 software, and open an existing Q1000 program.

2

In the Communications Settings component of the program, select the number of rings for Outside Call Windows and Inside Call Windows in the General tab.

3

The internal modem is connected to port 2. Go to the COM Port 2 tab.

4

Select the Mini-DLMS protocol.

5

Choose the baud rate (1200 to 33,600 bps).

6

Select the option for Internal or External Modem Only.

7

Save the program.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-47

Installation

8

From the Communications menu, log on to the meter and initialize the meter with the program just created. Log off the meter.

The communications settings are re-programmed only after the software logs off from the meter.

Initializing the meter will delete any existing data that the meter has accumulated. It is recommended that the user save any desired data prior to updating communications parameters and initializing.

Verifying Operation of Internal Modem 1

Connect the meter’s phone line to an analog phone line or phone line simulator.

2

Use PC-PRO+ 98 to call the meter. This step will verify that the modem was properly installed and that the meter was programmed correctly.

3

Refer to Chapter 6, Communications for additional Communications information.

Internal Modem Installation in DIN/A-base Meter To install the internal modem, follow these steps: 1

Power down the meter.

2

Remove the meter's external cover, nameplate, and internal cover.

You must disconnect a ribbon cable in the back of the meter before you can remove the internal cover.

3

2-48

Two plastic braces will be standing above the boards and between the boards and the transformers such that the modem board will be held perpendicular to the registration board. Gently insert the modem between the two raised plastic braces. The modem should be inserted with its transistor side facing the terminal block with the two pin connectors (J3 & J4) on top as shown in Figure 2.51.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

Braces lock into these holes

Figure 2.51 DIN/A-base Modem Board Installation

4

Push down gently on the modem until the two braces lock the modem into position.

5

Connect the gray 10-pin cable from connector (J3) on the top of the modem to the connector (J2) on the right side of the top board directly behind the modem, as seen in Figure 2.52.

RJ-11 Phone Line Connection

Ribbon Cable

RS-485 Bus Cable

Figure 2.52 DIN/A-base Modem J2 and J3 Connector Location

6

Connect the 6-pin cable end to the available connection (J2) on the top of the modem.

7

(Optional) If a RS-485 bus connection is needed, then connect the RS-485 bus cable to J4.

8

Securely arrange cables and replace the nameplate and covers.

Reverse this process to remove the modem.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-49

Installation

Internal Modem Installation in Switchboard Meter To install an internal modem, follow these steps: 1

Power down meter.

2

Remove front cover, paddles, and meter from case.

3

Remove display panel using the clips on both sides. Press clips in to release panel. The display panel will tilt down toward you, pivoting from the bottom.

4

The modem board fits into the available slot at the top of the meter. Push back on the modem until the 2 clasps shown in Figure 2.53 lock the modem into position.

RJ-11 Phone Line Connection

Ribbon Cable

RS-485 Bus Cable

Figure 2.53 Switchboard Modem Board Installation

2-50

5

Connect the gray 10-pin cable from connector (J3, right), on the front of the modem, to the connector (J2), on the left side of the main board.

6

Connect the 6-pin cable end to the available connection (J2, left) on the front of the modem.

7

Connect the 5-pin cable end to the available connection (J4, middle) on the front of the modem.

8

(Optional) If a RS-485 bus connection is needed, then connect the RS-485 bus cable to J4.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

J2

J4

J3

Figure 2.54 Switchboard J2, J3, and J4 Location

9

Securely arrange cables and replace display panel, insert meter back into case, replace paddles, and replace front cover.

Internal Modem Installation in Rackmount Meter To install an internal modem, follow these steps: 1

Power down meter.

2

Remove the four screws holding the meter in the case. Pull meter out of case.

3

Remove the 6 screws on the back and 6 screws on the sides of the meter with a Philip's head screwdriver.

4

Remove the top cover by sliding it back and then lifting it up.

5

Insert the modem board, face forward and connections up, into the available slot at the front of the meter.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-51

Installation

Modem Slot

Modem Locks

Figure 2.55 Rackmount Modem Board Placement

2-52

6

Slide the black locks back to secure the board

7

Attach the modem's gray 10-pin ribbon cable to connector J3 (right) on the modem and connect J4 on the left side of the main board.

8

Attach the 6-pin cable end to connector J2 (left) of the modem.

9

(Optional) If a RS-485 bus connection is needed, then connect the RS-485 bus cable to J4.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

RJ-11 Phone Line Connection

RS-485 Bus Cable

Ribbon Cable

Figure 2.56 Rackmount Modem Board Installed

10 Replace top cover, screws, meter in case, and screws holding meter in case.

Internal Modem and Internal RS-485 Boards in Pre-December 1999 Meters Q1000 meters manufactured before December 17, 1999 do not support the internal modem option or internal RS-485 option, but they can be returned to the factory for upgrading - consult your SchlumbergerSema Sales Representative. To determine if your Q1000 was manufactured before this date, check the date code on the right side of the meter’s nameplate. Depending on the type of meter you have, the nameplate will be above or below the TEST switch. The date code is in the format mmyy. Units built after this date can be field retrofitted. The "Internal Modem Kit" on page 2-44 shows the Modem Retrofit Kit part numbers for each meter type. "Internal RS-485 Kit" on page 2-55 shows the RS-485 Retrofit Kit part numbers for each meter type. Units returned to the factory for upgrading require the following four changes to be modem compatible: 1

A firmware upgrade to revision 2.06e or above.

2

A Main Board upgrade to revision 19 or above.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-53

Installation

Components L1 and JP1 should have black ferrite beads surrounding the component per ECN ELE01206, Board rev.

3

A Power Supply Board upgraded to revision 16 or above.

Component T1 should be labeled 512743-002 per ECN ELE01050, Board rev. 15.

4

2-54

Replacement of the internal wiring harness to support Modem/RS-485 output through the DB-25 connector.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

Internal RS-485 Kit An Internal RS-485 Kit is available for all five Q1000 meter forms. The same kit works in all meter forms. The kit part number is K442523-001. The Internal RS-485 Kit consists of the following components: Table 2.11 Internal RS-485 Kit Description

Part Number

Socket

DIN

A-base

Switchboard

Rackmount

RS-485 Board

442380-001

X

X

X

X

X

Ribbon Cable

512736-001

X

X

X

X

X

RS-485 / RS-232 Configuration The RS-485 board, when installed, uses COM port 2. The RS-485 board can be configured to support either RS-232 or RS-485 signaling. With the board configured as an RS-485 connection, an external conversion back to RS-232 may be required in some cases. See Chapter 6, Communications for more information. Once the RS-485 kit is installed, you can either connect using RS-485 or RS-232. Refer to Figure 2.57 while reading about these options. •

To connect using RS-485, connect to the board through J3. Add a jumper between pins 5 & 6 of JP1. This is labeled RS485 on the board next to the jumper. For long connection lengths between RS-485 modules, a jumper may be added between pins 1 & 2 (XMIT TERM) and pins 3 & 4 (REC TERM) of JP1. These are the Transmit and Receive outputs of the RS-485. These jumpers will provide about 120 ohms of termination impedance for these lines. For short connection, these jumpers may be removed.

•

To connect using RS-232, connect to the board through J2. Add a jumper between pins 7 & 8 of JP1. This is labeled RS232 on the board next to the jumper.

JP1

J3

RS-485

R14

1 3 5 7

R13 2 4 6 8

J2

RS-232

XMIT TERM REC TERM RS485 RS232

J1

Figure 2.57 RS-485 Board Configuration Information

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-55

Installation

Internal RS-485 Board Installation in Socket Meter To install an internal RS-485 board, follow these steps: 1

Power down the meter.

2

Remove the meter’s external cover, the two internal cover panels on each side, the nameplate, the display cover panel, and the display board. The two internal cover panels are identical except for a small hole near the meter’s front on one of the panels. This hole provides access to the LCD contrast adjustment potentiometer. When reinstalling the cover panels, be sure to install the panel with the hole on the correct side of the meter.

3

Slide the internal RS-485 board into the available slot on the left side of the meter, as shown in Figure 2.58.

Figure 2.58 RS-485 Board Insertion

4

2-56

With the RS-485 board in place, connect the ribbon cable from the connector J1 at the front of the RS-485 board.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

RS-485 Bus Cable (shown in RS-232 position)

Figure 2.59 RS-485 Board Installed

5

6

Do one of the following: •

To configure the board in the RS-485 mode, connect the RS-485 bus cable to connector J3 and add a jumper between pins 5 & 6 of JP1.

•

To configure the board in the RS-232 mode, connect the RS-485 bus cable to connector J2 and add a jumper between pins 7 & 8 of JP1.

Replace the Display Board, internal cover panels, nameplate, and external cover.

Reverse this process to remove the RS-485 board. Meter Programming 1

Launch the PC-PRO+ 98 software, and open an existing Q1000 program.

2

In the Communication Setup component of the program, select the tab that matches the serial port your RS-485 connection will use.

3

Select the option for Direct Connect.

4

Save the program with a new name.

5

From the Communications menu, log on to the meter and initialize the meter with the program just created. Log off the meter.

The communications settings are re-programmed only after the software logs off from the meter.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-57

Installation

Initializing the meter will delete any existing data that the meter has accumulated. It is recommended that the user save any desired data prior to updating communications parameters and initializing.

Verifying Operation of the RS-485 Board 1

Connect the RS-485 connector to the RS-485 bus.

2

Use PC-PRO+ 98 to call the meter. This step will verify that the RS-485 board was properly installed and that the meter was programmed correctly.

3

Refer to Chapter 6 of this manual for additional Communications information.

Internal RS-485 Board Installation in DIN/A-base Meter To install the internal RS-485 board, follow these steps: 1

Power down the meter.

2

Remove the meter's external cover, nameplate, and internal cover.

You must disconnect a ribbon cable in the back of the meter before you can remove the internal cover.

3

2-58

Two plastic braces will be standing above the boards and between the boards and the transformers such that the RS-485 board will be held perpendicular to the registration board. Gently insert the RS-485 board between the two raised plastic braces. The RS-485 board should be inserted with its component side facing the terminal block with the three pin connectors (J1, J2 & J3) on top as shown in Figure 2.60.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

Figure 2.60 DIN/A-base RS-485 Board Insertion

4

Push down gently on the RS-485 board until the two braces lock the RS-485 board into position.

5

Connect the gray 10-pin cable from connector (J1) on the top of the RS-485 board to the connector (J2) on the right side of the top board directly behind the RS-485 board, as seen in Figure 2.61.

RS-485 Bus Cable (shown in the RS-232 Position)

Figure 2.61 DIN/A-base RS-485 Board J2 and J3 Connector Location

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-59

Installation

6

7

Do one of the following: •

To configure the board in the RS-485 mode, connect the RS-485 bus cable to connector J3 and add a jumper between pins 5 & 6 of JP1.

•

To configure the board in the RS-232 mode, connect the RS-485 bus cable to connector J2 and add a jumper between pins 7 & 8 of JP1.

Securely arrange cables and replace the nameplate and covers.

Reverse the above process to remove the RS-485 board.

Internal RS-485 Board Installation in Switchboard Meter To install an RS-485 board, follow these steps: 1

Power down meter.

2

Remove front cover, paddles, and meter from case.

3

Remove display panel using the clips on both sides. Press clips in to release panel.

4

The RS-485 board fits into the available slot at the top of the meter. Push back on the RS-485 board until the 2 clasps shown in Figure 2.53 lock the RS-485 board into position.

Figure 2.62 Switchboard RS-485 Board Insertion

2-60

5

Connect the gray 10-pin cable from connector (J1, right), on the front of the RS-485 board, to the connector (J2), on the left side of the main board.

6

Do one of the following: •

To configure the board in the RS-485 mode, connect the RS-485 bus cable to connector J3 and add a jumper between pins 5 & 6 of JP1.

•

To configure the board in the RS-232 mode, connect the RS-485 bus cable to connector J2 and add a jumper between pins 7 & 8 of JP1.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

J3

J2 (Connection shown in RS-232 Position)

J1

Figure 2.63 Switchboard J1, J2, and J3 Location

7

Securely arrange cables and replace display panel, insert meter back into case, replace paddles, and replace front cover.

Internal RS-485 Board Installation in Rackmount Meter To install an RS-485 board, follow these steps: 1

Power down meter.

2

Remove the 4 screws holding the meter in the case. Pull meter out of case.

3

Remove the 6 screws on the back and 6 screws on the sides of the meter with a Phillips head screwdriver.

4

Remove the top cover by sliding it back and then lifting it up.

5

Insert the RS-485 board, face forward and connections up, into the available slot at the front of the meter.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-61

Installation

Figure 2.64 Rackmount RS-485 Board Insertion

2-62

6

Slide the black locks back to secure the board

7

Attach the RS-485 board’s gray 10-pin ribbon cable to connector J1 (right) on the RS-485 board.

8

Do one of the following: •

To configure the board in the RS-485 mode, connect the RS-485 bus cable to connector J3 and add a jumper between pins 5 & 6 of JP1.

•

To configure the board in the RS-232 mode, connect the RS-485 bus cable to connector J2 and add a jumper between pins 7 & 8 of JP1.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

RS-485 Bus Cable (shown in RS-232 Position)

Ribbon Cable

Figure 2.65 Rackmount RS-485 Board Installed

9

Replace top cover, screws, meter in case, and screws holding meter in case.

Board Replacement The following description applies to all meter versions: If the Main board, MOV board, or Transducer board on any version of the Q1000 meter needs to be replaced, the meter must be returned to the factory. These boards would affect calibration data and impact meter accuracy if replaced with a different board. After one of these boards is replaced, the meter must be recalibrated; the meter should be returned to the factory. The following sections describe replacement of the Display board and the Power Supply board. These boards can be replaced in the field; the must does not need to be recalibrated after these boards are replaced.

Replacing a Display Board The following sections describe how to install a Display board in the various Q1000 meter forms.

Socket Meter To replace a Display board, follow these steps: 1

Power down the meter.

2

Remove the meter’s external cover, the two internal cover panels on each side, the nameplate, and the display cover panel.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-63

Installation

The two internal cover panels are identical except for a small hole near the meter’s front on one of the panels. This hole provides access to the LCD contrast adjustment potentiometer. When reinstalling the cover panels, be sure to install the panel with the hole on the correct side of the meter.

3

The display board is held in place with four plastic clasps, two at the top of the board and two at the bottom. Firmly pinch one of these clasps and gently raise that corner of the display board as much possible. Repeat for each of the remaining clasps until the display board pulls free from the rest of the meter.

4

Align the new display board so that connector J1 on the underside of the board, seen in Figure 2.66, lines up with connector J7 of the main board and the four clasps line up with the corresponding holes in the display board.

Figure 2.66 Display Board (Bottom View)

5

2-64

Firmly push the new display board straight into the rest of the meter until the four plastic clasps fasten the board into place, as seen in Figure 2.67.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

Figure 2.67 Display Board Placement

6

Replace the cover panel over the display board, the two side cover panels, the nameplate, and the external cover.

Check the nameplate after re-installing. Ensure that the TEST switch has been properly aligned with the nameplate and is rising through the hole cut for it in the nameplate.

DIN/A-base Meter To replace a Display board follow these steps: 1

Power down the meter.

2

Remove the meter's external cover and display casing (held in place with four screws).

3

Detach the cables connecting the display board to the meter body as shown in Figure 2.68.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-65

Installation

Cable connects to rest of meter here

These screws hold the display board in place

Figure 2.68 DIN/A-base Display Board Removal

4

The display board is held in place with two screws. With a Philip's head screwdriver remove the two screws holding the display board to its casing and gently raise the board.

5

Place the new display board in the casing, pressing firmly on the board until it sits into the casing, and then replace the two screws.

6

Reconnect the cable to connector J1 (with the red strip towards the top of the casing) to the display board.

7

Replace the display casing and external cover.

Switchboard Meter To replace a Display board, follow these steps:

2-66

1

Power down meter.

2

Remove front cover, paddles, and meter from case.

3

Remove display panel using the clips on both sides. Press clips in to release panel. Display panel will tilt down toward you, pivoting from bottom.

4

Detach the cables connecting the display board to the meter body. Remove the display panel.

5

The display board is held in place by two screws. With a Philip's head screwdriver remove the two screws holding the display board to its casing (see Figure 2.69). Pull out on the side of the panel and up on the display board to remove it from its casing.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

Screws to be removed

Figure 2.69 Switchboard Display Board Removal

6

Place the new board in the casing by pressing firmly on the board until it sits into the casing, and then replace the two screws.

7

Reconnect the cables to the new display board. The cable to connector J1 should have the red strip towards the top of the display board.

8

Place meter in case, replace paddles, and replace front cover.

Rackmount Meter If the Rackmount Display board needs to be replaced, the meter must be returned to the factory. Due to decreased internal space, the Rackmount meter is constrained with respect to field retrofitting. The Rackmount internal component boards are designed not to be removed unless by the factory. Installation and/or removal of internal boards, other than an option board (if present), will void the meter's factory warranty.

Replacing a Power Supply Board The following sections describe how to replace a Power Supply board in the various Q1000 meter forms.

Socket Meter To replace the power supply board, follow these steps: 1

Power down the meter.

2

Remove the meter’s external cover, the two internal cover panels on each side, the nameplate, the display cover panel, and the display board.

3

The power supply board is shown in Figure 2.70.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-67

Installation

Figure 2.70 Power Supply Board Placement

Figure 2.71 Power Supply Board

2-68

4

Disconnect the ribbon cable at connector J2 from the transducer board by gently lifting the tab and pulling the ribbon cable out.

5

Disconnect the connector J1 by firmly pinching the two tabs on the sides of the connector and pulling away from the power supply board.

6

The power supply board can be removed by pulling the board straight forward along the plastic tracks holding it in place.

7

Slide the new power supply board into position in the guide tracks.

8

Connect the cable at connector J1, and connect the ribbon cable at J2 of the new power supply to the transducer board.

9

Replace the display board, the display cover panel, the nameplate, the two internal cover panels on each side, and the external cover.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

DIN/A-base Meter To replace the power supply board, follow these steps: 1

Power down the meter.

2

Remove the meter's external cover.

3

The rear plastic plate is held in place by two plastic clasps. Firmly pull back on the clasps and remove the rear plate as seen in Figure 2.72.

Clasps

Figure 2.72 Rear Plate Removal

4

The power supply board is the third one from the top. Detach the two flat, blue cables connected to the second board as shown in Figure 2.72 by pulling up on the blue fasteners and pulling out the cables.

5

The board is physically held in place by two plastic clasps on the side of the meter. Pull up firmly on each clasp and pull out the board.

6

Pull out the board about 1½” and then detach the white power cable on the underside, and then completely remove the board from the physical meter.

7

Insert the new power supply board shown in Figure 2.73, face down about half way. Reattach the power cable on the underside and fully insert the new board. The two plastic clasps on the side should both click when the board is inserted correctly.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-69

Installation

Figure 2.73 Power Supply Board

8

Reattach the two flat, blue cables and their respective fasteners.

9

Replace the rear plastic panel and the external cover.

Switchboard Meter To replace a power supply board, follow these steps: 1

Power down meter.

2

Remove front cover, paddles, and meter from case.

3

Remove display panel using the clips on both sides. Press clips in to release panel.

Disconnecting the battery will cause the meter to lose all stored meter data. Download all needed meter information prior to disconnecting the battery.

2-70

4

Completely remove display panel by detaching all cables connecting display board to meter body, including battery cable that is connected to the main board on the left side of the meter.

5

The power supply board is the third from the top. Detach the 2 flat, blue cables connected to the transducer board (second board) by pulling out on the blue fasteners and down on the cables.

6

The board is physically held in place be two plastic claps on the sides of the meter. Pull out firmly on each clasp and pull out the board.

7

Pull the board out about 1½” and then detach the white power cable on the underside, and then completely remove the board from the meter.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Installation

Blue Fasteners

Power Cable

Figure 2.74 Switchboard Power Supply Board Placement

8

Insert the new power supply board; face down, about half way. Reattach the power cable on the underside and then fully insert the board. The two plastic clasps on the side should click when the board is inserted completely.

9

Reattach the two flat, blue cables in their respective fasteners.

10 Reattach the display panel and cables. The cable to connector J1 on the display board should have the red strip towards the top of the board. 11 Place the meter back in case. Replace paddles and front cover.

Rackmount Meter If the Rackmount Power Supply board needs to be replaced, the meter must be returned to the factory. Due to decreased internal space, the Rackmount meter is constrained with respect to field retrofitting. The Rackmount internal component boards are designed not to be removed unless by the factory. Installation and/or removal of internal boards, other than an option Modem board (if present), will void the meter's factory warranty.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

2-71

Installation

Installing QUANTUM Q1000 Switchboard Meter at QUANTUM STQ Switchboard Meter Location The Q1000 Switchboard meter has been designed for retrofit installation into an existing QUANTUM STQ switchboard location. Use the following procedure to upgrade your STQ QUANTUM to a Q1000 meter. Removing existing QUANTUM STQ meter: 1

Get all information desired from the existing QUANTUM STQ meter.

2

Remove STQ meter cover and set aside. This cover will not be re-used.

3

Remove the two paddles from the meter case. The meter will now power down.

4

Unlock the two connections (at top and bottom) on the meter cradle.

5

Slide the STQ meter toward you and remove it from the case. Set the meter aside.

6

Remove the DB-25 cable from the back of the meter case.

7

Verify good current, voltage, and ground connections at the back of the meter case.

8

Install new Q1000 DB-25 splitter cable to DB-25 connector on back of case.

Installing new QUANTUM Q1000 meter: 9

Verify that the Form (Form 9 [3-phase, 4-wire wye] or Form 5 [3-phase, 3-wire, delta]) of Q1000 meter is the same as the STQ meter. SchlumbergerSema recommends that the site’s meter form requirements always match the meter being installed.

10 Connect meter battery (if not already connected). 11 Slide Q1000 meter into existing STQ case. 12 Lock two connections on meter cradle. 13 Slide the two paddles back into the meter case. The meter will power up. 14 Install new Q1000 meter cover. 15 Connect: •

communications cables.

•

I/O Network wires on splitter cable to installed I/O modules.

•

RS-485, RS-232, and/or phone connections.

16 Program meter (if not already programmed.

2-72

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Chapter 3

Operating Instructions This section describes the basic operations of the Q1000 meter. For information on specific functions or modules, refer to the appropriate section.

Controls and Indicators Controls and indicators available on the meter face are shown in Figure 3.1 and Figure 3.2. •

There are three switches accessible from outside of the meter cover. From left to right on the cover, they are scroll lock, demand reset, and alternate display. A fourth switch, which places the meter in test mode, is located on the lower right side of the meter nameplate and can only be accessed with the meter cover removed.

•

The optical port tower is located to the left of the switch assembly. Two types of optical probes are available: ANSI or IEC.

•

Two test LEDs are mounted just above the meter serial number, which is above the main display. These LEDs may be programmed to pulse for any energy value. The default values are Varh and Wh. These LEDs can be ordered as either visible or infrared.

•

DIP switches can be accessed with the meter cover removed. They are located inside the meter, behind the nameplate on the bottom left side.

•

A display contrast adjustment screw is located inside a hole near the top of the left side meter housing (see Figure 3.10). It can be adjusted with a small flathead screwdriver (preferably plastic).

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-1

Operating Instructions

Test LEDs SchlumbergerSema Serial Number Month and Year of Manufacture

Installed Options Matrix

Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Internal Option Board Indicator M = Internal Modem R = Internal RS-485 Board

Meter with Auxiliary Power Meter with Optional Internal Modem Board

Test Switch

Optical Communications Port (ANSI Type) SchlumbergerSema Meter Specification Number (partially under Optical Port in this

Scroll Lock

Demand Reset

Alternate Display

Figure 3.1 Controls and Indicators, Socket Test LEDs

SchlumbergerSema Serial Number

Month and Year of Manufacture

Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Internal Option Board Indicator M = Internal Modem R = Internal RS-485 Board

Optical Communications Port (IEC Type)

Test Switch Alternate Display

Installed Options Matrix

Demand Reset Scroll Lock

Meter with Auxiliary Power SchlumbergerSema Meter Specification Number (partially under Optical Port in this view) Figure 3.2 Controls and Indicators, DIN

3-2

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Application of Power/Power-Up Functions The Q1000 meter is powered in a manner similar to transformer-rated electromechanical polyphase meters. Refer to Chapter 2, Installation, for proper connections. Upon application of power, the Q1000 meter goes through a series of diagnostic checks, including: •

Shadow RAM

•

System RAM check

•

EEPROM check

•

I/O module(s) (auto-detect)

•

Real time clock

•

Battery check

•

Modem check

•

Transducer Board check

•

Display Segment check

Shadow, system ram and EEPROM are checksummed on all data blocks. I/O modules are continually tested for presence and are installed and uninstalled when a change in status is detected. Modem presence is verified when in self-sensing mode. Transducer Board presence is verified and data validated via checksum communication. Refer to Chapter 9, Testing and Maintenance, for more detailed information on possible error messages that are displayed. Do not remove the electronic housing while the meter is powered up. Line-level voltages are present on some circuit boards. Failure to follow this procedure could result in serious personal injury or death. The warning label, shown in Figure 3.3, should always be visible on the electronics housing.

Figure 3.3 Warning Label

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-3

Operating Instructions

Power Down Procedures The meter is turned off when power is disconnected from the meter electronics. Power is disconnected by removing the meter from its installation or by a power outage at its installation.

Normal Turn-off To manually de-energize all of the meters electronics, remove power from the meter: 1

For a socket-base version, disconnect A-phase voltage if the meter is not auxiliary powered, or disconnect the auxiliary voltage supply. If you will be working inside the meter, also disconnect B- and C-phase voltages.

2

For DIN, A-base, Switchboard, and Rackmount versions, disconnect all three phases and the auxiliary voltage supply (if present).

The display will go blank when power is removed from the meter electronics. If the display is not blank, the meter is still powered. The display might be blank even if power is present. This can happen if the current display list is empty, the display is between screens, or if the display component of the meter is not active which is possible in some error conditions.

Power Outage A power outage occurs whenever line voltage drops below 50 volts or auxiliary power is removed from the meter for auxiliary powered meters. Upon reception of the early power fail signal from the power supply monitoring circuit, the metering firmware: •

completes any critical active task, primarily saving the last piece of data to battery backed RAM or NOVRAM.

•

posts billing registers and other critical data to NOVRAM, This includes any information that must survive a power down with a low battery.

•

sets the real time clock chip for crystal synchronization and low-power mode, and then goes to reset.

Once power is restored, the processor returns from reset. All meter variables and processor registers are initialized. Saved registers are restored to RAM and the actual time is read from the real time clock chip. The meter synchronizes the change from one second to the next to avoid loss of significant partial seconds due to the outage. The firmware checks for fatal and nonfatal errors. All time dependent functions are resynchronized with the current date and time. Any tasks that were missed due to the outage (self read, season change, DST change) are performed. Once all power up tasks are completed, the meter begins normal operation. During meter component startup, the display shows a segment test with all pixels in all character positions darkened. When normal operation begins at the end of power-up, the display shows the protocols enabled in the meter’s configuration of the optical port and communication ports 1 and 2. Next, the meter starts the normal mode display list.

3-4

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Cold Load Pickup Normally, when power is restored to the meter after an outage, a new demand interval is started and demand calculations begin immediately. The customer can, however, program the meter to recognize a demand delay or cold load pickup (CLPU) time, as well as a minimum power outage duration which must occur in order for the CLPU to be used. If a CLPU is programmed into the meter, the meter will delay demand calculations for the programmed amount of time. For example, if a CLPU time of five minutes and a minimum power outage length before CLPU of 30 seconds is programmed into the meter, a power outage of at least 30 seconds will cause the meter to wait five minutes after power restoration before resuming demand calculations.

Interval Make-up Before the end of power-up processing, meter components that store interval data, including load profile and harmonics, make up any intervals that may have been missed during the outage, to maintain the normal progression of interval end times. Intervals inserted for makeup are inserted with zero data and an outage status if the length of the outage was greater than the programmed component interval length, or else the intervals are not given a status. Interval makeup due to outage is done if the end of interval is controlled by the meter clock. It is also possible for the user to set the intervals to be tied to external end of interval without backup, in which case there is no make up.

Recovery Power-up If the battery is removed or its voltage is too low while the meter is not powered, the contents of battery backed RAM will be invalid on power-up. The meter detects this condition by checking the validity of stored memory at several locations during a normal power-up. If more than half of the locations are invalid, the meter does a recovery power-up instead of the normal power-up procedure. In recovery power-up, the meter configuration is recovered from Flash, the battery backed RAM is re-initialized, billing registers are restored from NOVRAM, and the meter restarts. The result is as if the meter had been re-initialized with its existing configuration, but billing registers are restored, and the recovery power-up nonfatal error event will be set. If one or more of the locations are invalid, but less than half, then the meter will complete a normal power up. The meter will show a fatal LOBAT error if the battery’s voltage is low, or it will show a fatal RAMFS error if the battery does not test low.

Operating Modes There are two operating modes in the QUANTUM Q1000: normal and test. The normal mode incorporates two separate display sequences: normal display and alternate display. The test mode has its own display sequence. Each display sequence (normal, alternate, and test) may be independently programmed to show desired billing quantities and informational data. For information on programming the meter, refer to the PC-PRO+ 98 Online User's Guide.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-5

Operating Instructions

Normal Mode Once power-up procedures are complete, the QUANTUM Q1000 operates in normal mode. In this mode, the meter measures instantaneous values, accumulates energy in the energy registers, performs normal I/O, and carries out all other programmed tasks. The display scrolls continuously through the normal display screens. The meter operates in the normal display mode until power is disconnected, the alternate display sequence is initiated, or test mode is enabled. A maximum of 34 displayable screens, each of which can include up to 4 lines of data and/or annunciators, can be viewed in the normal display sequence. A total of 136 register and non-register data parameters can be displayed in this mode. The status line is optional on each display screen. When enabled in normal display mode, the letters “NRM” appear on the status line. All programmed registers and non-register information scroll continuously according to the programmed display parameters until one of three actions takes place: •

the alternate display switch is depressed

•

the test switch is engaged

•

the scroll lock switch is depressed

Alternate Display The alternate mode, or more properly the alternate display, is functionally identical to the normal display mode. The meter itself still operates in normal mode, but the display sequence is programmed to show a different set of data screens from those in the normal display mode. Like in the normal display mode, a maximum of 34 displayable screens with up to 4 lines of data and annunciators can be viewed in the alternate display mode. The alternate display mode allows the user to display additional meter information without affecting normal meter operation. To switch the meter into the alternate display, press the plunger button to the right of the demand reset on the face of the meter cover. The status line is optional on each display screen. When enabled in the alternate display mode, the letters “ALT” appear on the status line to designate activation of the alternate display mode. Upon completion of one scroll sequence through the information to be displayed in the alternate display mode, the meter automatically returns to the normal display mode. Depression of the scroll lock button to the left of the demand reset will stop the scroll sequence until depressed again to continue. The meter will still return to the normal display mode at the completion of one complete scroll sequence.

Test Mode The meter can be placed into test mode either manually or through PC-PRO+ 98 software communications. Test mode is a separate operating mode from normal mode. In test mode, normal billing mode calculations are stopped.

3-6

•

To perform this function manually, remove the meter cover and slide the test mode switch on the right side of the faceplate to the ON position. The status line is optional on each display screen. When enabled in test mode, the letters “TST” are displayed on the status line.

•

To activate the test mode through communications, use PC-PRO+ 98 software to log on to the meter and select Communications, Change Display Modes.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

The meter will show the test mode displays when test mode is activated. The test mode display sequence can be programmed with up to 15 four-line screens of information. The meter returns to normal display mode when test mode is deactivated. If test mode is activated but the test mode display list is empty, the display screen will remain blank. This condition can be avoided by programming at least one screen consisting of at least a status line. When the test mode is activated, all normal mode billing registers and certain billing registers are preserved in battery-backed RAM until test mode is exited. Test mode demand registers run in Test mode, but they are discarded upon returning to Normal mode. Time-of-Use does not operate during test mode. The user may configure the following functions to operate differently during test mode in the meter’s PC-PRO+ 98 program: •

Energy collection can be disabled.

•

Demand intervals and subintervals can be set to different durations than in normal mode.

•

Global EOI can be enabled or disabled.

•

Switches (demand reset, scroll lock, alternate display mode) can be disabled.

•

LEDs are configurable to different registers and pulse weights than in normal mode.

•

Load profiles 1 and 2 (24 channels each) can be independently disabled.

•

Voltage quality can be disabled.

•

Harmonics can be disabled.

•

Thresholds can be independently disabled.

•

Analog, digital state, and pulse inputs and outputs can each be independently disabled.

The meter remains in test mode until the switch is moved back to the OFF position or until a programmed amount of time has passed in test mode. If this time is exceeded, the meter automatically returns to normal mode, even though the test mode switch is still ON. The message “FORCING OUT OF TEST MODE” is displayed on the screen when this change occurs. This action prevents someone from accidentally leaving a meter in test mode and thus losing billing data for an extended time. To reenter test mode: 1

Turn the test switch OFF.

2

Then, turn the test switch back ON.

The meter keeps a running total of the number of times test mode is entered and the time of the last test mode entry.

Figure 3.4 Test Switch

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-7

Operating Instructions

Remote Test Mode Test mode can also be entered remotely by sending a command from the PC-PRO+ 98 programming software. The remote test mode command includes the number of minutes the meter will be in test mode, which overrides the programmed setting. The remote test mode has precedence over the test mode switch. This means that the test mode command sent over communication takes action regardless of the state of the test mode switch. Having a transition from ON to OFF of the test mode switch does not put the meter out of test mode if a remotely activated test mode is currently in progress. Also, when the remote test mode time-out expires with the test mode switch ON, the meter exits test mode.

To put the meter back in test mode again: 1

Turn the switch to OFF.

2

Then turn the switch to ON again.

Display The Q1000 display module coordinates the activity of displaying information on the LCD screen. The display screen is refreshed every second and serves as the visual interface to the meter registers and statuses.

Display Lists The Q1000 meter has three display lists: normal, alternate, and test. The meter uses the normal display list unless it is switched to another display mode. The meter can be switched to either of the other display modes at any time. A separate display list is used for each of the three display modes. If the meter is in test mode, the display sequence is defined by the test display mode. If the meter is in normal mode, the display sequence is defined by the normal display mode or alternate display mode. Only one display mode is active at a time. Each display mode has its own list of programmed display screens. The display module shows one screen at a time, scrolling to the next one in the predefined sequence according to the programmed display ON and display OFF parameters.

Screen Configuration Each line of the display screen contains one programmable item, for a total of four lines per screen. Each line can be 16 characters long. The four lines on a particular screen do not have to correlate in any way to each other; however, for ease of use, it is recommended that the user put related quantities on the same screen. There are many types of displayable items, including:

3-8

•

Energy registers

•

Demand registers

•

Date/Time of Min./Max. Demand

•

Instantaneous registers

•

Peak and Minimum Values

•

Coincident Values

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

•

Informational items

•

Diagnostics

•

Harmonic registers

•

Voltage Quality registers

•

Last Self Read

Numerical values can be displayed in various formats depending on configuration. For example, units, kilo units, or mega units. Also, fixed decimal point, floating decimal point, and leading zeros can all be configured on a per-display line basis. The user can program the behavior that the meter should exhibit for every specific error condition. The possible actions in order of increasing severity are ignore the error (don't display its error code), display its error code on the error screen (an error screen is automatically displayed at the end of each display sequence), or lock the screen, showing only the error code (don't display anything else).

Display Formats The Q1000 meter features a versatile four-line by 16 character LCD display. Table 3.1 describes the choices available for formatting each of the four lines of the display. Note that each line of a particular display may have its own format. Table 3.1 Display Formats Format

Description

Annunciator Only

Display only text in this line. The text is programmed by the user and can also be a blank line.

Annunciator, Data

Display text, programmed by the user, in the first part of the line, then the register’s value in the last part.

Data Only (1-8 digits)

Display 1 to 8 digits of data, programmed by the user, centered on the line.

Data Only (16 digits)

Display 1 to 16 digits of data, programmed by the user,.

ID Code, Data

Display a 3 digit ID code programmed by the user, then the register value.

ID Code, Data, Annunciator

Display a 3 digit ID code programmed by the user, then the register’s value, and then text programmed by the user.

ID Code, Annunciator, Data

Display a 3 digit ID code programmed by the user, then text programmed by the user, and then the register’s value.

ID Code, Annunciator

Display a 3 digit ID code programmed by the user and then text programmed by the user.

Status Line

Display symbols representing the current meter status. This selection can be made for any display line. Selecting the “Status Line” for a line converts that line to a Status Line.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-9

Operating Instructions

Figure 3.5 shows sample displays.

Analog I/O Display

Current Display Status Line with Scroll Lock ON in Normal Mode

Digital State I/O Display

Voltage & Status Line Display

Status Line with Scroll Lock ON in Normal Mode

Date, Time, Firmware Revision, Status Line Display

Pulse I/O Display

Status Line in Normal Mode

Power Factor Display

Annunciator, Whr, VARhr, Status Line Display

KYZ and Analog Output Status Display

Current Display #2

Figure 3.5 Example Displays

3-10

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Figure 3.6 shows the status line. To display a status line, it must be explicitly selected in the meter programming software for each display line on which it is to appear.

Status Line

->XXX *SDR ABC-> Figure 3.6 Status Line

Following are explanations of the symbols on the status line, going from left to right. Table 3.2 Status Line Symbols Symbol -> XXX

Description Watt load indicator (-- for zero, -> for delivered, <- for received) Current display mode (NRM=NoRMal, ALT=ALTernate, TST=TeST)

*

Port 2 is on-line. This meter’s Port 2 (COM2) is on-line.

+

Port 2 is on-line. Used by a master meter with an internal modem. The “+” means that this meter is monitoring communications on the Port 2 (COM2) RS-485 bus passing through its modem board.

S

Scroll lock indicator

D

Current Time-of-Use day type (0 to number of day types minus 1)

R

Current active rate indicator (A-G according to the active rate) a

ABC ->

Indicators for phase voltages being present Var load indicator (-- for zero, -> for delivered, <- for received)

a

The Q1000 meter’s TOU allows overlapping rates. If more than one rate is on, then the first alpha character will be displayed here. For example, if both Rate B and Rate F are active, the display status line will show a ‘B’ here.

Messages There are several messages that are displayed on the bottom line of the meter to indicate when an end of interval, a demand reset, or a register freeze event occurs. Other informational messages may also be displayed. These events are enabled or disabled through the PC-PRO+ 98 software when the user configures the Display Configuration component by setting the Display Options tab parameters. When one of these events occurs, the corresponding message flashes on the bottom line of the display for several seconds, regardless of what mode the meter is currently displaying.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-11

Operating Instructions

Display Options The Display Options tab of the Display Configuration component of the PC-PRO+ 98 software also provides the capability to configure other options, such as the Date Format, the Display Scroll On Time, the Display Scroll Off Time, and the Annunciators.

Scroll Lock Switch The scroll lock switch is a plunger-style button and can always be accessed from outside the meter. Pushing this switch does not affect the billing quantities in any way. It is provided to the user for controlling the meter’s display. When the switch is pressed, the display locks on the current screen. If there is a status line on this display, the letter “S” appears in the middle, indicating that the scroll lock is active. Whatever values are displayed on this locked screen will continue to be updated every second. Pushing the scroll lock button again terminates the scroll lock, allowing the display sequence to continue to scroll through the screens. When the meter display is scroll locked, pressing the Alternate Display button once will advance the active display mode one screen. The display will remain scroll locked, but will now show this second screen. Each additional press of the Alternate Display mode button will advance the display to the next screen, and the display will remain scroll locked on that screen. If the scroll lock button has been programmed to be disabled (using the PC-PRO+ 98 software), the meter will display a message “SCOLL MODE SWITCH DISABLED” whenever the scroll lock button is pressed.

Demand Reset Switch The demand reset switch is used to initiate a demand reset. This switch can be physically locked with a meter seal to prevent manual demand resets. The switch can also be disabled by the PC-PRO+ 98 software.

The demand reset switch must be turned clockwise approximately ¼ turn before it can be pushed down.

There are three methods of triggering a demand reset. When the demand reset switch is pressed, a demand reset is immediately performed. A demand reset can also be done using the PC-PRO+ 98 programming software communicating directly with the meter. Finally, a digital state input line can also be programmed to trigger a demand reset. The following actions occur with a demand reset: •

“Demand Reset!” is displayed on the screen.

•

The demand registers are processed and reset.

•

The date and time of last demand reset is updated.

•

The number of demand resets is incremented.

•

Any other programmed functions, such as a self read, occur.

The meter can be programmed with a demand reset lockout time. This is the minimum time required to pass between demand resets. If a demand reset is attempted before this amount of time elapses since the last demand reset, a message “DmdReset Lockout” is displayed and no demand resets occur.

3-12

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Alternate Display Switch The alternate display mode switch is a plunger-style button and can always be accessed from outside the meter. Pushing this switch does not affect the billing quantities in any way. It is provided for accessing the alternate display list. When the switch is pressed, the Q1000 switches the display to the alternate display. While scrolling through data of the alternate display, the letters “ALT” appear on the status line (if programmed). Upon completion of one scroll sequence through the information to be displayed in the alternate display list, the meter returns to the normal display mode. If the alternate display mode button has been programmed to be disabled, the meter will display a message “ALT MODE SWITCH DISABLED” whenever the button is pressed.

Test Mode Switch The test mode switch is located on the lower right side of the meter nameplate inside the meter cover and is not accessible from outside the meter. Sliding the test switch to the ON position activates test mode. If the test mode button has been programmed to be disabled, the meter will display a message “TEST MODE SWITCH DISABLED” whenever the button is pressed.

Infrared LEDs Two infrared LEDs (light emitting diodes) are located near the top of the meter nameplate. The left one is labeled “VARh” and the right is “WATTh”. These LEDs are normally configured for varhours and watthours respectively, but can be programmed to pulse based on any energy value. The Kh value, or energy per pulse, is also programmable for each LED. When the meter enters test mode, a different LED configuration is allowed. This test LED configuration allows the user to redefine both the energy registers programmed by the LEDs and their respective pulse weights. The LEDs may be ordered as either infrared or visible light types. The visible light LED is red.

DIP Switches A six- position DIP switch is located on the bottom left hand side of the Display Module. This switch is easily accessed with the meter cover removed, as shown in Figure 3.7. There is no need to remove the meter side panel housing to access these switches; they are accessible through the housing. The OFF position of each switch is away from the front of the meter and away from the DIP switch number. The ON position is toward the front of the meter and toward the DIP switch number.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-13

Operating Instructions

OFF ON

Figure 3.7 Q1000 DIP Switches

The function of each DIP switch is given in the table below. Q1000s are shipped from the factory with all DIP switches in the OFF position. Table 3.3 DIP Switch Configuration DIP Switch

Normal Position

Description

1

OFF

Reserved for future use.

2

OFF

Reserved for future use.

3

OFF

Reset programming to factory default. If the meter is turned on with this switch in the ON position, the meter program resets to the factory default state.a Notes: •

•

a

3-14

Factory default erases all meter data. Prior to using this switch, save all pertinent data from the meter. See Chapter 6 for a list of factory default settings. If this switch is left ON, every time the meter powers off and on it will return to the Factory Default state and all meter data and programming will be lost.

4

OFF

Program protect mode. If ON, meter programming is disabled. If OFF, the meter can be programmed normally.

5

OFF

Test mode switch. This duplicates the function of the front-mounted test switch and is used by the factory.

6

OFF

Alternate display switch. This duplicates the function of the frontmounted alternate display switch and is used by the factory.

The I/O network bindings are not affected by this switch; they are maintained.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Security Codes Along with the Program Protect Mode switch (DIP switch 4), the meter security codes provide protection for meter register and mass memory data. Four levels of security are inherent in the QUANTUM Q1000 meter. The table below describes the level of access to the meter provided by each device security code. Once security codes are programmed and stored in the meter, they are required to logon to the meter. The user may choose to not use security codes in the meter’s program. Table 3.4 Q1000 Security Code Levels Level

Access Level

Description

Primary

Read/Write access

All read/write functions are available except the ability to download new firmware to the meter. New security codes can be programmed into the meter using this security code.

Secondary

Read-only access plus selected functions

Read-only access is provided as well as the ability to reset Demand Registers, reconfigure communications, and change the meter’s Display Mode to Alternate.

Tertiary

Read-only access

Access to the meter is limited to reading information from the meter. No operation that writes information to the meter is available.

Firmware Download

Read/Write access and firmware download

Access to the meter is unrestricted. All read/write functions are available including the ability to download new firmware to the meter.

Implementing Security Codes When a customer file is created, security codes are entered by the software operator. Each security code may be from 1 to 20 characters long. For example, the primary code is selected to be ABC and the secondary code is to be 123. When the software first attempts communication with a meter that has just been delivered from the factory, the meter has only null security codes. The software downloads and unlocks the meter with these null security codes. When the meter is initialized, the software downloads security codes ABC and 123 to the meter. When unlocking a meter with security codes, the software downloads the primary code that is in the PC-PRO+ 98 Q1000 Device Security Codes dialog— in this case ABC. If this code matches the meter primary code, the operator can read and/or program the meter. If it does not match the primary, but matches the secondary, 123, the operator can only read data from the meter. For example: Three PCs are set up to interrogate Q1000 meters. One PC is designated as the Master PC. The Master PC programs Q1000 meters for installation and interrogates meters in the field. In this example, the Master PC programs a meter with a primary security code of Q1K and a secondary security code of 222. The Master PC can then read data from and reprogram the meter. The remaining two PCs are configured so that the same customers are in each database, but each PC-PRO+ 98 software is configured with a security code that matches the meter’s secondary security code only. In this case, the two additional PCs have been given security code 222. When the two PCs interrogate the meter, the security code they download provides them with secondary security code privileges only.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-15

Operating Instructions

Figure 3.8 Device Security Codes Dialog

To set up a meter so that the Master PC can perform all meter functions, but any other PC has limited access, program the meter through the Master PC with a primary security code, but leave the secondary security code blank. Any PC other than the Master PC will connect to the meter using a blank security code and thereby gain secondary access only.

Clearing Security Codes—Customer Default Mode To clear the existing security codes in the meter; return the meter to the Customer Default Mode. See "Three Button Reset—Customer Default Mode" on page 3-18. If security codes are cleared from the meter in this manner, the PC will have no record of a security code change. The PC will go through the following attempts to gain access to the meter: (see Figure 3.8) •

•

3-16

If the Options | Default Values | Device Security Codes | Override Security Code menu option IS NOT checked, PC-PRO+ 98 will: a

Use the security code in the device Primary field.

b

Use the security code in the device Previous Security Code field.

c

Use all nulls.

If the Options | Default Values | Device Security Codes | Override Security Code menu option IS checked, PC-PRO+ 98 will: a

Use the security code entered in the Security Code field on the logon screen.

b

Use the security code in the device Previous Security Code field.

c

Use all nulls.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Contrast Adjustment If the LCD display is too light or too dark, it can be adjusted with the display contrast adjustment screw. The screw is a 10-turn screw; 2 turns are significant in changing the meter’s contrast. To access the screw: 1

Remove the meter cover. The adjustment screw is located inside a small hole near the left front top of the meter housing. The screw can be adjusted with a small flat-head screwdriver (preferably plastic).

2

Turn the screw clockwise to increase intensity and counter-clockwise to decrease intensity. Figure 3.9 shows the contrast adjustment screw location for the DIN meter; Figure 3.10 shows the contrast adjustment screw location for the Socket meter.

Figure 3.9 Contrast Adjustment, DIN Meter

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-17

Operating Instructions

Figure 3.10 Contrast Adjustment, Socket Meter

Also, see Figure 9.1 on Page 9-8 for a picture of the Display Board and display contrast adjustment potentiometer.

Three Button Reset—Customer Default Mode The purpose of the three button reset is to allow the customer to reset the meter configuration to the customer default mode.

A three button reset erases all meter data. Prior to using this reset, be sure to save all pertinent data from the meter.

To do a three button reset, perform the following steps: 1

Power down the meter.

2

Take the external cover off the meter and move the TEST switch to ON.

3

Replace the cover.

4

Press and hold the ALT and Demand RESET buttons.

5

Power up the meter.

6

Wait several seconds then release ALT and Demand RESET buttons.

7

Power down the meter.

8

Remove the cover.

9

Move the TEST switch to OFF.

10 Replace the cover. 11 Power up the meter. The display will light up and all three ports (optical, COM1, COM2) will come up set to DLMS. A three button reset will erase the customer configuration in the meter and replace it with the customer default program. See Chapter 6, Communications for a detailed list of customer default settings.

3-18

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Registers There are four register types in the Q1000: energy registers, demand registers, instantaneous registers, and load profile registers. All of these types of registers measure how much of a quantity has been used by counting the quantity as it is used.

Figure 3.11 Q1000 Quantities

Q1: Watts Delivered, VARS Delivered Q2: Watts Received, VARS Delivered Q3: Watts Received, VARS Received Q4: Watts Delivered, VARS Received

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Watts net =

Watts delivered - Watts received

Watts total =

Watts delivered + Watts received

VA total =

(VA Q1) + (VA Q2) + (VA Q3) + (VA Q4)

VAR net =

VARs delivered - VARs received

VAR total =

VARs delivered + VARs received

3-19

Operating Instructions

QUANTITY

DIRECTION

Watts Fundamental Watts SLC Watts Fundamental SLC Watts

Delivered Received Net

Vars Fundamental Vars SLC Vars Fundamental SLC Vars

Delivered Received Net Quadrants

Vectorial VA RMS VA SLC vectorial VA

Delivered Received Quadrants Distortion Unbalance Total

PHASES

Phase A Phase B Phase C Aggregate

Phase A Phase B Phase C Aggregate

Phase A Phase B Phase C Aggregate

Volts

Amps

Neutral Amps

Q SLC Q

Delivered Received Net

Phase A Phase B Phase C Aggregate

Phase A Phase B Phase C Aggregate

Power Factor

Hertz

Average Power Factor

Quadrants 1-4

Phase A Phase B Phase C Aggregate

% THD Volts % THD Amps

Phase A Phase B Phase C

Totalized Quantities

THD - ANSI THD - IEC

Figure 3.12 Quantity Flow Chart

3-20

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Energy Registers Energy registers always accumulate. In normal operation, they are never reset to zero. The Q1000 contains 30 energy registers—a maximum of 24 can be used for TOU energy measurement. These registers, like all others, are completely programmable by the user to monitor any energy quantity (or TOU energy quantity) and are independent from the other registers. The Q1000 tracks several hundred quantities, and it would be tedious to list them all. Instead, Table 3.5 describes the quantities available for each type of register. For example, one of the various available watthour quantities can be accumulated to an energy register; a block, thermal, or peak demand register; a load profile channel; and/or an analog output, and pulse output. Table 3.5 Q1000 Energy Quantities Energy Registers

Demand Registers

Load Profile Channels

Analog Outputs

Pulse Outputs

Watthours

yes

BTP

yes

yes

yes

Varhours

yes

BTP

yes

yes

yes

VA-hours

yes

BTP

yes

yes

yes

Volt-hours

yes

BTP

yes

yes

yes

Amp-hours

yes

BTP

yes

yes

yes

Q-hours

yes

BTP

yes

yes

yes

BP

yes

yes

yes

Measured Quantity Type

Power Factor (hours) Hertz (hours)

yes

yes

Average Power Factor Totalized Values (hours)

yes

B

Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) hours External Inputs (hours)

yes

yes

yes yes

B

yes

yes yes

yes

yes

Demand Register Calculation Types: B: Block (and rolling) demand T: Thermal demand P: Peak instantaneous demand In a given row, any value from each column can be combined to form a valid register. For example, fundamental SLC watthours delivered is one register. Table 3.6 shows which register types can be used to store each energy type.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-21

Operating Instructions

Table 3.6 Energy Registers (Watthours, Varhours, VAhours, Qhours) Energy Values

Calculation Types

Phases

Directions

watthours varhours

normal (includes all harmonic content up to 32nd harmonic)

aggregate phase A phase B phase C SLC (system loss compensation - aggregate)

net delivered received quadrants (vars only)

aggregate phase A phase B phase C SLC (vectorial only) distortion (arithmetic only) unbalance (arithmetic only)

delivered received quadrants total

fundamental only

VAhours

vectorial arithmetic (RMS)

Qhours

normal SLC

net delivered received

Other registers can be used to make energy-like calculations. These other registers, traditionally thought of as instantaneous values, just accumulate in an energy register in the same manner as instantaneous watts are counted to make watthours. Table 3.7 shows these values and phases. Table 3.7 Energy Registers (volthours, amphours) Energy Values volthours amphours

Phases average phase A phase B phase C neutral (amphours only)

Demand Registers Demand is the average value of a measured quantity over a specified time. There are 60 demand registers available in the Q1000; 25 block registers, 10 thermal registers, and 25 peak registers—a maximum of 24 can be used for TOU demand measurement. There are three types of demand in the Q1000 meter: Block Demand—Demand calculations are made at the end of each completed interval. The user may select up to 25 block demand registers to measure. Block intervals are enabled when the number of subintervals in the demand interval length is equal to one. The user may set the interval length and number of subintervals in both normal and test modes in the PC-PRO+ 98 program.

3-22

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Rolling Demand— Rolling intervals are enabled when the number of subintervals in the demand interval length is greater than one. A selected number of subintervals make up the demand interval. At the end of every subinterval, new demand calculations occur based on the last full demand interval. For example, a fifteen minute demand interval can consist of three five minute subintervals. Every five minutes, demand calculations are made based on the previous fifteen minutes worth of energy accumulation. The user may set the interval length and number of subintervals in both normal and test modes in the PC-PRO+ 98 program. Instantaneous Demand—Instantaneous demand is the calculation of a demand value every second. The user may select up to 25 Instantaneous Demand registers to measure. Thermal Demand—Thermal demand simulates the operation of a thermal demand meter. The user may select up to 10 Thermal Demand registers to measure. The demand registers are processed according to the demand type defined in the meter program. Most demand values are reset at a demand reset, but some provide other functionality. The type of demand values available are described in the following sections.

Present Demand Present demand is the current value of the demand register. For block demand calculations, the demand register is reset to zero at the beginning of every demand interval. For rolling demand calculations, the oldest subinterval’s energy is discarded from the demand calculation at the end of each new subinterval. Present demand is not affected by a demand reset.

Previous Demand Previous demand is the demand from the most recently completed demand interval. When a demand interval ends, the present demand is transferred to the previous demand. When using rolling demand, this quantity is updated after each subinterval. For thermal demand types, the previous demand value is equal to the present demand.

Projected Demand Projected demand is an estimate of the demand the meter will have accumulated by the end of the current interval. This value is calculated by dividing the accumulated energy by the amount of time accumulated in the interval. Projected demand is updated every second based on the equation variables. Projected demand is available for block and rolling demand only.

Cumulative Demand Cumulative demand is the summation of previous peak demands between demand resets. When a demand reset occurs, the peak demand values are added to the existing corresponding cumulative demand values, and the sums are saved as the new cumulative demands. This value will not increase until the next demand reset. Cumulative demand is available for block, rolling, instantaneous and thermal demand types.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-23

Operating Instructions

Continuous Cumulative Demand Continuous cumulative demand is the sum of the previous peak demands (cumulative demand) and the present peak demand (present demand). A demand reset will clear the maximum demand value but will not affect the continuous cumulative demand. Continuous cumulative demand is available for block, rolling, instantaneous and thermal demand types.

Minimum Demand Minimum demand is the smallest demand value that has occurred during any complete demand interval since the last demand reset. At the end of a complete demand interval, the present demand is compared with the current minimum demand. If the present demand is less, it is transferred to the minimum demand. The minimum demand is reset to zero on a demand reset. The date and time of the minimum demand is also recorded. Minimum demand is available for block, rolling, instantaneous and thermal demand types.

Maximum Demand Maximum demand is the largest demand value that has occurred during any demand interval since the last demand reset. At the end of a demand interval, the present demand is compared with the current maximum demand. If the present demand is greater, it is transferred to the maximum demand. The maximum demand is reset to zero on a demand reset. The date and time of the maximum demand is also recorded. Maximum demand is available for block, rolling, instantaneous and thermal demand types.

Load Profile Registers Load profile registers accumulate energy usage for an interval and then save it in memory. Each interval in a load profile accumulates over the same period of time. Later, all the intervals can be uploaded from the meter to get a picture over time of the energy usage measured by the meter. There are 48 load profile registers, or channels, available in the two separate standard load profiles (24 channels/ profile). Each load profile is independently programmed for quantities to record, interval length, outage length, and pulse weights. Eight optional Extended Load Profiles, each with 24 channels, are also available. Extended Load Profile has additional capabilities. For more information, see Chapter 4, Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary.

Instantaneous Registers Instantaneous registers contain quantities that are continuously calculated by the meter. Unlike the past where the meter program specifies which registers to track, the Q1000 calculates ALL instantaneous registers every second. All instantaneous registers are available to be displayed or read through a communications port at any time.

3-24

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Since there are hundreds of registers that the Q1000 tracks, the complete list will not be duplicated here. For Watt, VAR, VA, and Q registers, see the preceding section on Energy Registers and Table 3.6. Volt and Amp registers are listed in Table 3.7. All energy values given in these two tables are also available as instantaneous registers.

Non-Register Values The Q1000 also stores a significant amount of data which is informational in nature and can be accessed by the user on the meter display and through remote retrieval. These non-register values are organized under the Display Configuration component of the Q1000. There are 7 folders under Non-register Values. These non-register values are listed in the following sections.

Communication Port Information •

Optical Port Baud Rate

•

Optical Port Group Address

•

Optical Port Meter Address

•

Optical Port Online

•

Optical Port Protocol

•

Optical Port Setup Line #1

•

Optical Port Setup Line #2

•

Optical Port Setup Line #3

•

Serial Port 1 Baud Rate

•

Serial Port 1 Group Address

•

Serial Port 1 Interrogate Count

•

Serial Port 1 Last Interrogate Date

•

Serial Port 1 Last Interrogate Time

•

Serial Port 1 Meter Address

•

Serial Port 1 Online

•

Serial Port 1 Protocol

•

Serial Port 1 Setup Line #1

•

Serial Port 1 Setup Line #2

•

Serial Port 1 Setup Line #3

•

Serial Port 2 Baud Rate

•

Serial Port 2 Group Address

•

Serial Port 2 Interrogate Count

•

Serial Port 2 Last Interrogate Date

•

Serial Port 2 Last Interrogate Time

•

Serial Port 2 Meter Address

•

Serial Port 2 Online

•

Serial Port 2 Protocol

•

Serial Port 2 Setup Line #1

•

Serial Port 2 Setup Line #2

•

Serial Port 2 Setup Line #3

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-25

Operating Instructions

I/O Information •

I/O Analog Input Status

•

I/O Analog Output Status

•

I/O Pulse Input Status

•

I/O Pulse Output Status

•

I/O State Input Status

•

I/O State Input Status 2

•

I/O State Output Status

•

I/O State Output Status 2

•

KYZ1 Input Pulseweight

•

KYZ1 Pulseweight

•

KYZ2 Input Pulseweight

•

KYZ2 Pulseweight

•

KYZ3 Input Pulseweight

•

KYZ3 Pulseweight

•

KYZ4 Input Pulseweight

•

KYZ4 Pulseweight

•

KYZ5 Input Pulseweight

•

KYZ5 Pulseweight

•

KYZ6 Input Pulseweight

•

KYZ6 Pulseweight

•

KYZ7 Input Pulseweight

•

KYZ7 Pulseweight

•

KYZ8 Input Pulseweight

•

KYZ8 Pulseweight

Meter Status Information •

Battery Voltage

•

Calibration Date

•

Calibration Time

•

Firmware Revision

•

Minutes on Battery

•

Seconds on Battery

•

Segment Test

Metering Point Information

3-26

•

Alarm Status #1

•

Alarm Status #2

•

Current Date

•

Current Frequency

•

Current Time

•

Date/Time Alarm Status

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

•

Demand Reset Count

•

DS Input Status

•

DS Output Status

•

Interrogation Count

•

Last Interrogate Date

•

Last Interrogate Time

•

Last Outage Date

•

Last Outage Time

•

Last Program Date

•

Last Program Time

•

Last Reset Date

•

Last Reset Time

•

Last Self Read Date

•

Last Self Read Reason

•

Last Self Read Time

•

Last Test Date

•

Last Test Time

•

Line Synchronized

•

Meter Reset Reason

•

Next Self Read Action

•

Next Self Read Date

•

Next Self Read Time

•

Number of Complete Initializations

•

Outage Count

•

Program Count

•

Test Count

•

Test Interval Length

•

Time Left in CLPU

•

Time Rem in Demand Subint

Program Information •

CLPU Time

•

CT Ratio

•

Custom Ratio

•

Demand Reset Lock Out Time

•

Display On Time

•

Interval Length

•

Load Research ID

•

Load Research ID2

•

Meter ID

•

Meter ID2

•

Normal Kh

•

Normal Kh #2

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-27

Operating Instructions

•

Number of Subintervals

•

Number of Test Subintervals

•

Program ID

•

Register fullscale

•

Serial Number

•

Serial Number 2

•

Test Kh

•

Test Kh #2

•

Thermal Interval Length

•

Thermal Test Interval Length

•

Transformer Ratio

•

VT Ratio

Time-of-Use Information •

Active Rates (A-G)

•

Current Day of Week

•

Daily Pattern ID

•

Holiday ID

•

Latent Start Date

•

Latent Start Time

•

Latent TOU ID

•

Latent TOU Name

•

Rate A Active

•

Rate B Active

•

Rate C Active

•

Rate D Active

•

Rate E Active

•

Rate F Active

•

Rate G Active

•

TOU Expiration Date

•

TOU Rate

•

TOU Schedule ID

•

TOU Schedule Name

User Data Information

3-28

•

User Data 01

•

User Data 02

•

User Data 03

•

User Data 04

•

User Data 05

•

User Data 06

•

User Data 07

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

•

User Data 08

•

User Data 09

•

User Data 10

•

User Data 11

•

User Data 12

•

User Data 13

•

User Data 14

•

User Data 15

•

User Data 16

•

User Data 17

•

User Data 18

•

User Data 19

•

User Data 20

•

User Data 21

•

User Data 22

•

User Data 23

•

User Data 24

Programmable Functions This section is a comprehensive list of all the programmable functions of the Q1000 and the parameters that define the operation of these functions. For more information on the individual parameters listed in each section, see PC-PRO+ 98 help or PC-PRO+ 98 Online Manual.

The information in this section has been revised to reflect changes in version 2.3 of the PC-PRO+ 98 programming software.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-29

Operating Instructions

Figure 3.13 PC-PRO+ 98 Device Programmer

Device Operation Table 3.8 describes parameters that define the general operating state of the Q1000. These parameters are configured in the PC-PRO+ 98 software program. Table 3.8 Parameters, Device Operation Parameter

3-30

Description

Use DST

Enables daylight savings time.

Enable Time-ofUse

Enables Time-of-Use. Note: This field is enabled in version 2.3 and above.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Table 3.8 Parameters, Device Operation Parameter

Description

Register Fullscale

Sets maximum kW delivered (sum of phases A, B, and C). If exceeded, a diagnostic is triggered. Register Fullscale is the kilowatt demand value that defines the maximum rated demand for a particular installation. Valid entries are 0.000001 to 999,999 adjusted in increments of 0.001 kW. If this value is exceeded, a diagnostic is triggered. Use the following formula to calculate Register Fullscale: (V x I x Elements x CTR x VTR) / 1000 where: V = Maximum voltage I = Maximum current Elements = Number of elements CTR = Current Transformer Ratio VTR = Voltage Transformer Ratio

Example: [(200 Volts) (10 Amps) (3) (60) (120)] / 1000 = 43,200 KW This register fullscale value is a special threshold value that monitors Block Interval Demand kW Delivered only. If the value in this field is exceeded, the meter records an FS (full scale) diagnostic error which can be displayed. It retains this error message until non-fatal errors are cleared. If kWd, block demand is not selected in quantity selections, the value in this field is ignored. The value monitored is the primary value (see the equation above). Register Rollover

Defines the point (in unit-hours) at which an energy register reaches its maximum value and rolls over to 0, select from powers of 10.

# of Peaks or Minimums to Store

Defines the number of demand peaks and minimums to store in memory for demand quantities configured for multiple peaks or minimums. Zero to 5 peaks or minimums are allowed.

VA Calculation for PF

Selects the method of VA calculation, either arithmetic or vectorial for default power factor quantities and for average power factor calculation.

Global EOI Source

Selects a source for the global EOI signal, either internal, external, or external with backup. Note: The External and External With Backup options are currently disabled.

Interval Length

Sets the interval length for the global End Of Interval source. Two seconds up to 60 minutes is allowed.

Grace Period for EOI

Available if Global EOI Source is set to external with backup. This is the extra time, beyond the nominal interval time, that the meter waits for an external EOI signal before initiating one itself. If the Grace Period expires without an external EOI, the interval information that was saved at the expected EOI time is used. Note: This field is currently disabled.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-31

Operating Instructions

Time-of-Use Table 3.9 describes parameters that define the Q1000 Time of Use options. These parameters are configured in the PC-PRO+ 98 software program. Table 3.9 Parameters, Time-of-Use Parameter

Description

TOU Selection Tab Current TOU Schedule Name

The name of the Current TOU Schedule that is being used for the program. The Schedule is created in the TOU calendar application.

Current Schedule Size

Displays the size of the Current TOU Schedule in bytes. You cannot edit this field.

Percent of Current Schedule Size

The percentage of the Current TOU Schedule size that you want to allocate for Latent TOU Schedule Reconfigurations in the future. Latent schedules are added later after initial TOU meter initialization.

Latent Schedule Size

Displays the size of the Latent TOU Schedule allocation in bytes.

Event Overrides Tab Add

Adds override events. For each event, you can select an override pattern if you want the event to trigger a daily pattern and/or override rate that you want to go into effect when the event occurs. You can make the override rate exclusive. Making a rate exclusive turns all other rates off when this event occurs.

Delete

Deletes the selected override event.

Move Up / Down

Moves the selected override event up or down in the list of events. Events at top take priority over lower events.

Quantity Selections Energy The meter may be configured with up to 30 energy registers, each configured with the parameters shown in Table 3.10. Table 3.10 Quantity Selections Parameter Quantity

Sets the quantity that should be accumulated in the energy register.

Multiplier

Selects the multiplier to use for this quantity. The multiplier can be None (1.0), CT, VT, CT X VT, or a custom multipliera.

Use TOU

Enables accumulation in Time-of-Use rates, Up to 24 energy registers can use TOU.

a

3-32

Description

The values for the CT, VT, and Custom multipliers are set in the Device Multipliers component.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Demand The meter may be configured with up to 60 demand registers, including up to 25 block interval demand registers, 25 instantaneous demand registers, and 10 thermal demand registers. Each demand register is configured as shown in Table . Parameters, Demand Configuration Parameter

Description

Quantity

Sets the quantity that should be summarized in the demand summary.

Multiplier

Selects the multiplier to use for this quantity. The multiplier can be None (1.0), CT, VT, CT X VT, or a custom multipliera.

Demand Type

Selects block interval, peak, instantaneous, or thermal for the type of demand calculation.

Enable TOU

Enables a separate demand summary for each Time-of-Use rate, Up to 24 demand registers can use TOU.

a

The values for the CT, VT, and Custom multipliers are set in the Device Multipliers component.

Register Options Use the appropriate tabs on this dialog to configure registers to record demand data. You can configure the register options for Block/Rolling Demands, Thermal Demands, Multiple Peaks, and Instantaneous Demands. For Thermal demand and Instantaneous Peak Demand, there is no difference between present, previous, and projected demand. For Block Demand, there are three different demand values available.

Parameters, Register Options Configuration Dialog Tab Block/Rolling Demands

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Description Demand based on user-defined interval lengths. The items in the Quantity list are based on your selection of Block/Rolling Demand quantities in the Quantity Wizard. The demand is simply the total energy accumulated during the interval divided by the length of the interval. This includes rolling demand intervals. You can select up to three coincident quantities you want to combine with each block/rolling demand quantity you select. You can also edit the coincident quantities. For block interval demand, demand calculations are made at the end of each completed interval. For rolling interval demand, a selected number of subintervals make up the demand interval. At the end of every subinterval, new demand calculations occur based on the last full demand interval. For example, a fifteen minute demand interval can consist of three five minute subintervals. Every five minutes, demand calculations are made based on the previous fifteen minutes worth of energy accumulation.

3-33

Operating Instructions

Parameters, Register Options Configuration Dialog Tab

Description

Thermal Demands

The response time of the demand value that simulates legacy demand recorders. The items in the Quantity list are based on your selection of Thermal Demand quantities in the Quantity Wizard . Thermal demand calculation is approximated exponentially. You can select up to three coincident quantities you want to combine with each thermal demand quantity you select. You can edit the coincident quantities. Thermal demand intervals simulate the operation of a thermal demand meter in accumulating energy.

Multiple Peaks

Use this tab to select up to 6 quantities (in any combination of Minimum or Peaks) for which you want to assign registers to record multiple peaks, minimum values, or both. Note: The hardware for analog inputs is not currently available.

Instantaneous Demands

Demand based on the most recent instantaneous data. The items in the Quantity list are based on your selection of Instantaneous Peak Demand quantities in the Quantity Wizard. The metering process samples voltage and current waveforms for 50 or 60 cycles, depending on your system. At the end of the sampling cycle, the W, VAR, and accumulators are processed and converted into energy seconds. If selected in the Normal or Alternate mode sequences, any of these parameters are converted into kW, kVAR, and kVA demand values. These readings are the instantaneous demand values determined in the preceding second. You can select up to three coincident quantities you want to combine with each instantaneous peak demand quantity you select. You can edit the coincident quantities.

Communications Setup You configure the meter’s ports using the Communications Setup component. Communications Setup involves completing several dialogs to define how the meter’s ports will be used. The number of dialogs is determined by the selections you make on the first four dialogs. The dialogs are described in Table 3.11. Table 3.11 Communication Setup Dialog Tabs Dialog Tab

3-34

Description

General

Define modem answer delays for Mini-DLMS ports inside and outside call windows. Note: Mini-DLMS must be used on at least one port.

Optical Port

Select the protocol and communication parameters for the optical port.

Serial Port 1

Select the protocol and communication parameters for serial port 1.

Serial Port 2

Select the protocol and communication parameters for serial port 2. Note: If a Q1000 meter has an optional internal modem board, the internal modem board connections are enabled and serial port two is disabled. The RS-485 board also uses port 2.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Table 3.11 Communication Setup Dialog Tabs Dialog Tab

Description

Advanced Protocols

If you select an advanced protocol for one of the ports, then the Advanced Protocols tab appears. Currently the Advanced Protocols include DNP 3.0, IEC 60870-5-102, IEC 60870-5-102 Plus, and MODBUS RTU. Select the required Advanced Protocol configuration file(s) for each port by clicking Browse and then selecting the file(s)a.

Time Synchronization

If you select Time Synchronization for one of the Mini-DLMS ports, then the Time Synchronization tab appears. You can configure the Q1000 meter for automatic time synchronization to a GPS (Global Positioning System) device or a GPS message from a non-GPS device. Both methods can be implemented on a meter port that uses the Mini-DLMS protocol. Therefore, one port can be used for two purposes. Only one port may be selected as the time synchronization port at a time.

a

The Advanced Protocol configuration files are created using the SchlumbergerSema Protocol Editor program. It is supplied with the PC-PRO+ 98 CD and will install automatically on your PC. Refer to the Protocol Editor help files and Getting Started Guide for more information.

Table 3.12 describes parameters used to define the communications setup. Depending on the meter's configuration, some of these parameters may not be available. For more information, see Section 6, Communications. Table 3.12 General Tab Parameters, Communications Setup Parameter

Description

Inside Call Window

Enter the number of rings the modem waits before answering the phone when the call window is open.a Valid entries are 1-255 rings.

Outside Call Window

Enter the number of rings the modem waits before answering the phone when the call window is closed (Outside Call Window)a. Valid entries are 1-255 rings.

Never Answer

If this box is checked, the corresponding Answer Delay number of rings field is disabled. Note: If you select this option, the meter will not answer a phone call for the corresponding call window setting.

a

During normal operation, the meter will write the number of rings for the modem to wait before answering to the modem as the meter changes from inside to outside call windows and back. See “MODEMS” on page 6-2 for details.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-35

Operating Instructions

Table 3.13 Optical Port Tab Parameters, Communications Setup Parameter

Description

Protocol

Selects the protocol used for the optical port. Note: The fields that appear on the remainder of this dialog are determined by the protocol you select for this port. If you select an advanced protocol for any of the ports, the Advanced Protocols tab is added to the dialog. For more information on protocols, see "Protocols" on page 6-18.

Meter Address

Uniquely identifies a specific meter on a network for communication. All values are allowed except the global address 0xFFFF which is the group address. When communication is initiated, only the meter with the matching address will respond. The format and range of values for the meter address parameter for advanced protocols will change according to the needs of the protocol. • • • •

3-36

For Mini-DLMS and QDIP, the range is 1 to 253; For DNP 3.0 the range is 1 to 65535. For IEC 60870-5-102 and IEC 60870-5-102 plus, the meter address is the Data Logger (Data Link) address. The range is 1 to 65535. For MODBUS RTU the slave address must be between 1 and 255. Standard MODBUS restricts the address to 1-247. Address 0 is reserved for a broadcast address. This is the address of the meter on the Q1000 port that this protocol will run on.

Meter Address 2

For IEC 60870-5-102 and IEC 60870-5-102 plus protocols, enter the Meter Address 2. The meter address 2 field is the Meter Address DTE (Data Terminal Equipment). The range is 1 to 65535.

Group Address

Enter the Group Address for the Mini-DLMS protocol, if applicable. The range is 0 to 255. Note: This field is currently disabled.

Baud Rate

Select the Baud Rate that will be used to connect to this meter port. Click the arrow to select from the drop-down list of available baud rates. Valid settings are 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14,400, and 19,200 bpsa.

Time Synchronization

If you selected the Mini-DLMS protocol, the Time Synchronization field is available. The Mini-DLMS protocol can be configured to support time synchronization on any one port. When you select Time Synchronization for a port, the Time Synchronization tab is added to the Communications Setup dialog. Note: Auto-baud detect cannot be used when a port is configured for time synchronization.

Ignore I Command

If you selected the Mini-DLMS protocol, the Ignore I Command field is available. The I Command is a command from a software application requesting the meter to identify itself. For multi-drop network configurations, the meter address is used for identification instead of the I Command. You can disable the I Command to prevent all network meters from responding to the I Command. Each meter should have a specific address to use before you disable the I Command.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Table 3.13 Optical Port Tab Parameters, Communications Setup Parameter

Description

Auto Baud Detect

The Auto Baud Detect field is available if you selected Auto Modem Detect for the connection type. Check this box to enable the meter to automatically adjust its speed according to the incoming baud rate. For the Optical Port, the range is from 1200 to 9600 bps. To avoid locking the baud rate, provide an Auto Baud Retry value. When you check this box, the Baud Rate field becomes unavailable (is grayed out).

Auto Baud Retry Time

If you check the Auto Baud Detect box, the Auto Baud Retry Time field is added to the dialog. Enter the time to wait between auto baud detection retries. Valid entries are 3 to 60 seconds. This parameter allows the port’s server to sense the baud rate again after this number of seconds. This is helpful for switching baud rate on the client side without having to reprogram the meter. This value cannot be set to zero.

a

Some optical port cables cannot support baud rates faster than 9600 bps.

Table 3.14 Serial Ports Tab Parameters, Communications Setup Parameter

Description

Protocol

Same as Optical Port.

Meter Address

Same as Optical Port.

Meter Address 2

Same as Optical Port.

RTS to Tx Delay

If the MINI-DLMS protocol is used for a serial port, the RTS to Tx Delay (Request-to-Send to Transmit Delay) field is available. Set the time (in milliseconds) to delay between a transition from the Request-to-Send (RTS) signal to the Transmit Delay (Tx Delay) signal. This is the minimum time that the RTS signal is asserted prior to the start bit being transmitted. The value is in milliseconds. The range is 0-100.

RTS to Rx Delay

If the MINI-DLMS protocol is used for a serial port, the Drop RTS to Tx Delay (Drop Request-to-Send to Transmit Delay) field is available. Set the time (in milliseconds) to delay between a transition from the Request-to-Send (RTS) signal to the Transmit Delay (Tx Delay) signal. This is the minimum time that RTS remains asserted after the last stop bit is transmitted. The value is in milliseconds. The range is 0-100.

DCD to Rx Delay

If the MINI-DLMS protocol is used for a serial port, the DCD to Rx Delay (Data Carrier Detect-to-Receive Delay) field is available. Set the time (in milliseconds) to delay between a transition from the Data Carrier Detect (DCD) signal to the Receive Delay (Rx Delay) signal. This is the minimum time that the DCD input must be asserted prior to the receiver being turned on. The value is in milliseconds. The range is 0-100. A value of 0 tells the meter to ignore DCD and the receiver is always on.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-37

Operating Instructions

Table 3.14 Serial Ports Tab Parameters, Communications Setup Parameter

Description

Group Address

Same as Optical Port. Note: This field is currently disabled.

Baud Rate

Select the Baud Rate that will be used to connect to this meter port. Click the arrow to select from the drop-down list of available baud rates. Valid settings are 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 38400, 57600, and 115200 bpsa.

Time Synchronization

Same as Optical Port.

Ignore I Command

Same as Optical Port.

Auto Baud Detect

The Auto Baud Detect field is available if you selected Auto Modem Detect for the connection type. Check this box to enable the meter to automatically adjust its speed according to the incoming baud rate. For the Serial Ports 1 & 2, the range is from 1200 to 38400 bps. To avoid locking the baud rate, provide an Auto Baud Retry value. When you check this box, the Baud Rate field becomes unavailable (is grayed out).

Auto Baud Retry Time

Same as Optical Port.

Serial Port 1 (or 2)

Select the Connection Type for this meter port. Your choices are: •

•

•

Auto Modem Detect—Use this option to allow the Q1000 to periodically test for the presence of a modem. This setting is useful if a modem upgrade (baud rate) is planned or if the original installation has no modem, but a modem will be added in the future. When the modem is added, no re-programming is required for the meter to recognize this addition. When you select this option, you can also enable Auto Baud Detection and set the Auto Baud Retry Time in seconds. Self-Sensing has a five minute waiting period before it will recognize the modem. Periodically, the meter will test for the presence of a modem and its speed. During the few seconds that the meter is testing the port, the user will not be able to log on to the meter. Direct Connect—Use this option to make a direct, hard-wired connection to the Q1000 (RS-232/RS485). You can also use Direct Connect for certain modem configurations. Modem (Internal or External)—Use this option if you want the Q1000 to assume that a modem is always connected. If you select this option, you need to select the modem speed also. This is the best choice for an installation where the Q1000 will always have a modem connected. For Serial Port 1, the modem must be external; for Serial Port 2, the modem may be internal or external. This setting is preferable to the Auto Modem Detect option because there is no waiting and no periodic self-sensing to test for the presence of a modem. This option enables the Q1000 to write configuration commands to the modem (internal or external) on power up.

Phone Home Baud Rate

a

3-38

If you select Modem, the Phone Home Baud Rate field is added to this dialog. Set the baud rate for the phone home signal.

Some computer ports cannot communicate at the highest speeds due to their COM port hardware limitations.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Table 3.15 Advanced Protocols Tab Parameters, Communications Setup Parameter

Description

PDS Configuration File

If you are using the DNP 3.0 protocol, select the Protocol Data Server (PDS) Configuration file to be used for communications for the DNP 3.0 protocola. Note: This field is not used in other protocols.

Optical Port/Serial Ports

For any port that uses an advanced protocol, select the advanced protocol configuration file.a

a

The Advanced Protocol configuration files are created using the SchlumbergerSema Protocol Editor program. It is supplied with the PC-PRO+ 98 CD and will install automatically on your PC. Refer to the Protocol Editor help files and Protocol Editor Online User's Manual for more information.

Table 3.16 Time Synchronization Tab Parameters, Communications Setup Parameter

Description

Frequency

Select the Frequency to define how often the meter will look for a time synchronization message from the external GPS device. Choose from Daily, Hourly, and 5 Minutes.

Offset

Enter an Offset to indicate the number of hours and minutes after the selected frequency that the meter will expect the time synchronization message. The offset defines the middle of the synchronization window.

Duration

Enter the Duration. The duration defines the number of minutes the meter should look for the synchronization message before and after the offset. The duration establishes the synchronization window. The meter will begin looking for the synchronization message at the value of the duration before the offset and continue to allow a time synchronization message after the offset until the end of the duration value. Valid range is 0 to 29 minutes.

Message Properties

Define the Message Properties as follows: •

•

•

Time Zone

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

External Delay—a factor that accounts for the time it takes to send the time message from the external source to the meter. The delay is determined by the device and the method of communication used. Enter the number of milliseconds of discrepancy between the time the message is sent (time= t0) and the time the message is received by the meter (time=t1). Valid range is 0 to 65535 milliseconds. Message Properties Configuration—The Q1000 meter can recognize five different GPS message formats at one time. Click the Configuration button to define the message address format(s) and the time field(s). Meter Time Zone—Select the time zone where the meter will be installed.

Select the Meter Time Zone - the time zone for the service point where the meter is installed.

3-39

Operating Instructions

Table 3.16 Time Synchronization Tab Parameters, Communications Setup Parameter Time Adjustment Windows

Description Use the Time Adjustment Window fields to define what action the meter will take when a time difference (between the meter’s time and the synchronization message time) is detected. • •

•

•

No Change—If the time difference is less than or equal to the value entered, the meter’s time is not adjusted. The range is 0 to 2000 milliseconds. Time Change No Logging—If the time difference is less than or equal to the value entered, the meter’s time is adjusted, but the adjustment is not logged—the meter will not record the adjustment. The time change is “feathered-in” a little at a time. The adjustment takes place at the rate of 8 milliseconds per second until the adjustment is complete. The range is 1 to 500 milliseconds (1/2 second) and must be at least one millisecond greater than the value entered for No Change. Small Time Change—If the time difference is less than or equal to the value entered, the meter’s time is adjusted and the meter logs an adjustment. You can define an Event Log to track the time adjustments. The range is 2 to 1,800,000 milliseconds (30 minutes) and must be at least one millisecond greater than the value entered for Time Change (No Logging). Large Time Change—If the time difference is less than or equal to the value entered, the meter’s time is adjusted and the meter logs an adjustment. If a time difference is greater than the number of ms set here, the message is considered outside the time synchronization window and no adjustment is made. This non-event is logged as an event. The range is 3 to 1,800,000 milliseconds (30 minutes) and must be at least one millisecond greater than the value entered for Small Time Change.

Device Multipliers/CT and VT Correction Table 3.17 describes parameters that define the register multiplier values. Register multipliers are used to obtain primary rated demand and energy readings. Table 3.17 Parameters, Device Multipliers Parameter

3-40

Description

CT Ratio

Sets the current transformer ratio.

VT Ratio

Sets the voltage transformer ratio.

Custom Ratio

Sets the ratio for a custom-rated demand or energy register.

Enable Phase A/B/C VT Correction

Enables VT correction for each phase.

Enable Phase A/B/C CT Correction

Enables CT correction for each phase.

VT Phase Correction (Phase A/B/C)

Sets the phase angle correction for each phase of the voltage transformer. Enter the phase angle correction in minutes.

CT Phase Correction (Phase A/B/C)

Sets the phase angle correction for each phase of the current transformer. Enter the phase angle correction in minutes.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

System Loss Compensation (SLC) Table 3.18 describes parameters that define the operation of the Basic System Loss Compensation functions. For a complete description, see Section 7, System Loss Compensation and the PC-PRO+ 98 programming software help files. Table 3.18 Parameters, Basic System Loss Compensation Parameter

Description

% Watts Fe

Sets the Watt Iron (Fe) constant value.

% Watts Cu

Sets the Watt Copper (Cu) constant value.

% Vars Fe

Sets the VAR Iron (Fe) constant value.

% Vars Cu

Sets the VAR Copper (Cu) constant value.

SLC Nominal Current

Enter the value for nominal current for this SLC configuration. The nominal current (secondary rated) is the current flowing in the meter when the loss constants for the power transformer are calculated, usually with a full load on the transformer. SLC Nominal Current is typically the Test Amps of the installed meter:a • • •

a

1 Amp for Class 2 installations 5 Amps for Class 10 installations 5 Amps for Class 20 installations

If the user chooses to assign a different nominal current value in the calculation of the % Watts Fe, % Watts Cu, % VARs Fe, and % VARs Cu, then that current value should be entered as the SLC nominal current.

Display Configuration Table 3.19 describes parameters used to define the display configuration of the Q1000. Depending on the meter's configuration, some of these parameters may not be available. Table 3.19 Parameters, Display Configuration Parameter

Description

Display Options Tab Display Scroll On Time

Sets the time the display stays on each display page. Regardless of this setting, the display values inside the meter are updated every second.

Display Scroll Off Time

Sets the time the display is blanked between display pages.

Annunciators

Enables messages for EOI, demand reset, and register freeze to be displayed.

Date Format

Specifies the format for displaying the date on the display.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-41

Operating Instructions

Table 3.19 Parameters, Display Configuration Parameter

Description

Normal Display, Alternate Display, and Test Display Tabs Displayable Items

Specifies, in a hierarchical-type list, all the meter values that may be chosen for display. This list is generated by the choices previously made in the Quantity Selections component of PC-PRO+ 98.

Display List

Defines the display screens. A separate list is available for normal, alternate, and test display modes. Each line of each screen can be separately configured.

Displayable Errors Table 3.20 describes parameters used to control the displaying of error conditions in the Q1000. For more information on error handling functions, see Chapter 9, Testing and Maintenance. Table 3.20 Parameters, Displayable Errors Parameter

Description

Error Condition

Selects meter display actions to occur for each error condition. The choices are to: Ignore the error, Scroll—display the error code at the end of each display list, or Lock—display the error code and lock the display on this error page.

Enable Locks on Non-Fatal Errors

Enables the meter to lock the non-fatal error screen on the display if configured non-fatal errors occur.

Normal Mode Register Operation Table 3.21 describes parameters that define the demand register operations while the meter is in normal mode. Table 3.21 Parameters, Normal Mode Register Operation Parameter

3-42

Description

Use Global EOI Source

Enables using the global EOI source for this component, instead of defining the intervals here. When this parameter is selected, it is valid for both normal and test modes.

Demand Interval Length

Sets the length of a demand interval. Valid choices range from 2 seconds to 60 minutes. Note: This dialog is filled in with the Global EOI selection and grayed out when Global EOI is selected.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Table 3.21 Parameters, Normal Mode Register Operation Parameter Number of Subintervals

Description Select the number of subintervals in the Demand Interval. Valid choices are presented based on the Demand Interval Length. If you selected Use Global EOI Source above, the choices for number of subintervals are based on the Global EOI Interval Length which is set on the Device Operation dialog. •

•

If not using the global EOI source, the user selects the demand interval length and a number of subintervals. The subinterval length will then be the selected demand interval length divided by the selected number of subintervals. The subinterval length must be greater than or equal to 2 seconds, and if the demand interval is less than or equal to 1 minute, must divide evenly into 60 seconds. If the demand interval is greater than 1 minute, the subinterval length must divide evenly into 60 minutes. When using the global EOI source, the user does not select the demand interval length; the global EOI configuration defines the subinterval length. The number of subintervals selection multiplies the subinterval length to determine the demand interval length. The demand interval length must be greater than or equal to 2 seconds, and if the subinterval length is less than 1 minute, must divide evenly into 60 seconds, but if the subinterval length is greater than or equal to 1 minute, must divide evenly into 60 minutes.

Thermal Interval Length

Select the length of the thermal interval. Valid choices range from 2 seconds to 60 minutes. This is the time for 90% of a change in load to be registered in the interval.

Demand Reset Lockout Time

Set the time required to pass after a demand reset before another demand reset can occur. The range is 0 to 65535 seconds.

Cold Load Pickup Time

Set the time required to pass after a cold load pickup before energy accumulation occurs. The cold load pickup time is programmable from 0 seconds to 65535 seconds. During this time, no accumulation occurs. When the delay time expires, demand calculation resumes. Note: Cold load pickup time is canceled whenever the meter is placed in the Test mode.

PO Length Before CLPU

Enter the number of seconds a power outage must last before a cold load pickup occurs. The range is 0 to 65535 seconds.

Test Mode Register Operation Table 3.22 describes parameters that define the demand and energy register operations while the meter is in test mode. Table 3.22 Parameters, Test Mode Register Operation Parameter Use Global EOI Source

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Description If Global EOI was selected in Normal Mode Register Operation, then it is automatically applied in Test Mode. If Global EOI was not selected in Normal Mode Register Operation, then it is grayed out and not available here.

3-43

Operating Instructions

Table 3.22 Parameters, Test Mode Register Operation Parameter

Description

Demand Interval Length

Sets the length of a demand interval while the meter is in test mode. Note: This dialog is filled in with the Global EOI selection and grayed out when Global EOI is selected.

Number of Subintervals

Sets the number of subintervals in an interval while the meter is in test mode.

Thermal Interval Length

Sets the length of a thermal interval while the meter is in test mode.

Collect Energy in Test Mode

Enables the meter to continue accumulating energy information while in test mode.

Switch Operation Table 3.23 describes parameters that define the behavior of the meter switches. Table 3.23 Parameters, Switch Operation Parameter

Description

Enable Demand Reset Switch

Enables the demand reset switch to be active. This is independently programmable for normal and test mode. A demand reset can be initiated by communications software regardless of this setting.

Enable Test Mode Switch

Enables the test mode switch to be active. Test mode can also be activated by communications software, regardless of the status of this setting.

Enable Scroll Lock Switch

Enables the scroll lock switch to be active. This is independently programmable for normal and test mode.

Enable Alternate Mode Switch

Enables the alternate display mode switch to be active. This is independently programmable for normal and test mode.

Test Mode Switch Timeout

Sets the amount of time the meter will stay in test mode before automatically returning to normal mode.

LED Configuration Table 3.24 describes parameters that define the behavior of the meter LEDs. There is a separate set of these parameters for normal and test mode. LEDs may be ordered either visible (red) or infrared. Table 3.24 Parameters, LED Configuration Parameter

3-44

Description

Left LED Quantity

Selects the energy quantity represented by the left LED.

Left LED Kh

Sets the pulse constant value, or amount of energy represented by each left LED pulse.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Table 3.24 Parameters, LED Configuration Parameter

Description

Right LED Quantity

Selects the energy quantity represented by the right LED.

Right LED Kh

Sets the pulse constant value, or amount of energy represented by each right LED pulse.

Standard Load Profile Configuration Table 3.25 describes parameters that define the configuration of the Q1000's two standard load profile areas. Each area has its own set of parameters. For a complete description of load profile functions, see Chapter 4, Load Profile and Time-of-Use. Table 3.25 Parameters, Standard Load Profile Configuration Parameter

Description

Use Global EOI

Enables using the global EOI to define the interval length, instead of defining the intervals here. Note: This dialog is filled in with the Global EOI selection and then grayed out when Global EOI is selected.

Interval Length

Sets the length of a load profile interval. Valid interval lengths range from 2 seconds to 60 minutes. Note: This dialog is filled in with the Global EOI selection and grayed out when Global EOI is selected.

Outage Length

Sets the length of time an outage must last before the interval is flagged. Valid range is 1 to 65535 seconds.

Disable Profile in Test Mode

Disables accumulation of energy into load profile channels while in test mode.

# of Intervals

Sets the number of intervals of data to store in this load profile.

Quantities

Selects the quantities that are being stored in each channel. Select the quantities you want this profile to accumulate. For each Unassigned item in this list, choose an item from the drop-down menu to assign to the Quantity list. Your choices depend on the quantities you configured previously in the Quantity Selections component. These are the energy quantities that will be stored in each channel. You can select a maximum of 24 quantities. Each quantity is stored as a separate load profile channel. The number of channels you select affects memory usage.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-45

Operating Instructions

Table 3.25 Parameters, Standard Load Profile Configuration Parameter

Description

Pulse Weights

Set the pulse weight, or energy per pulse, for each channel. The values here are secondary-rate pulse weights in Unit-Hour. Pulse values. The list of allowed pulse weights are configured under Options | Default Values | Pulse Weight Values. The value of 1.00000 is the default value. Note: If you use the SchlumbergerSema Mini-Master software, SchlumbergerSema recommends that use a pulse weight of 0.025 or greater. This will allow you to import data from Energy Audit for use in Mini-Master applications.

Meter Memory Bar

Shows how much memory will be required by the current state of the program configuration. The Q1000 can be configured to perform a large number of functions, each of which take up a variable amount of memory. Previous meters allocated specific amounts of memory for certain components. The Q1000 allocates memory dynamically allowing the user to maximize the meter’s functionality at a given location. For this reason, the Q1000 gives you constant feedback on the amount of memory your program is currently consuming. This feedback is a Meter Memory bar at the bottom of the dialog indicating the amount of meter memory currently required for the configuration. As long as the bar is in the blue region (<100%), there is sufficient meter memory for the configuration. If the bar displays in the red (>100%), the memory requirements for your configuration have exceeded the amount of memory available in the meter. You must modify your configuration to display the bar in the blue region only. If you attempt to save a program file while the bar displays in the red region, the Out of Device Resources dialog displays. The software will not allow you to continue configuring the meter program if the amount of memory your program requires exceeds 200% of the meter's memory. If the percentage is >100%, but <200%, then the user can close the software component that is active, and then open and modify another component to reduce the memory requirements. The program components that use portions of this memory include: • • • •

3-46

Load Profile Harmonics Voltage Quality Self Reads

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Voltage Quality Table 3.26 describes parameters that define the configuration of the voltage quality functions in the Q1000. There are three classes of power supply interruptions and two levels of voltage sags and swells definable. For a complete description of these functions, see Chapter 5, Power Quality. Table 3.26 Parameters, Voltage Quality Parameter

Description

General Tab Cold Load Pickup Time

Sets the time required to pass after a meter restart before voltage quality functions operate.

Disable Voltage Quality in Test Mode

Disables voltage quality functions while in test mode.

Interruption to Power Supply Tab Duration (Class 1, 2, 3)

Sets the duration for a power supply interruption required to cause an event for each class.

Number of Events

Sets the number of voltage quality events to record. This number is definable for each type, class, and level of event.

Level 1/2 Sag/Swell Tab Disable Phase A/B/C

Disables voltage quality events for each phase. This check is available for all sag and swell events independently.

Minimum Duration

Enter the minimum duration length (in milliseconds) a sag or swell event must occur on this phase to be used to determine voltage quality. You can use any number between 0 and 65535. Negative numbers are not allowed. Note: The minimum sag or swell duration that the meter can detect is ½ cycle (at 50Hz - 10 ms, at 60 Hz - 8 ms).

Maximum Duration

Enter the maximum duration length (in milliseconds) a sag or swell event may occur on this phase to be used to determine voltage quality. You can use any number between 0 and 65535. If the length of the event exceeds the maximum duration, the event is not recorded. Negative numbers are not allowed.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-47

Operating Instructions

Table 3.26 Parameters, Voltage Quality Parameter Threshold Voltage

Description Set the voltage threshold which will trigger a voltage quality event when exceeded. For sags and swells, this value is a percentage of nominal voltage (% of Vnominal). Nominal voltage is specified in the Service Configuration. The valid range for threshold voltage is 0% to 100% for sags and 100% to 200% for swells. Sag Example If nominal voltage is set to 120V and the sag threshold is 90% of nominal, a sag is triggered when the RMS value of the voltage drops below 108V (120 volts X 90% = 108 volts).

Swell Example If nominal voltage is set to 120V and the swell threshold is 110% of nominal, a swell is triggered when the RMS value of the voltage rises above 132V (120 volts X 110% = 132 volts).

Hysteresis Voltage

Set the hysteresis voltage that ends a voltage quality event by entering the % of Vnominal you want to use for the hysteresis voltage on this phase. For sags, this is a value above the threshold voltage and above which the voltage must rise to end the sag. You can use any number between 0% and 100%. For swells, this is a value below the threshold voltage and below which the voltage must fall to end the swell. You can use any number between 100% and 200%.

Number of Events

Enter the number of voltage quality events you want the meter to record for each phase. This number is definable for each type of event. The number of events you can enter is based on the available meter memory.

Imbalances Tab Minimum Duration

3-48

Enter the minimum duration length (in milliseconds) a sag or swell event must occur on this phase to be used to determine voltage quality. You can use any number between 0 and 65535. Negative numbers are not allowed.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Table 3.26 Parameters, Voltage Quality Parameter

Description

Maximum Duration

Enter the maximum duration length (in milliseconds) a sag or swell event may occur on this phase to be used to determine voltage quality. You can use any number between 0 and 65535. If the length of the event exceeds the maximum duration, the event is not recorded. Negative numbers are not allowed.

Threshold

The imbalance threshold defines the percentage of deviation between the voltage for a single phase and the average voltage for all phases. Set the threshold by entering the percentage of deviation that will trigger an imbalance event. Because all three phase voltages can drift together without causing an imbalance, the imbalances are triggered off the average of all voltages. The valid range for threshold voltage is 0 to 100 for imbalances.

Hysteresis

Set the hysteresis voltage that ends a voltage quality event by entering the percentage number you want to use for the hysteresis voltage on this phase. This is a percentage level, less than the threshold, that the imbalance must fall below to end the event. For imbalances, the threshold sets the value above or below the average that starts an event. Similarly, the hysteresis value sets the value above or below the average that ends an event.

Number of Events

Enter the number of voltage quality events you want the meter to record. This number is definable for each type of event. The number of events you can enter is based on the available meter memory.

Meter Memory Bar Meter Memory Bar

See page 3-46.

Harmonics Table 3.27 describes parameters that define the configuration of the harmonics recording functions. The Q1000 records time-averaged harmonics up to the 20th harmonic. For a complete description of these functions, see Chapter 5, Power Quality. Table 3.27 Parameters, Harmonics Parameter

Description

General Tab Use Global EOI Source

Enables using the global EOI to define the harmonic interval length, instead of defining the intervals here.

Interval Length

Sets the length of a harmonic interval.

Enable Harmonics in Test Mode

Enables harmonic interval accumulations while in test mode.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-49

Operating Instructions

Table 3.27 Parameters, Harmonics Parameter Number of Records to Store for Each Phase

Description Sets the number of harmonic interval records to keep in memory for each phase.

Voltage Amplitude Tab All

Click this button to select all harmonics for recording. The selection covers all three phases.

Even

Click this button to select the even-numbered harmonics for recording. The selection covers all three phases.

Odd

Click this button to select the odd-numbered harmonics for recording. The selection covers all three phases.

Clear All

Click this button to deselect all selected harmonics. The action covers all three phases.

Harmonics to Record

Click the corresponding Phase box once to select an individual harmonic for recording. An X signifies a selected harmonic. To deselect the harmonic, click the box again. An empty box signifies a deselected harmonic.

Voltage Phase Angle Tab All

Click this button to select all harmonics for recording. The selection covers all three phases.

Even

Click this button to select the even-numbered harmonics for recording. The selection covers all three phases.

Odd

Click this button to select the odd-numbered harmonics for recording. The selection covers all three phases.

Clear All

Click this button to deselect all selected harmonics. The action covers all three phases.

Harmonics to Record

Click the corresponding Phase box once to select an individual harmonic for recording. An X signifies a selected harmonic. To deselect the harmonic, click the box again. An empty box signifies a deselected harmonic.

Current Amplitude Tab

3-50

All

Click this button to select all harmonics for recording. The selection covers all three phases.

Even

Click this button to select the even-numbered harmonics for recording. The selection covers all three phases.

Odd

Click this button to select the odd-numbered harmonics for recording. The selection covers all three phases.

Clear All

Click this button to deselect all selected harmonics. The action covers all three phases.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Table 3.27 Parameters, Harmonics Parameter

Description

Harmonics to Record

Click the corresponding Phase box once to select an individual harmonic for recording. An X signifies a selected harmonic. To deselect the harmonic, click the box again. An empty box signifies a deselected harmonic.

Current Phase Angle Tab All

Click this button to select all harmonics for recording. The selection covers all three phases.

Even

Click this button to select the even-numbered harmonics for recording. The selection covers all three phases.

Odd

Click this button to select the odd-numbered harmonics for recording. The selection covers all three phases.

Clear All

Click this button to deselect all selected harmonics. The action covers all three phases.

Harmonics to Record

Click the corresponding Phase box once to select an individual harmonic for recording. An X signifies a selected harmonic. To deselect the harmonic, click the box again. An empty box signifies a deselected harmonic.

Meter Memory Bar Meter Memory Bar

See page 3-46.

Time-of-Use Configuration Table 3.28 describes parameters that define the Time-of-Use feature of the Q1000. For a complete description of using Time-of-Use functionality, see Chapter 4, Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary.1 The configuration shown in Table 3.28 is planned. Table 3.28 Time-of-Use Configuration Parameter

1.

Description

Schedule expiration date

Date when schedule is no longer valid.

Schedule ID

Per rate schedule

Delay season change until after demand reset

Option to delay season change processing until after the first demand reset after midnight on the season change date.

Rate schedule to use for display status line

The status line on the display has one character reserved for the TOU rate indication.

Time-of-Use is available in the PC-PRO+ 98 version 2.3 software and 5.x firmware or higher.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-51

Operating Instructions

Table 3.28 Time-of-Use Configuration Parameter

3-52

Description

Number of rate schedules

Allocates space in each pattern group

Number of pattern groups

Allocates space for pattern group definitions

Number of daily patterns

Allocates space for daily pattern definitions

Number of seasons per year

Allocates space for season definitions

Number of season dates

Allocates space for season change date definitions

Number of holiday dates

Allocates space for holiday date definitions

Number of switch points

Allocates space for switch point definitions

Time of day per switch point

2 second resolution

Action per switch point

Turns a rate or output on or off

Rate or Output ID per switch point

Specifies what rate or output is changed.

Daily pattern ID

One per rate schedule

Switch point ID of the first switch point of the day

Identifies ID name.

Number of switchpoints in day

Specifies the number of switchpoints per day.

Pattern Group ID

One per day of the week

Date

Sets the date of the Pattern Group ID.

Pattern Group ID #2

This pattern group will be used on the holiday date instead of the one specified by the season.

Date

Sets the date of Pattern Group ID #2.

Season ID

Identifies the new season to start on the season change date.

Events to watch

Up to 16 events can be watched for an override.

Rules

Specifies the required states of the events to cause the override

Priority

In case multiple overrides are active

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Table 3.28 Time-of-Use Configuration Parameter

Description

Type

What gets overridden if rules are satisfied (and how) (pattern group, daily pattern, rate exclusively, or rate non-exclusively)

Pattern group or rate schedule

Pattern or rate

Start date and time

When the override starts

End date and time

When the override ends

Priority

In case there are multiple overrides

Type

What gets overridden if rules are satisfied (and how) (pattern group, daily pattern, rate exclusively, or rate non-exclusively)

Pattern Group or rate schedule

Pattern or rate

Event Configuration Table 3.29 describes parameters that define the configuration of meter events and diagnostic events. An event is the occurrence of a programmed condition and is either in an ON or OFF state. Meter events can be logged in the event log and can also be selected for inclusion in the event summary. Diagnostic events can be selected for inclusion in the diagnostic event summary. For more information, see "Diagnostics" on page 9-2. Table 3.29 Parameters, Event Configuration Parameter

Description

General Tab Loss of Potential Limit

Enter the voltage that the meter will use as a reference to determine if a Loss of Potential Limit event has occurred. If the voltage on any phase drops below this value, the meter will register a loss of potential event on that phase. The upper limit is 600 Volts.

Loss of Current Limit

Enter the amperage that the meter will use as a reference to determine if a Loss of Current Limit event has occurred. If the current on any phase drops below this value, the meter will register a loss of current event on that phase. The upper limit is 20 Amps.

Neutral Current Limit

Enter the amperage that the meter will use as a reference to determine if a Neutral Current Limit event has occurred. If the neutral current rises above this value, the meter will register a neutral current event. The upper limit is 20 Amps.

Time Allowed on Battery

Enter the number of minutes the meter will be allowed to operate from internal battery before a Time Allowed on battery event occurs. The upper limit is 525,600 Minutes.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-53

Operating Instructions

Table 3.29 Parameters, Event Configuration Parameter Use Circular Log

Description Check this box to enable usage of a circular event log. If the event log is programmed to be a circular or wrap-around file, the most current 200 events are always retained. For a non-circular file, the event log fills up the 200 events and then must be cleared before new events are recorded.

Log & Summary Tab Event Name

This column displays a list of all events defined in the meter program.

Log

Check the box in this column to enable the corresponding event to be recorded in the Event Log. The Event Log is a collection of event records that can be used to monitor the occurrence of certain conditions in the meter. The event log in the Q1000 allows you to record predefined events with the date and time of each occurrence. Up to 200 programmable events with their time of occurrence can be recorded. The event log is stored in battery backed RAM. To view the Event Log, while online with a meter, from the navigation tree select Device Status | Events. The event log is programmable to be a circular or a non-circular file. If the event log is programmed to be a circular or wrap-around file, the most current 200 events are always retained. For a non-circular file, the event log fills up the 200 events and then must be cleared before new events are recorded.

Summary

Check the box in this column to enable the corresponding event to be recorded in an Event Log Summary. A maximum of 16 event summaries are allowed. An event summary is a tool for monitoring the occurrence of certain events without having to add a record to the event log. This can be used to monitor an event that occurs frequently without needing each date and time occurrence. The event summary reports the date and time of the first occurrence and the date and time of the last occurrence and the number occurrences since the last event log reset. To view the Event Log Summaries, while online with a meter, from the navigation tree select Device Status | Event Log Summaries.

Diagnostics Tab Event Name

This column displays a list of all events defined in the meter program.

Event Summary Number

The number assigned to a diagnostic event when it is recorded in the summary. There are seven user-configurable diagnostic event summaries available. You can assign multiple diagnostic events to each of the seven summaries. The eighth summary contains additional events that are hard coded ON.

Threshold Alarm Configuration Table 3.30 describes parameters that define the configuration of the 16 meter thresholds. A threshold is a value against which a meter quantity is compared. If the quantity is beyond the threshold, a threshold alarm is generated.

3-54

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Table 3.30 Parameters, Threshold Alarm Configuration Parameter

Description

Quantity

Selects the register to which this threshold will apply. Demand and instantaneous values can be monitored.

Lower Threshold

Sets the lower limit for this threshold event to be activated.

Upper Threshold

Sets the upper limit for this threshold event to be activated.

Mode

Defines how the thresholds are interpreted. In normal mode, an event occurs if the quantity has exceeded the upper threshold, but has not yet dropped below the lower threshold. In inverted mode, an event occurs if the quantity has dropped below the lower threshold but has not yet risen above the upper threshold.

Disable in Test Mode

Enables monitoring of thresholds in test mode.

Threshold Alarm Examples The following two graphics show alarm conditions where the Upper and Lower Thresholds are the same values. Figure 3.14 shows the alarm points when the threshold is in the normal mode; Figure 3.15 shows the alarm points when the threshold is in the inverted mode.

Figure 3.14 Normal Mode Threshold Alarm Example 1

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-55

Operating Instructions

Figure 3.15 Inverted Mode Threshold Alarm Example 1

The following graphics show alarm conditions where the Upper and Lower Thresholds are not the same values. When the two thresholds are entered as separate values, hysteresis is automatically turned on. This function locks the alarm on until the quantity falls below the lower (normal mode) or upper (inverted mode) threshold again. Figure 3.16 shows the alarm points when the threshold is in the normal mode; Figure 3.17 shows the alarm points when the threshold is in the inverted mode.

Figure 3.16 Normal Mode Threshold Alarm Example 2

Figure 3.17 Inverted Mode Threshold Alarm Example 2

3-56

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Output Configuration Table 3.31 describes parameters that define the output configuration of the Q1000. There are three forms of data output using the LONWORKs I/O network: analog, digital state, and digital pulse. Use the fields on the Analog tab to define up to 8 analog outputs. Analog outputs can be used to feed analog recorders, PLCs (power line carriers), or RTUs (remote terminal units). These recording devices usually take instantaneous values from sensors and transducers. The Q1000 meter produces an analog output for instantaneous values, such as Amps, Volts, Watts, and so forth. Use the fields on the Digital State tab to define up to 16 digital state outputs. The purpose of this configuration is to assign a particular output to a threshold/alarm. This is the option to close or open an output when the event occurs. The default is to not trigger on an event. Use the fields on the Digital Pulse tab to define up to 8 digital pulse outputs. These outputs are used to collect output pulses from an external device and store those pulses in mass memory. Configuration is similar to configuring Analog Inputs . The pulses that are received from the network become energy quanta after the multiplication by Ke. These energy quanta can be used in different registers: Load Profile, Demand, or Energy. Table 3.31 Parameters, Output Configuration Parameter

Description

Analog Tab Quantity

Select the quantity you want to measure. This instantaneous value will be assigned to the selected analog output. Note: For PC-PRO+ 98 v2.1 or higher, you can now select net quantities and frequency (Hertz) for analog outputs.

K

The K value is the gain factor used to convert the analog output quantity to a percentage of full scale. The setting is based on estimates of the output level for the particular installation location. The K value represents the conversion coefficient between the instantaneous register value and the analog output value. This coefficient is used to transform an instantaneous register value to a relative range between 0 to 100% for delivered quantities or –100% to +100% for net quantities. Enter a floating point number for the K value for each analog quantity. K is calculated with two methods—one for unipolar quantities and one for bipolar quantities.

Zero Offset

Zero offsets are available for meters with firmware revision 3.02 or higher. Zero offsets can either be 0 or an integer. Integer values for Zero Offset are typically entered as negative values. The Zero Offset defines the mid-point value or the value of zero. The range for the analog output value for delivered quantities is 0 to 100%. For net quantities, the range is –100% to +100%. Defining a zero offset allows you to improve the resolution of the analog output by sending values in smaller increments. For more information about the analog output range for net and delivered quantities, see Analog Output Ranges. Typically you enter a negative value for the zero offset to “set it back” to zero.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-57

Operating Instructions

Table 3.31 Parameters, Output Configuration Parameter Disable Analog Output in Test Mode

Description Check this box to disable analog outputs while the meter is in Test mode.

Digital State Tab Event

Select the event that will trigger the digital state output from the dropdown list.

State

Select the state definition for each output line from the drop-down list.

Disable Digital State Output in Test Mode

Check this box to disable digital state outputs while the meter is in Test mode.

Digital Pulse Tab Quantity

Select the quantity (energy value) you want to trigger an output on one of the eight digital pulse output lines.

Ke

Set the Ke value, or energy per pulse, for each digital pulse quantity.

Disable Digital Pulse Output in Test Mode

Check this box to disable digital pulse outputs while the meter is in Test mode.

Input Configuration Table 3.32 describes parameters that define the input configuration of the Q1000. There are three forms of data input using the LONWORKs I/O network: analog, digital state, and digital pulse.1 Use the Analog tab to define up to 8 analog inputs. Since each input is on a node on the network, you must program the meter and link the physical analog inputs to logical analog inputs. To describe an analog input, a list mapping the index (analog input number) to the input value must be downloaded to the meter. The value received from the network is a relative scale from 0 to 100 percent. Use the Digital State tab to define up to 16 digital state inputs. The purpose of this configuration is to define the action to take when there is a transition on a digital state input. Each Digital State Input can be triggered by one or more of the following actions: EOI, Self-Read, Demand Reset, or Blink Display. Additionally, an input can be configured to trigger on the rising or falling edge of an input.

1.

3-58

Analog inputs are not currently available in the Q1000 meter. They are a planned enhancement for a future release.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

The purpose of the Digital State Input configuration is to define the action to take when there is a transition on a digital state input. Each Digital State Input can be triggered by one or more of the following actions: Self-Read, Demand Reset, or Blink Display. Additionally, an input can be configured to trigger on the rising or falling edge of an input. Digital state inputs can be used to log the closing of a relay, switching of capacitor banks, or noting any event that can signal a contact closure. The date and time of each opening and closing of the state inputs can be written to the event log. The status inputs can also trigger an action in the Q1000 meter as follows: •

Register Self Read or Freeze—Enable a Self-Read action on transitions of the digital state input lines. Selecting this option disables the Read on Digital State Input option on the Self Read Configuration: Events tab.

•

Demand Reset—Enable a Demand Reset action on transitions of the digital state input lines.

•

Blink Display—Enable a Blink Display action on transitions of the digital state input lines.

Use the Digital Pulse tab to define up to 8 digital pulse inputs. These inputs are used to collect input pulses from an external device and store those pulses in mass memory. Configuration is similar to configuring Analog Inputs . The pulses that are received from the network become energy quanta after the multiplication by Ke. These energy quanta can be used in different registers: Load Profile, Demand, or Energy. Table 3.32 Parameters, Input Configuration Parameter

Description

Analog Tab Maximum Value

Sets the scale factor for each of the eight analog input lines. The input value is multiplied by this value before being used as an instantaneous value.

Quantity Description

Describes the quantity for each analog input line. Can be up to 40 characters of text. This name is not stored in the meter. Note: This field is currently disabled.

Digital State Tab Self Read

Check this box to enable a Self-Read action on transitions of the digital state input lines. Note: Selecting this option disables the Read on Digital State Input option on the Self Read Configuration - Events tab.

Demand Reset

Check this box to enable a Demand Reset action on transitions of the digital state input lines.

Blink Display

Check this box to enable a Blink Display action on transitions of the digital state input lines.

Triggered By

Select the type of transition that must occur on the digital state lines to trigger the action for the corresponding digital state input. You can choose an off-to-on transition, an on-to-off transition, or any transition.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-59

Operating Instructions

Table 3.32 Parameters, Input Configuration Parameter Disable Digital State Input in Test Mode

Description Check this box to disable digital state inputs while the meter is in Test mode.

Digital Pulse Tab Ke

Set the Ke (pulse weight) value, or energy per pulse, for each digital pulse input quantity. The range of values is 0.00001 to 100000.00000.

Quantity Description

Enter up to 40 text characters to describe each digital pulse input line.

Disable Input in Test Mode

Check this box to disable digital pulse inputs while the meter is in Test mode.

Call Window Configuration Table 3.33 describes parameters that define the call window configuration of the Q1000. A call window is a programmed period during which the meter can answer the phone or call home. For meters with internal or external modems, the changing from one call window to another triggers the Q1000 meter to write the number of rings to wait to answer the phone to the modem. Each day of the week has two independent call windows. For more information, see Chapter 6, Communications. Table 3.33 Parameters, Call Window Configuration Parameter

3-60

Description

Day of Week

Defines which day the current configuration applies to. Separate call windows are supported for each day of the week.

Window Operation

Selects state of operation for call window one and two. Choices are open all day, closed all day, and custom.

Start Time

Sets the time at which a custom call window opens.

Stop Time

Sets the time at which a custom call window closes.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Phone Home Configuration Table 3.34 describes parameters that define the phone home configuration of the Q1000. For more information, see Section 6, Communications. Table 3.34 Parameters, Phone Home Configuration Parameter

Description

General Tab Call Home Enabled

Check this box if you want to enable the phone home capability of the meter. The remaining fields on this screen only display if this option is enabled.

Phone #1

Select a phone number to use for phone #1. The list of phone numbers are created using the Phone Numbers option in the Program Editor defaults. In the Dial Type area, select whether the call will use dial tone or pulse dialing.

Phone #2

Select a phone number to use for phone #2. The list of phone numbers are created using the Phone Numbers option in the Program Editor defaults. In the Dial Type area, select whether the call will use dial tone or pulse dialing.

Display Messages

Enable up to three display messages for any combination of New Events, Current Call, and Window Activity.

Retry Strategy Tab Maximum Attempts on Clock Error

A clock error occurs when the meter’s CPU cannot read the time from its clock chip at power up. This setting specifies how many times the meter will attempt to call home in that case. When the CPU does not know the time, it will ignore call window settings. The range is 1 to 255. For Canada, this value must be less than or equal to 10.

Enable Fixed Delay

Enables a phone home call to occur after a fixed delay from the last attempt. If you choose this option, you must define the Fixed Delay Time in seconds.

Fixed Delay Time

Sets the fixed delay time that passes between call attempts.

Enable Random Delay

Enables a phone home call to occur after a random delay from the last attempt. If you choose this option, you must define the Random Delay Minimum Time and the Random Delay Maximum Time in seconds.

Random Delay Minimum Time

Sets the minimum delay time that passes before another call attempt.

Random Delay Maximum Time

Sets the maximum delay that could pass before another call attempt.

Lock Meter After Failure

If you do not want the meter to try to phone this number again after an unsuccessful attempt to phone home, check this box. Once locked, a phone number can be unlocked by any of the switches on the meter or by a communication with the meter. Note: Canadian-only feature.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-61

Operating Instructions

Table 3.34 Parameters, Phone Home Configuration Parameter

Description

Number of Attempts Before Lock

Canadian Installations: If you check the box above, and If this value is not zero, it represents the maximum number of attempts per phone number before the meter locks itself and does not attempt to phone this number again. Other Installations: If you check the box above, this field fixes the number of times the meter goes through the phone home sequence (up to 4 attempts) before waiting. Once it has waited, it repeats the process based on the Number of Attempts and Time Between Retries set in the next two fields. This continues indefinitely. Note: Canadian-only feature.

Number of Retries Before Wait

Select the number of phone home attempts the meter will try using this phone number before waiting for the next retry. Note: Canadian-only feature.

Time Between Retries

Select the time to wait between phone home attempts. Note: Canadian-only feature.

Call Window Strategy Tab

3-62

Call Outside Call Window

The meter calls home when the window is open. However, you can override this restriction by enabling this option. If enabled, the meter calls home only once if the window is closed. If the call fails, the event is noted so that the meter places calls later when the window opens. If the window is open at the time of the event, the event is handled normally.

Outage Length

Enter the number of seconds an outage must last in order for the meter to attempt to call home. In this release of PC-PRO+ 98, this field will accept a maximum value of 99999 seconds, but the allowed range is 0 to 65535 seconds.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Phone Home Event Configuration Table 3.35 describes parameters that define the phone home event configurations of the Q1000. These are events which trigger phone calls home. For more information, see Section 6, Communications. Table 3.35 Parameters, Phone Home Event Configuration Parameter

Description

Add

Click this button to add an event to the Event Name list.

Delete

Select an event, and then click this button to delete an event from the Event Name list.

Event Name

This column displays the selected list of events. The Q1000 can support up to 32 events. The events that display in this list are the ones you define using the Add Phone Home Event dialog.

Attempt #1-4

Select up to 4 Attempt options for each event. For example, when an event occurs, on Attempt #1 you may choose to use Phone #1 and place the call on Port 2. If the call is not successful, the Q1000 tries again using the parameters for Attempt #2. If you define a third and fourth attempt, the Q1000 will continue trying those phone number / port combinations.

Priority Up

The event’s priority is the number at the left of the PC-PRO+ 98 software dialog. To change an event’s priority, you must highlight the number and then use the buttons to move the event up or down in the priority list. Select an event, and then click this button to move the event up in the priority list. Each line entry shows the Phone Number / Port attempt combinations for the calls. When several events occur simultaneously, the event used is the one that is nearest the top of the list. For example, if the event on line 1 occurs, the 4 attempts for line 1 are used. If the event on line 1 does not occur, the Q1000 looks for the next line entry whose event is TRUE. In all cases, the higher priority event takes precedence and retries start over from Attempt #1.

Priority Down

Select an event, and then click this button to move the event down in the priority list.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-63

Operating Instructions

Self Read Configuration Table 3.36 describes parameters that define the self read configuration of the Q1000. Table 3.36 Parameters, Self-Read Configuration Parameter

Description

General Tab Number of Reads to Store

Sets the number of reads to store in memory. Valid range is 0 to 32.

Periodic Tab Read Frequency

Choose the appropriate Periodic Read Frequency option to determine how often self reads occur, if at all. You can choose: • •

•

No Periodic Reads—If you choose this option, no other Read Frequency fields are available. Read Every N Minutes—If you choose this option, you must enter the number of minutes between reads and the number of minutes after the top of the hour for Read Synchronization. This allows reads to be synchronized across other meters. Valid range is 1 to 60 minutes; this selection must be evenly divisible into 60. Read Every N Hours—If you choose this option, you must enter the number of hours between reads and the hours after midnight for Read Synchronization. This allows reads to be synchronized across other meters. Valid range is 2 to 12 hours; this selection must be evenly divisible into 1440.

For example, if you do the following: • • •

select the Read Every N Hours option, set the Hours Between Reads to 6, and set the Read Synchronization time to 3 hours after midnight,

the meter will perform self reads at 3 AM, 9 AM, 3 PM, and 9 PM. Actions to Perform After Read

Select the actions the meter should perform after a self read is completed.

Weekly Tab Read Weekly

Check this box to enable self reads to occur weekly. When you check this box the other fields on this tab become available.

Time of Read

Enter the time of day you want the weekly self read to occur.

Days of Week to Read

Select the day of the week you want the weekly self read to occur.

Actions to Perform After Read

Select the actions the meter should perform after a self read is completed.

Monthly Tab Read Monthly

3-64

Check this box to enable self reads to occur monthly. When you check this box the other fields on this tab become available.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Table 3.36 Parameters, Self-Read Configuration Parameter

Description

Day of Month to Read

Select the day of the month you want the monthly self read to occur.

Time of Read

Enter the time of day you want the monthly self read to occur.

Actions to Perform After Read

Select the actions the meter should perform after a self read is completed.

Events Tab Read on Digital State Input

Check this box to enable a self read to be triggered by a Digital State Input. Note: This option is not available if you have selected the Self Read option on the Input Configuration - Digital State tab. If you select this option, the Input Configuration - Digital State tab will display for you to select a self read input channel. If you cancel the operation, this option is cleared and normal operation begins again.

Read on Demand Reset

Check this box to enable a self read to be triggered by a Demand Reset.

Read on Remote Request

Check this box to enable a self read to be triggered by a Remote Request.

Read at Season Change

Check this box to enable a self read to be triggered by a change of seasons. Note: This field is currently disabled.

Read on Test Mode Entry

Check this box to enable a self read to be triggered when the meter is placed in Test Mode.

Read on Test Mode Exit

Check this box to enable a self read to be triggered when the meter is removed from Test Mode.

Actions to Perform After Read

For each event, select the actions the meter should perform after a self read is completed.

Registers Tab Registers to Store

Check the box beside each register you want to store in the meter’s memory when a self read occurs. Your choices depend on the Quantities you configured previously in the Quantity Selections component. The maximum number of registers that can be stored in each self read is 60. All self reads store the same registers.

Meter Memory Bar Meter Memory Bar

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

See page 3-46.

3-65

Operating Instructions

Service Configuration Table 3.37 describes parameters that define the meter's service configuration. Table 3.37 Parameters, Service Configuration Parameter

Description

Clock Synchronization

Select the clock synchronization method you want to use. You can choose either the internal crystal or line synchronization. If the meter is powered by an external AC or DC auxiliary supply and no line voltages are present, the clock defaults to synchronization to the internal crystal. If any of the three phases are present (and Line Sync is selected), the meter will sync to line frequency provided the line frequency is between 45 and 65 Hz. If you select Internal Crystal synchronization, the meter determines the time from the oscillation signal of an internal crystal. If you select Line Frequency, the meter uses a signal derived from the line frequency of the voltage.

Line Frequency

Select the line frequency that matches the line frequency at the installation location. You can choose either 50 or 60 Hz. This is the nominal expected frequency of the line voltage. The line frequency can vary from 45 to 65 Hz before the meter reverts to the internal crystal for timing.

Service Type

Select the type of service to which the meter is connected. For the first release, you can choose either 3 phase 4-wire WYE (3 element) or 3 phase 3-wire delta (2 element). The service type you select determines which equations are used in the calculation of quantities. For example, the calculation of the average per phase voltage and current values must be performed with the correct number of elements. This entry affects demand registers, energy registers, and voltage quality events.

Nominal Voltage

Enter the number you want to use to represent the nominal voltage value. This voltage value is used throughout the program to calculate deviations from normal voltage. Minimum = 24 Volts; Maximum = 600 Volts. The nominal voltage is used for determining power quality events and System Loss Compensation (SLC) for scaling voltage dependent quantities.

Nominal Current

Enter the number you want to use to represent the nominal current value. The nominal current value is for informational purposes only and does not affect calculations. This meter nominal current is independent of the SLC Nominal Current in the SLC component. Note: This field is currently disabled.

3-66

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

User Data Configuration Table 3.38 describes parameters that define the meter's user data. Up to 24 items of user data can be programmed into the Q1000. This data can be displayed as text on the meter display and viewed at a later time with meter programming software. Table 3.38 Parameters, User Data Parameter

Description

User Data #1 - #24

Enter up to 24 fields of free-form text. Each field can store up to 16 text characters. Each display line on the Q1000 will hold up to 16 characters. User data fields can also be used in the following ways: •

•

•

You can configure a line on the Q1000 meter display to display text using the text from a user data field. The selections for the user data fields are available in the Non-Register Values section of the displayable items. The first five user data fields can be modified at program time if you select them on the Programming Options | Electricity tab. User Field number one in Programming Options corresponds to User Data field number one on this dialog. You can use one of the first five user data fields to define a unit ID for the QDIP protocol (QDIPID). For detailed instructions, see the online help for User Defined Unit ID for QDIP Protocol.

Input/Output Modules The following sections describe disassembly and re-assembly of the Input/Output Modules as well as an overview of the components.

I/O Module Disassembly To disassemble an I/O module perform the following steps: 1

Turn power to I/O module OFF.

2

Remove the module from any mountings and remove any connections to its terminal strips.

3

Remove the four corner screws shown in Figure 3.18 followed by the two terminal strips as seen in Figure 3.19.

Power Connections

Terminal Strip - Top

Cover Screws

Cover Screws

Terminal Strip - Bottom Figure 3.18 I/O Module Disassembly

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-67

Operating Instructions

Use small screwdriver to pry terminal strip loose from module base

Figure 3.19 I/O Module Terminal Strip Removal

4

Push in both tabs located on the module's sides with a flathead screwdriver and remove the center cover. Be sure to only use the screwdriver inside the square in the black casing as shown in Figure 3.20, as other methods will crack/snap the external cover.

Press here on both sides with small screwdriver to remove the module center cover. Do not pry on black tab

Figure 3.20 I/O Module Center Cover Removal

3-68

5

Remove both internal boards together.

6

Remove both thin 16-pin gray ribbon cables from the power supply board.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

7

Figure 3.21 shows the power supply board. The other board is the functional board which depends upon which type of I/O module you possess (i.e. Digital State Input, Pulse Input, and so forth).

Figure 3.21 I/O Module Power Supply Board

I/O Module Assembly To assemble an I/O module perform the following steps: 1

Locate the printed text on the back of the I/O module casing. Situate the module casing so the text is right side up.

2

Connect the power supply board (Figure 3.21) to the functional board with both 16-pin flat gray ribbon cables.

3

Insert both boards into their respective interior tracks with the power supply board on the topside and the terminal connector tabs in the direction of the opening.

4

Place the clear center cover onto the module. It will only lock into position one way. When inserted correctly the tabs on both sides will easily snap into position.

5

The bottom terminal strip is marked with the module's serial number. Fit the bottom terminal strip to the module case and tighten the two corner screws.

6

The top terminal strip contains the external power connections. Fit the top terminal strip to the module case and tighten the two corner screws.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-69

Operating Instructions

IEC 2-wire KY Pulse Output Module The 2-wire pulse output has a user-selectable pulse length. DIP switches located on the output board of the IEC 2-wire KY Pulse Output Module allow the user to select a 10, 20, 40, or 80 millisecond output. Following removal of terminals and viewing cover of the module, the DIP switches on the output board are identified as shown in Figure 3.22.

DIP Switches

Figure 3.22 IEC 2-wire KY Output Board DIP Switches

Table 3.39 shows DIP switch positions and corresponding timing parameters for the pulse output module. Table 3.39 IEC 2-wire KY Pulse Output Module DIP Switch Settings Output 1

Output 2

Output 3

Output 4

Pulse Length

S1 = 0 S2 = 0

S3 = 0 S4 = 0

S5 = 0 S6 = 0

S7 = 0 S8 = 0

10 msec

S1 = 0 S2 = 1

S3 = 0 S4 = 1

S5 = 0 S6 = 1

S7 = 0 S8 = 1

20 msec

S1 = 1 S2 = 0

S3 = 1 S4 = 0

S5 = 1 S6 = 0

S7 = 1 S8 = 0

40 msec

S1 = 1 S2 = 1

S3 = 1 S4 = 1

S5 = 1 S6 = 1

S7 = 1 S8 = 1

80 msec

0 = switch open 1 = switch closed

3-70

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

IEC 2-Wire KY or KYZ Pulse Input Module A single Pulse Input Module has been developed which is very flexible in functionality and timing parameters. Internal jumpers on the input board of the module allow the user to select the following features: 1

KYZ or IEC 2-wire KY pulse inputs

2

Wetting voltage for contacts may be supplied internally (contact closure) or externally (voltage pulse)

3

Input pulse duration (10, 20, 40, or 80 milliseconds)

To configure the module as a KYZ or IEC 2-wire KY module, locate jumper JP1 using Figure 3.24 and refer to Table 3.40 for jumper settings. Table 3.40 Pulse Input KYZ or IEC 2-wire KY Jumper Selections Jumper

IEC 2-wire KY

KYZ

JP1

1&2

2&3

Jumpers JP2 through JP5 are used to select the source of wetting voltage for KYZ or IEC 2-wire KY contacts. See Figure 3.24 for jumper locations and refer to Table 3.41 for jumper settings. Table 3.41 Wetting Voltage Jumper Selections Pulse Input

Jumper

Contact Closure

Voltage Pulse

1

JP2

1&2

2&3

2

JP3

1&2

2&3

3

JP4

1&2

2&3

4

JP5

1&2

2&3

Input pulse duration must be selected with consideration to the timing parameters of the transmitting device. For IEC 2-wire KY devices, the pulse duration of the input module must match the duration of the transmitting device. For modules configured as KYZ input modules, the duration must be set below the smallest interval possible between pulses by the transmitting device. The timing function of the KYZ input module is a duration in which the module will not accept incoming pulses. This feature prevents noise or bouncing of the contacts causing false pulses. For example: A SchlumbergerSema input module is configured for KYZ inputs and is connected to a device capable of transmitting a maximum of 40 pulses per second. This corresponds to 25 milliseconds between pulses. Pulse input duration should be selected to 10 or 20 milliseconds. Jumpers JP6 through JP9 are used to select the input timing parameters for KYZ or IEC 2-wire KY modules. See Figure 3.24 and Figure 3.25 for jumper locations and refer to Table 3.42 for jumper settings.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-71

Operating Instructions

Table 3.42 Input Pulse Duration Jumper Selections Pulse Input

Timing Function Jumper

10 ms

20 ms

40 ms

80 ms

1

JP6

4&5

3&6

2&7

1&8

2

JP7

4&5

3&6

2&7

1&8

3

JP8

4&5

3&6

2&7

1&8

4

JP9

4&5

3&6

2&7

1&8

A

B

Figure 3.23 Pulse Input Module Input Board

The left half of the Pulse Input Module Input Board (A in Figure 3.23) is shown in a larger view in Figure 3.24. The right half of the Pulse Input Module Input Board (B in Figure 3.23) is shown in a larger view in Figure 3.25.

3-72

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

JP1

JP5

JP4

JP9

JP8 JP7 JP6

Figure 3.24 Pulse Input Board Jumper Locations (JP1 & JP4-9)

JP3

JP2

Figure 3.25 Pulse Input Board Jumper Locations (JP2 & JP3)

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-73

Operating Instructions

Analog Output Module Configuration Settings The Analog Output module provides the user with a variety of useful configurations all in one module. The Analog module can provide voltage or current outputs. Three ranges are supported for voltage and current outputs.

Ranges Each channel can be configured to output a DC voltage or a DC current. The range is selectable by a DIP switch on a per-channel basis. Regardless of which configuration you select, you should disconnect the unused wires from the I/O module terminal strip. The current terminals are separate from the voltage terminals. When you select a current output, the voltages on the voltage terminals outputs have undefined values; you should not connect any device to the voltage terminal outputs to limit susceptibility to transients. When you select a voltage output, the current on the current terminals outputs have undefined values; you should not connect any device to the current terminal outputs to limit susceptibility to transients. You should need to short the unused current terminals to preserve immunity to transient influences. Shorting tabs are shipped with the module.

The meter sends values between -100% and 100% to the module. These values must be translated into physical current or voltage on the module's terminals. The generic (linear) transfer function is shown in Table 3.43. Table 3.43 Relative Value to Physical Output Translation Network Variable Value -100% 0% 100 %

Current or Voltage Output Value Minimum Value of the Range—“Min Value” Zero Value of the Range—“Zero Value” Maximum Value of the Range—“Max Value”

When power is not applied to the module, the output goes to a “Zero Value”. The “Min Value”, “Max Value”, “Zero Value” are described in the next paragraphs. Unipolar Quantities Delivered quantities start at zero and go to the delivered maximum or full scale, which is 100%. Therefore, the analog output range for delivered quantities is 0 to 100%. W Delivered Range Example: For 0 to 50,000 W delivered, 0 represents 0 Watts and 100% represents 50,000 Watts. Bipolar Quantities For net quantities, values can range from the negative of the full scale value to the positive of the full scale value with zero in the middle. Therefore, for net quantities, the analog output range is -100% to +100%. W Net Range Example:

3-74

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

For an intertie site where watts are delivered or received, the maximum number in either direction must be estimated. After estimating the maximum, establish that value as the full scale value. The positive maximum is +100% (full scale positive) The negative maximum represents the watts received or -100% (full scale negative) Using 4 to 20mA Range as a Unipolar Output It is very common for industrial data acquisition systems to use a 4-20 mA in a unipolar mode, that is, 4 mA represents 0. To use such equipment with the Q1000 Analog Output Module, simply apply the bipolar formulas for offset and gain. For example, to produce 4 mA when 0 Watts are delivered and 20 mA when 7200 Watts are delivered, use:

7200 – 0 K = --------------------- = 36 200

and

7200 + 0 Offset = – --------------------- = – 3600 2

Current Ranges These selections are available when the “Current / Voltage” DIP switch is on the “Current” position. The range selection is on a per-channel basis (2 DIP switches per channel). You can select 3 current ranges with the switches on the module. Table 3.44 I/O Module Current Ranges Range ID

Min Value

Zero Value

Max Value

Range 0 (unipolar)

0 mA

0 mA

1 mA

Range 1 (bipolar)

-1 mA

0 mA

1 mA

Range 2 (bipolar)

4 mA

12 mA

20 mA

Range 2 (unipolar)

0 mA

4 mA

20 mA

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-75

Operating Instructions

Voltage Ranges These selections are available when the “Current / Voltage” DIP switch is on the “Voltage” position The user is able to select 3 voltage ranges with switches on the module. Table 3.45 I/O Module Voltage Ranges Range ID

Min Value

Zero Value

Max Value

Range 0 (unipolar)

0V

0V

5V

Range 1 (bipolar)

0V

0V

10 V

Range 2 (bipolar)

-5 V

0V

5V

The I/O Modules receive network variable updates from the Q1000 meter. After the network variable is received, the analog output (current or voltage) will reach a stable level in 500 milliseconds or less. This time includes the firmware processing of the network variable value, the correction with calibration parameters, and communication with the Digital to Analog converter and the converter’s settling time. The meter updates each channel of the module every second.

Loss of Communication When the module loses communications with the meter, the behavior of the analog output is controlled by two LC (Loss of Communication) switches. Table 3.46 shows the configurations of the switches that are available. Table 3.46 Loss of Communication Switch Settings Setting

Switches

Zero after 10 seconds

OFF, OFF

Zero after 20 seconds

OFF, ON

Zero after 60 seconds

ON, OFF

Maintain Value

ON, ON

Comments Factory Default

Output stays at last update’s value

In the “ON, ON” position, the module outputs the last value received from the meter. This value is maintained until the power is removed or communication is reestablished. In the other positions, the module maintains the value for a predefined time, and then the value goes to the “Zero Value”. This behavior is defined for ALL channels by these two switches. However, the channels are independent and maintain an interval timer (in firmware) to keep track of the updates. This means that a particular channel may time out and set its value to the “Zero Value” without affecting the other channels.

3-76

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

SW1

SW2

SW3

I1+ I1- V1-V1+ I2+ I2- V2- V2+

SW4

I3+ I3- V3- V3+ I4+ I4- V4- V4+

Figure 3.26 DIP Switch and Jumper Positioning

In Table 3.47 and Table 3.48, an “x” denotes the channel number. Channel numbers correspond to DIP switch and jumper numbers. Settings for each channel are set independent of the other channels. In order to configure all four channels, each of the four DIP switch and jumper banks must be configured to the desired setting.

To insure proper operation, all unused current outputs should be shorted using the supplied shorting bars.

Table 3.47 Output Type DIP Switch and Jumper Options Output Type

Current/Voltage Selection

SWx-1 Position

SWx-2 Position

SWx-3 Position

SWx-4 Position

JP x01

OT 1

CURRENT 0-1mA

UP

UP

UP

UP

7 to 8 AND 5 to 6

OT 2

CURRENT -1 to +1mA

UP

UP

DOWN

UP

7 to 8 AND 5 to 6

OT 3

CURRENT 4 to 20mA

UP

DOWN

UP

UP

7 to 8 AND 3 to 4 AND 1 to 2

OT 4

VOLTAGE 0 to 10 V

UP

UP

UP

DOWN

5 to 6

OT 5

VOLTAGE -5 to +5V

UP

UP

DOWN

DOWN

7 to 8 AND 5 to 6

OT 6

VOLTAGE -10 to +10

UP

DOWN

UP

DOWN

5 to 6

Table 3.48 Mode Selection Mode

SWx-5

SWx-6

NORMAL

UP

UP

TEST_MIN

UP

DOWN

DOWN

UP

90% of TEST_MAX

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-77

Operating Instructions

Table 3.48 Mode Selection Mode RESERVED

SWx-5

SWx-6

DOWN

DOWN

Table 3.49 Time Out Selection TIME OUT VALUE

SW2-7

SW2-8

10 SECONDS

UP

UP

20 SECONDS

UP

DOWN

60 SECONDS

DOWN

UP

MAINTAIN LAST

DOWN

DOWN

The meter will hold its value for 10, 20, or 60 seconds, or until it receives a new updated value. If your program has more I/O modules than you are actually using, the meter will drop out communications periodically to “look” for the other modules. To prevent this behavior, only program the actual I/O modules you are using.

QUANTUM Q1000 Meter Keys QUANTUM Q1000 meters with firmware version 3.02m and above include meter keys. Earlier versions of the firmware do not support the MeterKey® feature. Keys are updated as new firmware versions are released to support new functions. Meter Keys are set at the SchlumbergerSema factory at the time of meter manufacture and correspond to the meter features ordered. The meter key settings are retained when the meter firmware is upgraded from a 3.x firmware to a higher firmware version. Two package groups of meter functions may be ordered on a Q1000 meter. These are the Basic Package and the Enhanced Package. Each of these standard packages may be ordered with several additional optional features. •

The Basic Package which configures the Q1000 meter with functionality similar to but exceeding the QUANTUM STQ meter includes 0.1% accuracy, around 440 Kbytes of user memory, quad port communications, one standard load profile with 24 channels, 32 I/O capability (with purchase of I/O modules separately), System Loss Compensation - Basic, auxiliary power (optional), one splitter communications cable and TOU (when available).

•

The Enhanced Package includes the Basic Package with two standard load profiles with 48 channels, 64 I/O capability (with purchase of I/O modules separately), Voltage Quality and Harmonics detection, GPS time synchronization, and choice of one of the advanced protocols.

These and many more features may be checked individually on the QUANTUM Q1000 Hardware Specification Form when the meter is ordered.

3-78

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Firmware The Q1000 was designed to be the most advanced meter in today's market. But what about tomorrow? What features will be required in the future? With deregulation and utility privatization changing the business climate of the electricity industry, many needs will exist a few years from now that are not yet definable today. For example, more protocols could be developed or maybe even a universal protocol agreed upon. Also, newer power quality standards may be instituted. To be prepared for this, we included downloadable firmware in the meter. Downloadable firmware allows you to easily add functionality to the Q1000. Table 3.50 describes the Q1000 meter firmware revisions. Table 3.50 Firmware Revisions as of December 2001 Revision Number

Date

Description

1.01b

June 1998

This was the first production version of the QUANTUM Q1000 that was released. The Version 1.01b firmware was the first to be sent with the initial release of the QUANTUM Q1000. The features listed were the first standard features of the QUANTUM Q1000: 0.1% accuracy, quad port communications, user-configurable memory, 1 standard load profile with 24 channels, an optional additional load profile with another 24 channels, standard 32 I/O capability and an optional additional 32 I/ O capability (both with purchase of I/O module separately), system loss compensation, optional auxiliary power, voltage quality, harmonics, two 1200115,200 bps COM ports, flexible display, thousands of quantities to select from, 16 configurable threshold alarms, 32 flexible self reads, and support for 50 or 60 Hertz operation.

2.00a

December 1998

This was the second production version of the QUANTUM Q1000. This version of firmware was the first to include DNP 3.0 protocol.

2.03b

May 1999

This was the third production version of firmware for the QUANTUM Q1000. This firmware was the first to support Form 5 meters.

2.06e

July 1999

This was the fourth production version of firmware for the QUANTUM Q1000. This firmware included support of the 33,600 bps internal modem.

2.07a

May 2000

This firmware version corrected a timing issue after a power down.

3.02m

June 2000

This was the sixth revision of Q1000 firmware was release for production. This is the first firmware the user is required to use PC-PRO+ 98 Version 2.0 or higher. Improvements included: support for V2 and I2 quantities, subtractive totalization, improved Advanced Protocol programming, expanded reconfigure support, Digital State Inputs, some Last Self Read register display options, IEC 60870-5-102 protocol support, DNP 3.0 conversion service 11 support, GPS time synchronization, software file import and export, MeterKeys, some primary value display, Analog Output improvements, SLC corrections, and optical port cable support from different vendors.

3.03a

July 2000

This was the seventh revision of Q1000 firmware was release for production. A calculation was revised to the firmware that computes VA Arithmetic. No other changes were made to the firmware code.

3.03e

December 2000

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

This was the eighth revision of Q1000 firmware was release for production. This firmware was released to improve the performance of the GAL and PAL component in the meter. The calibration constants are now stored in the Main board.

3-79

Operating Instructions

Table 3.50 Firmware Revisions as of December 2001 Revision Number

Date

Description

4.01i

January 2001

This ninth firmware version of the QUANTUM Q1000 is the first to support MODBUS Protocol and HHF File retrievals. This is the first firmware that is used with PC-PRO+ 98 Version 2.1. Low current meters are supported. SLC programming moved into PC-PRO+ 98. New I/O bindings supported. RS-485 supported; multi-drop supported.

5.x a

December 2001

This version of the Technical Reference Guide has been updated to include the abilities of this upcoming firmware. This tenth firmware version added TOU, phone line sharing, expanded reconfigures, DNP 3.0 protocol improvements, import/export DST table, DST for world, MODBUS protocol improvements, CPU timing improvements, optical port baud rate up to 19,200 bps and new TOU calendar.

a

The final version of the 5.x firmware was not available at publishing time.

Firmware Upgrades The internal instruction set for the Q1000, or firmware, can be upgraded without changing any physical hardware. The firmware is downloaded to the meter using the Firmware Download Access Password and a terminal emulator program. A SchlumbergerSema supplied file is required to perform this operation. There are two classes of firmware upgrades; those versions that can be upgraded directly to the latest firmware, and those that must be downgraded to a previous version before the upgrade to the latest version can be accomplished. Table 3.51 shows these categories. Table 3.51 Firmware Upgrades Version

3-80

Special Instructions

2.x to 4.01i

You can upgrade directly from 2.x firmware (or lower) to 4.x firmware (or higher). However, you must remember that 4.01i firmware requires PC-PRO+ 98 Version 2.0 or higher.

2.x to 5.x

You can upgrade directly from 2.x firmware (or lower) to 5.x firmware.

3.x to 4.x

The method of downloading firmware requires both the existing revision and the new revision to exist in the meter at the same time. The 3.x firmware is too large to exist with 4.x; therefore, you cannot upgrade directly from 3.x firmware to 4.01i firmware. You must first downgrade to 2.x firmware and then upgrade the firmware from 2.x to 4.x (or higher) firmware as described above.

3.x to 5.x

The method of downloading firmware requires both the existing revision and the new revision to exist in the meter at the same time. The 3.x firmware is too large to exist with 5.x; therefore, you cannot upgrade directly from 3.x firmware to 5.x firmware. You must first downgrade to 2.x firmware and then upgrade the firmware from 2.x to 5.x (or higher) firmware as described above.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Table 3.51 Firmware Upgrades Version 4.x to 5.x

Special Instructions A new loader process allows you to upgrade directly from 4.x firmware to 5.x firmware.

Firmware Upgrade Process Specific terminal emulator commands or processes refer to the Microsoft Accessory Program “Hyperterminal” (hereafter “HT”). Other terminal emulators may vary in appearance, though function should be acceptable.

This process will completely reset the Q1000 and all data will be erased. The meter configuration will revert to a default configuration. I/O bindings are retained, however.

User notes are located at the end of this section. The process is as follows: 1

To increase download reliability, copy the new firmware file to the PC’s harddrive. Remember where this file is written; it will need to be accessed in step 13.

2

Using PC-PRO+ 98, log on to meter.

3

Read and record all desired meter data.

4

Under “Communication Setup” in PC-PRO+ 98, reprogram meter with one communication port defined with “LOADER” protocol (the default baud rate is 9600 bps; however this can be changed later). This is the port that will be used for firmware downloading.

At least one port must always be defined as Mini-DLMS. If an internal modem is installed, do not use port 2 for the download process.

5

After initializing meter, log off meter and close PC-PRO+ 98.

6

Open any terminal emulation program that supports X-Modem file transfer protocol. If using HT, and a Connection Description has already been created, use the open function. The first time this process is performed, a Connection Description must be created. A “Phone Number” dialog box will appear; change the “Connect Using” field to the appropriate COM port on your computer and then click OK.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-81

Operating Instructions

7

Configure the following communications parameters: Baud

9600

Data Bits

8

Parity

None

Stop Bits

1 (this parameter is ignored)

Flow Control

None

(This dialog may be re-edited by selecting File | Properties and then clicking the Configure button.) 8

Select File | Properties and then select the Settings tab. On the Emulation dialog, select TTY emulation.

For HT use the two phone icons in the toolbar at the top of the window to connect and disconnect.

9

Using the “LOADER” port configured above, connect to the meter using the terminal emulator. Click the Connect toolbar button and press the ENTER key. A prompt similar to the following should be returned: “Loader 4.01i: (9600):->” The number following “Loader” is the firmware revision currently installed in the Q1000 meter (4.01i: in the above example). The number in parenthesis is the current baud rate of the meter port being used. The Help Menu outlines the “LOADER” user options available. It is available by entering “HELP” or any other non command character. These commands are not case sensitive. The “LOADER” commands shown in Table 3.52 are available. To issue a command, type the command and press the ENTER key.

Table 3.52 LOADER Commands Command

3-82

Description

HELP

Display menu options

BAUD

Change baud rate

PASSWORD

Enter meter firmware download password for download authorization (or press ENTER if no password is programmed in the meter).

DL

Download new firmware

EXIT

Terminate password authorization

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

10 The communications baud rate can now be increased to facilitate the download. A rate of 57,600 bps is recommended (refer to the note below for more information). Type the “BAUD” command and select the meter baud rate to use (follow the screen prompts). After changing the meter baud rate, some terminal emulators, including HyperTerminal, may require a disconnect, change of terminal emulator baud rate, and then a reconnect to change the emulator’s baud rate. Supported baud rates can be computer-specific; if you experience problems downloading at 57600 bps, lower your baud rate until the download can be completed.

To change the baud rate of HT, use the disconnect phone icon. From the tool bar, select “Properties” (the hand holding the paper); then from the “Phone Number” tab, click the “Configuration” button. Change the baud rate to match that selected for the meter. Next, connect to the meter (use phone icon). The meter and the emulator are now talking at the faster baud rate. 11 Issue the “PASSWORD” command and enter the Firmware Download Access Password (or press ENTER if no password is programmed in the meter).

The Password is case sensitive. After the password is accepted, a “DL” can be issued at any time.

12 Issue a “DL”. The following should occur: The meter will display the following message: “FIRMWARE LOADER:” “DOWNLOADING!” “(AWAITING START)” The emulator will display messages similar to: •

“Stopping.”

•

“Killing task “MAIN” OK”

•

“Killing task “NETD” OK”

•

“Killing task “SWIT” OK”

•

“Killing task “DLM0” OK”

•

“Killing task “DLM1” OK”

•

“Killing task “LCDT” OK”

•

“Killing task “DSPT” OK”

•

“All Functions Stopped”

•

“Ready to receive binary file”

•

“Make sure you are using the Xmodem protocol.”

If using HT, small squares will begin to appear on the screen as the emulator waits for a binary file to be specified for sending. Other emulators may respond differently when “waiting”.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-83

Operating Instructions

13 Select the appropriate file path (for the firmware file that you will use to upgrade the meter’s firmware) and “SEND” the binary file. Be sure that when the file is selected for transfer that the transfer protocol “Xmodem” is also selected. If using HT, select “Transfer” from the menu bar and then the “Send File” command. A dialog box will prompt for the file path. Enter the path or use the browser. Also select the “Xmodem” protocol in this box.

This step is the last command needed to start the firmware download process. The following information details the steps that the meter will now perform.

14 The last line of the meter display message should change to: “STARTED” 15 During file download, HT will display a dialog box with file transfer data, a fuel gage and approximate download time. This display will vary from emulator to emulator. 16 When the file download is complete the following messages should appear on the screen: •

“End of file reached>”

•

“Download Results”

•

“Xmodem packets received: (XXXX)”

•

“Data blocks received: (XXXX)”

•

“Total firmware bytes: (XXXX)”

•

“The file was successfully downloaded!”

•

“The new firmware is now in spare flash.”

•

“Committing new firmware to executable flash”

•

“The meter will reboot in ~90 seconds, watch the meter’s display”

17 The meter display should change to: •

“COMMITTING FILE!”

•

“PAGES LEFT: XX”

•

“PLEASE WAIT”

18 The “PAGES LEFT” field will count down as data is copied from spare memory to the firmware executable area of memory. This final 90 second period is the most critical portion of the firmware download process. The new firmware is now copying itself on top of the old firmware. If the Q1000 experiences a power outage during this period, the meter will probably need to be returned to the factory.

19 The meter will start up in customer default mode. The communications ports will be set up with Mini-DLMS (PC-PRO+ 98) protocol. 20 Disconnect and Exit the terminal emulation program and launch PC-PRO+ 98. 21 Logon to the Q1000 meter and program the meter as desired.

3-84

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Operating Instructions

Helpful Hints 1

When connected to a Q1000 with HT, communications can be confirmed simply by issuing a RETURN. The emulator should respond with another prompt.

2

After a “DL” has been issued, a “CTRL X” (the Xmodem command for cancel) will abort the operation. The baud rate will revert to 9600 bps.

3

After a “DL” has been issued, the user has approximately 5 minutes to send a file. If a file is not sent within this time period the meter will time out. The baud rate will revert to 9600 bps.

4

When connected to a Q1000 with HT, if the keyboard responds sporadically (i.e. incorrect characters, long keyboard-to-screen delay times, etc.), check the computer-meter connections. Use of an RS-232 switch may also have the same result.

5

When using HT, it is helpful to enable the connect/disconnect beep. The check box can be found under the tool bar icon “Properties” (the hand holding the paper), under the “Settings” tab.

6

When downloading firmware the recommended baud rate is 57,600 bps. If this speed does not work try a lower rate. At 57,600 bps, the download process will take 8-10 minutes.

CT/VT Correction CT/VT Correction is a metering scheme that corrects for the inaccuracies of the instrument current and voltage transformers. This feature allows metering points to be metered with a higher accuracy metering system. The correction depends on the instrument transformer characteristics as well as the load characteristics. The Q1000 allows for a single point correction; therefore, a point that would be considered as the normal burden for the transformer should be selected. PC-PRO+ 98 allows the instrument transformer’s ratio and phase angle correction factors to be programmed into the meter. The transformer’s correction factors are obtained from the manufacturer’s test cards shipped with the instrument transformer. When using PC-PRO+ 98 programming software to program the CT/VT Correction into a Q1000 meter, care should be taken to ensure that the correct units are used - Minutes. Conversions from other units are given below and in the PC-PRO+ 98 help files.

CT and VT manufacturers can express the phase angle correction in radians, a percentage, or minutes on their test card. When entering phase angle correction values into your program using PC-PRO+ 98, be sure to enter values as minutes. The following formulas can be used to calculate the appropriate units. Where: X = phase angle given in minutes Y = phase angle given in radians

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

3-85

Operating Instructions

To convert to minutes: Y ´ 360 degrees ´ 60 minutesPhase Angle = ---------------------------------------------------------------------2 P radians

To convert to radians:

X ´ 2 P radians Phase Angle = -------------------------------------------------------------360 degrees ´ 60 minutes

To convert from percent to minutes: · 1% = .01 = ( 1 – 0.01 ) = .99 minutes

· 5% = .005 = ( 1 – 0.005 ) = 0.995 minutes

3-86

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Chapter 4

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary This section provides more detailed information on the capabilities and functions of the standard and extended load profile (or mass memory), Time-of-Use (TOU), meter time, event log, and event summary in the Q1000 meter. •

Load profile allows one or more integrated meter quantities to be saved periodically for later system retrieval. The meter has two independent standard load profiles, each of which can store up to 24 channels of 16 bit resolution pulse data (or 65,535 pulses per interval). Eight additional extended load profiles are also available.

•

TOU provides the ability to record meter information in new quantities using different billing charges based on the time of consumption by creating and applying TOU schedules.

•

The QUANTUM Q1000 meter maintains accurate timekeeping. In today’s electricity market, the need to maintain the same time across a population of meters spread over a wide geographic area is becoming even more important. The Q1000 meter allows a wide flexibility to synchronize the times of these meters.

•

The event log is a collection of event records that can be used to monitor the occurrence of certain conditions in the meter.

•

The event summary tool monitors the occurrence of certain events without adding a record to the event log. This can be used to monitor an event that occurs frequently without needing each date and time occurrence to be logged.

Each of these components is fully described in the following sections of this chapter.

Memory Allocation The meter has around 440 Kbytes of battery backed RAM in a RAM file system that is used for data storage that can be configured by the user.1 This user memory can be apportioned among several meter components according to their configurations. The components that can be configured to use more or less memory include energy, demand, load profile, harmonics, voltage quality, TOU, and self read. For example, all of the memory could be allocated to one load profile; it could all be allocated to harmonics, or it could be split with 50K in one load profile, 100K in another, 50K in energy, and so forth.

1.

This user memory size assumes that the user has 5.x firmware and PC-PRO+ 98 version 2.3. Older firmware versions allowed more user memory.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

4-1

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

The memory is allocated when the meter is restarted after initialization. The PC-PRO+ 98 programming software utilizes a memory bar the shows the user how much memory will be required by the current state of the Q1000 program configuration. The Q1000 can be configured to perform a large number of functions, each of which take up a variable amount of memory. Previous meters allocated specific amounts of memory for certain components. The Q1000 allocates memory dynamically allowing the user to maximize the meter’s functionality at a given location. Later, if the needs for a site change, the Q1000 meter can be reprogrammed to meet these needs. For this reason, the PC-PRO+ 98 programming software gives you constant feedback on the amount of memory your program is currently consuming. This feedback is a Meter Memory bar at the bottom of the dialog indicating the amount of meter memory currently required for the configuration. As long as the bar is in the blue region, there is sufficient meter memory for the configuration. If the bar is in the red region, the memory requirements for your configuration have exceeded the amount of memory available in the meter. You must modify your configuration to display the bar in the blue region only. If you attempt to save a program file while the bar is in the red region, the Out of Device Resources dialog is displayed. You are not allowed to continue configuring the meter if the amount of memory your program requires exceeds 200% of the meter's memory. If memory usage exceeds 200%, the 200% Warning is displayed to indicate that you cannot add additional quantities to the configuration. Reduce the memory usage to under 200% to continue modifying your program. It must be less than or equal to 100% before you can save the program.

Standard Load Profile Configuration The following attributes can be independently configured for each standard load profile component: •

interval length

•

number of channels

•

number of intervals to store

•

minimum outage length in seconds

•

option to use the global EOI source for this load profile

•

pulse weights for each load profile channel

•

quantity to record for each load profile channel

•

option to not update load profile registers during test mode.

Interval Lengths The interval length for each standard load profile in the Q1000 is programmable: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20 or 30 seconds or 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30 or 60 minutes. The interval length is the same for all 24 channels in the profile. A second set of 24 channels is available in the 2nd standard load profile and can use an interval length independent of the first group of channels. This capability provides for up to 48 channels of recording in the two standard load profiles. The interval length for all load profile information is independent of the interval length for displayed demand quantities or harmonic recording information.

4-2

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

Channel Configuration The channel configuration for the Q1000 is completely user programmable. The meter can be configured to have up to 24 channels of interval load profile data in standard load profile #1 using one interval length and up to 24 additional channels in standard load profile #2 using another interval length. The quantity recorded on a channel is independent. For example, a quantity can be recorded that is not configured for an energy register. Following are some examples of the many quantities that can be assigned as interval pulse channels: •

Watthours delivered and received

•

Qhours

•

Varhours lagging and leading

•

Vahours per quadrant

•

Amp-hours, Amp-squared-hours

•

Volt-hours, Volt-squared-hours

•

Compensated and Uncompensated Watthours and Varhours

•

Fundamental Watthours and Varhours

•

%THD V-hours and %THD A-hours per phase

•

pulse input energy values

•

analog input energy values1

Table 4.1 is a chart of load profile memory channels and storage capacity for selected interval lengths and channels: Time (in days) for recording to fill the around 440 KB of memory. For example, 10 channels of 5 minute interval data fills 500 KB in 56 days. In Revision 5.x firmware, with its additional capabilities, there are only around 440,000 bytes of storage available to the user. The number of bytes is (10 + 2 times the number of channels). Therefore, with 24 channels it takes 58 bytes of storage per interval. The maximum number of days of storage—assuming that only one load profile is being stored—can be determined by the formula shown below. 440000 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- = Max. # days of storage 24 ´ 60 ´ 60 ( 10 + [ 2 ´ Number of Channels ] ) ´ æ ----------------------------------------------------------------ö è Interval Length in Secondsø

1.

Analog inputs are not available in the current release of the Q1000 meter. They are a planned enhancement for a future release.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

4-3

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

Table 4.1 shows examples of the standard load profile data recording capacity with Firmware version 5.x.1

Table 4.1 Standard Load Profile Data Recording Capacity (in days)

Number of Recording Channels

Interval Length (minutes) 1

5

10

15

30

60

1

25

127

254

381

763

1527

2

21

109

218

327

654

1309

3

19

95

190

286

572

1145

4

16

84

169

254

509

1018

5

15

76

152

229

458

916

10

10

50

101

152

305

611

20

6

30

61

91

183

366

40

3

16

33

50

101

203

Pulse Constants For each data channel, the pulse constant is programmable as a floating point number in unit-hours per pulse. Since load profile always stores secondary information, the pulse constants apply only to secondary rated readings.

Example Calculation of kWh Pulse Weight A Q1000 meter, 120V, Class 20, 3-element, Form 9S, is programmed so that the kWh aggregate (sum of phases A, B, and C) is recorded into load profile storage. The maximum 16-bit data resolution is desired for 15 minute intervals. First, we must calculate the maximum watthour accumulation during 15 minute intervals. Wh, Max = 120V X 20A X 3 phases X 0.25 hours Wh, Max = 1800 watthours (or use the expected maximum demand) The maximum number of pulses is 65,535; therefore, the smallest pulse weight (PWMin) that can be used is: 1800Wh PW Min = æ --------------------ö = 0.0275 Wh per Pulse è 65535P ø

Example 2: Calculation of Pulse Weights for Vh A 110V, 10A, 3-element Q1000 meter is programmed. The data resolution interval is 1 minute.

1.

4-4

This data was calculated using PC-PRO+ 98 version 2.3 and Firmware 5.x. Older versions of software and firmware may allow more recording time.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

First, we calculate the maximum volthour accumulation, assuming the maximum secondary volts on each phase will be 115. Vh, Max = 115volts X 1/60 hours Vh, Max = 1.9 volthours The minimum pulse weight to produce 65535 pulses at 115 volts in one minute would be:

1.9 --------------- = 0.00003volt – Hours per Pulse 65535

Standard Load Profile Specifications Bit Resolution Each channel of the load profile is stored with 16 bit data resolution. The equivalent pulse count resolution per interval is 65,535.

Data Storage The Q1000 can flag an interval when a power outage exceeds a specified number of seconds. Other statuses include short and long intervals, time adjustments, Daylight Savings Time, saturation, clock error, checksum error, TOU rates active at the end of the interval, and an indication if the interval was ended by an external end of interval signal.

Extended Load Profile Specifications Extended Load Profiles are the eight profiles that are optionally available in addition to the standard Load Profiles. The extended profiles are numbered 3 through 10. In order to support Extended Load Profiles, the Q1000 meter must have either been ordered from the factory with the Extended Load Profile option, or have been upgraded using MeterKey. The firmware required to support Extended Load Profile is version 3.x and beyond. For example, if you have a Q1000 with version 2.0 firmware, you cannot upgrade to Extended Load Profile without first upgrading the meter firmware. For specific details on upgrading the Q1000 to support Extended Load Profile, contact your SchlumbergerSema Sales Representative.

Meter Time Timekeeping The QUANTUM Q1000 real time clock is either synchronized to line frequency or its own crystal. The crystal allows accurate time keeping to be maintained in the event of an outage or a location with line varying frequency.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

4-5

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

Table 4.2 Time Accuracy Time Accuracy

Temperature

+/-0.0022%

-10°C to +45°C

+/-0.02%

-40°C to +85°C

The time in the meter can be updated via communication ports at any time using a variety of methods.

Adjusting Meter Time The time in the meter can be adjusted in several ways. Meter initialization will set the time in the meter to the time in the PC being used. In the event of an initialization, the time can be set to any time regardless of the previous meter setting. Initialization clears all meter data.1 A second method for changing the time in the meter is a time adjustment; this adjustment can be made in several ways. The programming software can be used; or one of several Advanced Protocols can be used; or the GPS time synchronization capability can be used. When a time adjustment is performed, the meter’s time can be changed forward or backward up to one hour each time; multiple time adjustments can be done.2 During a time adjustment, demand and load profile data are maintained but are modified to accommodate the time change. In this way, the load profile structure remains consistent in spite of the time change. If time is moved backward, the ending time for the current interval remains the same as it was before the adjustment, so it will simply be extended to make a larger interval. When the real time reaches the time for end of interval, the meter will begin with normal interval lengths again. The extended interval will be flagged to indicate a long time adjustment. If time is moved forward, the old interval ending times will be maintained and empty intervals will be added to fill in the time that was skipped. Each affected interval will be flagged to indicate a short time adjustment. Additional time adjustment methods are included in several of the Advanced Protocols. Refer to the respective protocol for more information. GPS time synchronization allows for sophisticated control and setup of time changes. Frequencies of daily, hourly, and 5 minutes are supported. 61 world time zones are supported. Up to 5 GPS message formats may be simultaneously monitored, and four time adjustment windows may be configured. Time can be adjusted up to +/- 30 minutes in this method.

Time Synchronization The internal clock in the QUANTUM Q1000 meter can be synchronized to an external time reference in several ways. Since the meter's internal clock resolution is in milliseconds, the meter's firmware supports up to millisecond resolution (maximum resolution format: hh:mm:ss.sss) depending on the time resolution

1. 2.

4-6

Billing data may be retained or discarded using a prompt in the initialization process. Each method of time adjustment has its own abilities. The maximum time change allowed in one adjustment is one hour. Some methods may allow less time change in a single adjustment, but multiple adjustments are allowed.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

output of the external time reference. Communication between the external time reference and the meter is available via the optical port or one of the two communication (COM) ports. There are five external time references that can be used to synchronize the Q1000's internal clock: 1

The Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) is one of five external time synchronization methods that can be used to synchronize the Q1000's internal clock. The GPS protocol and Mini-DLMS protocol can co-exist simultaneously on the same communication port. The NMEA 0183 version 2.30, an ASCII based protocol, has been implemented as the GPS time synchronization protocol. This protocol was chosen because it is the standard for many GPS devices on the market.

2

The second form of external synchronization is a “black box” that converts another signal (pulse, radio message, SCADA message, etc.) into the NMEA message: $TIMESYNC*12. This message will synchronize the meter's time with millisecond resolution for top-of-the-hour signals. This “black box” time converter solution could enable a utility to use existing time broadcast technology to implement meter time synchronization. The NMEA 0183 protocol is a unidirectional protocol. There are two types of devices connected to the network, Talkers and Listeners. Talkers are defined as the “originators of the messages across an NMEA 0183 link” and Listeners are “the recipients of the messages across an interconnecting link.” Use a NMEA Listener connected to the Q1000 via any communications port to deliver the time message to the meter. The meter accepts up to 5 configurable time address formats. Only the address formats configured by the user in PC-PRO+ 98 will be accepted for verification, implementation, and meter time synchronization.

3

The third external time synchronization method is in PC-PRO+ 98. Use this software to go online with the Q1000 meter and reconfigure the time in the meter forward or backward up to one hour. This process uses the computer’s time to synchronize the meter. This method also allows the user to offset the new meter time from the computer time.

4

The fourth method to externally change the meter’s time is to use one of several billing collection software packages to change the time after data collection.

5

The fifth external time synchronization method is similar to the second method. Use a SCADA RTU to send a GPS time message to synchronize the meter’s time.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

4-7

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

The following are parameters needed for the time synchronization function. These parameters are configurable using PC-PRO+ 98. Refer to "Communications Setup" on page 3-34 and the PC-PRO+ 98 help files for more information.

GPS Time Synchronization GPS (Global Positioning System) Time Synchronization is configured through the Communications Setup component of the PC-PRO+ 98 programming software. Figure 4.1 shows the Time Synchronization tab of the Communications Setup component. The resolution of time sent to the meter by the GPS device is dependent on the capability of the GPS device. Some devices are accurate to within several seconds while others are accurate to fractions of a second.

Figure 4.1 Time Synchronization Configuration

Using the fields on this tab, you can synchronize the meter’s clock to the time in the GPS device. GPS time synchronization devices that use the NMEA 0183 protocol can connect to a Q1000 meter communications port that is configured for the Mini-DLMS protocol and time synchronization. When you select the Mini-DLMS protocol for the optical port or one of the serial ports, a Time Synchronization checkbox is displayed. When you check this box, the Time Synchronization tab is added to the Communications Setup dialog. Only one port may be configured for time synchronization. The Time Synchronization tab indicates which port has been enabled for time synchronization. This tab allows you to configure four time adjustment windows to define the actions the meter will take when a time difference (between the meter’s time and the synchronization message time) is detected.:

4-8

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

•

No Change—If the time difference is less than or equal to the value entered, the meter’s time is not adjusted. The range is 0 to 2000 milliseconds (2 seconds).

•

Time Change No Logging—If the time difference is less than or equal to the value entered, the meter’s time is adjusted, but the adjustment is not logged— the meter will not record the adjustment. The time change is “feathered-in” a little at a time. The adjustment takes place at the rate of 8 milliseconds per second until the adjustment is complete. The range is 1 to 500 milliseconds (1/ 2 second) and must be at least one millisecond greater than the value entered for the No Change field.

•

Small Time Change—If the time difference is less than or equal to the value entered, the meter’s time is adjusted and the meter logs an adjustment. You can configure the Event Log to track these time adjustments. The range is 2 to 1,800,000 milliseconds (30 minutes) and must be at least one millisecond greater than the value entered for the Time Change (No Logging) field.

•

Large Time Change—If the time difference is less than or equal to the value entered , the meter’s time is adjusted and the meter logs an adjustment. If a time difference is greater than the number of milliseconds set here, the message is considered outside the time synchronization window and no adjustment is made or logged by the meter. The range is 3 to 1,800,000 milliseconds (30 minutes) and must be at least one millisecond greater than the value entered for Small Time Change.

Time Synchronization Example This example shows the Q1000 meter’s action if you enter the values listed below for Time Adjustment Windows. Settings for the Time Adjustment Windows: No Change (0 to 2,000 ms):

50 ms

Time Change No Logging (1 to 500 ms): This value must be 1 ms greater than No Change.

100 ms

Small Time Change (2 to 1,800,000 ms): This value must be 1 ms greater than Time Change No Logging.

500 ms

Large Time Change (3 to 1,800,000 ms): This v(alue must be 1 ms greater than Small Time Change.

2000 ms

The table below shows the action the Q1000 meter will take if the example values listed above are entered in the Time Adjustment Window fields and the time difference is as shown in column one. Message Time and Meter Time Difference

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Time Adjustment Window Used

Meter’s Action

40 ms

No Change

The meter time is not adjusted.

90 ms

Time Change No Logging

The meter time is adjusted, but not logged.

4-9

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

Message Time and Meter Time Difference

Time Adjustment Window Used

Meter’s Action

450 ms

Small Time Change

The meter time is adjusted and logged.

1500 ms

Large Time Change

The meter time is adjusted and logged.

3000 ms

Not used

The time synchronization message is outside the Large Time Change window. No adjustment is made and no logging occurs.

Figure 4.2 shows how GPS time synchronization messages are handled.

Large Time Change Small Time Change Window

Time Change No Logging

No Change Window Timeline

Synchronization Messages

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

Figure 4.2 GPS Synchronization Message Timeline Examples

Message

4-10

Time Adjustment Window Used

Action

A

Not Used

The time synchronization message is outside the Large Time Change window. No adjustment is made and no logging occurs.

B

Large Time Change

The meter time is adjusted and logged.

C

Small Time Change

The meter time is adjusted and logged.

D

Time Change No Logging

The meter time is adjusted, but not logged.

E

No Change

The meter time is not adjusted.

F

No Change

The meter time is not adjusted.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

Message

Time Adjustment Window Used

Action

G

Time Change No Logging

The meter time is adjusted, but not logged.

H

Small Time Change

The meter time is adjusted and logged.

I

Large Time Change

The meter time is adjusted and logged.

J

Not Used

The time synchronization message is outside the Large Time Change window. No adjustment is made and no logging occurs.

Once a synchronization message is received inside the synchronization window, the synchronization window is then closed. This prevents multiple synchronization within the same window. If a complete synchronization window passes without a time synchronization message being received, a non-fatal error LOG message is generated. Time adjustments are made on the next odd second after time synchronization. Time synchronization will not occur at the hour of DST. When the programmed hour of daylight savings time is reached, the meter will ignore the time messages for the meter and will allow time synchronization in the next hour. The internal propagation delays will be handled by the meter; external propagation delay between the external device and the meter may be accounted for in the PC-PRO+ 98 program file configured by the user.

Message Handling GPS Time Synchronization can be enabled hourly, daily, or every 5 minutes depending on user selection. The initial parameters for the time synchronization function from the user are five, three-letter address formats and their corresponding field numbers for each address format (example below). The user will be allowed to select from a list of approved address formats and will be able to enter an address format and time field of their choice. For a port configured as a time synchronization port, normal port operation continues until a dollar sign character ($) is seen. The Time Synchronization function will then be launched to capture and save the internal meter time at that moment. The firmware will collect the complete message and then check to see if the incoming message contains a user selected address format. Acceptable address formats that contain a Universal Time Coordinate (UTC) in the predefined time field are allowed. The UTC is a time scale based on the rotation of the earth. If the address is acceptable, the checksum is verified, and the message is then parsed for the UTC. The external delay from the timing device to the meter can be entered by the user and is added to the UTC of the incoming message. The captured meter time and the altered message time are then compared. The difference between the times will determine which time adjustment window the meter will use in its time change.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

4-11

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

Example of default Address and Time Format Strings:

Figure 4.3 Time Synchronization Message Configuration

These configurations are common UTC implementations in many GPS devices. The dialog in Figure 4.3 is used for advanced configuration as defined in the documentation of your GPS device. These fields define the time synchronization message format that is sent from your GPS timing device to the Q1000 meter. The most common address formats and times are used as defaults. The meter uses the first Address Format and Time Field when searching the time synchronization strings. If the first one is not found, the meter tries the second one, and so forth. This feature allows the user to utilize up to 5 different GPS devices with varying time implementations in one meter program. The Address Format fields are used to find the valid incoming strings for time information. The Time Fields correspond to the number of commas counted over in the time message to find the time field. The following is an example of an actual GGA message: $GPGGA,195853,3445.984,N,08302.365,W,1,03,5.1,265.8,M,-31.7,M,,*7F* In this example:

4-12

•

$ = the GPS Time Sync Message trigger for the Q1000 meter.

•

GGA = the GPS Message Type (see the next section for GPS message formats based on the message type).

•

195853 = GPS time information for this message.

•

3445.984,N,08302.365,W,1,03,5.1,265.8,M,-31.7,M,,*7F* = miscellaneous GPS information such as latitude and longitude that is not used by the Q1000 meter.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

Example Message Formats For standard NMEA 0183 sentence descriptions, see the NMEA website (www.nmea.org). GGA Message Format GGA - Global Positioning System Fix Data Time, position and fix related data for a GPS receiver. $--GGA,hhmmss.ss,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M,x.x,M,x.x,xxxx where: -- = unused characters

GGA = GPS message type hhmmss.ss = UTC of position (time) llll.ll = latitude of position (not used by the Q1000 meter) a = N(orth) or S(outh) (not used by the Q1000 meter) yyyyy.yy = Longitude of position (not used by the Q1000 meter) a = E(ast) or W(est) (not used by the Q1000 meter) x = GPS Quality indicator (0=no fix, 1=GPS fix, 2=Dif. GPS fix) (not used by the Q1000 meter) xx = number of satellites in use (not used by the Q1000 meter) x.x = horizontal dilution of precision (not used by the Q1000 meter) x.x = Antenna altitude above mean-sea-level (not used by the Q1000 meter) M = units of antenna altitude (in meters) (not used by the Q1000 meter) x.x = Geoidal separation (not used by the Q1000 meter) M = units of geoidal separation (in meters) (not used by the Q1000 meter) x.x = Age of Differential GPS data (seconds) (not used by the Q1000 meter) xxxx = Differential reference station ID (not used by the Q1000 meter)

GLL Message Format GLL - Geographic Position, Latitude / Longitude Latitude and Longitude of present vessel position, time of position fix and status. $--GLL,lll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,hhmmss.ss,A where: -- = unused characters

GLL = GPS message type llll.ll = Latitude of position (not used by the Q1000 meter) a = N(orth) or S(outh) (not used by the Q1000 meter) yyyyy.yy = Longitude of position (not used by the Q1000 meter) a = E(ast) or W(est) (not used by the Q1000 meter)

hhmmss.ss = UTC of position (time) A = status: A = valid data (not used by the Q1000 meter)

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

4-13

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

RMC Message Format RMC - Recommended minimum specific GPS/Transit data $--RMC,225446,A,4916.45,N,12311.12,W,000.5,054.7,191194,020.3,E*68 where: -- = unused characters

RMC = GPS message type 225446 = Time of fix 22:54:46 UTC (time) A = Navigation receiver warning A = OK, V = warning (not used by the Q1000 meter) 4916.45,N = Latitude 49 degrees 16.45 minutes North (not used by the Q1000 meter) 12311.12,W = Longitude 123 degrees 11.12 minutes West (not used by the Q1000 meter) 000.5 = Speed over ground, Knots (not used by the Q1000 meter) 054.7 = Course Made Good, True (not used by the Q1000 meter) 191194 = Date of fix 19 November 1994 (not used by the Q1000 meter) 020.3,E = Magnetic variation 20.3 degrees East (not used by the Q1000 meter) *68 = mandatory checksum (not used by the Q1000 meter)

ZDA Message Format ZDA - Time & Date UTC, day, month, year, and local time zone. $--ZDA,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,xxxx,xx,xx where: -- = unused characters

ZDA = GPS message format hhmmss.ss = UTC (time) xx = Day, 01 to 31 (not used by the Q1000 meter) xx = Month, 01 to 12 (not used by the Q1000 meter) xxxx = Year (not used by the Q1000 meter) xx = Local zone description, 00 to +/- 13 hours (not used by the Q1000 meter) xx = Local zone minutes description (same sign as hours) (not used by the Q1000 meter)

GPS Port Baud Rate Options Often it is desirable to use the auto baud feature of a port, especially when the port will be used both as a GPS time synchronization port and a Mini-DLMS protocol port. A requirement of auto baud detection in the Q1000 meter is that the first character received contains an odd number of logic “1”s. The standard NMEA 0183 protocol's first character is a '$' which contains an even number of logic “1”s. Three scenarios for configuring the port’s baud rate are discussed:

4-14

•

Often GPS devices will only support one baud rate. In this case, the port will have to be configured to match the GPS device baud rate. Older GPS devices standardized on 4800 baud, but newer versions provide more flexibility.

•

With some other “Black Box” time synchronization devices the baud rate is flexible. In this case the port should be configured to match the capabilities of the time synchronization device.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

Data Backup During Power Outage During AC power outages, the real-time clock and RAM are powered by a removable battery. This lithium cell (2/3A) has a 10 year shelf life. Carry-over capacity of the Q1000 battery is at least 180 days.

Auxiliary Power Backup Loss of power to the voltage terminals normally results in a meter powering down. With the Q1000’s optional Auxiliary Power Supply, the meter maintains power to the electronics through a power outage while the AC or DC auxiliary terminals are powered.

Event Log An event is the occurrence of a programmed condition. Each event has an associated logic state which is either ON or OFF. The Q1000 meter can record several kinds of events. Using the PC-PRO+ 98 programming software, users can choose which events are to be logged. The event log is a collection of event records that can be used to monitor the occurrence of certain conditions in the meter. The event log in the Q1000 allows the user to record predefined events with the date and time of each occurrence (see "Event Configuration" on page 3-53). Up to 200 event records may be recorded. The event log is stored in battery backed RAM. The event log is programmable to be a circular or a non-circular file. If the event log is programmed to be a circular or wrap-around file, the most current 200 events are always retained. For a non-circular file, the event log fills up the 200 events and then must be cleared before new events are recorded. While logged on to the Q1000 meter, you can use the Communications | Reset Activity Status option to clear the event log.

Event Summaries Also available in the Q1000 are event summaries. An event summary is another tool for monitoring the occurrence of certain events without having to add a record to the event log. This feature can be used to monitor an event that occurs frequently if the user does not need each date and time occurrence. The event summary reports the date and time of the first occurrence and the date and time of the last occurrence and the number occurrences since the last event log reset. Sixteen event summaries are available. They are configured in PC-PRO+ 98 in the Event Configuration component. Below is a list of the possible events: •

Daylight Savings Time (before and after entry and exit)—

•

Automatic Time Adjustment—The meter’s internal time was automatically adjusted.

•

Clock Error—The internal clock error occurred.

•

Demand EOI—A demand end-of-interval occurred.

•

Demand Resets—remote or local demand reset

•

Reprogramming of the meter—any reprogramming or reconfigure of the meter

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

4-15

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

•

Clock adjustments—update of the clock (device time changes)

•

External inputs—ON or OFF state of the digital state inputs 1 through 16

•

Override Daily Pattern—ON or OFF state

•

Override Rate Exclusive—ON or OFF state

•

Override Rate—ON or OFF state

•

External EOI—An externally triggered end-of-interval occurred.

•

Fatal Error—A fatal error occurred. For a list of fatal errors, see Appendix A.

•

Holiday—ON or OFF state

•

Interrogations—any communications log-on to the meter

•

Invalid Password—An invalid password was used when attempting to logon to the meter.

•

Load Profile EOI (1 and 2)—One of the load profile end-of-intervals occurred.

•

Loss of phase—Loss of any phase(s) to the meter.

•

Loss of potential (A, B, C or any)—Loss of potential to the meter with a user defined threshold (see "Event Configuration" on page 3-53)

•

Non-Fatal Error—A non-fatal error occurred. For a list of non-fatal errors, see Appendix A.

•

Optical port on-line—the active status of the optical port

•

Phoned Home—The meter called home on schedule

•

COM port on-line (2-ports)—the active status of both Communication ports

•

Power Outage—The meter experienced a loss of input power.

•

Rates A through G—ON or OFF state

•

Register freeze— Self Read

•

Scheduled Outputs 1 through 16—ON or OFF state

•

Test Mode (entry and exit)—The meter was placed in (or removed from) Test Mode.

•

Thresholds 1 through 16—ON or OFF state

•

Time Override Daily Pattern—ON or OFF state

•

Time Override Rate Exclusive—ON or OFF state

•

Time Override Rate—ON or OFF state

Time-of-Use Metering The Time-of-Use (TOU) implementation in the QUANTUM Q1000 meter is powerful and flexible. PC-PRO+ 98 and the TOU Calendar Editor are used to configure TOU. TOU is a time-based scheme that provides the user with the ability to assign different billing “collection buckets” (rates) based on the time of energy consumption. These stored rates allow the user to assign a 'cost of energy' based on when the energy is actually used. Rates are dependent on the time of day, day of week, day type, season of the year, and the year. All of these characteristics are configurable using the PC-PRO+ 98 programming software. For Q1000 meters that support the TOU feature, you can implement TOU by creating a program file that enables TOU and identifies a TOU (Calendar) Schedule. A TOU Schedule ties blocks of time to different billing rates.

4-16

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

Use the TOU Calendar Editor of PC-PRO+ 98 to create a detailed TOU schedule, including on/off times for each rate, season start and stop dates, holidays, and more. You must create the TOU schedule before it is available for use in a program file. After a TOU schedule has been created, you can click the Edit button in the Time of Use Selection component of PC-PRO+ 98 to launch the TOU Calendar Editor and make changes to the schedule. When you initialize a meter, the Q1000 device server checks the meter to see what features are supported. If the meter does not support Time of Use, or does not support the TOU Calendar Schedule selected for the program file, an error is generated. PC-PRO+ 98 version 2.3 or higher and firmware version 5.0 or higher are required to use TOU in the Q1000 meter.

TOU Features The current TOU option in the Q1000 meter is called Basic TOU. Basic TOU provides: •

Up to seven (7) day types and two holiday day types.

•

Up to seven (7) available overlapping rates for energy and demand plus total.

•

A memory-limited number of daily patterns (400 unique patterns maximum).

•

A memory-limited number of switching events per day (665 unique events per schedule maximum).

•

Up to sixteen (16) available outputs and support for digital state outputs.

•

Up to twelve (12) seasons per year maximum with the ability to be recurring (255 unique seasons maximum).

•

Up to two configurable TOU schedules, current and latent.

•

A memory-limited number of years per schedule.

•

A memory-limited number of holidays per schedule (500 per schedule maximum).

•

The ability to configure a meter program to handle rate and daily pattern changes by means of the 16 digital state inputs.

•

A memory-limited number of season change dates (400 season change dates per schedule maximum).

•

A dynamic memory bar to manage the memory associated with the current TOU schedule, the TOU event overrides, the TOU energy registers selected, and the TOU demand registers selected. See "Meter Memory Bar" on page 3-46 for a complete description of the memory bar.

•

The ability to reconfigure TOU parameters without re-initializing the entire meter program. (Latent Schedules are always programmed into the meter using reconfigure.)

Implementing TOU To implement TOU in a PC-PRO+ 98 program file: 1

Use the Calendar Editor to create a TOU schedule defining daily schedules and patterns that identify the rates and the time of day when each rate begins and ends. The daily patterns can be assigned to different days of the week, seasons, and holidays.

2

Use the Program Editor to create the Q1000 program file as follows: •

Device Operation component—enable the TOU option.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

4-17

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

•

Time of Use Selection component—on the TOU Selection tab, select the TOU schedule you created in step 1. If desired, allocate memory to a latent TOU Schedule, and then select the Event Override tab to set override options for TOU patterns and rates.

Allocating memory to a Latent Schedule reserves the amount of memory you define for future use by a Latent Schedule. You must estimate the amount of memory the Latent Schedule will require. Use the size of the Current Schedule as a guideline. When you reconfigure TOU, you select the Latent Schedule and the date and time when the Latent Schedule will take effect. You do not necessarily need to reserve memory; however, to define a Latent schedule at a later date, sufficient memory must be available to store the schedule.

•

Quantity Selections component—select the TOU Energy and TOU Demand quantities that you want to store.

•

Display Configuration component—select the TOU registers that you want to display on the meter.

•

Load Profile Configuration component—enable TOU statuses to display TOU rate codes to indicate the rate in effect for each load profile interval.

•

Digital State Outputs—Select the TOU events that you want to use to trigger a digital state output.

•

Self Reads—Select the quantities that you want to store during a self read.

3

Logon to the meter and use the program file to initialize the meter.

4

To add (or change) a latent TOU schedule to (in) the meter, reconfigure the Q1000 meter using the TOU calendar file that identifies the new TOU schedule.

For more details on creating program files, using the TOU Calendar Editor, using PC-PRO+ 98, and reconfiguring a meter, see the PC-PRO+ 98 Online Help.

Event Overrides There are a maximum of 16 Event Overrides that can be used to supersede the Current TOU schedule when a programmed condition occurs. These overrides can be used to start (trigger) an override daily pattern or an override rate. To use these overrides, you must be online with and reconfiguring the meter. Current TOU Schedule Event Overrides The Current TOU scheduled daily pattern or rate(s) may be superseded by the meter while an event override is active. When the override condition ends, the Current TOU schedule resumes. Current TOU Schedule Time Overrides The Time Overrides allow you to implement TOU pattern or rate changes for a specified period of time for the TOU schedule that is currently active in the meter. At the time and date defined for the ending switchpoint, the override rate or override pattern ends and the Current TOU schedule is resumed.

4-18

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

Latent TOU Schedule Event Overrides Once the Latent TOU schedule becomes active (becomes the Current TOU Schedule), its daily pattern or rate(s) may be superseded by the meter while an event override is active. When the override condition ends, the Current TOU schedule resumes.

TOU Calendar Editor The TOU Calendar Editor is the PC-PRO+ 98 application that allows Q1000 users to create, view, and edit TOU schedules for supported meters that have a time-ofuse capability. Using the Calendar Editor, you can define daily patterns that identify the rates used for the day and the time of day when each rate begins and ends. Daily patterns are associated with day types via seasons. Day types and Holiday types are associated with days of the week via the Typical Week. Holiday types can also be associated with holidays. Once the schedules are created, you can modify, print, import, and export schedules using Calendar Editor. Holidays are defined in holiday lists, such as the US Holiday List. You can add new holiday lists as well as edit existing lists to add holidays or modify the date(s) for holidays. Holiday Lists are available for use in all schedules. When portions of a schedule become outdated, the Calendar Editor provides a means of removing the obsolete parts. This is accomplished through the Roll Off Old Years feature.

TOU Schedule TOU information is normally expressed in the form of a schedule. The purpose of the PC-PRO+ 98 TOU component is to provide the means through which a user can easily define TOU schedules for use with their SchlumbergerSema meters. The TOU schedule: •

describes the period of time of coverage, in years.

•

assigns a daily pattern to each of the days in a season.

•

describes the seasons that exist within the TOU calendar.

•

lists the holidays that will occur within the TOU schedule.

•

describes the rates active and their switchpoints in each daily pattern.

•

describes the rates and digital state outputs supported in the TOU schedule.

•

describes the typical week with each day’s day type.

•

describes the supported day types

The Q1000 meter supports two types of TOU schedules: •

Current—the schedule the user intends to run once the meter is initialized. This is the only schedule the user is allowed to select in the TOU component and program in the meter at initialization.

•

Latent—a schedule that can begin running at a predetermined time in the future. Users can allocate memory usage for the Latent TOU schedule in the TOU component at initialization, but they can only add a Latent schedule during reconfiguration. Reconfiguration is a process that allows users to change the configuration of certain components of a meter’s program while online with the meter without initializing the entire meter program. Use this feature to create a new TOU schedule in the meter that will come active in the future.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

4-19

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

Any schedule that exceeds 200% of the meter’s memory is not allowed. When a schedule is entered that causes the memory to exceed 200%, a warning message is displayed. Users cannot dismiss this error message until the schedule has been modified to resolve the memory usage problem. Also, the TOU configuration component can be closed with the memory usage exceeding 100%, but the program cannot be saved until the memory usage is 100% or less.

To assist in the definition of the TOU schedule, two other 'concepts' are contained in the TOU component: •

Daily Pattern—refers to an assignable description applied to a pattern of rate changes that occur within a 24 hour period. The TOU component allows the user to define a collection of Daily Patterns. These Daily Patterns are then assigned to the days of the week and holidays that are defined within a schedule.

•

Holidays—a list of holidays and exclusion days (as opposed to the regular days of the week). These holidays are defined using the date on which they occur.

Holidays can be recurring or singleton (single occurrence). Recurring holidays occur on the same date every year. Singleton holidays either occur only once or their repetition cannot be readily described.

Import/Export Importing and exporting allows schedules to be transferred to and from PC-PRO+ 98 systems.

TOU Energy Registers The Q1000 meter can store up to 24 energy quantities in its TOU Energy Registers. Each quantity is stored in its own register. TOU energy quantities are selected from the valid list of available energy quantities through the Quantity Wizard. As the users selects quantities, the number of registers available is decremented. The Meter Memory Bar is updated as TOU Energy Registers are selected for use.

TOU Demand Registers The Q1000 meter can store up to 24 demand quantities in its TOU Demand Registers. Each quantity is stored in its own register. TOU demand quantities are selected from the valid list of available demand quantities through the Quantity Wizard. As the users selects quantities, the number of registers available is decremented. The Meter Memory Bar is updated as TOU Demand Registers are selected for use.

4-20

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Chapter 5

Power Quality The QUANTUM Q1000 has two forms of Power Quality: Voltage Quality and Harmonics Analysis. The meter is capable of storing power quality information to an event log, to registers, and tod profile. Additionally, alarms and events can be triggered based on power quality information.

Voltage Quality The following voltage quality functions are available with the QUANTUM Q1000 meter: •

Voltage Interruptions

•

Voltage Sags

•

Voltage Swells

•

Voltage Imbalances

Interruptions, sags, swells, and imbalances are recorded as events in the meter when the voltage value exceeds the threshold for a time period greater than the programmed minimum duration time and less than the programmed maximum. If the voltage quality event does not persist for longer than the minimum duration time period or if it persists too long, the event is not recorded. The minimum duration can be programmed down to ½ cycle. A cold load pickup variable can be set for voltage quality events. The cold load pickup defines the time in seconds after power up that the meter waits before recording voltage quality events. Voltage quality can be programmed to be active or not active when the meter is in test mode. This allows the choice of recording voltage quality events while operating in test mode or ignoring them. The voltage quality functions help the user to monitor and record voltage quality information based upon user-defined criteria. The number of events recorded for each of the voltage quality function is programmable. The Q1000 can be configured to perform a large number of functions, each of which take up a variable amount of memory. Previous meters allocated specific amounts of memory for certain components. The Q1000 allocates memory dynamically allowing the user to maximize the meter’s functionality at a given location. Later, if the needs for a site change, the Q1000 meter can be reprogrammed to meet these needs. For this reason, the PC-PRO+ 98 software gives you constant feedback on the amount of memory your program is currently consuming. This feedback is a Meter Memory bar at the bottom of the dialog indicating the amount of meter memory currently required for the configuration. As long as the bar is in the blue region, there is sufficient meter memory for the configuration. If the bar displays in the red, the memory requirements for your configuration have exceeded the amount of

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

5-1

Power Quality

memory available in the meter. You must modify your configuration to display the bar in the blue region only. If you attempt to save a program file while the bar displays in the red region, the Out of Device Resources dialog is displayed. The meter will not allow you to continue configuring the meter if the amount of memory your program requires exceeds 200% of the meter's memory. If memory usage exceeds 200%, the 200% Warning displays to indicate that you cannot add additional quantities to the configuration. Reduce the memory usage to under 200% to continue modifying your program. Memory usage must be less than or equal to 100% before you can save the program. The program components that use portions of this memory include: •

Load Profile

•

Harmonics

•

Voltage Quality

•

TOU

•

Self Reads

Voltage Interruptions A voltage interruption occurs whenever the meter’s electronics experience a complete loss of potential and records a power outage.

The meter’s electronics loss of power will depend on how it is being powered—whether through phase voltage or auxiliary power voltage.

This function will track the power supply interruptions and separate them into three programmable classes, based on the duration of the interruption. The minimum duration of a voltage interruption is 1 second and the maximum duration is 65,535 seconds. For each interruption, the start time, stop time, and phase are recorded. The start and stop time can be recorded down to the millisecond.

Figure 5.1 Voltage Interruptions Example

As shown by the example in Figure 5.1, if you set class 1 to 5 seconds, class 2 to 10 seconds, and class 3 to 20 seconds, an interruption of up to 5 seconds will be recorded as a class 1 event, interruptions between 5 and 15 seconds will be a class 2 event, and an interruption between 15 and 35 seconds will be a class 3 event. Any interruption lasting longer than 35 seconds will not be recorded.

5-2

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Power Quality

Figure 5.2 Voltage Interruptions

You can program the number of power interruption events the meter will store. The number of events you can enter is based on the available meter memory. Each class may be configured independently; class 3 has the highest priority.

Voltage Sags A voltage sag is a momentary (less than a few seconds) decrease in the voltage below a given tolerance on one or more phases. Voltage sags affect power-down sensing circuitry on computer and large controllers and can cause equipment to shutdown. Repetitive sags (or swells ) in the voltage cause flickering of lights, motor stalling, reduced life of motors and equipment. Electrical equipment may respond to a sag as it would to a power interruption. Voltage sags are often caused when large loads, such as motors, air conditioners and electric furnaces, are started which result in high inrush currents leading to drops in the voltage for short periods. These disturbances can also be caused by lightning, and power system faults such as overloaded wiring, incorrect fuse rating, fuse and breaker clearing, ground faults, and utility switching/equipment failure. Using a sliding-window function, the QUANTUM Q1000 continuously calculates an RMS voltage based upon ½ cycle of the phase voltages. A voltage sag occurs when the voltage “sags” below the user-programmable threshold for a period of time greater than the user-programmable duration. There are two levels of sags which can be programmed. Each phase is independently programmable.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

5-3

Power Quality

Figure 5.3 Voltage Sags

A programmable threshold typically between 75% and 100% of nominal voltage is used to determine the threshold voltage at which the sag is registered. A programmable hysteresis voltage level is also a programmable option. Hysteresis is used to prevent the meter from recording the same event multiple times and filling up the event log. The sag must remain in effect for a period of time greater than the specified duration before it will be recorded. The minimum and maximum duration range is selectable from 1-65,535 milliseconds. The maximum duration must be set larger than the minimum duration. The minimum voltage, duration, date and time (millisecond resolution for time) are stored for each voltage sag recorded. The coincident average current magnitude during the event is also stored. You can program the number of voltage quality events you want the meter to record. This number is definable for each type of event. The number of events is based on the available meter memory.

5-4

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Power Quality

Figure 5.4 Voltage Sag Example of One Phase Voltage

Voltage Sag Example If nominal voltage is set to 120V and the sag threshold is 90% of nominal, a sag is triggered when the RMS value of the voltage drops below 108V (120 volts X 90% = 108 volts).

Figure 5.5 Voltage Sag Example

Voltage Swells A voltage swell is a momentary (less than a few seconds) increase in the voltage above a given tolerance on one or more phases. Voltage swells are often caused by large cyclic loads such as spot welders, induction or arc furnaces, and motors when cycled. They can also be caused by sudden load decreases or turn-off of heavy equipment, open neutral connection, insulation breakdown, and improper wiring.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

5-5

Power Quality

Using a sliding-window function, the QUANTUM Q1000 continuously calculates an RMS voltage based upon ½ cycle of the phase voltages. A voltage swell occurs when the voltage “swells” above the user-programmable threshold for a period of time greater than the user-programmable duration. There are two levels of swells which can be programmed. Each phase is independently programmed.

Figure 5.6 Voltage Swells

A programmable threshold typically between 100% and 125% of nominal voltage is used to determine the threshold voltage at which the swell is registered. A programmable hysteresis voltage level is also a program option. Hysteresis is used to prevent the meter from recording the same event multiple times and filling up the event log. For the swell to be recorded, the event duration must be between the minimum and maximum duration limits. The minimum and maximum duration range is selectable from 1-65,535 milliseconds. The maximum duration must be larger than the minimum duration. The minimum voltage, duration, date and time (millisecond resolution for time) are stored for each voltage swell recorded. The coincident average current magnitude during the event is also stored. You can program the number of voltage quality events you want the meter to record. This number is definable for each type of event. The number of events is based on the available meter memory.

5-6

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Power Quality

Figure 5.7 Voltage Swell Example of One Phase Voltage

Voltage Swell Example If nominal voltage is set to 120V and the swell threshold is 110% of nominal, a swell is triggered when the RMS value of the voltage rises above 132V (120 volts X 110% = 132 volts).

Figure 5.8 Voltage Swell Example

Voltage Imbalances In three phase systems, voltage imbalance occurs when the three phase voltage vectors are not the same magnitude and 120 degrees apart from each other. A steady state imbalance is a duration of at least 2 seconds. The coupling mechanism of imbalance is either conductive or electromagnetic. It is usually calculated in terms of negative phase sequence voltage. The presence of negative phase sequence voltage causes overheating in induction and synchronous machines, reduces the margin for voltage regulation, and increases the system losses. The most serious problem is the overheating of induction motors, where a small amount of voltage imbalance causes motors to draw much more imbalanced currents.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

5-7

Power Quality

Voltage imbalance can be caused by the connection of single phase or imbalanced loads in a three phase system and by different impedances on the three phase lines. Imbalances can also be caused by defective transformers and ground faults. The voltage phase imbalance calculated in the Q1000 meter is a measure of the percentage difference between a phase voltage and the average of the three phase voltages. The equation for the percent imbalance as implemented is: 3-Element Meter (Form 9):

100 ´ ( V phase – V avg ) Percent Voltage Imbalance = ---------------------------------------------------V avg

where: Va + V b + Vc V avg = æ -------------------------------ö è ø 3

2-Element Meter (Form 5):

100 ´ ( V phase – V avg ) Percent Voltage Imbalance = ---------------------------------------------------V avg

where: Va + Vc V avg = æ ------------------ö è 2 ø

Figure 5.9 Voltage Imbalances

5-8

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Power Quality

For the imbalance condition to be met, the percent imbalance must exceed the user-programmable threshold and last longer than the user-programmable duration. The threshold is programmable between 1 and 15 percent in 1 percent increments. For the voltage imbalance to be recorded, the event duration must be between the minimum and maximum duration limits. The range of this duration is programmable between 0 and 600 seconds with a resolution of 1 second. You can program the number of voltage quality events you want the meter to record. This number is definable for each type of event. The number of events is based on the available meter memory.

Figure 5.10 Voltage Imbalance Example of VA

Voltage Imbalance Example 1 In the following diagram, there is a greater than 8% difference between the average of the phases and Phase A. The average of the three phases is 122 V. Phase A is 131.76 V, which represents an 8% imbalance.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

5-9

Power Quality

Voltage Imbalance Example 2 If the threshold is 5% and the voltages are 120 V, 120 V, and 112 V an imbalance will not be triggered because 112 V is within the threshold based on the average of all three voltages. (120 + 120 + 112) / 3 = 117.3, 5% of 117.3 = 5.87 V •

The upper allowed voltage is 117.3 + 5.87 = 123.87 V

•

The lower allowed voltage is 117.3 - 5.87 =111.43 V

Voltage Imbalance Example 3 If the voltages are 120 V, 120 V, and 111 V, an imbalance will be triggered because 111 V exceeds the threshold based on the average of all three voltages. (120 + 120 + 111) / 3 = 117, 5% of 117 = 5.85 V •

The upper allowed voltage is 117 + 5.85 = 122.85 V

•

The lower allowed voltage is 117 - 5.85 =111.15 V

Voltage Imbalance Example 4 If the voltages are 120 V, 120 V, and 130 V, an imbalance will be triggered because 130 V exceeds the threshold based on the average of all three voltages. (120 + 120 + 130) / 3 = 123.3, 5% of 123.3 = 6.17 V •

The upper allowed voltage is 123.3 + 6.17 = 129.47 V

•

The lower allowed voltage is 123.3 – 6.17 =117.14 V

Harmonic Analysis A harmonic distortion is a voltage or current deviation from a true sine wave due to unwanted frequencies that are multiples of the fundamental. Harmonic distortion causes motor loads, such as compressors, pumps, and disk drives to overheat. Harmonics can also result in serious damage to capacitors and transformers. Harmonics will cause decreased motor performance (reduced efficiency, over-heating, torque pulsations), premature control equipment failure, false triggering of SCRs (silicon controlled rectifiers), interference with computers, and amplification of harmonic levels due to resonance. Harmonics can also cause incorrect readings on mechanical timing relays and electricity meters. Harmonics are usually caused by the operation of any static power converter that converts AC to DC or DC to AC, or any solid-state switch, or equipment containing these devices. Some of the equipment which contains these devices are electric variable speed drives, computer power supplies, dimmer switches, variable speed drills, UPS, welding equipment, induction furnaces, arc furnaces, microwave ovens, battery chargers, elevators. Saturated utility transformers can also cause harmonic distortion. The Q1000 performs Fast Fourier Transforms on each phase voltage and current. Up to the 20th harmonic is measured for magnitude and phase angle. All phase angles are referenced to the phase voltage. The meter also provides the average % THD Voltage and % THD current per phase. See Harmonics Diagram for an illustration.

5-10

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Power Quality

The meter captures harmonic content up to the 32nd harmonic in its measurement. The time averaged value of harmonic voltage and currents up to the 20th harmonic can be recorded and displayed. You can select the interval length and per phase harmonic values to record. Each Harmonic record contains the following information: •

Year

•

Month

•

Day

•

Hour

•

Minute

•

Second

•

Fundamental voltage magnitude

•

Fundamental voltage phase angle

•

Percentage of voltage fundamental magnitude for the 2nd through the 20th voltage harmonics

•

2nd through 20th voltage harmonic phase angle

•

Fundamental current magnitude

•

Fundamental current phase angle

•

Percentage of current fundamental magnitude for the 2nd through the 20th current harmonics

•

2nd through 20th current harmonic phase angle

•

Checksum

The meter performs Fast Fourier Transforms on each phase of voltage and current every 60 cycles. The magnitudes and phase angles up to the 20th harmonic are measured. The following harmonic information is available: •

THD registers

•

Fundamental power registers

•

Displacement power factor

•

Harmonic magnitude registers

•

Harmonic phase angle registers

THD Registers Total harmonic distortion (THD) registers are available for voltage and current. These registers include the total amount of distortion caused by harmonics 2-20 of the fundamental waveform and are computed based on the magnitudes of the harmonic components. The meter provides registers for percent THD for voltage, current. The meter allows for a time based harmonic voltage and current “THD hour register”. This register allows the user to store THD as an energy or demand register and record pulses in load profile. Additionally, THD can be programmed to trigger an alarm or event condition in the meter.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

5-11

Power Quality

Fundamental Power Registers The Q1000 has the capability of calculating energy and demand registers based upon fundamental power. Fundamental Power is the active power based on fundamental voltage and current only. Fundamental registers for voltage magnitude, voltage phase angle, watts, and vars can also be stored in load profile.

Figure 5.11 Basic 60 Hz Waveform

Harmonic Registers and Recording The user may select to record from the 2nd to the 20th on a per phase basis. The percent of fundamental magnitude and associated phase angle for each of the userselectable harmonics can be displayed as a register. The user can also record timeaveraged harmonics up to the 20th which includes the date (year, month, day), time (hour, minute, second), fundamental voltage magnitude, percent of fundamental voltage (2 - 20th user selectable), fundamental current magnitude, and percent of fundamental current (2-20th user selectable).

Figure 5.12 Basic 60 Hz Waveform with Harmonics

5-12

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Power Quality

General Harmonics Configuration

Figure 5.13 Harmonics Configuration—General Tab

Check the Use Global EOI Source box if you want to use the Global EOI to define the harmonic interval length. If this box is checked, the Interval Length fields on this screen are disabled and filled with the interval length of the EOI Interval Length defined on the Device Operation screen. Choose the Interval Length. This is the length of time you want to use for a harmonic interval. Choices range from two seconds to 60 minutes. If you checked the Use Global EOI Source box, this field is disabled, and the current Global End of Interval length specified in the Device Operation dialog is used. Check the Disable Harmonics in Test Mode box if you do not want to record harmonics when the meter is in Test Mode. Select the Number of Records to Store for each Phase. This is the number of harmonic records to store in memory for each phase. The Q1000 can be configured to perform a large number of functions, each of which take up a variable amount of memory. Previous meters allocated specific amounts of memory for certain components. The Q1000 allocates memory dynamically allowing the user to maximize the meter’s functionality at a given location. For this reason, the PC-PRO+ 98 software gives you constant feedback on the amount of memory your program is currently consuming. This feedback is a Meter Memory bar at the bottom of the dialog indicating the amount of meter memory currently required for the configuration. As long as the bar is in the blue region, there is sufficient meter memory for the configuration. If the bar displays in the red, the memory requirements for your configuration have exceeded the amount of memory available in the meter. You must modify your configuration to display the bar in the blue region only. If you attempt to save a program file while the bar displays in the red region, the Out of Device Resources dialog displays. The meter will not allow you to continue configuring the meter if the amount of memory your program requires exceeds 200% of the meter's memory. If memory usage exceeds 200%, the 200% Warning displays to indicate that you cannot add

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

5-13

Power Quality

additional quantities to the configuration. Reduce the memory usage to under 200% to continue modifying your program. It must be less than or equal to 100% before you can save the program. The program components that use portions of this memory include: •

Load Profile

•

Harmonics

•

Voltage Quality

•

TOU

•

Self Reads

Voltage Amplitude Harmonics Configuration

Figure 5.14 Harmonics Configuration—Voltage Amplitude Tab

You can select the individual phases and harmonics (2nd to 20th) to record Voltage Amplitude. Each row represents one harmonic.

5-14

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Power Quality

Voltage Phase Angle Harmonics Configuration

Figure 5.15 Harmonics Configuration—Voltage Phase Angle Tab

Current Amplitude Harmonics Configuration

Figure 5.16 Harmonics Configuration—Current Amplitude Tab

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

5-15

Power Quality

Current Phase Angle Harmonics Configuration

Figure 5.17 Harmonics Configuration—Current Phase Angle Tab

5-16

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Chapter 6

Communications This section describes the communication architecture of the Q1000 meter. The Q1000 supports several different communication ports. These include an optical port, LEDs, RS-232 ports, internal modem, RS-485 ports, and I/O network connection. The Q1000 meter also provides powerful capabilities for talking with various protocols over these communication ports. Protocol implementation in the Q1000 meter is flexible. A port can be configured with one of a variety of protocols; the user may program a port with the protocol best suited to meet the needs of an installation. Since there are no industry wide standard protocols, SchlumbergerSema supports many protocols in the Q1000 meter. The protocols in the Q1000 meter are divided into two groups—Basic Protocols and Advanced Protocols. Basic protocols are included in all meters. Advanced protocols are optional and may be ordered by the user. The ‘native’ protocol in the meter is Mini-DLMS. This protocol is used to program the meter. This programming operation determines how many energy registers to run, what demand registers to run, the load profile configuration, and many other parameters. Once the meter is programmed using Mini-DLMS, data can be retrieved from the meter by Mini-DLMS itself or by one of the other protocols. In most cases, the other protocols are read only protocols. Only a limited set of write features are supported. The IEC1107 protocol, mainly used in Europe, and the QDIP protocol are two of these protocols. The Q1000 QDIP implementation emulates a portion of the QUANTUM STQ meter’s QDIP protocol implementation and allows the Q1000 to connect to existing RTUs where QUANTUM meters are installed. These protocols are Basic Protocols. The first Advanced Protocol the Q1000 supported was DNP 3.0; a Level 2+ implementation. Other Advanced Protocols currently supported in the Q1000 meter include IEC 60870-5-102, IEC 60870-5-102 Plus, and MODBUS RTU protocols.

Simultaneous Communication The Q1000 allows you to talk through its ports simultaneously and in both directions. These ports include the optical port, two RS-232 ports and the I/O port. The second RS-232 port can be used to support an internal modem or an internal RS-485 port. These features allow you to simultaneously perform functions such as: •

implement a complex I/O scheme

•

dedicate an RS-232 port to a continuous polling system

•

give access through the modem to your customer

•

always allow for on-site interrogation through the optical port

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

6-1

Communications

Optical Port (OPT) The optical port is by definition coupled to the external world with opto-couplers. The baud rate for the optical port is selectable from 1200 to 19,200 bps; however, some optical port cables may limit communication speed to a maximum of 9600 bps. This port may be connected to external modems, fiber optic circuits, or other communication networks using the optical port cable to connect to the optical port.

Dual Port RS-232 Two RS-232 ports are available on the Q1000. These ports support autobaud sensing from 1200 to 38,400 bps and direct connections up to 115,200 bps. The RS232 ports can be connected to any number of devices such as fiber optic modems, external modems, frame relay FRADs, 900 MHz radios, or short haul modems. See Table 2.5 for pin assignments for the Q1000 DB-25 connector. These pin assignments support configuring the meter as a DTE device, which can be directly connected to a DCE device such as an external modem. The Q1000 meter can be connected directly to a PC, which is a DTE device, by using a null modem cable. See "Grounding" on page 2-25 for more information.

Modems The meter supports the use of modems for communication on both ports. There are two options for connecting a modem: an optional internal factory supplied modem and a user supplied external modem. Modems can be used for programming the meter and also for retrieving data.

Internal Modem The optional 1200 to 33,600 bps auto-baud sensing internal modem provides telephone communication. The internal modem takes the place of RS-232 port number two. The Q1000 modem supports V.34 telephone communication standard for initiating and receiving telephone calls. Error correction (V.42/MNP 2-4) and data compression (V.42 bis/MNP 5) maximize data transfer integrity and boost average data throughput up to 33,600 bps. The modem board includes the capability to support multi-drop applications. An internal RS-485 connector on the modem board connects to the meter’s external DB-25 connector. A meter with an internal modem that starts the RS-485 bus is the “master meter”.

Figure 6.1 Q1000 Phone Line Multi-drop Support

6-2

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Communications

This connection can then be attached to a 4-wire RS-485 bus. Other Q1000 meters will then use an internal RS-485 board to connect to the bus. This multi-drop design can support a large number of meters on one phone line. Program the Master meter as a Modem meter for COM 2 in Communication Setup, and then program the other meters (with internal RS-485 boards) as Direct Connection meters for COM 2. Log on to all of these meters with the multi-drop option using the programmable COM 2 port address.

External Modem An external modem can be connected to either or both external RS-232 communications ports available on the meter to allow phone line communications. In these cases, the meter port’s baud rate is selectable from 1200 to 115,200 bps. To allow the meter to work with a wide variety of modems, the meter is programmed to expect a very small set of capabilities from the modem. •

Requirements: The modem cannot echo commands issued to it. This modem feature is usually set with an ATE0 command issued to the modem with an RS-232 terminal or terminal emulator. Response codes are sent and the response set is kept to a minimum, result codes 0-4. This modem feature is usually set with an ATQ0X0 command. The response codes are issued in text (Verbose) form. This modem feature is usually set with a ATV1 command.

•

The meter does not support any form of flow control between itself and the modem; therefore, flow control should be disabled. Some modems will require additional AT commands to disable flow control features.

•

The meter assumes that the configuration has been stored in profile 0 of the modem. This modem feature is usually accomplished by issuing an AT&W0 command.

•

After configuring the modem and saving the configuration, set the modem to use this profile as a default on power up. This modem feature is usually accomplished by issuing an AT&Y0 command.

•

To make sure that your modem will answer, “the number of rings before answering” should be set to a non-zero number in Profile 0. If the phone line is dedicated to the meter only, set the number of rings to 1. (S0=1) If the phone line is shared with a handset, set the number of rings higher to allow for a person to answer the phone call before the modem picks up. If you leave your external modem’s Profile 0 with S0=0, then the modem is put in a state to “never answer” after a power outage.

External Modem Configuration Examples The following examples show how to apply the above general guide to different kinds of modems.

Practical Peripherals P114MT II 1

Connect a terminal to the modem.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

6-3

Communications

2

Power up the modem.

3

Type: ATS0=1 <ENTER> Modem echo’s what is typed and responds: OK Where “S0=1” writes ‘wait for 1 ring to answer the phone’ to profile 0. The “1” can be any number of rings. 0 means do not answer the phone; numbers greater than 0 indicate the number of rings to wait before answering the phone.

4

Type: ATQ0E0V1X0&Y0&W0 <ENTER>. Modem echo’s what is typed and responds: OK Where “&Y0” tells the modem to use profile 0 as default. Where “&W0” writes the changes in the active profile to profile 0.

5

Type: ATZ<ENTER> Modem does not echo what you type but does respond after a short delay: OK

6

Type: AT&V<ENTER> Modem does not echo what you type but does respond. ACTIVE PROFILE:

B1 E0 L1 M1 N1 Q0 T V1 W0 X0 Y0 &C1 &D0 &G0 &J0 &K0 &Q5 &R1 &S0 &T5 &X0 &Y0 S00:001 S01:000 S02:043 S03:013 S04:010 S05:008 S06:002 S07:050 S08:002 S09:006 S10:014 S11:095 S12:050 S18:000 S25:005 S26:001 S36:007 S37:000 S38:020 S44:020 S46:138 S48:007 S95:000 STORED PROFILE 0:

B1 E0 L1 M1 N1 Q0 T V1 W0 X0 Y0 &C1 &D0 &G0 &J0 &K0 &Q5 &R1 &S0 &T5 &X0 S00:0011 S02:043 S06:002 S07:050 S08:002 S09:006 S10:014 S11:095 S12:050 S18:000 S36:007 S37:000 S40:232 S41:195 S46:138 S95:000 STORED PROFILE 1:

B1 E0 L1 M1 N1 Q0 T V1 W0 X0 Y0 &C1 &D0 &G0 &J0 &K0 &Q5 &R1 &S0 &T5 &X0 S00:001 S02:043 S06:002 S07:050 S08:002 S09:006 S10:014 S11:095 S12:050 S18:000 S36:007 S37:000 S40:232 S41:195 S46:138 S95:000 TELEPHONE NUMBERS: 0= 2= OK

1.

6-4

1= 3=

This field tells the modem how many rings to wait before answering the phone.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Communications

Hayes Accura 144 + Fax 144 Modem 1

Connect a terminal to the modem!

2

Power up the modem!

3

Type: ATS0=1 <ENTER> Modem echo’s what is typed and responds: OK Where “S0=1” writes ‘wait for 1 ring to answer the phone’ to profile 0. The “1” can be any number of rings. 0 means do not answer the phone; numbers greater than 0 indicate the number of rings to wait before answering the phone.

4

Type: ATQ0E0N0S37=nV1X0&K0&D0 &Y0&W0 <ENTER> Where n is the baud rate in the meter. Modem echo’s what is typed and responds: OK Where “&Y0” tells the modem to use profile 0 as default. Where “&W0” writes the changes in the active profile to profile 0.

5

Type: ATZ<ENTER> Modem does not echo what you type but does respond after a short delay: OK

6

Type: AT&V<ENTER> Modem does not echo what you type but does respond. ACTIVE PROFILE:

DTE:19200

DCE:

PARITY:NONE

B16 B1 E0 L2 M1 N1 P Q0 V1 W0 X0 Y0 &A0 &B1 &C1 &D0 &G0 &K0 &L0 &Q5 &R0 &S0 &T4 &U0 &X0 &Y0 S00:0011 S01:000 S02:043 S03:013 S04:010 S05:008 S06:002 S07:050 S08:002 S09:006 S10:014 S11:095 S12:050 S18:000 S25:005 S26:001 S30:000 S36:007 S37:00n S38:020 S43:000 S46:002 S48:007 S49:064 S50:220 S63:009 S82:128 S86:000 S95:000 S97:030 S108:001 S109:062 S110:002 S136:003 STORED PROFILE 0:

B16 B1 E0 L2 M1 N1 P Q0 V1 W0 X0 Y0 &A0 &B1 &C1 &D0 &G0 &K0 &L0 &Q5 &R0 &S0 &T4 S00:001 S02:043 S06:002 S07:050 S08:002 S09:006 S10:014 S11:095 S12:050 S18:000 S25:005 S26:001 S30:000 S36:007 S37:00n S38:020 S46:002 S48:007 S63:009 S82:128 S95:000 S97:030 S108:001 S109:062 S110:002 S136:003 STORED PROFILE 1:

B16 B1 E0 L2 M1 N1 P Q0 V1 W0 X0 Y0 &A0 &B1 &C1 &D0 &G0 &K0 &L0 &Q5 &R0 &S0 &T4 1.

This field tells the modem how many rings to wait before answering the phone.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

6-5

Communications

S00:0011 S02:043 S06:002 S07:050 S08:002 S09:006 S10:014 S11:095 S12:050 S18:000 S25:005 S26:001 S30:000 S36:007 S37:00n S38:020 S46:002 S48:007 S63:009 S82:128 S95:000 S97:030 S108:001 S109:062 S110:002 S136:003 TELEPHONE NUMBERS: &Z0= &Z2=

&Z1= &Z3=

U.S. Robotics Sportster 336 Faxmodem 1

Set the rear panel switches as follow: Switch #1: Modem ignores DTR (DOWN) Switch #2: Verbal results (UP) Switch #3: Enable result codes (DOWN) Switch #4: Suppresses echo (DOWN) Switch #5: Disable auto answer (UP) Switch #6: Modem sends CD signal when it connects with another modem, drops CD on disconnect (UP) Switch #7: Loads Y or Y1 configuration from user-defined NVRAM (UP) Switch #8: Enables recognition (smart modem) (DOWN)

2

Connect a terminal to the modem!

3

Power up the modem!

4

Type: ATS0=1 <ENTER> Modem echo’s what is typed and responds: OK Where “S0=1” writes ‘wait for 1 ring to answer the phone’ to profile 0. The “1” can be any number of rings. 0 means do not answer the phone; numbers greater than 0 indicate the number of rings to wait before answering the phone.

5

Type: AT&F0X0&A0&NnY0&W0<ENTER>, where n is the baud rate in the meter. Do not select 12,000, 14,400 or 28,800 baud, it will not work. Modem echo’s what is typed and responds: OK Where “&Y0” tells the modem to use profile 0 as default. Where “&W0” writes the changes in the active profile to profile 0.

6

Type: ATZ<ENTER> Modem does not echo what you type but does respond after a short delay: OK

7

Type: ATI4<ENTER> Modem does not echo what you type but does respond.

1.

6-6

This field tells the modem how many rings to wait before answering the phone.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Communications

U.S. Robotics Sportster 33600 Fax Modem Settings

B0 E0 F1 M1 Q0 V1 X0 Y0 BAUD=115200 PARITY=N WORDLEN=8 DIAL=TONE ON HOOK CID=0 &A0

&B0

&C1

&D0

&G0

&H0

&I0

&K1

&M4

&N6

&P0

&R1

&S0

&T5

&U0

&Y1

S00=001 1 S01=000 S06=002

S02=043

S03=013

S04=010

S05=008

S07=060 S13=000

S08=002

S09=006

S10=014

S11=070

S12=050

S15=000 S23=019

S16=000

S18=000

S19=000

S21=010

S22=017

S25=005 S32=002

S27=000

S28=008

S29=020

S30=000

S31=128

S33=000 S40=001

S34=000

S35=000

S36=014

S38=000

S39=000

S41=000

S42=000

LAST DIALED #: OK

1.

This field tells the modem how many rings to wait before answering the phone.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

6-7

Communications

RS-485 Board The QUANTUM Q1000 RS-485 Option Board provides 1 RS-485 port or 1-RS-232 port for the Q1000. In either configuration, the RS-485 board uses COM port 2 in the meter. Either port is isolated from the existing COM 1 RS-232 port and the AC input. The RS-485 port operates with cable lengths of up 4000 feet and with as many as 32 devices sharing the RS-485 bus. The RS-232 port operates with cable lengths of up to 50 feet (up to 100 feet with low capacitance cable) and with up to 255 devices using multidrop addressing. If longer distances are needed, then the RS-232 communication can be converted from wire to fiber optics, radio, etc. The data rate can be up to 115,200 bits per second for either communication type.

PC RS-232 Output

B&B Electronics 485TBLED

Null Modem Adapter

Q1000 Meter

Q1000 Meter

Example RS-232 to RS-485 Converters TD (A) TD (B) RD (A) RD (B) SHLD

Aten - IC 485S

TD (A) / TD (B) / RD (A) / RD (B) /

T+ TR+ R-

IC-11

TD (A) / TD (B) / RD (A) / RD (B) /

T+ TR+ R-

Up to 32 Q1000 Meters Total

4-Wire RS-485 Bus Null Modem Adapter

Note: Only ground shield wire on one end of bus.

Figure 6.2 RS-485 Connections

RS-232 to RS-485 Converters A Q1000 meter without an internal RS-485 board supports RS-232 outputs on COM ports 1 and 2. An external conversion to RS-485 format may be accomplished using an external RS-232 to RS-485 converter. The following sections describe the connections for several converters available in the market. These examples have been tested with the Q1000 meter. Other converters are available.

B&B Electronics—485TBLED To use the B&B Electronics—485TBLED converter, the Control jumper should be removed and the Echo jumper should be ON. No Null Modem cable is required with this converter. Table 6.1 shows the wiring for this converter.

6-8

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Communications

Table 6.1 B&B Electronics—485TBLED RS-485 Converter Wiring B&B Electronics— 485TBLED

Q1000 RS-485 Splitter Cable

TD(A)

White/Red

TD(B)

Red/White

RD(A)

Brown/White

RD(B)

White/Brown

SHLD

Yellow/White

Aten—IC-485 To use the Aten—IC-485 converter, the DTE, Simu, and T-ON/R-ON switches should be selected. A Null Modem cable is required with this converter. Table 6.2 shows the wiring for this converter. Table 6.2 Aten—IC-485 RS-485 Converter Wiring Aten IC-485 Q1000 RS-485 Splitter Cable Pin

Signal

1

TD(A)/T+

Red/White

2

TD(B)/T-

White/Red

3

RD(A)/R+

Brown/White

4

RD(B)/R-

White/Brown

IC-11 To use the IC-11 converter, the DTE and T-ON/R-ON switches should be selected. A Null Modem cable is required with this converter. Table 6.3 shows the wiring for this converter. Table 6.3 IC-11 RS-485 Converter Wiring IC-11 Q1000 RS-485 Splitter Cable Pin

Signal

1

TD(A)/T+

Red/White

2

TD(B)/T-

White/Red

3

RD(A)/R+

Brown/White

4

RD(B)/R-

White/Brown

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

6-9

Communications

Default Communications Settings The default Q1000 communication settings are shown in Table 6.4. Table 6.4 Default Communications Settings Factory Default

Customer Default

General Inside Call Window

1

1

Outside Call Window

8

8

Protocol

SCS

Mini-DLMS

Meter Address

N/A

1

Group Address

N/A

0

Auto Baud Detect

N/A

Yes

Input Baud Rate

N/A

9600

Mini-DLMS

Mini-DLMS

Meter Address

1

1

Group Address

0

0

RTS to Tx Delay

1

1

Drop RTS to Tx Delay

1

1

DCD to Tx Delay

0

0

Auto Baud Detect

Yes

Yes

Connection Type

Direct Connect

Direct Connect

Input Baud Rate

9600

9600

Protocol

SCS

Mini-DLMS

Meter Address

N/A

1

Group Address

N/A

0

RTS to Tx Delay

N/A

1

Drop RTS to Tx Delay

N/A

1

DCD to Tx Delay

N/A

0

Auto Baud Detect

N/A

Yes

Connection Type

N/A

Direct Connect

Input Baud Rate

N/A

9600

Optical Port

Serial Port 1 Protocol

Serial Port 2

6-10

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Communications

A factory default reset is performed using DIP switch #3. A customer default reset is performed by a three button reset. See Section 3, Operating Instructions, for more details.

BPS Rates There are three bps rates that come into effect when modems are used to connect two devices together. The following explanation details these rates and their purpose in a Q1000 meter set-up. The first is the meter to modem rate, the second is the modem to modem rate, and the third is the remote modem to remote station (PC, SCADA system, or RTU) rate.

Figure 6.3 Three Communication Rates for Modem Connections

•

To control the flow rate between the meter and the modem, program the meter to answer and/or call at a specific bps rate. The bps rate for the meter to modem is selectable from 1200 to 115,200 bps. (Rate 1)

•

Modem to modem autobaud rate sensing is supported for incoming and outgoing calls as a standard modem feature. (Rate 2)

•

The remote modem to remote station rate is controlled by the remote station. (Rate 3)

This description is valid for both the internal and external modems.

Detection Off-Hook Detect The internal modem module supports parallel off-hook detect. If the line is a shared line, then the modem will sense if an extension phone picks up the line and the handset is toggled, and the meter will release its hold on the line. A phonehome unit will not attempt to dial while the off-hook condition exists. Once the condition disappears, the meter will re-initiate its call. Off-hook detect can be disabled by connecting jumper JP1 on the Modem board as shown in Figure 6.4.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

6-11

Communications

Off-Hook Detect Jumper (J1) Installing the Jumper Disables Off-Hook Detect

Figure 6.4 Internal Modem Off-Hook Detect Enable/Disable Jumper

Call Windows Call windows are time ranges that determine when a meter will answer the phone or place calls. A window is defined by start and stop times programmed in a 24hour format. Different answer delays are available for inside and outside of call windows. Use PC-PRO+ 98 programming software to configure call windows. The meter will usually not initiate a call home when the window is closed; this action is programmable. Certain events can attempt one call outside the window. Call windows are programmed independently for each day of the week. There are up to two programmable windows per day. For each day and each window you can select “closed all day”, “open all day” or “custom”. When custom is selected start and stop times for each window are programmable. The open and close times have one minute resolution. The maximum length is 24 hours. The windows can overlap. If a call is in progress while the window closes, the call will be completed.

Answer Delays There are two separate answer delays: one for inside and one for outside the call window. These settings are made in the Communication Setup component. See the PC-PRO+ 98 Online Help for more information. The meter will “write” the number of rings to wait before answering a phone call to an internal or external modem at the start of a new call window or at a power up.

Answer in Call Windows The meter can be programmed to answer after a select number of rings inside the defined call windows.

Answer Outside Call Windows The meter can be programmed to answer after a select number of rings outside the defined call windows.

6-12

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Communications

Ring Answer Delay The meter has an answer delay dip switch which will cause the meter to delay 8 rings on an unprogrammed meter. This dip switch can be disabled causing the meter to pick up the phone on the first ring. This switch function only applies to an unprogrammed meter. The DIP switch is located on the lower left hand of the display board in the Q1000.

Tip and Ring Polarity The polarity of the tip and ring lines does not affect the operation of the modem.

Telephone Circuits Dedicated Phone Line A dedicated phone line is used in situations where one phone line connects to one meter and no other devices or phone lines are connected to the line. Figure 6.5 illustrates a typical dedicated phone line connection. .

Figure 6.5 Dedicated Phone Line Connection

Parallel Off-Hook Detect The parallel off-hook detect option is useful in situations where the Q1000 meter shares a customer’s phone line. The parallel off-hook detect circuit provides the same customer phone hook status sensing capability as the series off-hook detect circuit used in other devices.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

6-13

Communications

When implementing the parallel off-hook detect option, an RJ-11C telephone jack should be used. The Q1000 modem is connected to the RJ-11C jack with the provided 6-position telephone cable with RJ-11 connector. In installations where the meter shares the phone line with customer’s phones and in the parallel off-hook detect configuration described above, all customer’s phones and other communication devices should be tested for proper operation after the Q1000 meter is installed.

Figure 6.6 Meter Sharing Customer Phone Line

Though the Q1000 meter meets specified dielectric, surge and discharge tests, it cannot protect against the large ground potential rise that can occur on the electrical system during switching operations, lightning strikes, surge arrester operations, or faults. The Q1000 meets or exceeds the industry standards for transient and surge protection; however, the specifications are in terms of 1.5 to 8 kV for dielectric, surge, and static discharge tests. The ground potential rise between the electrical system and the earth point (equivalent to the grounded equipment at the switching room of the telephone company) is in the order of 15 to 25 kV. The meter is not designed to protect against these large ground potential rises. ANSI and IEC standards have been designed to consider the whole picture. To protect against high surges and transients on the telephone system, the user must install the meter and the telephone circuit in such a way that the ground potential rise between the station ground grid and the telephone company system (equipment and wires) is absorbed (blocked). The telephone company and the electric utility (user) usually agree and require that the Tip, Ring and Shield wires from the telephone company not touch the ground grid of the station. The user should provide this isolation protection in those utilities and in those countries where there is not formal prohibition against the Tip, Ring and Shield wires from the telephone company touching the ground grid of the substation. For more information refer to the Installation and Grounding of the QUANTUM Meters: A Suggested Practice Guide.

6-14

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Communications

Dialing Features The meter is capable of dialing two numbers which can contain up to 60 characters including dial modifiers. The phone number will be a string of ASCII characters set up by PC-PRO+ 98 programming software. Features like delay between digits are handled by PC-PRO+ 98 programming software by inserting the following dial modifiers in the phone string. Table 6.5 Dial Modifiers Dial Modifier 0-9#,*

Description Digits/characters for dialing (# valid only for tone dialing)

!

Hook flash

W

wait for dial tone

,

Delay processing of next character by number of seconds

Retry Features If call windows are always open and a call is not answered or is incomplete, the meter will complete the following procedure by default: 1

Wait a random delay of 6 to 255 seconds.

2

Place the call to the first specified number.

3

If the call fails and there is a second number, then the second number is called.

If the call is not successful, the meter will: 1

Repeat the above sequence nine additional times.

2

Wait 10 minutes.

3

Repeat the above call sequence.

If the windows are used, then the meter can be programmed to place one phone call regardless of the call window. If the call fails, the meter uses the same retry strategy but only within the specific call window. If the meter has not reached the master station during the call window, then it will wait until the following call window and restart the random retry strategy.

Number of Redials The number of redials specifies the number of times a given number is called. If two numbers are programmed, then each number will be redialed this number of times. The number of redials on a phone-home meter could be overridden to redial a selected number of times if the master station fails to answer. Its range can go from 1 to 255, but must be 15 or less for meters in Canadian markets.

Minutes to Wait Between Retry Sequences The number of minutes between retry sequences on a phone-home meter could be overridden to wait a selected number of minutes if the master station fails to answer. The range is 1 to 255 minutes, but must be 60 or greater for meters in Canadian markets.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

6-15

Communications

Phone Home on Event The meter will call the master station when one of several events occurs. If the master station is set up to receive calls and interrogate meters, then incoming calls will be logged to alert the operator that a certain condition exists. If the meter is programmed to call outside its windows, then it will immediately place a call to the master station after an event has taken place. When the meter has a call window, the meter will wait until the window is open to make the second attempt. Only if enabled in the programming software will the meter attempt to make a call outside a call window after an event occurs. If the phone home attempts are not successful, then the meter will use the retry strategy specified in the “Retry Features” section. The user can select up to 32 events to trigger a phone call. The meter can be configured to phone home on the following events: •

Clock Error

•

Demand EOI

•

Demand Reset

•

Digital State Input 1-16

•

Fatal Error

•

Load Profile #1 & #2 EOI

•

Loss of Phase

•

Loss of Potential A, B, or C (see "Event Configuration" on page 3-53)

•

Non-Fatal Error

•

Optical Port Active

•

Port 1 or 2 Active

•

Power outage

•

Register Self Read

•

Threshold 1-16

For each of the events the user can select a port and a phone number to use. The first event in the chart is considered to have the highest priority. Following is an example configuration for phone home on event and the meter’s response to events triggered. Table 6.6 Phone Home Configuration Example Event Name

Attempt 1

Attempt 2

Attempt 3

Attempt 4

Loss of Phase

PH#1/PO#1

PH#1/PO#2

PH#2/PO#2

PH#2/PO#1

CLK_Error

PH#2/PO#1

PH#1/PO#1

PH#1/PO#2

PH#2/PO#2

Test mode

PH#1/PO#2

PH#2/PO#2

PH#2/PO#1

No Attempt

PH#1 is phone number 1, PH#2 is phone number 2, PO#1 is port number 1, and PO#2 is port number 2.

6-16

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Communications

Assuming that the meter has experienced each of the above events: •

The meter tries to call home on event first using PH#1/PO#1.

•

If this event is acknowledged, the meter will continue on to call PH#2/PO#1 for the CLK error event.

•

If the first event is not acknowledged, it will move to Attempt 2 and try PH#1/ PO#1.

•

After the clock error is acknowledged or the call is unsuccessful, the meter will then try the test mode event for PH#1/PO#2.

If the meter has a loss of phase and has been placed in test mode the call sequences would be as follows: •

The meter tries to call home on event first using PH#1/PO#1.

•

If the first event is not acknowledged, it will move to Attempt 2 and try PH#1/ PO#2.

•

After the loss of phase error is acknowledged or the call is unsuccessful, the meter will then try the test mode event for PH#1/PO#2.

Changing Meter Time The Q1000 meter allows the user to change the time in the meter while continuing other meter functions—all while the meter is in service. The time in the meter can be changed in the several ways. A time change of up to +/- 1 hour does not require the user to re-initialize the meter. If a time change of more than one hour is needed, then the user can perform multiple time change commands or perform an initialization to the meter.

Programming Software Time Change The PC-PRO+ 98 programming software can be used to change the time in the Q1000 meter. While on-line with the meter, go to “Communications” at the top of the screen, and select time adjustment. A dialog will come up showing the System clock time (the PC's time) and the Device clock time (the meter's time). The user can then choose to change the time in the meter to the PC's time or an offset of the PC's time. A maximum time change of +/- 1 hour is supported with this function.

Advanced Protocol Time Change Several of the Advanced Protocols available as options in the QUANTUM Q1000 meter allow the user to change the time in the meter or the meter's port through the use of protocol commands. These Advanced Protocols include the DNP 3.0 protocol, the IEC 60870-5-102 protocol, the IEC 60870-5-102 Plus protocol, and the MODBUS protocol. For specific information about any of these protocols, refer to the Protocol Editor software and Getting Started Guide. These sources give detailed information about each of these protocols.

GPS Time Synchronization In addition, the Q1000 meters now have the ability to do GPS Time Synchronization when ordered with this function. The meter's GPS function complies with the NMEA 0183 standard - the common standard for GPS receivers.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

6-17

Communications

A GPS time adjustment ability in the Q1000 meter can be configured to be accurate to within 100 ms when used in a system that supports this fast resolution update time. The PC-PRO+ 98 software allows the user to program the GPS port to •

watch for the absolute time in the meter.

•

watch for a “top of the hour” or “midnight” signal.

•

perform a time synchronization of up to +/- 30 minutes.

Up to 5 different GPS time synchronization device configurations can be programmed into one meter which will allow a Q1000 meter to “listen” for five different GPS device message types simultaneously. This flexibility will allow the meter to support multiple GPS devices in one PC-PRO+ 98 program and lets the user switch from one external GPS device to another without having to reprogram the meter. Another powerful feature of the GPS time synchronization function in the Q1000 meter is its ability to support GPS signals from non-GPS devices like RTUs. In this set-up, the meter can be configured to “listen” to a non-GPS device send a GPS ASCII format message to perform the time synchronization function with existing equipment at a meter's location. The Optical port, COM 1 port or COM 2 port may be configured to communicate using the Mini-DLMS protocol. The user determines which of these port(s) to use for Mini-DLMS in the PC-PRO+ 98 programming software in the “Communications Set-up” component. One to three ports may be programmed with the Mini-DLMS protocol. For one of the Mini-DLMS configured ports, the GPS time synchronization function may enabled too; you can only set up one port at a time for time synchronization. This one port is “shared” between the Mini-DLMS and GPS time synchronization functions. Once a port has been selected as a time synchronization port in “Communication Set-up”, an additional tab in the Communications Setup component turns on called Time Synchronization. The dialogs in this TAB are used to configure the various time synchronization functions. The HELP screens in the programming software give detailed information and examples for configuring time synchronization in the meter. Also, refer to the programming software “Getting Started Guide”. This port is a Mini-DLMS port and can talk to PC-PRO+ 98, EnergyAudit, and EnergyScan. Then, when a GPS time synchronization message is “heard” by the port, the function of the port switches to GPS time synchronization, and the meter performs the time adjustment. When this short function is completed, the port reverts back to its normal Mini-DLMS tasks. This technological innovation in the Q1000 meter saves the user a port by enabling one port to perform two separate tasks.

Protocols Since there are no industry wide standard protocols, SchlumbergerSema supports many protocols in the Q1000 meter. The protocols in the Q1000 meter are divided into two groups-Basic Protocols and Advanced Protocols.

6-18

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Communications

Basic Protocols Mini-DLMS Mini-DLMS is the protocol that allows PC-PRO+ 98 software to program the meter and retrieve data. The meter will force at least one port to be configured for MiniDLMS. Mini-DLMS is an object based protocol. An extensive number of objects have been defined so that retrieving data is made easily and efficiently. All data within the meter can be accessed through these objects. The firmware packs the data in the desired format, yielding to a higher throughput for monitoring applications where time is critical. When configuring the Q1000, the following information is necessary to set up the meter. •

Baud Rate—Any supported baud rate is acceptable up to 115,200 baud.

•

Auto Baud Enable Option—This option is used to be able to connect to the meter at any speed. If this option is disabled, then the meter will only talk at the specified baud rate.

•

Meter's Individual Address—This address allows several meters to exist in the same network. The range of the address is dependent on the protocol selected for the port. All meters connected to the same network must have different addresses; otherwise, more than one reply will be sent, and the line will be jammed. An address is not needed for point-to-point communications.

Different ports on a meter can be programmed with different addresses.

•

Meter's Group Address—The group address may be used to send a command to multiple meters, such as a register freeze command. (This feature is not supported at this time.)

•

RTS to Enable TX Time—This setting is the minimum time that the RTS (Ready To Send) signal is asserted prior to the start bit being transmitted. The range is 0 to 100 milliseconds.

•

Drop RTS after Tx Time—This setting is the minimum time that RTS remains asserted after the last stop bit is transmitted. The range is from 0 to 100 milliseconds.

•

DCD to RX Time—This setting is the minimum time that the DCD input must be asserted prior to the receiver being turned on. The range is 0 to 100 milliseconds. A value of 0 tells the meter to ignore DCD, and the receiver is always on.

QDIP Any of the non-LONWORKs ports on the Q1000 may be configured with the QDIP protocol. This protocol is used by RTUs and other software packages to talk to QUANTUM 200/300 series and the FULCRUM SQ400 meters. The QDIP protocol that the Q1000 supports is a subset of the QUANTUM’s feature set. From the data in the program tables, the RTU or polling software knows what registers are programmed. Unlike the QUANTUM meter, the Q1000 does not require additional hardware to support QDIP. The protocol is implemented in the meter’s code. The

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

6-19

Communications

RTU polls the meter to retrieve the register information as well as other basepage items. The Q1000’s emulation handles a fixed normal program table that contains 26 registers. The alternate program table is empty. Below is the standard register list in the order supported. .

Table 6.7 QDIP Registers Index

a

6-20

Quantity

Unit

0

Wh Delivered

kilo units

1

Wh Received

kilo units

2

Maximum Delivered Watt Demand

kilo units

3

VARh Delivered

kilo units

4

VARh Received

kilo units

5

Phase A Maximum Amp Demand

kilo units

6

Phase B Maximum Amp Demand

kilo units

7

Phase C Maximum Amp Demand

kilo units

8

Instantaneous Watts

units

9

Instantaneous VARs

units

10

Instantaneous Power Factor

units

11

Phase A Instantaneous Power Factor

units

12

Phase B Instantaneous Power Factor

units

13

Phase C Instantaneous Power Factor

units

14

Phase A Instantaneous Volts

units

15

Phase B Instantaneous Volts

units

16

Phase C Instantaneous Volts

units

17

Phase A Instantaneous Amps

units

18

Phase B Instantaneous Amps

units

19

Phase C Instantaneous Amps

units

20

Instantaneous Neutral Amps

units

21

Instantaneous VA

units

22

Maximum Neutral Amp Demand

kilo units

23

Instantaneous Delivered SLC Watts (Present Delivered Wattsa)

units

24

Instantaneous Received SLC Watts (Present Received Wattsa)

units

25

a

Instantaneous Delivered SLC Vars (Present Delivered Vars )

units

26

Instantaneous Received SLC Vars (Present Received Varsa)

units

Equivalent registers in the QUANTUM ST-Q100, 200, 300 series.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Communications

The following registers are added and cannot be removed from the meter configuration when QDIP protocol is selected: Energy Registers •

Wh d

•

Wh r

•

VARh d

•

VARh r

Demand Registers •

Max A (a)

•

Max A (b)

•

Max A (c)

•

Max A (n)

The following items may be configured if QDIP is chosen on one port of the Q1000 meter: •

Baud Rate—The allowed speeds are from 1200 to 115,200 baud.

•

Auto Baud Enable Option—This option can be used to be able to connect to the meter at any speed. If this option is disabled, the meter will only talk at the specified baud rate.

•

Auto Baud Time Out—This parameter allows the QDIF server to sense the baud rate again after this number of seconds. This setting can be very helpful for switching baud rate on the customer side without having to reprogram the meter.

•

Meter's Individual Address—This address allows several meters to exist in the same network. The range of the address is from dependent on the protocol selected for the port. All meters connected to the same network must have different addresses; otherwise, more than one reply will be sent, and the line will be jammed. An address is not needed for point-to-point communications.

Different ports on a meter can be programmed with different addresses.

•

RTS to Enable TX Time—This setting is the minimum time that the RTS (Ready To Send) signal is asserted prior to the start bit being transmitted. The range is 0 to 100 milliseconds.

•

Drop RTS after Tx Time—This setting is the minimum time that RTS remains asserted after the last stop bit is transmitted. The range is from 0 to 100 milliseconds.

•

DCD to RX Time—This setting is the minimum time that the DCD input must be asserted prior to the receiver being turned on. The range is 0 to 100 milliseconds. A value of 0 tells the meter to ignore DCD and the receiver is always on.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

6-21

Communications

IEC 1107 (SIRP) Any one port of the Q1000 can be configured to support the SIRP implementation of the IEC 1107 protocol with a restricted version of the Mode C implementation, a programming mode. The baud rates for the protocol are selectable form 300 to 9600. The following features are implemented: •

Responding to an identification message from the host.

•

Negotiating a baud rate with the host.

•

Supporting verification of password.

•

Performing automatic data read out of supported registers (energy and demand registers) without entering the programming mode.

•

Entering the programming mode in Mode C.

•

Supporting the full data readout of all the supported registers using the SchlumbergerSema SIRP formatted codes.

SCS (factory use only) Any of the non-LONWORKs ports can be configured with SCS protocol. This protocol is used to calibrate the meter at the factory and serves no purpose in the field.

Loader This protocol is used to download new firmware in the meter. See "Firmware Upgrades" on page 3-80 for more information.

Advanced Protocols An Advanced Protocol is not a standard Q1000 feature. This additional functionality must be specified as a part of the meter specification submitted to SchlumbergerSema with the meter order. Advanced protocols currently supported for the Q1000 meter include DNP 3.0 Level 2+, IEC 60870-5-102, IEC 60870-5-102 Plus, and MODBUS RTU protocols. Advanced protocols are highly configurable. For advanced protocols, the meter's firmware must support the advanced protocol and the meter must have a MeterKey license for that protocol. The advanced protocol configuration files reduce implementation time and the expense of developing custom SCADA (Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition) protocol implementations. Advanced protocols are configured by using the SchlumbergerSema Protocol Editor software. These protocols have a flexible, user-configurable design. The following table gives a quick overview of the capabilities of each protocol.

6-22

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Yes Yes No (9)

DNP 3.0

MODBUS RTU

IEC 60870-5-102

IEC 60870-5-102 Plus

Standard Load Profile

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide No

Extended Load Profile Yes

Last (9)

No No

No

(2)

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes (3)

Yes (4)

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

(7)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Digital Signature of Load Profile Data

Yes

Self Reads Yes (3)

(11)

(8)

Yes

(5)

(10)

No

(2)

(2)

Yes

Yes

Current Year DST Change and Read

No

Input/Output Information

Last (1)

Display

No

Threshold Alarms

(6)

23-5 (Load Profile Data) Yes (3)

Supports Changing Time in Meter?

Yes

TOU

No

Instantaneous Harmonics

(2)

Instantaneous Voltage Quality

Last (1)

Event Status

No

Non-Register Values

No

Yes

Yes

Password Protection

(11) Fatal and Non-fatal errors, plus some events and some event summaries supported

(10) CT Ratio, VT Ratio, Pulse Weight, and Serial Number supported

(9) 4 of 14 billing registers from last self read (can be selected by the user)

(8) Fatal and Non-fatal errors, plus some events supported

(7) Counters supported

(6) Information is retained from the last complete load profile interval

(5) State events are supported (ON or OFF)

(4) TOU rate information can be retrieved (with 5.x and above firmware)

(3) Supported in 5.x and above firmware

(2) Mostly supported

(1) Delivered and Received: Watts, VARs, VA Arithmetic, VA Vectorial, Watts SLC Compensated, VARs SLC Compensated, VA Vectorial Compensated.

Instantaneous Registers (Energy, Demand, Sec. Inst., etc.)

Advanced Protocol

Communications

6-23

Communications

DNP 3.0 The first Advanced Protocol in the Q1000 was DNP 3.0 with Level 2 implementation being supported. DNP 3.0 is a read/write protocol used by a wide variety of systems including SCADA systems. The Distributed Network Protocol Version 3.0 (DNP 3.0) is a read/write protocol that is used by SCADA (System Control And Data Acquisition) systems. The DNP 3.0 protocol serves the need for open, standards-based interoperability between substation computers, RTUs (Remote Terminal Units), IEDs (Intelligent Electronic Devices) and master stations for the electric utility industry. Using Protocol Editor, you can define a DNP 3.0 protocol configuration for a QUANTUM® Q1000 meter. The Q1000 meter supports a Level 2+ implementation.

IEC 60870-5-102 A read/write protocol common in Europe. This protocol is used primarily for load profile and event retrieval. The IEC 60870-5-102 protocol is a read/write protocol common in Europe. This protocol was previously called the IEC 870-5-102 protocol. You can use Protocol Editor to create an IEC 60870-5-102 protocol configuration file that can be used by the Q1000 meter to communicate load profile and event data.

IEC 60870-5-102 Plus A read/write protocol common in Europe. In addition to load profile retrieval, the IEC 60870-5-102 Plus protocol can retrieve 4 energy registers, self-read billing data—4 (user-selectable) of the 14 billing registers, 16 event summaries, CT and VT pulse weights, and information about the meter status and meter messages. The IEC 60870-5-102 protocol was previously called the IEC 870-5-102 protocol. You can use Protocol Editor to create an IEC 60870-5-102 PLUS protocol configuration file that can be used by the Q1000 meter to communicate load profile data, event data, quantity data, and protocol error data.

MODBUS A protocol often used in industrial automation. SchlumbergerSema supports the MODBUS RTU version of the protocol. The MODBUS message that is sent from the master to the slave contains the address of the slave, the command function, such as “read register” or “write register”, the data, and a check sum (LRC or CRC). Using Protocol Editor, you can define a MODBUS protocol configuration for a Q1000 meter. Configuration for the MODBUS protocol involves setting general configuration items as well as defining the data that will be accessible. The general configuration includes communication configuration (such as baud rate and address), word order, identifier values, and other miscellaneous configurations. The register dataset configuration defines the map of Q1000 data onto the MODBUS data spaces: coils, discretes, holding registers and input registers.

6-24

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Communications

Protocol Editor The Protocol Editor software is a configuration file editor that is used to create and modify advanced protocols that support communication with the QUANTUM Q1000 meter. Using the Protocol Editor software, you can create advanced protocol configuration files that are then loaded into the Q1000 meter using the PC-PRO+ 98 version 2.0, or greater, programming software. Protocol Editor is now a part of the PC-PRO+ 98 version 2.0 and above installation; it is installed on your PC along with PC-PRO+ 98. Protocol Editor is intended for a user who is familiar with an advanced protocol. Typically, the electric utility company's protocol expert will work with the utility's Q1000 meter expert to identify the measurement data needed from the meter. Then the protocol-specific configuration requirements for the data retrieval system are configured using the Protocol Editor software to create the protocol configuration file. Each advanced protocol is configured independently by using Protocol Editor to create a protocol configuration file. This file defines the communication parameters for the protocol. The Protocol Data Server (PDS) configuration file is the file that defines the “100 item list” of meter elements to be used by the advanced protocol(s) when communicating with a Q1000 meter. The table below lists the Advanced Protocols and indicates whether a .pds file is required as well as the file types extension.

Protocol

PDS

File Extension

DNP 3.0

Yes

.dnp

IEC 60870-5-102

No

.ie2

IEC 60870-5-102 Plus

No

.i2p

Modbus

No

.mbu

For a more in-depth explanation of Protocol Editor and Advanced Protocols, please see the Help files in Protocol Editor.

Input and Output Options The QUANTUM Q1000 meter has the capability of sending and receiving a wide variety of Inputs and Outputs including Digital, Pulse and Analog signals. The meter can also communicate to other Q1000 meters in some of the I/O network options and exchange data with other LONWORKs compatible devices. I/O signals utilize a LONWORKs Network. These I/O features are options for the Q1000 and can be installed with the meter initially or at a later date. The Q1000 connects to I/O modules via a two wire transformer-isolated LONWORKs LONTALK interface. This I/O interface connection to the network is made through the meter's DB-25 connector which can be connected to the I/O modules using twisted pair wires to terminal strips mounted in the I/O enclosures.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

6-25

Communications

Using the various I/O features of the Q1000, the meter can become a data collector which can gather information from a substation, power plant, or industrial installation. A remote connection to a Q1000 meter with these features allows access to a wide variety of data from a number of devices. The output features allow the Q1000 to interact with devices including recorders, other Q1000 meters, EMS systems, PLC systems, and analog and digital RTUs. A fully loaded Q1000 will support a total of 12 I/O modules with 64 I/O signals. These include: •

4 KYZ and 4 IEC 2-wire KY pulse outputs (using two modules)

•

16 digital state outputs (using two modules)

•

8 KYZ or 8 IEC 2-wire KY pulse inputs (using two modules)

•

16 digital state inputs (using two modules)

•

8 analog outputs (using two modules)

•

8 analog inputs (using two modules)1

The network can normally span about 500 feet and uses shielded twisted pair. The network must be physically terminated at each end. Refer to Figure 6.8 through Figure 6.10 for connection examples. A meter with no I/O modules does not require termination.

Outputs Pulse Outputs (KYZ, or IEC 2-wire KY) The pulse outputs are designed so that any energy type quantity can be output. These outputs can control an IEC 2-wire KY or KYZ output. An IEC 2-wire KY pulse output generates a pulse with a certain width, and a KYZ output toggles its state every time a pulse output triggers it. The configuration is the same regardless of what physical mechanism is chosen. The two wire output may be configured with internal DIP switches on the board to have a 10, 20, 40, or 80 ms output. For a diagram of the output boards, see Chapter 10, Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings. The pulse outputs are programmable through PC-PRO+ 98. The pulse weight is expressed in unitHours/Pulse. The range of pulse constants, or Ke is: 0.00001 to 100,000.0. Ke values are expressed in secondary unithours. Register multipliers do not affect pulse constants. Example 1: For a class 20 Amp meter, 120 Volt 3-phase service, use the following calculation to determine the pulse weight for maximum pulse output resolution:

V ´ I ´ Number of Phases Ke = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------sec onds-ö æ 3600 -------------------( Maximum Pulse Rate ) è hour ø

1.

6-26

Analog Inputs are not currently available in the Q1000 meter. They are a planned enhancement for a future release.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Communications

( 120 Volts ) ´ ( 20 Amps ) ´ ( 3 ) Ke = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------sec onds-ö æ ----------------pulses-ö æ 3600 -------------------40 è hour ø è sec ondø

7200Watts Ke = ------------------------------------------æ 144,000 pulses ----------------ö è hour ø

watthours Ke = 0.05 -------------------------pulse

1

2

40 pulses per second is the maximum number of pulses that the I/O module can output. SchlumbergerSema recommends that 36 pulses per second (90% of maximum) be used to allow for load growth. Some pulse input devices are limited in the maximum number of pulses per second they can receive. Remember to check your pulse input device instruction manual.

Example 2: One channel is designated so that one primary megawatthour will be accumulated per pulse output. Assume a CTR = 240:1 and a VTR = 60:1 The following equation can be used to determine the pulse weight:

1 MWh per Pulse PW sec ondary = æ ------------------------------------------ö = 69.44 Wh per Pulse è ø 240 ´ 60

This pulse weight is a secondary value and must be multiplied by CTR and VTR to obtain the desired 1.0 MWh per pulse on the primary side of the transformer. In addition, the Q1000 meter can be programmed so that one quantity can be used for two or more outputs. For example, watthours can be programmed for pulse outputs on channels one and two. One output could be used for a pulse recorder and one output for the industrial customer, eliminating the need for a pulse splitting device.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

6-27

Communications

Digital State Outputs The meter has over 80 events which can be assigned to trigger a digital state output. Using PC-PRO+ 98, the user can assign the following events to any digital state output. These events include:

6-28

•

Fatal Error—These errors require immediate attention.

•

Non-Fatal Error—These errors need to be investigated to determine their severity.

•

End Of Interval (EOI)—An EOI pulse representing the end of the interval for the Demand Interval, or either load profile interval can be output and used for timing information or synchronization.

•

Threshold Alarms—Up to 16 threshold alarms can be assigned in the Q1000. These thresholds can be configured as normal or inverted where a normal threshold indicates that a maximum level has been exceeded, and an inverted threshold indicates that a minimum level has been exceeded.

•

Loss of phase—An output indicating that the potential on any phase has dropped below a user defined level may be routed to the output.

•

Demand Reset—An output can be sent when a demand reset is performed.

•

Port Active—An output can be sent when a port’s status changes; either when it becomes active or when it becomes inactive.

•

Clock Error—An output can be sent when the software cannot communicate with the real time clock (RTC) using the serial interface.

•

Register Freeze—An output can be sent to indicate that a self read or register freeze has been performed.

•

Rate Alert—A contact closure corresponding to a programmed TOU rate.

•

Digital State Input—A contact closure corresponding to a digital state input.

•

TOU Status—Several TOU statuses may be assigned to trigger a digital state output including: -

Time Override

-

Scheduled Output

-

Holiday

-

Event Override

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Communications

Analog Outputs Analog outputs can used to feed analog recorders, PLCs or RTUs. These recording devices usually take instantaneous values from sensors and transducers. An analog output for the Q1000 must represent an instantaneous value from the meter like Amps, Volts, and Watts. First, select either voltage or current outputs for each desired analog output. Next, select the range to use. The Analog Output module supports 3 voltage outputs and 4 current outputs. The ranges are : Voltage Ranges:

0 to +10 Volts (unipolar) -5 to +5 Volts (bipolar) -10 to +10 Volts (bipolar)

Current Ranges:

0 to +1 Milliamps (unipolar) -1 to +1 Milliamps (bipolar) 4 to 20 Milliamps (unipolar) 4 - 12 - 20 Milliamps (bipolar)

Zero offsets can either be zero (0) or an integer. Integer values for Zero Offset are typically entered as negative values. The Zero Offset defines the mid-point value or the value of zero. The range for the analog output value from the meter to the I/O module is 0 to 100% for delivered quantities and -100% to +100% for net quantities. Defining a zero offset allows you to improve the resolution of the analog output by sending values in smaller increments. Delivered quantities start at zero and go to the delivered maximum or full scale, which is 100%. Therefore, the analog output range for delivered quantities is 0 to 100%. For net quantities, values can range from the negative of the full scale value to the positive of the full scale value with zero in the middle. Therefore, for net quantities, the analog output range is -100% to + 100%. W delivered Example: For 0 to 50,000 W delivered, 0 represents 0 Watts and 100% represents 50,000 W. W net Example: For an inter-tie site where watts are delivered or received, maximum number in either direction must be estimated. After estimating the maximum, establish that value as the full scale value. The positive maximum is +100% (full scale positive). The negative maximum represents watts received or -100% (full scale negative). Typically you enter a negative value for the zero offset to “set it back” to zero. For the Analog Output module to operate at the 0 to 100% or -100 to 100% range, you must have the module's DIP switches and Jumpers set to the desired output range. Refer to Analog Output Module Configuration Settings on page -61 for these output range settings.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

6-29

Communications

Unipolar Examples K Value Calculation With Zero Offset Equal to Zero: The meter is a three element meter, 120V, 20A for a three phase four-wire WYE installation. The value to be output is Watts. The maximum value for Watts is 3 phases x120x20 = 7200 Watts. If the maximum relative value is 7200 Watts, when 7200 watts are measured, the output must be at 100%. A zero offset of 0 is used because this is a delivered quantity with a range of 0 to 100%. Full scale = 7200 W Zero Offset = 0 K = [Full scale value + (- Zero offset)] / 100% K = [7200 + (-0)] / 100% K = 72 K Value Calculation With Zero Offset Not Equal to Zero: If the range of values for V2H (Volts-squared Hours) is 14400 V to 19600 V, you could set -14400 V as the zero offset. With 14400 V as zero, 19600 V would represent 100% of the output. The scaling factor of K would equal 52 as shown below: Full scale = 19600 V Zero Offset = -14400 K = [Full scale value + (- Zero offset)] / 100% K = [19600 + (-14400)] / 100 K = 52 K Value Calculation With Hertz Quantity and Zero Offset Not Equal to Zero: To use 65 Hz as the full scale value (100%) and 55 Hz as the negative maximum value (-100%), define -60 Hz as the zero offset value. Full scale = 65 Hz Zero Offset = -60 K = [Full scale value + (- Zero offset)] / 100% K = [65 + (-60)] / 100 K = 5 / 100 K = .05 Using 4 to 20 mA Range as a Unipolar Output It is very common for industrial data acquisition systems to use 4-20mA in a unipolar mode, that is, 4mA represents 0. To use such equipment with the Q1000 Analog Output Module, simply apply the bipolar formulas for offset and gain. For example, to produce 4mA when 0 Watts are delivered and 20mA when 7200 Watts are delivered, use: Max – Min K = --------------------------200

Max + Min Offset = – ---------------------------2

6-30

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Communications

7200 – 0 K = --------------------- = 36 200

and

7200 + 0 Offset = – --------------------- = – 3600 2

Bipolar Example This example shows calculations for K (gain factor) and the Offset for Analog Output ranges which are bipolar (centered at 0%). Analog output ranges which are bipolar are as follows: •

-1mA to +1mA

•

4mA to 20mA (12 mA represents 0)

•

-5V to +5V

•

-10V to + 10 V

Calculations for K and the Offset for bipolar outputs are as follows: – Min K = Max --------------------------200

Max + Min Offset = – ---------------------------2

where Max is the value of the measured quantity, full-scale and Min is the lowest value of the measured quantity expected. For example, if the maximum Watt measurement is 7200 and the minimum is 1440, the corresponding gain factor and offset are:

7200 – 1440 K = ------------------------------ = 28.8 200

and

7200 + 1440 Offset = – ------------------------------ = – 4320 2

For this example, applying a 1440 Watt load would produce 4mA at the output of an Analog Output Channel set up for 4-20mA range. Applying 4320 Watts would result in a 12mA output and 7200 Watts would generate a 20mA output.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

6-31

Communications

Inputs Pulse Inputs (KYZ, or IEC 2-wire KY) Pulse inputs can be generated by meters or other devices which support either KYZ outputs or pulse outputs. The type of input is configured by the setting of a jumper on the I/O Module. For a diagram of the input boards, see Chapter 10. Data received into the Q1000 via a digital pulse input can be assigned to several different kinds of values. These include block interval and thermal demand, energy registers, and load profile. Using PC-PRO+ 98, the user can assign a pulse weight multiplier for each digital pulse input to convert the pulses received to the true value.

Digital State Inputs Digital state inputs can be used to log the closing of a relay, switching of capacitor banks, or noting any event which can signal a contact closure. The date and time of each opening and closing of the state inputs can be logged in the event log. For a diagram of the input boards, see Chapter 10. The status inputs can also trigger an action in the meter such as listed below: •

Register Self Read or Freeze—A status input can be programmed to trigger a self read in the meter where the user defines which registers will be stored.

•

Call home on event —The Q1000 can be programmed to phone in on a status input event.

•

Real Time Billing—See Chapter 4, Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary, for a full description. Whenever one of the inputs is active, a corresponding TOU rate may be programmed to become active. The time of use rates and assignment of a digital state input to a TOU rate are programmed in PC-PRO+ 98.

Analog Inputs Analog inputs1 are used to record data from sensors like transducers that output analog signals. Examples include temperature and frequency. Data received into the Q1000 via an analog input can be assigned to several different kinds of values. These include instantaneous, demand, and energy registers that can be sent to and stored in load profile. For a diagram of the input boards, see Chapter 10. The Q1000 will need to be programmed with the appropriate multiplier to convert the input value received to the true value. Each channel will have circuitry for input scaling and offset adjustments. The offset will allow the user to set a “zero” for each input.

1.

6-32

Analog Inputs are not currently available in the Q1000 meter. They are a planned enhancement for a future release.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Communications

Input / Output Modules (Optional)

Also see Figure 1.11 on page 1-36 and Figure 2.30 on page 2-24.

Figure 6.7 I/O Module Mounted on DIN Rail

The input/output modules allow the meter to be easily customized to a particular application. The modules are installed external to the meter and housed in a standard enclosure that mounts on a DIN rail. Each module has its own power supply that operates from line 120V AC or DC or 240V DC. Input/output module dimensions can be found in Figure 1.11 on page 1-36; a 3-dimensional view is shown in Figure 2.30 on page 2-24. Up to six modules types (12 modules total; two of each type) can be connected to work with a single Q1000 meter: •

digital state output—stays in closed or open position until toggled

•

pulse output—outputs a fixed length pulse

•

analog output—takes a digital value and converts it to an analog value

•

digital state input—provides voltage to sense a continuous contact closure

•

pulse input—provides voltage to sense a pulse of fixed length

•

analog input—receives an analog input and digitizes it1

Functions of the modules are described below:

1.

•

Digital State Outputs—The digital state outputs will use LCA145-type optocouplers to achieve isolated contact closure outputs. These are intended for use with infrequently changing signals such as customer alerts or EOI.

•

Pulse Outputs—The pulse outputs use LCA145-type opto-couplers to achieve isolated contact closure outputs. The output format is either KYZ or IEC 2-wire KY. For the IEC 2-wire KY outputs, the output pulses are defined by short duration contact closures. The duration can be selected by internal DIP switches.

•

Analog Outputs—The analog outputs use LONWORKs to interface with a multiplexed Digital to Analog Converter (DAC). The DAC's multiplexed outputs interface with four independent output drivers.

Analog Inputs are not currently available in the Q1000 meter. They are a planned enhancement for a future release.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

6-33

Communications

•

Digital State Inputs—The digital state inputs use a single isolated DC supply to provide the wetting voltage for the dry contacts of all the external circuits. This supply provides the voltage for the opto-couplers so that there will be isolation between the internal and external circuits. These input circuits are intended for use with infrequently changing signals such as alarms or EOI.

•

Digital Pulse Inputs—The digital pulse inputs use a single isolated DC supply to provide the wetting voltage for the dry contacts of all the external circuits. This supply provides the voltage for the opto-couplers so that there is isolation between the internal and external circuits. Internal jumpers determine whether the input is KYZ or IEC 2-wire KY. For IEC 2-wire KY inputs, the customer may select the input pulse duration using internal jumpers.

•

Analog Inputs—The analog inputs use LONWORKs to interface with a multiplexed Analog to Digital Converter (ADC). The ADC's multiplexed inputs interface with four independent analog current input circuits. Each channel has circuitry for input scaling and offset adjustments. For current inputs, external resistor networks are necessary for scaling.1

I/O Network Protocol LonTalk The LONTALK protocol implements the 7 layers of the OSI model by the means of a single chip called Neuron. The Neuron chip uses the Neuron C language which has very powerful instructions, especially in handling variables over the network. Two or more applications on the network can exchange data or share data very easily, thanks to the concept of network variables. They behave as global variables in a C program. In other words, a network variable on a node is visible from other nodes without any handling by the application program. This feature is fully exploited by our I/O modules. The state of a digital state output in the meter is seen by the digital state output module and allows the application program to control the output relay. The meter uses the Neuron chip as a communication processor. The Neuron chip is connected to a main processor and provides network access. The application is written on the host, and the host uses the Neuron chip to communicate variables or explicit messages to the network. LONWORKS provides a way of upgrading easily the number of I/Os just by adding more nodes on the network. Also, the number of wires on the meter's side does not increase with the number of I/Os.

LonWorks Circuits The LONWORKS circuit should use shielded twisted pair wire, 22 AWG or better. Even though the LONWORKS circuit has good noise immunity, it is recommended to shield the twisted pair wire and ground at one end to improve performance in noisy environments such as a substations or power plants.

1.

6-34

Analog Inputs are not currently available in the Q1000 meter. They are a planned enhancement for a future release.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Communications

I/O Network The Q1000 can communicate with numerous inputs and outputs through the I/O network. Through this media, the Q1000 can send or receive KYZ pulse, digital status, and analog information. The I/O network should be a low-cost shielded twisted pair wire. The characteristics of the wire used to implement a network will affect the overall system performance with respect to total distance, stub length, and total number of nodes supported on a single channel. The use of UL Level IV, 22 AWG (0.65 mm) shielded twisted pair cable as defined in document: UL’s LAN Cable Certification Program, Document number 200-120 20M/11/9112,13. is recommended.

I/O Bindings Normally, I/O bindings are done at the factory as part of the assembly process. Four versions of plug-and-play bindings are currently supported. The standard is the Universal Plug-and-Play binding. The binding process programs the LONWORKS network variables in both the meters and the I/O modules.

Meter Part Numbers The part numbers of the meters always follow a predefined pattern: 36 xxx yyyy-000 xxx

Determines the physical characteristics of the meter (i.e., voltage, current rating, form, and so forth.)

yyyy

Signifies the binding of the meter.

I/O Module Part Numbers The part numbers of the I/O modules always follow a predefined pattern: 369xxyyyy-000

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

xx

Determines the physical characteristics of the module (i.e., Digital State Output, Digital Pulse Input, and so forth.)

yyyy

Signifies the binding of the I/O module.

6-35

Communications

Binding Codes The three I/O binding options and the respective binding codes are: Binding Option

Binding Code

Meter-to-Meter

005A, 005Ba

ANSI Plug and Play

0004

IEC Plug and Play

0003

Universal Plug and Play

0000

a

Meter-to-Meter Binding is one binding. One meter and its 10 I/O modules have binding 005A; the second meter and its 10 I/O modules have binding 005B.

The specification number is used to check the binding that has been put into a meter or I/O module. The standard part number format for a QUANTUM Q1000 meter or I/O module is: 36xxx_ _ _ _ -xxx The four digits to the left of the dash (-) represent the binding. The Universal Plug-and-Play binding is shown as: 36xxx0000-xxx If a meter and an I/O module have the same 4-digit binding number, then they should have the same bindings and will be able to communicate. For example: Meter Number

I/O Module Number

Bindings Compatible?

36xxx0000-xxx

369xx0000-xxx

Yes

36xxx0002-xxx

369xx0000-xxx

No

36xxx0003-xxx

369xx0003-xxx

Yes

Where x is independent of the bindings.

6-36

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Communications

I/O Module Functionality for the Plug and Play Bindings

I/O Module Number

ANSI Plug and Play

I/O Module Number

IEC Plug and Play

I/O Module Number

Universal Plug and Play

1

Digital State Outputs (1-8)

1

Digital State Outputs (1-8)

1

Digital State Outputs (1-8)

2

Digital State Outputs (9-16)

2

Digital State Outputs (9-16)

2

Digital State Outputs (9-16)

3A

Digital Pulse Outputs KYZ (1-4) and Digital State Output (1)

4A

Digital Pulse Outputs IEC 2-Wire KY (1-4) and Digital State Outputs (1-4)

3

Digital Pulse Outputs KYZ (1-4) and Digital State Output (1)

3B

Digital Pulse Outputs KYZ (5-8) and Digital State Output (2)

4B

Digital Pulse Outputs IEC 2-Wire KY (5-8) and Digital State Outputs (5-8)

4

Digital Pulse Outputs IEC 2-Wire KY (5-8) and Digital State Outputs (1-4)

5

Analog Outputs (1-4)

5

Analog Outputs (1-4)

5

Analog Outputs (1-4)

6

Analog Outputs (5-8)

6

Analog Outputs (5-8)

6

Analog Outputs (5-8)

7

Digital Pulse Inputs KYZ (1-4)

7

Digital Pulse Inputs IEC 2-Wire KY (1-4)

7

Digital Pulse Inputs KYZ or IEC 2-Wire KY (1-4)

8

Digital Pulse Inputs KYZ (5-8)

8

Digital Pulse Inputs IEC 2-Wire KY (5-8)

8

Digital Pulse Inputs KYZ or IEC 2-Wire KY (5-8)

9

Analog Inputs (1-4) *

9

Analog Inputs (1-4) *

9

Analog Inputs (1-4) *

10

Analog Inputs (5-8) *

10

Analog Inputs (5-8) *

10

Analog Inputs (5-8) *

11

Digital State Inputs (1-8)

11

Digital State Inputs (1-8)

11

Digital State Inputs (1-8)

12

Digital State Inputs (9-16)

12

Digital State Inputs (9-16)

12

Digital State Inputs (9-16)

Binding # 0004

Binding # 0003

Binding # 0000

* Module Not Yet Available

The number(s) in parentheses following each module description indicate(s) the I/O channel number(s) present in the respective I/O module.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

6-37

Communications

Meter-to-Meter Binding KYZ Outputs (1-4) *

KYZ Inputs (1-4) *

KYZ Inputs (1-4) *

KYZ Outputs (1-4) *

I/O Module Number

I/O Module Number

1

Digital State Outputs (1-8)

1

Digital State Outputs (1-8)

2

Digital State Outputs (9-16)

2

Digital State Outputs (9-16)

4

Digital KYZ Pulse Outputs (5-8) and Digital State Output (2)

4

Digital KYZ Pulse Outputs (5-8) and Digital State Output (2)

5

Analog Outputs (1-4)

5

Analog Outputs (1-4)

6

Analog Outputs (5-8)

6

Analog Outputs (5-8)

8

Digital Pulse Inputs KYZ or IEC 2-Wire KY (5-8)

8

Digital Pulse Inputs KYZ or IEC 2-Wire KY (5-8)

9

Analog Inputs (1-4) **

9

Analog Inputs (1-4) **

10

Analog Inputs (5-8) **

10

Analog Inputs (5-8) **

11

Digital State Inputs (1-8)

11

Digital State Inputs (1-8)

12

Digital State Inputs (9-16)

12

Digital State Inputs (9-16)

005A Binding Side

005B Binding Side

*

These are virtual I/O modules. This binding incorporates their functionality by just connecting the meters together with a twisted pair.

**

Module Not Yet Available.

The number(s) in parentheses following each module description indicate(s) the I/O channel number(s) present in the respective I/O module.

6-38

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Communications

Network Terminations It is necessary to terminate the ends of the twisted pair bus to minimize reflections. Failure to terminate the bus will degrade network performance. The user can terminate the network either in the meter or I/O modules. Terminations are not polarity sensitive. The LONWORKS bus must be a continuous bus. The twisted pair wires use terminations to connect the twisted pairs together. Terminations can be made on an I/O module (by the user), in a Q1000 meter (at the factory during assembly only), or externally on a Q1000 meter (by the user).

I/O CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES

Figure 6.8 I/O Network with Terminated QUANTUM Q1000 (at one of the bus ends)

Figure 6.8 shows one internally terminated Q1000 meter with two I/O modules. The I/O module on the left is also terminated.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

6-39

Communications

Figure 6.9 I/O Network with Unterminated QUANTUM Q1000 (in between)

Figure 6.9 shows the meter in between two I/O modules. This meter must be unterminated as shown. Both I/O modules are terminated.

Figure 6.10 I/O Network with Two Unterminated Q1000 Meters

6-40

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Communications

Figure 6.10 shows how to connect more than one QUANTUM Q1000 meter in the same I/O network. This configuration requires custom binding which includes custom communication parameters and connection assignments. Contact your SchlumbergerSema Sales Representative for more information. The Q1000 on the left is unterminated and passes through the LONWORKS bus. The Q1000 on the right is unterminated internally but has an external network termination (part number 442045) adapter on the DB-25 connector. The I/O module on the left is terminated, and the one on the right is unterminated.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

6-41

Communications

Notes:

6-42

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Chapter 7

System Loss Compensation The QUANTUM Q1000 meter has the capability of providing System Loss Compensation (SLC) to enable users to install a meter on the low voltage side of a transformer and then compensate the billing data in the meter to a billing point on the high voltage side of the transformer.

Figure 7.1 System Loss Compensation Scheme

System Loss Compensation is a metering scheme that provides for adding (or subtracting) losses to meter registration when it is more economical to install the metering equipment at a point that is different from the contractual billing point. The SLC scheme compensates for the losses that occur between the contractual and the actual metering point. These losses can be from the power transformer, transmission lines, and auxiliary power equipment. These losses can be significant, and sometimes there may be no transformer involved. When rate schedules and service contracts permit, many metering installations are often placed on the low voltage side of the power transformer. Significant savings in the installed cost of the lower voltage CT and VT instrument transformers as compared to the cost of the higher voltage CT and VT instrument transformers can then be achieved. Also, the metering point may be located a considerable distance from the billing point. Compensation for the associated transformer, line, and conductor losses can be included in the QUANTUM Q1000 meter readings. System loss compensation for active and reactive power losses may include transformer, transmission line, and auxiliary equipment losses. Transformer noload core losses, and load losses for winding resistance and leakage reactance as well as transmission line resistive and inductive load loss, and charging current vars may be included. The meter also provides users with the ability to program CT/VT correction in the Q1000 which will allow the user to correct for the errors in the current and voltage transformers. Together these advanced compensation and correction features result in a billing point accuracy that is greatly improved over traditional measurement methods. The current implementation of SLC in the QUANTUM Q1000 meter is the SLC Basic version. This version is similar to the implementation in the QUANTUM STQ meter.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

7-1

System Loss Compensation

System Loss Compensation - Basic SLC is a metering scheme that builds on the QUANTUM meter’s Transformer Loss Compensation (TLC) abilities.

In early PC-PRO+ 98 versions, the SLC values were programmed outside of PC-PRO+ 98. In version 2.1 and higher, SLC configuration programming is done within PC-PRO+ 98.

SLC provides for the adding (or subtracting) of losses to meter registration when it is more economical to install the metering equipment at a point that is different from the contractual billing point. Many metering installations are placed on the low voltage side of the power transformer. When the billing point is on the high side, costly voltage and current instrument transformers are required. Using the System Loss Compensation capabilities of the Q1000 meter to install the meter on the low voltage side can reduce this cost. System loss compensation in the Q1000 meter is applied by calculating all the losses involved and applying them in equations that automatically adjust for variations of voltage and load. The watt and var losses of transformers, transmission lines, and substation conductors and equipment may be included. Loss calculations in the Q1000 meter are done using calculated instantaneous values updated once per second. Once calculated, the system loss compensated quantities can be used as any other meter quantities, for example, in demand, energy, load profile, and so forth. The components that can be used to make up system losses are: •

Losses in substation conductors, bus work, and lines

•

Power transformer losses

•

Transmission line losses

•

CT and VT correction

The following section discusses in detail the use of SLC - Basic.

Figure 7.2 SLC Basic

7-2

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

System Loss Compensation

Elements of System Loss Compensation System loss compensation is applied by calculating all the losses involved and applying them in equations that automatically adjust for variations of voltage and load in real time. The watt and var losses of transformers, transmission lines, and substation conductors and equipment may be included. High Voltage

Low Voltage

Q1000 Meter Figure 7.3 Diagram of QUANTUM Q1000 SLC Metering

The QUANTUM Q1000 meter can be compensated to add the system losses between the billing point and the metering point to the meter readings if the contract calls for the customer to pay for the losses. If the billing and metering points are reversed, and the utility agrees to cover the losses, the Q1000 meter can be compensated to subtract the losses from the meter readings. The objective of system loss compensation is to cause a meter to register as if it were at another physical location, properly adding to (or subtracting from) its registration the losses interposed between the physical metering point and the contractual billing point. Ideally, this compensation would be perfectly accurate under all conditions, automatically adjusting for such factors as temperature influences on conductors and transformer windings and core losses. In practice, assumptions have to be made for operating temperatures, core loss variations, and other variables. The resulting errors in compensation are small compared to total registration.

Transformer Losses Power transformer losses are made up of core (iron) losses that vary with voltage and winding (copper) losses that vary with current. The transformer loss data supplied by the manufacturer includes the core watt loss and percentage exciting current at rated voltage and frequency, and the winding watt loss and the percentage impedance at rated load and temperature. Var losses for both the core and windings can be calculated using this data.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

7-3

System Loss Compensation

The calculation of transformer losses is done in two parts, the core loss (iron loss or no-load loss) and the copper loss (load loss). Figure 7.4 shows a simplified equivalent circuit for a power transformer and two power triangles representing the two kinds of losses. The main components making up the losses are represented by series and shunt resistance and reactance.

Figure 7.4 Simplified Transformer Equivalent Circuit and Loss Power Triangles

Information supplied by the transformer manufacturer includes: •

The kVA rating of the transformer bank

•

Rated primary and secondary voltages

•

No-load watts at rated voltage

•

Load watts at rated current and at 75 C

•

Percent exciting current at rated voltage

•

Percent impedance at rated load.

The watt losses are given for both no-load and full-load, but the var losses have to be calculated. The no-load (iron) losses are composed mostly of eddy current and hysteresis losses in the core and the magnetizing reactance (represented by the shunt resistance and inductance in Figure 7.4(a)). These losses are measured (by the transformer manufacturer) with the transformer open-circuited and rated voltage applied. The information furnished is percentage exciting current (%Ix) and noload (or Fe) watts. Using the power triangle in Figure 7.4(b), we can solve for the no-load vars. The full-load losses are composed of winding resistance (full load watts) and leakage reactance (full load vars), represented by the series resistance and inductance in Figure 7.4(a). These losses are measured with one winding shorted and low voltage applied to the other winding, sufficient to cause rated current in the windings. The information given by the manufacturer is full load watts and percent impedance (%Z). Applying this information to the full-load power triangle in Figure 7.4(c), we can solve for full load vars.

7-4

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

System Loss Compensation

No-load Var Loss Calculation In Figure 7.4(b), the no-load losses are represented by a power triangle. The noload watts loss (NLW) is given directly in the manufacturer’s data. The no-load voltamperes (NLVA) is defined as the percent exciting current (%Ix) times the transformer bank kVA rating:

The kVAr in the following equations stands for the kilovolt-ampere rating of the transformer bank; not kilovars.

NLVA = % Ix · kVAr

The no-load loss phase angle (a) is defined as the inverse cosine of the no-load watts divided by the no-load voltamperes: NLW a = acos æ ---------------ö è NLVAø

The no-load var loss (NLV) is the no-load voltamperes multiplied by the sine of the no-load loss angle: NLV = NLVA · sin ( a )

Full-load Var Loss Calculation In Figure 7.4(c), the full-load losses are represented by another power triangle. The full-load watts loss (FLW) is given directly in the manufacturer’s data. The full-load voltamperes (FLVA) is calculated by multiplying the percent impedance times the transformer bank kVA rating: FLVA = %Z · kVAr

The full-load loss phase angle (b) is the inverse cosine of the full-load watts divided by the full-load voltamperes: FLW b = acos æè ---------------öø FLVA

The full-load var loss (FLV) is the full-load voltamperes multiplied by the sine of the full-load loss angle: FLV = FLVA · sin ( b )

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

7-5

System Loss Compensation

Transmission Line Losses Transmission Line impedance needs to be known in terms of resistance per unit length and effective inductance per unit length, after taking into account line capacitance and compensation. Then the watt and var losses at the transformer bank apparent power (kVA or MVA) rating can be calculated for a given line length. Transmission Line losses are made up of series resistance and inductance and shunt capacitance. The information that is needed to calculate the losses for the transmission line is: •

The series resistance in ohms per unit length

•

The effective series inductive reactance in ohms per unit length, after allowing for shunt capacitance and line compensation

•

The length of the line

•

The primary line current at the VA rating of the transformer bank

The transmission line watt loss is three times (for the three lines) the resistance per unit length times the square of the rated current. The transmission line var loss is three times the inductive reactance per unit length times the square of the rated current. Using the transformer information, calculate the transmission line current at the transformer rated VA. The rated line current is the one-third of the transformer bank VA rating divided by the line-to-neutral voltage.

Substation Losses The substation losses that are to be included in the compensation are calculated at the secondary current of the transformer bank at its VA rating. Var loss in the substation conductors will probably be quite small compared to the transformer and transmission var losses, but may be included if significant. Power supplied to cooling fans and other auxiliary equipment can also be included in the comparison. Substation conductor losses are calculated in a similar manner to transmission line losses, except on the secondary side of the transformer bank. The substation conductor losses may be so small in comparison to those of the transformer bank and transmission line that they can be neglected.

Total System Losses All system losses have been described. The next step is to combine them in preparation for calculation of the four loss coefficients for programming into the meter. All of the full-load watt losses will be added together as will all of the fullload var losses. These losses have been calculated at the kVA rating of the transformer bank. Had there been only transmission line and substation losses (no transformer bank involved), the calculations would be made at the base voltampere rating of the system. Of course, in this case, there would be only copper watt and var losses involved. Since, in the previous examples, only the transformer bank had no-load losses, the NLW and NLV values will be as calculated in the transformer loss section. All of the full-load watt losses will be combined to determine TLW, the total system watt losses, and the full-load var losses will be combined to determine the TLV, the total system var losses.

7-6

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

System Loss Compensation

Examples Examples are given in the following sections to illustrate how to calculate the four loss coefficients for the compensation equations.

Calculation of System Losses For this example, the system losses are calculated assuming a 36 mile transmission line, 10 MVA transformer bank, and 156 feet of substation conductor. Then, the losses will be converted to constants for the compensation equations to be used in different metering situations.

Transformer Losses The transformer data supplied by the manufacturer: kVA rating of transformer bank

10 MVA

Rated primary voltage

115 kV

Secondary line-to-line voltage

12,470 V

Secondary line-to-neutral voltage

7200 V

No-load watts loss

45 kW

Copper loss watts at 75° C

135 kW

Percent impedance

7.5%

Percent exciting current

1.03%

Symbols are assigned here to the transformer data to be used in later calculations:

In the following equations the equals sign (=) means “is defined as”.

kVA rating of transformer bank

kVAr = 10MVA

Rated primary line-to-line voltage

V p = 115kV

Rated line-to-neutral voltage

Vr = 7200V

Rated line-to-line voltage

Vs =

No load watts loss

NLW = 45.0kW

Copper loss watts at 75C

FLW = 135.0kW

3 · Vr

Percent impedance

% Z = 7.5 %

Percent exciting current

% Ix = 1.03 %

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

7-7

System Loss Compensation

Calculation of Transformer Var Losses Calculation of No-load vars (NLV): (Refer to power triangle b in Figure 7.4.) No-load VA (NLVA) is: No-load loss phase angle (a):

· NLVA = ( % Ix · kVAr ) = 0.0103 ( 10MVA ) NLVA = 103kVA

NLW 45.0k a = acos æ ---------------ö = acos æ -------------ö è NLVAø è 103k ø a = 64°

No-load var loss (NLV): NLV = NLVA · sin ( a ) = 103 kVA sin 64° NLV = 92.65kvar

Calculation of Full-load Vars (FLV): (Refer to power triangle c in Figure 7.4.) Full-load VA (FLVA) is: Full-load loss phase angle (b)

FLVA = ( % Z · kVAr ) = 0.075 ( 10MVA ) FLVA = 750kVA FLW 135k b = acos æ ---------------ö = acos æ ------------ö è FLVAø è 750kø b = 79.6°

Full-load var loss (FLV): FLV = FLVA · sin ( b ) = 750k sin 79.6° FLV = 737.75 kvar

Comment: If the transformer bank were composed of three single-phase transformers, each individual transformer’s VA, watt, and var losses would be determined as previously outlined. Then the values for the three transformers would be added to obtain the total transformer loss. Observation: The three-phase transformer watts and vars have been obtained without reference to voltage or rated current in the system. The transformer bank has been treated as a “black box” without any reference to the arrangement of the transformer windings or to whether the system is a three-phase four-wire system, or a three-phase three-wire system.

7-8

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

System Loss Compensation

Transmission Line Losses The transmission line for this example is 36 miles long. The capacitive effect is assumed to be low enough to be neglected. At 60 Hz and 50°C, it has 0.306 ohms resistance and 0.451 ohms reactance per mile per line. This example calculates the resistance and reactance per line and the line current at the transformer kVA rating. The base current is used in cases involving transmission lines and no transformer losses. The total load watt loss for the transmission line is calculated multiplying the resistance per mile times the number of total miles for all three lines times the square of the load current. The total load var loss is calculated the same way except using reactance per mile. Resistance per mile: ohm r = 0.306 ----------mi

Inductive reactance per mile: ohm x = 0.451 ----------mi

Total line length:

length = ( 3 ) · 36mi

Transmission line current at primary-rated current of transformer: 10, 000kVA kVAr I p = ------------------- = ----------------------------115kV · 3 Vp · 3 I p = 50.204A

Line loss watts for all three lines is three times the resistance per line times the rated primary current squared: · ohm 2 LLW = r · ( length ) · ( I p ) 2 = æ 0.306 -----------ö 108mi ( 50.20A ) è mi ø LLW = 83.297kW

Line loss vars for all three lines is three times the reactance per line times the rated primary current squared: · 2 ohm LLV = x · ( length ) · ( I p ) 2 = æ 0.451 -----------ö 108mi ( 50.20A ) è mi ø LLV = 122.766 kvar

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

7-9

System Loss Compensation

Substation Conductor Losses For this example, the substation conductors between the secondary of the transformer bank and metering point (instrument transformers) have a total length (for all three conductors) of 156 feet. The conductor resistance is 0.005 ohm per 1000 feet and the reactance is 0.09 ohm per 1000 feet. To calculate the watt and var losses, determine the secondary current at the transformer bank rating, and then multiply its square times the resistance and reactance to obtain the losses. The secondary rated current is one third of the transformer bank rating divided by the secondary line-to-neutral voltage. V r = 7200V kVAr 10, 000kVA I r = --------------- = ----------------------------3 · Vr 3 ( 7200 ) I r = 462.96A

The total conductor resistance is:

ohm R cond = 0.005 ----------- · 156ft kft –4

R cond = 7.8 · 10 ohm

The total conductor watt loss is: 2 –4 · CLW = ( Ir ) 2 · Rcond = ( 462.96A ) ( 7.8 · 10 ohm )

CLW = 0.167kW

The total conductor reactance is: ohm X cond = 0.09 ----------- · 156ft kft Xcond = 0.014ohm

The total conductor var loss is::

CLV = ( Ir ) 2 · X cond CLV = 3.009 kvar

7-10

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

System Loss Compensation

Total System Losses All system losses have been calculated. They will now be combined in preparation for calculation of the four loss coefficients to be used in the watt and var loss equations (1) and (2). All of the full-load watt losses will be added together and all of the full-load var losses will be added together. These losses have been calculated at the kVA rating of the transformer bank. Had there been no transformer bank involved, the transmission line and substation losses would have been determined at the base voltage and base current for the system. The total for all load watt losses is: TLW = FLW + LLW + CLW The total for all load var losses is: TLV = FLV + LLV + CLV Table 7.1 shows a summary of all system losses from the example. Table 7.1 System Losses Example Type No-Load Losses

Load Losses

Source

Watt Losses

Var Losses

Transformer Core

NLW = 45 kW

NLV = 92.65 kvar

Transformer Windings

FLW = 135 kW

FLV = 737.75 kvar

Transmission Line

LLW = 83.30 kW

LLV = 122.77 kvar

Substation Conductors

CLW = 0.17 kW

CLV = 3.01 kvar

Total Load Losses

TLW = 218.5 kW

TLV = 863.5 kvar

Three-Phase, 4-Wire Meter Calculations The loss constants will be calculated first for a 4-wire grounded Y load using a 3-element meter. Later, the loss constants for the same system except with a 3-wire delta load will be calculated. In the previous sections, the watt and var losses of the system with reference to the kVA rating of the transformer bank have been determined. In order to calculate the percentage loss constants for the loss equations, the losses for differences between the system voltage and current ratings and the metering voltage and current ratings (as determined by the meter ratings and the instrument transformer ratios) have to be adjusted. The following meter and instrument transformer ratings will be used for this example: Current transformer ratio, CTR:

CTR = 500/5 = 100/1

Voltage transformer ratio, VTR:

VTR = 7200/120 = 60/1

Meter voltage rating, Vm:

Vm = 120 V

Inom, meter test amps:

TA = 5 A

The loss constants (or coefficients) for the system loss equations can now be determined. In order to do this, the losses have to be scaled to the values that they would be if operating at the nominal meter voltage and current values (at the secondaries of the instrument transformers). Then they are converted to a percentage of the transformer bank VA rating.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

7-11

System Loss Compensation

Watt Loss Constants The first step is to calculate the watt load loss constant (WCU), which is the total load watts (TLW) adjusted for the shift from the power transformer secondary current rating to the current transformer primary rating. Since the load loss varies as the square of the current, the ratio of the two current ratings is squared.

TA · CTR WCU = -----------------------Ir

2

2

5A · 100 218.5kW · TLW = --------------------462.96A

WCU = 254.86kW

The watt load loss constant has to be converted from its value in watts to a percentage for the watts loss equation. The percentage watt load loss constant (%WCU) is the ratio of WCU to the metering VA rating, multiplied by 100. The metering VA rating (VAm) is the product of the meter voltage and current ratings times the product of the instrument transformer ratios and the number of meter elements. Meter VA rating, VAm at the instrument transformer primaries: VA m : = 3 · V m · TA · CTR · VTR = 3(120)(5)(100)(60) VA m = 1.08 · 10 4 kVA

The percentage load loss constant is the load loss watts normalized for the meter VA rating and converted to a percentage: WCU 254.86kW %WCU: = -------------- · 100 = æè ----------------------------öø 100 VA m 10,800kVA %WCU = 2.36

The next step is to calculate the watt no-load loss constant (WFE), which is the noload watts (NLW) adjusted for the shift from the power transformer secondary voltage rating to the voltage transformer primary rating. Since the no-load watt loss varies approximately as the square of the voltage, the ratio of the two voltage ratings is squared.

V m · VTR WFE = ----------------------Vr

2

2

· 60 · NLW = 120V ------------------------ 45 kW 7200V

WFE = 45kW

The percentage no-load watt loss constant is the no-load loss watts normalized for the meter VA rating and converted to a percentage:

7-12

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

System Loss Compensation

WFE 45kW %WFE: = ------------ · 100 = æè ----------------------------öø 100 VA m 10,800kVA %WFE = 0.42

Var Loss Constants The var loss constant (VCU) is the total load vars (TLV) adjusted for the shift from the power transformer secondary current rating to the current transformer primary rating. Since the load loss varies as the square of the current, the ratio of the two current ratings is squared.

TA · CTR VCU = -----------------------Ir

2

2

5A · 100 863.5 kvar · TLV = --------------------462.96A

3

VCU = 1.01 · 10 kvar

The var load loss constant has to be converted from its value in vars to a percentage for the vars loss equation. The percentage var load loss constant (% VCU) is the ratio of VCU to the metering VA rating (VAm), multiplied by 100. The percentage var load loss constant is the load loss vars normalized for the meter VA rating and converted to a percentage: VCU 1010kvar %VCU: = ------------- · 100 = æè ----------------------------öø 100 VAm 10,800kVA

%VCU = 9.35

The next step is to calculate the var no-load loss constant (VFE), which is the noload vars (NLV) adjusted for the shift from the power transformer secondary voltage rating to the voltage transformer primary rating. The no-load var loss varies approximately as the fourth power of the voltage.

Vm · VTR VFE = ----------------------Vr

4

4

120V · 60 92.65kvar · NLV = -----------------------7200V

VFE = 92.65kvar

The percentage no-load var loss constant is the no-load loss vars normalized for the meter VA rating and converted to a percentage: V m · VFE 4 92.65kvar %VFE: = æ -------------------------ö · 100 = æ ----------------------------ö 100 è VA m ø è 10,800kVAø

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

7-13

System Loss Compensation

%VFE = 0.86

Three-Wire, Delta Load, 2-Element Meter Calculations The preceding example covered a four-wire wye load metered with a three element meter. This example is for exactly the same system except that the load is threephase, three-wire delta load metered with a two-element meter. The transmission line, transformer bank, and substation losses are unchanged. But now the load is delta instead of wye and the voltage transformers will be the same (except only two are required). The metering VA rating will change, resulting in changes in all of the percentage loss constants. Two-Element Meter Loss Constants The secondary line current and CTR are unchanged from the previous example. However, the voltage transformer ration (VTR) and the metered voltage have changed. This means that all of the percentage loss constants will change. The new metering VA rating and the new loss constants to program into the meter will be calculated. The new voltage transformer ration is: The secondary line-to-line voltage is:

VTR: = 12000 --------------120 V s = V r · 3 = 7200V · 3

V s = 12.471kV It is important to observe that when the system is operating at rated voltage the voltage applied to the meter is 124.71 volts. The internal reference voltage of the QUANTUM meter is unchanged and is 120 volts.

This formula calculates the metering VA rating for this load configuration: VA m =

3 · V m · TA · CTR · VTR =

3 · 120V · 5A · 100 · 100

VA m = 1.04 · 10 4 kVA

7-14

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

System Loss Compensation

Figure 7.5 System Schematic; 3-Phase 3-Wire with 2-Element QUANTUM Q1000 Meter

This changes the percent loss constants. The calculation of the system’s watts and vars is unchanged, only the base on which the percent value is based changes. TA · CTR 2 5A · 100 WCU: = æ -------------------------ö · TLW = æ ----------------------ö 218.5kW è 462.96A ø è ø Ir 2

WCU = 254.82kW 5A · 100 TA · CTR 2 VCU: = æè -------------------------öø · TLV = æè ----------------------öø 863.5kvar 462.96A Ir 2

VCU = 1.01 · 10 3 kvar Vm · VTR 2 120V · 100 2 WFE: = æ --------------------------ö · NLW = æ ----------------------------ö 45kW è ø è Vs 12,470V ø

WFE = 41.67kW Vm · VTR 4 120V · 100 4 VFE = æ --------------------------ö · NLV = æ ----------------------------ö 92.65kvar è ø è 12,470V ø Vs

VFE = 79.45kvar

Two-Element Meter Percentage Loss Constants The percentage loss constants for programming the 2-element meter are: WFE 41.67 %WFE: = æ -------------ö · 100 = æ ----------------ö 100 è VAmø è 10,400ø

%WFE = 0.4 WCU 254.86 %WCU: = æè --------------öø · 100 = æè ----------------öø 100 VAm 10,400

%WCU = 2.45

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

7-15

System Loss Compensation

VFE 79.45 %VFE: = æ -------------ö · 100 = æ ----------------ö 100 è VAmø è 10,400ø

%VFE = 0.76 VCU 1010 %VCU = æ -------------ö · 100 = æ ----------------ö 100 è VAmø è 10,400ø

%VCU = 9.71

Testing Meters with System Loss Compensation Uncompensated test should be run first to verify normal operation of the meter. After the uncompensated tests are run, program the meter with the desired SLC constants. The following steps are suggested for testing QUANTUM Q1000 meters with SLC: 1

Run Series tests, uncompensated.

2

Run individual element tests, uncompensated.

3

Apply compensation constants (by reprogramming the meter for SLC).

4

Run Series tests. Be sure that the meter test board is set to the best accuracy for voltage and current.

5

Compare uncompensated test results with compensated test results to see that the expected changes occurred. This can be done easily by programming the display to represent both compensated and uncompensated values at the same time. Be sure to take into account the measurement uncertainties of voltage, current, and phase angle of the test board when evaluating the results.

6

If element tests are run with SLC active, be aware that iron losses are active on any element where voltage is present regardless of whether the current is present in the element.

The WFE, WCU, VFE, and VCU in the following equations are the values that are calculated and placed into the Q1000 SLC Editor. The two equations that are listed in the following paragraphs are the same equations used by the Q1000 in calculating compensated watts and vars.

3 Element Testing For a 3 element meter, values for the compensation equation can be obtained directly from the meter and per phase results can be evaluated directly. Note that because the Wfe, Wcu, VARfe, and VARcu values are aggregate (total) values for all elements, they must be divided by three in per-element calculation models. The division by 3 is handled automatically by the Q1000 for internal meter calculations.

7-16

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

System Loss Compensation

The per-element compensated watts (CWATTS) can be calculated by the following equation: 2 Wfe 2 Wcu CWATTS = WATTS A + ( VA ¤ Vm ) × ---------- + ( IA ¤ TA ) × ----------3 3 2 Wfe 2 Wcu ---------WATTS ( V ¤ Vm ) ( ¤ TA ) --------I + × + × + B B B 3 3 2 2 Wcu WATTS C + ( V C ¤ Vm ) × Wfe ---------- + ( I C ¤ TA ) × ----------+ 3 3

CWATTS = [ WATTS A + ( WATTS B + WATTS C ) ]

+ + +

2 Wfe 2 Wcu ( V A ¤ Vm ) × ---------- + ( I A ¤ TA ) × ----------3 3 2 Wfe 2 Wcu ( V B ¤ Vm ) × ---------- + ( I B ¤ TA ) × ----------3 3 2 Wfe 2 Wcu ( V C ¤ Vm ) × ---------- + ( I C ¤ TA ) × ----------3 3

2 2 Wcu ---------- + ( I A ¤ TA ) × ----------CWATTS = WATTS + ( V A ¤ Vm ) × Wfe 3 3 2 2 Wcu ( V B ¤ Vm ) × Wfe ---------- + ( I B ¤ TA ) × ----------+ 3 3 2 Wfe 2 Wcu ---------( V ¤ Vm ) × + ( ¤ TA ) × --------I + C C 3 3

The equation shows that you can begin with the uncompensated watts on a per phase basis (first line) or begin with the total uncompensated watts and then modify it by the compensation applied to each phase (last line). Either calculation will give you the total compensated watts. Per phase uncompensated watts or total uncompensated watts can be obtained directly from the meter (recommended) or calculated from the known volts, amps, and power factor. When you find the total compensated watts you can divide them by the total uncompensated watts and then multiply by 100 to find the percent registration that should be expected from the meter. The accuracy of the compensated watts measurement is very dependent upon the accuracy of the test board voltmeter and ammeter.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

7-17

System Loss Compensation

You can use the same steps as above to test the compensated vars. The following equation shows how the per-element compensated vars can be calculated:

4 Vfe 2 Vcu CVARS = VARS A + ( V A ¤ Vm ) × -------- + ( I A ¤ TA ) × ---------3 3 4 Vfe 2 Vcu VARS B + ( V B ¤ Vm ) × -------- + ( I B ¤ TA ) × ---------+ 3 3 4 Vfe 2 Vcu VARS C + ( V C ¤ Vm ) × -------- + ( I C ¤ TA ) × ---------+ 3 3

CVARS = [ VARS A + ( VARS B + VARS C ) ]

+ + +

4 Vfe 2 Vcu ( VA ¤ Vm ) × -------- + ( I A ¤ TA ) × ---------3 3 4 Vfe 2 Vcu ( VB ¤ Vm ) × -------- + ( I B ¤ TA ) × ---------3 3 4 Vfe 2 Vcu ( V C ¤ Vm ) × -------- + ( IC ¤ TA ) × ---------3 3

4 2 Vcu -------- + ( I A ¤ TA ) × ---------CVARS = VARS + ( V A ¤ Vm ) × Vfe 3 3 4 Vfe 2 Vcu + ( V B ¤ Vm ) × -------- + ( I B ¤ TA ) × ---------3 3 4 Vfe 2 Vcu + ( V C ¤ Vm ) × -------- + ( IC ¤ TA ) × ---------3 3

2 Element Testing For a 2 element meter, testing is not as straightforward. Compensation of the total values can still be directly evaluated. Evaluation of the per phase compensation is not as direct as the 3 element. This is because the SLC calculation still happens on a 3-phase basis even in a 2 element meter. To accomplish this, the SLC calculator creates an equivalent 3 element system from the 2 element data, and then calculations proceed as outlined in the 3 element procedure above. At the end, however, the 3 element data appears in the per phase registers. The total value is correct, but the per element values would be misleading if the user does not fully understand the application.

It is recommended that the user evaluate the compensation based on total values to avoid the confusion that could result from using per phase values.

Definition of Symbols Table 7.2 shows a list of the symbols used in System Loss Compensation. Table 7.2 Definition of Symbols

7-18

kVAr

The kVA capacity of the transformer at the rated voltage

Ix

The transformer exciting current

%Ix

The transformer exciting current at rated voltage as a percentage of rated current

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

System Loss Compensation

Table 7.2 Definition of Symbols NLW

The transformer iron (no-load) watts loss

NLVA

The transformer no-load voltamperes

NLV

The transformer no-load vars

a

The transformer no-load loss angle, alpha

%Z

The transformer percent impedance (the ratio of voltage required to circulate rated current in the transformer windings when one winding is shortcircuited to the rated voltage)

FLVA

The transformer VA full-load losses

FLV

The transformer var full-load losses at rated current

FLW

The transformer copper losses at rated current

b

The transformer full-load loss angle, beta

LLW

Transmission line watt losses at rated current of transformer bank

LLV

Transmission line var losses at rated current of transformer bank

CLW

Substation conductor watt losses at rated current of transformer bank

CLV

Substation conductor var losses at rated current of transformer bank

TLW

Total system watt losses, TLW = FLW + LLW + CLW

TLV

Total system var losses, TLV = FLV + LLV + CLV

Vp

Rated primary voltage, line to line

Ip

Rated primary line current

Vr

Rated secondary voltage, line to neutral

Ir

Rated secondary current

Vs

Rated secondary voltage, line to line

VTR

The voltage instrument transformer ratio

CTR

The current instrument transformer ratio

Vm

The rated meter voltage

Inom

The SLC nominal current (typically TA)

I

The measured current at the meter

V

The measured voltage at the meter

WATTS

The measured watts

CWATTS

The compensated watts

WFE

The iron watt loss constant

WCU

The copper watt loss constant

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

7-19

System Loss Compensation

Table 7.2 Definition of Symbols

7-20

VARS

The measured vars

CVARS

The compensated vars

VFE

The iron var loss constant

VCU

The copper var loss constant

VAm

The primary voltampere rating of the meter

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Chapter 8

Theory of Operation The collection of capabilities of the new QUANTUM Q1000 meter exceeds any ever available before in the electricity metering market. Internally, it combines the power of one neuron network controller and two 32-bit microprocessors: one specialized for digital signal processing (DSP) of the line signal and one specialized in multi-port, mutli-protocol communications. The meter architecture allows for functional upgrades without changing any hardware. Four megabytes of program memory and one megabyte of data memory provides room for expansion and storage of large amounts of data. External input/output modules, communicating seamlessly over a two-wire, LONWORKs network, give the meter the flexibility to be customized for each application and easily expanded later if needed. The LONWORKs network can also be used to connect meters together for the sharing of data or input/output modules. An optional internal, 33.6 Kbaud modem is available to provide high speed telephone communications. A 4 line LCD allows for simultaneous display of up to four metering quantities or other status messages. A standard optical port provides convenient on-site communications; some new optical cables allow for optical port communication up to 19,200 bps. Active transformer technology combined with a 14-bit analog-to-digital converter reduces measurement errors to near reference standard levels. The fundamental accuracy of the meter is rated at 0.1% of reading. The DSP processor performs a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) to provide harmonic analysis of the waveform up to the 20th harmonic, allowing the user to see harmonics updated once per second. The user can also record harmonics or trigger alarms based on harmonics. Voltage quality (sags, swells, interruptions, and imbalances) can also be captured. Two independent basic load profiles enable the user to specify different interval lengths for different uses. Eight additional extended load profiles provide even more functionality including some new and innovative functions. Thirty-five different demand quantities are selectable, and 340 energy quantities can be calculated. Also, there are 60 demand registers. This chapter has been updated to comply with the upcoming release of PC-PRO+ 98 version 2.3 and firmware 5.x.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

8-1

Theory of Operation

Major Function Boards VTs and MOV Board The MOV board is located closest to the transducers. It provides the bulk of the protection from harmful or destructive signals on the line. The MOV board localizes all “dirty” electrical circuits (subject to surges, transients and noise), and provides “clean” (filtered and/or surge-protected) signals to other boards. This board contains: •

Active voltage transformers for the Transducer Board

•

Surge protection for the Power Supply Board

•

EMI filter facilitating compliance with FCC Part 15 and CISPR 22 requirements

•

Single-phase or polyphase rectifier

Voltages connected to the base terminals are first routed through inductors. These inductors help to block spurious high frequency signals such as those appearing in the fast transient tests of ANSI C12.1 and IEC 687. The voltages then go to both the power supply and the voltage measurement circuit. In the voltage measurement circuit, the voltage signal is first converted to a current signal by means of a high voltage resistor. This precision resistor is specially designed for stability even after high voltage surges. The small current signal flows through the primary winding of the active voltage transformer circuit. Back-toback protection diodes insure that the voltage on the primary of the VT stays small. In the secondary of the VT, the small current is changed back to a voltage and scaled by a resistor before being routed to the Transducer Board to be sampled. The circuit is repeated for each phase. The power supply input circuit differs for socket-base, DIN/A-base and panel mount meters: •

In a standard socket-base meter, the single-phase rectifier will normally be connected to the A-phase potential connection. Optionally, the socket-base meter may be ordered with auxiliary power. The AC/DC auxiliary power for the socket meter may be ordered two ways. It can be routed through the spades in the meter’s base or through a special cable, brought to the outside via an opening in the meter base.

•

In the DIN, A-base, Switchboard and Rackmount meters, the polyphase rectifier will be connected to all available phases. Optionally, these meters may be ordered with auxiliary power supply inputs. The rectifier will be connected to those inputs, working as single-phase in that case.

For each power supply input, after the voltage has gone through an inductor, it is surge protected by a series resistor, line-to-line and line-to-neutral varistors and a line to neutral capacitor. The neutral leg also has the resistor and inductor in series. The voltage is then rectified and filtered by a capacitor. With more filtering by inductors, the rectified voltage then goes to the power supply board by a two wire connector.

CTs and Transducer Board (Front End) The Transducer Board does the measurement in the meter. It holds the active electronics for the CTs, the A/D converter, and the 32-bit DSP processor. It receives voltage signals from the MOV board and current signals directly from the CTs. Once measurements are taken, they are communicated to the main microprocessor on the Main Board.

8-2

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Theory of Operation

The voltage and current signals are first routed to a dual multiplexer where a phase is selected by DSP control. The selected voltage phase is directly routed to a sample and hold while the current is passed to the A/D converter. Before it reaches the converter, a gain may be applied to the current if it is needed. This is determined by the DSP based on outputs of comparators that compare the current signal to reference values. The A/D has an internal sample and hold, so both voltage and current of the selected phase are sampled simultaneously. Once the current signal is converted, the voltage signal is routed to the A/D and converted. Then the DSP switches the input multiplexer to the next phase, and the process begins again. The output of the A/D converter after each conversion is sent to the DSP through a digital buffer. Once every second, the DSP reports the battery voltage to the Main Board for use as a battery check. The program code for the DSP is downloaded from the Main Board over the communication bus at power up and is stored in the RAM on the Transducer Board. This allows for functional upgrades of measurement code without having to change any hardware. Calibration constants for the meter are permanently stored in nonvolatile EEPROM on the Transducer board. Address logic for the sample and holds and multiplexers has been integrated into one programmable logic integrated circuit. Finally, the Transducer board passes the line frequency signal to the Main Board so that the Main Board can keep track of time. It also passes through the early power fail signals from the power supply to the Main Board.

Main Board (Back End) The Main Board is the central processing and communications hub of the meter. It holds the 32-bit communications microprocessor, 4 Megabytes of FLASH program memory, 1 Megabyte of battery-backed memory for data storage, 2 Kbytes of NOVRAM (nonvolatile SRAM), the LONWORKs network interface, two RS-232 ports, and a real time clock. It is where the measurement quantities are calculated and stored. The Main Board handles multiple communication sessions and controls the four line display and test LEDs. The standard single battery (see Figure 2.1) used for memory retention is a 2/3 A size, lithium carbon monofluoride cell. It was specially selected for long term durability and environmental friendliness. It is designed to provide at least 180 days of data retention. The dual battery configuration (see Figure 2.2) doubles the number of days of data retention during power loss to 360 days. The access door battery is ½ the capacity of the standard battery. Its data retention during power loss is ½ the number of days (90 days). Critical metering data will be stored in NOVRAM. This data will be retained even in the event of loss of power and the loss of battery back-up. NOVRAM is a RAM that is built in EEPROM that is written to automatically at power down.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

8-3

Theory of Operation

The following data is stored (both the energy and peak value) if selected:

Watts Delivered Aggregate

Watts Received Aggregate

VAR Delivered Aggregate

VAR Received Aggregate

VA Arithmetic Delivered Aggregate

VA Arithmetic Received Aggregate

VA Vectorial Delivered Aggregate

VA Vectorial Received Aggregate

Watts Delivered Aggregate SLC

Watts Received Aggregate SLC

VAR Delivered Aggregate SLC

VAR Received Aggregate SLC

VA Vectorial Delivered Aggregate SLC

VA Vectorial Received Aggregate SLC

This Billing Data is backed up in non-volatile memory.

Data Calculation and Storage Measurement data is received every 48 cycles from the Transducer Board. Energy and harmonic information is accumulated on the Transducer board for 60 cycles and then communicated to the main microprocessor. Based on the configuration, the main processor then begins to update the selected energy quantities. The main microprocessor requires some memory to use for calculations. The selected quantities (including energy quantities, demand values, load profiles and harmonics data) also require memory for storage. The microprocessor and the selected quantities share one megabyte of battery backed SRAM. The memory available for the selected quantities is allocated based on the user’s request. For instance, if a large load profile is chosen (e.g. if small intervals are selected), less memory will be available for storage of other values. This dynamic allocation of memory allows the meter to be optimized for an individual application.

Downloadable Firmware The internal program code is stored in FLASH memory on the Main Board. This design allows the code to be changed when upgrades become available. This program code includes the instructions for both the main microprocessor and the DSP. The code is updated by connecting to one of the communications ports of the meter (RS-485, RS-232 or Optical Port) and downloading a completely new set of code. The download may be password protected for security.

Communications LonWorks Network LONWORKs is a two wire, transformer isolated communications network. It is a commercially available product that allows the Q1000 to communicate with other Q1000 meters and Q1000 input/output modules depending on the binding selected.

8-4

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Theory of Operation

At the time this manual was revised, four different “plug and play” bindings were available from the factory.1 The Q1000 is configured in the factory with a userordered “plug and play” factory configuration. The LONWORKs protocol knows the address of each of the pre-configured input/output modules available and can thus talk directly to (or receive data from) the proper module. The LONWORKs network is capable of communicating at speeds up to 1.25Mbps at distances of up to 500 feet. This distance can be increased substantially through the use of a router.2

Optical Port An enhanced infrared LED optical port is mounted directly on the Display board for on-site interrogation. No cable connections are necessary inside the meter. The optical port supports data rates up to 19,200 baud. ANSI or IEC type magnetic pickup holders are available. Any protocol supported by a meter may be used through the Optical Port.

Most current optical port cables limit communication to 9600 baud; some cables can support faster rates.

RS-232 with Multiple Protocols The meter supports two RS-232 serial ports. These are totally independent bidirectional serial ports that support multiple protocols and can operate simultaneously. This capability allows for multiple independent parties to be directly communicating with the meter at the same time while using different protocols. These ports can be connected directly to an RS-232 interface. Port 2 can be routed through the optional internal modem. The RS-232 ports support data rates up to 115,200 bps when connected directly to a PC while the internal modem will support 33,600 bps. Another option is to route Port 2 through the RS-232 / RS-485 card. This card may be used in either mode. In the RS-485 mode, it is a 4-wire RS-485 communication port; communication up to 115,200 bps is supported.

Display The display is a four line, 16 character per line LCD display. The LCD uses 'supertwist' technology for a wide viewing angle so that viewing angle adjustments are not necessary. The four lines of the display can be completely configured to display data, annunciators, or status information. The screens are configured with the programming software. The display board has two infrared LEDs for test pulse outputs. Both LEDs can be configured to output pulses based on any energy quantity that the meter calculates. Their factory default configuration is watt-hours on the right LED and var-hours on the left LED. Four switches for the meter are located on the display board. The switches control the demand reset function, alternate display mode, test mode, and scroll lock. The Alternate Display, Demand Reset, and Scroll Lock switches are accessible from the

1. 2.

Devices from different bindings cannot be used together in one LonWorks network. A router will require the users to “custom bind” their hardware with a new binding that includes the router.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

8-5

Theory of Operation

meter’s front. The Demand Reset switch may be sealed. The Test Mode switch is under the meter cover in all forms except the Rackmount version which provides it on the meter face.

Power Supply The power supply is a high-efficiency, switch mode power supply. It is able to use AC or DC input voltages. The input range is 100 to 240 VAC with a -20% and +25% tolerance. The socket meter has a single phase power supply and the DIN/A-base/ Switchboard/Rackmount meters have a three phase power supply. The power supply consists of a boost converter followed by a two transistor forward converter. It has a switching frequency about 20KHz. The boost converter steps the input voltage up and provides power factor correction required to lower the input VA to the meter. The forward converter provides power for the isolated +/- 12 V and +5 V outputs.

Measurement Techniques and Quantities Active Transformers The Q1000 meter takes advantage of active transformer technology using electronics to help correct some of the imperfect characteristics of passive transformers. An input current in the primary winding of a transformer causes a magnetic flux in the core. This flux couples through the core to the secondary winding and causes a current to flow in the secondary in proportion to the turns ratio of the transformer—thus, a ratio scaled signal in the secondary that is electrically isolated from the primary. The problem is that normal transformers have a significant phase shift from input to output that is caused by losses in the transformer core. As the load on these transformers change, so does the amount of phase shift. This behavior normally requires multiple calibration factors to correct that phase shift. If the amount of magnetic flux in the core could be held constant, the phase shift would stay constant and could easily be calibrated away. If the amount of flux could be kept small, then the physical size of the transformer could be reduced without saturating the core and causing signal distortion. To accomplish both of these goals in the advanced Q1000 design, another winding is added to the secondary of the active transformer. One winding is then used to sense the amount of flux in the core and drive an op amp. The op amp then drives the correct amount of current back into the additional winding to create a flux in the core exactly opposite the flux caused by the input signal. Thus the flux in the core is reduced to very close to zero. Meanwhile, the current driven by the op amp is measured; this current is exactly proportional to the input current scaled by the turns ratio of the transformer. (Because the flux is almost nulled, this type of transformer is also known as a “zero flux” transformer.) Thus, a ratio scaled and electrically isolated signal appears at the secondary but without the changing phase shift and with a physically smaller core. Other smaller errors such as magnetic coupling to other transformers are also reduced because the flux is so small.

8-6

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Theory of Operation

Calibration Calibration of the meter takes place in the factory using measurements made against reference standards that are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). Measurements are taken under various voltage, current and phase angle conditions and correction constants are calculated and stored in the meter. These corrections are necessary due to manufacturing tolerances in the analog components (CTs, VTs, resistors, capacitors, op amps and A/D converter). The correction constants are permanently stored on the Main board. This process is only necessary once in the life of the meter unless some of the analog components are changed. If changes are made in the CTs, the MOV board, Main board, or the Transducer board, re-calibration may be necessary. The Display board, Modem, RS-485 board, Communication boards, and I/O modules may be replaced without re-calibration. New firmware may also be downloaded into the meter without re-calibration.

Fixed Sampling and FFTs The meter samples at 64 samples per line cycle synchronous to the voltage signal zero crossing. The fixed sampling rate is needed to ensure accuracy of the harmonic data from the Fast Fourier Transform (FFT). This sampling process happens on each phase voltage and current for a fixed sampling rate of 3840 samples/sec at 60Hz line frequency (3200 samples/sec at 50Hz line frequency). The line frequency and zero crossing are determined by the DSP based on an algorithm that looks at all three phase voltages. The algorithm is designed to continue even if two of the three phases are lost. If no acceptable line frequency is present, then the meter will continue to sample based on the internal crystal frequency.

Front End / Back End: Calculations and Communications The individual samples are corrected for any error caused by electronics, and then calculations begin. The correction removes any DC component in the voltage or current. This improvement is made by summing samples over an interval and dividing by the number of samples to get the DC error for each sample. This value is then subtracted from the samples in the next interval. Four quantities are accumulated on a sample-by-sample basis: Watts, Vars, V2 and I2. From these four quantities, VAarith and VAvect, Q, RMS Voltage, RMS Current are calculated by the DSP. Fundamental Watts (power at the line frequency only) and Fundamental Vars are obtained from the harmonic data. A phase correction is applied to the watt and var values to account for the phase error of the sampling circuit. The accumulated data along with any voltage quality events are transferred to the main board.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

8-7

Theory of Operation

Calculated Quantities Four types of messages are received from the front end by the back end: an energy message (every 60 cycles), a basic quantity message that includes voltage quality events if any, and a harmonic quantity message . Each message is processed and updates values in the back end as follows: Energy Message

à

Updates Energy Quanta Array (340 values)

Basic Quantity Message

à

Updates Raw Value Array (340 values) and Voltage Quality

Voltage Quality Only Message

à

Updates Voltage Quality Quantities

Harmonic Message

à

Updates Harmonic Quantities (86 Values per phase)

The energy quanta array is then used to update the energy quantities selected, the block and thermal demand values, the load profile data, and the test LED outputs. All 340 energy quanta are updated every 60 cycles while only the selected energy, demand, and load profile quantities will be updated every 60 cycles. Also note that other inputs from the LONWORKS network (pulse inputs, analog inputs, and adjustments from other meters) are also used to update the energy quantum array. The raw value array is used to update the instantaneous values. The harmonic quantities are used to update harmonic data.

Energy Quantity IDs Up to 30 energy registers and 24 TOU energy registers may be selected by the user from 340 energy quantities available. The energy registers are used to accumulate the energy increments called energy quanta. Every 60 cycles the amount of energy in the appropriate energy quantum is added to the energy register.

Demand Quantities Demand includes instantaneous, thermal, and block interval demand. Up to 25 instantaneous demands, 10 thermal, 25 block demands, and 24 TOU demand registers can be selected from the list of 340 quantity ID's. With each block demand, a demand summary is updated for each interval. Thermal demand is updated each 48 cycles. Instantaneous demands are updated every 12 cycles. Block interval demand length can be set from 2 seconds to 60 minutes. Subintervals can be used for sliding window demands. Subintervals must be in the same range (from 2 seconds to 60 minutes) and be evenly divisible into the demand interval and into 60 minutes. Thermal demand time constants can be any number of minutes that divides evenly into 60 minutes, or any number of seconds greater than or equal to 2 that divides evenly into 60 seconds. Thermal demand follows an exponential response curve such that the demand registers 90% of a change over each time constant. Thus if the thermal demand interval length is 15 minutes and the load is constant, thermal demand will report 90% of the load after 15 minutes, 99% after 30 minutes and 99.9% after 45 minutes. Cold load pickup time is programmable between 0 and 65535 seconds. Demand reset lockout time is programmable between 0 and 65535 seconds. Demand summary information includes peak, peak time of occurrence, minimum, minimum time of occurrence, cumulative peak, and continuous cumulative peak. Up to 3 coincident demand values can be saved at the time of the peak and minimum, but the coincident values must be chosen from the list of the same type

8-8

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Theory of Operation

(e.g. coincident values for block demand quantities must also be from the list of up to 25 block demands selected). At demand reset, peak value is summed to cumulative peak, and peak and minimum value are reset. Up to six demand quantities can be specified to track multiple peaks or multiple minimums. Multiple peaks and minimums information consists of a set of the 5 highest peaks or the 5 lowest minimums for a demand quantity since demand reset. Each set of multiple peaks or minimums counts toward the total of six. For instance, if both the five highest peaks and the five lowest minimums are desired for one demand quantity, only four other quantities could be chosen. End of interval (EOI) can be triggered based on time, an external input, or an external input with time backup. Timed EOI occurs when the length of time for the interval has expired. External EOI occurs when the meter receives an external input which is useful for triggering several devices simultaneously. External with timed backup looks primarily at the External EOI until the specified time expires. Global EOI triggers can come from any of the three sources.

Harmonics Harmonic calculations are done for 12 consecutive cycles each second using the 64 samples for that cycle. The DSP calculates the voltages and currents at each harmonic up to the twentieth for each of three phases using a Fast Fourier Transform. Both magnitude and phase angle are calculated for each harmonic. These results are then communicated to the back end. The back end will average, store, and report the selected harmonic data. The interval length over which the data is averaged can be set from 2 seconds to 60 minutes. The selected harmonic data is then stored as a record. The records are stored in a circular buffer such that it continues to store the latest record until the buffer is full, and then the oldest record is overwritten. The number of records stored is configured and based on available memory.

Voltage Quality Voltage quality (VQ) events are sags, swells, and imbalances of the voltage signals. A loss of power to the power supply can also trigger a VQ event. VQ events are reported when the RMS value of a line cycle drops below a defined low threshold or rises above a defined high threshold. This value is constantly monitored by the DSP processor, and when an event is detected, it records the level and the time. This information is reported to the main processor that logs the events for later reporting.

System Loss Compensation (SLC) System loss compensation is a way of adjusting data in the meter to account for losses in the power delivery system. The QUANTUM Q1000 has a system loss compensation (SLC - Basic) similar to the QUANTUM STQ meter. SLC - Basic allows the user to calculate an equivalent impedance for all of the losses to make the compensation. Line losses allow for the inclusion of capacitive and inductive losses in the transmission lines.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

8-9

Theory of Operation

Totalized Registers A totalized register is a combination of other register quantities and is itself a register quantity. Each totalized register will sum/subtract up to 4 other quantities. Configuration will consist of a list of the registers to be summed. Totalized quantities can be used like any other quantity. One use of a totalized quantity is to provide a duplicate of a quantity, for example to add more coincident demands to a demand register. Another use is to add or subtract KYZ pulse inputs from other devices together. Totalized registers will be calculated in order of the quantity ID number. This implementation will allow one summed register to sum other summed registers. But the value in a summed register having a higher quantity ID should not be used since it will not be updated before being used.

External Inputs There are three types of external inputs: pulse inputs, analog inputs, and digital state inputs. All of these inputs come to the meter via the LONWORKs network and they are treated as incoming energy messages that are added to the energy quanta array. The pulse inputs have pulse weights assigned by the user; the analog inputs1 are scaled. The meter can also receive digital state inputs. These inputs are used as status inputs to the meter and do not contribute to the energy calculations. They can be used for status, alarms, to trigger events, and so forth.

Load Profile Two independent standard load profile recorders are available in the meter. Each recorder can have up to 24 channels and have independent recording interval lengths ranging from 2 seconds to 60 minutes. Each recorder can have completely independent settings like interval length and recorder quantities. Each channel can record up to 65,535 pulses per interval and each interval is time/date stamped. Each interval also receives status indicators that show Daylight Savings Time, short interval, time adjustment, and so forth. In addition, meters may be upgraded with 8 additional extended load profiles. These profiles are also independent. Extended load profiles support recording of energy register data directly. They also support configuration of the data storage format and flags.

Alarms An alarm is an event or condition in the meter that can cause a digital state output to trigger or a call-home to occur, depending on its status. The status of an alarm is always stored in the meter so that other methods can check to see if the alarm has been triggered. The register threshold alarm is triggered whenever the attached data register's value strays above or below a programmed limit. The meter has 16 register threshold alarms.

1.

8-10

Analog inputs are not currently available in the Q1000 meter. They are a planned enhancement for a future release.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Theory of Operation

Power Quality Power quality means the measure, analysis, and improvement of voltage and energy distribution. It is determined by the amount of deviation from the ideal sinusoidal voltage and/or current waveform and/or influences from a wide variety of electromagnetic phenomena. Any deviation of magnitude or frequency of the fundamental waveform which affects the performance of electrical equipment can be considered a power quality disturbance. The recent growing concern for these disturbances results from the increasing number of nonlinear power electronic devices controlling various power apparatus and systems and the increased sensitivity of new technologies to such disturbances. With the increasing use of electronic equipment which can cause electromagnetic disturbances or which can be affected by power quality disturbances, the interest in monitoring and recording power quality parameters has increased. Typical disturbance-producing equipment are solid state switching semiconductors, arc furnaces, welders, and electric variable speed drives. Problems due to power quality disturbances include voltage distortion within facilities causing equipment malfunction, excessive neutral return currents, overheating and saturation of transformers, decreased distribution capacity, and high levels of neutral-to-ground voltage. From an end-user’s standpoint these disturbances can mean an increased number of power interruptions, increased number of voltage sags and swells, and low power factors resulting in excessive product loss in the commercial and industrial segment, computer damage in all segments, and, in severe cases, equipment damage. With the growing problems and interest, power quality measurement is moving from a reactionary troubleshooting measurement to a proactive ongoing monitoring measurement. The QUANTUM Q1000 meter provides power quality monitoring features such as voltage sags, swells, and harmonics. These features are in addition to load survey, system planning or tariff application requirements. In some markets, these power quality measurements can be used as a customer service tool in order to solve reported power supply problems. In others, the power quality features can be used for research purposes at both the system substation and customer levels. As more creative rates are developed, power quality features can be used as an integral part of the rate or tariff.

Voltage Imbalance In three phase systems, voltage imbalance occurs when the three phase voltages are either not equal in magnitude or in phase difference. A steady state imbalance is a duration of at least 2 seconds. The coupling mechanism of imbalance is either conductive or electromagnetic. It is usually calculated in terms of negative phase sequence voltage. The presence of negative phase sequence voltage causes overheating in induction and synchronous machines, reduces the margin for voltage regulation, and increases system losses. The most serious problem is the overheating of induction motors, where a small amount of voltage imbalance causes motors to draw high unbalanced currents. Voltage imbalance can be caused by the connection of single phase or imbalanced loads in a three phase system and by the different impedances of the phases of overhead and underground lines and transformers. Imbalances can also be caused by defective transformers, loose neutrals, ungrounded neutrals, bad capacitor banks, and ground faults. The QUANTUM Q1000 has a log of the date and time and percentage of unbalance.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

8-11

Theory of Operation

Voltage Interruptions A voltage interruption is a complete loss of power from a temporary interruption of several milliseconds to a permanent interruption of several hours. Voltage interruptions affect all equipment. Sensitive equipment may be disrupted by outages as short as 15 milliseconds. Interruptions can result in loss of computer/controller memory, equipment shutdown/failure, hardware damage, product loss, and productivity loss. Interruptions may be caused by power system faults, accidents involving power lines (tree limbs, animals, lightning), transformer failures, and generator failures. They can be caused by the operation of protective devices in response to faults that occur due to acts of nature and/or malfunctioning of customer equipment.

Voltage Sags and Swells A voltage sag is a momentary (less than a few seconds) decrease in the voltage below a given tolerance on one or more phases. Swells are corresponding voltage increases. Sags affect power-down sensing circuitry on computers and large controllers and can cause equipment to shutdown. Repetitive sags or swells in the voltage cause flickering of lights, motor stalling, reduced life of motors and motor driven equipment. Electrical equipment may respond to a sag as it would to a power interruption. Voltage sags are often caused when large loads, such as motors, air conditioners and electric furnaces, are started which results in high inrush currents leading to drops in the system voltage for short periods. These disturbances can also be caused by lightning and power system faults, such as overloaded wiring, incorrect fuse rating, fuse and breaker clearing, capacitor bank switching, ground faults, electric system switching, and equipment failure. Voltage swells are often caused by large cyclic loads such as spot welders, induction or arc furnaces, and motors when cycled. They can also be caused by sudden load decreases or turn-off of heavy equipment, open neutral connection, insulation breakdown, and improper wiring. Under voltages cause errors of sensitive equipment, low efficiency, and reduced life of electrical equipment, such as some motors and heaters. Under voltages lengthen process time of resistance heating systems and can cause hardware damage. Over voltages cause overheating and reduced life of electrical equipment. Under voltages are caused by circuit overloads, loose or corroded connections, unbalanced phase loading conditions, faulty connections or wiring, overloaded distribution system, poor voltage regulation, or incorrect transformer tap setting. Over voltages may be caused by improper application of power factor correction capacitors, feeder regulator settings, or incorrect transformer tap settings.

Harmonics A harmonic distortion is a voltage or current deviation from a true sine wave due to unwanted frequencies that are multiples of the fundamental. Harmonic distortion causes motor loads, such as compressors, pumps, and disk drives to overheat. Harmonics can also result in serious damage to capacitors and transformers. Harmonics will cause decreased motor performance (reduced efficiency, over-heating, torque pulations), premature control equipment failure, false triggering of SCRs (silicon controlled rectifiers), interference with computers, and amplification of harmonic levels due to resonance. Harmonics can also cause incorrect readings on mechanical timing relays and electricity meters.

8-12

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Theory of Operation

Harmonics are usually caused by the operation of any static power converter which converts AC to DC or DC to AC, or any solid state switch, or equipment containing these devices. Some of the equipment that contain these devices are electric variable speed drives, computer power supplies, dimmer switches, fluorescent lighting, variable speed drills, UPSs (uninterruptible power supplies), welding equipment, induction furnaces, arc furnaces, microwave ovens, battery chargers and elevators. Saturated utility transformers can also cause harmonic distortion.

Time-of-Use (TOU) The Time-of-Use (TOU) function is an optional feature of the QUANTUM Q1000 meter. With the TOU option, the meter can be programmed to measure and allocate power consumed at various times during a day, a week, or a season(s), etc. into storage units referred to as rate buckets. The QUANTUM Q1000 TOU feature is used in the registers, load profile, meter display, digital state outputs, and self reads. The QUANTUM Q1000 meter can be programmed for: •

Seven Day Types

•

Typical Week Type

•

Seven Rates plus Total—Rates are controlled by rate schedules which determine when rates are active during each day until the schedule expires.

•

Many user-defined Daily Patterns—A daily pattern defines which switchpoints are to be processed during a 24-hour period.

•

Many user-defined Switchpoints—A switchpoint defines a scheduled action and a time at which the action should occur. The action can be a rate change or a change of status of an independent output.

•

Up to 16 Digital State Outputs triggered by a TOU event

•

Up to 12 Seasons per Year—A season is a non-overlapping partition of a year that specifies the daily pattern to use for each day of the week.

•

One Current TOU Schedule and one Latent TOU Schedule—The TOU schedule contains the daily and yearly information necessary to control TOU in the meter. The current schedule is the active schedule running in the meter. A latent schedule may be added later by reconfiguring the meter. The latent schedule then becomes the active (current schedule) at a user-defined time in the future.

•

A user-defined number of Years

•

Many user-defined Exclusions (holidays)

•

User-defined Season Change Dates—Seasons can be configured to start on a specific date and at a specific time. Only one season can be active at a time.

•

Multiple Rates Active Simultaneously (Overlapping Rates)—The Daily Pattern controls which rates are on during the day. The Q1000 meter allows the user to program overlapping rates.

•

Temporary Override of Currently Active Rates / Daily Pattern

The meter stores the TOU configuration information in battery backed RAM.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

8-13

Theory of Operation

Notes:

8-14

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Chapter 9

Testing and Maintenance This section can be used along with Chapter 8, Theory of Operation, and Chapter 10, Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings, to troubleshoot the QUANTUM Q1000 meter. Included in this section are maintenance procedures, typical error messages, and general board-level troubleshooting techniques.

General Maintenance Procedures The following sections describe the general maintenance procedures required to support the Q1000 meter.

Scheduled Maintenance With the exception of the battery, no scheduled or preventive maintenance is necessary for the QUANTUM Q1000 meter.

Battery Precautions The lithium battery used in the QUANTUM Q1000 meter is designed with a pressure relief that vents the battery if it is short circuited or if an attempt is made to recharge it.

Do not recharge the battery. Even with pressure relief, lithium batteries can rupture and cause injury if mishandled. To ensure maximum safety, follow the battery handling guidelines described below.

Battery Handling Guidelines 1

Never short circuit the battery (such as measuring current capabilities with an ammeter).

2

Do not recharge the battery.

3

Do not store or transport batteries in metal or other electrically conductive containers.

4

Keep batteries separated. If stored in a container where they can contact each other, face them in the same direction to prevent short circuits.

5

Do not operate the battery at temperatures above +85 C (+185F). Dispose of batteries where they will not be punctured, crushed, or incinerated.

6

Discard the battery using proper federal, state, and local waste procedures.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

9-1

Testing and Maintenance

System Error Diagnostics Upon power up, the QUANTUM Q1000 meter performs a series of system checks on its primary metering functions to verify proper operation. If a malfunction is detected, then the meter displays an error diagnostic message. Appendix A details each diagnostic and gives recommended actions.

Diagnostics The QUANTUM Q1000 includes a diagnostics routine that continually monitors the health of the meter. The diagnostic information gathered is saved so that it will be maintained in the event of a power outage. There are two types of error conditions that are checked. Fatal Errors—Fatal errors are serious errors. If a fatal error occurs, then a special fatal error screen appears; this message identifies the error and is frozen on the display. Non-Fatal Errors—Non-fatal errors are generally less serious. For example, only one component of the meter may be affected. Non-fatal errors are normally displayed in a non-fatal error screen that is appended to the current display list. Each non-fatal error is identified by a 3 letter code. The non-fatal error screen can show up to eight different non-fatal errors at one time. Non-fatal error conditions can be individually enabled in the meter using the PC-PRO+ 98 programming software for the non-fatal error screen. If an error is not enabled, then it will not appear on the non-fatal error screen and will not cause the non-fatal error screen to be appended to the display list. All diagnostic information is accessible using PC-PRO+ 98 even if an error has been disabled on the meter display. The default in PC-PRO+ 98 for new configurations is to enable the display of ALL non-fatal errors. If you are trying to diagnose a problem, then you should enable all non-fatal errors on the display. There is nothing wrong with enabling all non-fatal errors in every meter configuration. Individual errors can also be programmed to cause the non-fatal error screen to lock on the display. If the non-fatal error screen is frozen on the display, pressing the alternate button causes the display to cycle once through the display list before returning to the non-fatal error screen. This option is only effective if non-fatal error locking is enabled as a part of display configuration. Once a fatal or non-fatal error occurs, it will be remembered by the meter until it is cleared; however, a few errors are self-clearing. Specifically, loss of phase and low battery diagnostics are self-clearing. PC-PRO+ 98 can access complete diagnostic information that indicates more specifically what errors have occurred. If an error code appears on the display, then check the PC-PRO+ 98 Diagnostics Readings screen (under Device Status) for more information. Diagnostic information is cleared by initializing the meter. Non-fatal errors can also be cleared by doing a demand reset or by pressing the alternate button for 5 or more seconds.

9-2

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Testing and Maintenance

Diagnostics Data The basic diagnostic is a flag that indicates for each error whether it has occurred since the error information was last cleared. Seven event summaries are provided that can be configured by the user to track certain errors. Other errors are hard-coded to be summary #8.1 Each event summary has a count of the number of times the error event has occurred as well as the date and time of the first and last occurrence. Individual errors can be configured to contribute to one of the eight diagnostic event summaries. Diagnostics also maintains timing information for certain meter actions to help in firmware verification. For each of these events, the maximum and minimum duration is saved along with the number of samples. Timing and event summary information is available in the Diagnostics Readings screen in PC-PRO+ 98.

Error Codes The following sections describe the fatal and non-fatal errors that the Q1000 meter can monitor. See Appendix A for a complete listing of error code descriptions and the recommended actions.

Fatal Errors Fatal errors cause the display to lock on the error code due to the possibility that billing data may have been corrupted, or that the meter may not be operating correctly. When an error is seen in the meter, SchlumbergerSema recommends that you first go online with the meter and check all diagnostic status prior to taking action. Look up the recommended actions in the Help file or in this manual. This additional information will help you to take the correct action. Appendix A provides information about the fatal errors.

Non-Fatal Errors Non-fatal errors can be programmed to be ignored, to scroll, or lock on the display. If the error is programmed to be locked on the display, the user can access other readings by pressing the alternate mode switch. In this case, the meter scrolls once through the normal display. When an error is detected in the meter, SchlumbergerSema recommends that you first go online with the meter and check diagnostic status prior to taking action.

Meter Operations Tests Shop level meter operation tests ensure the correct operation of Q1000 meters. These tests verify proper operation, proper mass memory operation, and proper operation of other functions. Extreme care should be taken when performing these tests. Each section constitutes a step-by-step procedure for testing that specific function.

1.

These changes are a planned enhancement of the PC-PRO+ 98 version 2.3 and above software.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

9-3

Testing and Maintenance

In instances where displayed quantities are required, SchlumbergerSema recommends that the meter be connected to a master station so that all registers can be uploaded and recorded individually.

Register Calculations Follow these steps to verify that the meter is displaying correct register data. 1

Select a demand interval length (block demand).

2

Program the meter to display present and maximum kilowatt demand.

3

Apply a constant load to the meter and perform a demand run-up test for one interval length.

4

Stop the display (scroll lock) on present kW demand.

5

Verify that the register increases during the entire demand interval.

6

Let the display scroll to the maximum demand register.

7

Verify that it displays the correct demand reading.

8

If a PC is connected, verify that the maximum demand register displays the correct reading at the end of the interval, and that the present demand register resets to zero.

Infrared LED Pulse Follow these steps to test the operation of the infrared LEDs. 1

Apply a constant delivered watts load to the meter (Wapp).

2

Program the meter with Watthours on an LED and set the desired pulse constant KT.

3

Verify that the two LEDs pulse properly either by counting the pulses or using a comparator to compare pulses from the meter under test to the standard. To determine the number of pulses per second, use the following equation: 1 Hour 1 Number of Pulses per Second = W app ´ N ´ --------------------------------- ´ -------3600 Seconds KT

where N is the coil factor for singlephase test method. 4

Do the same for both LEDs, and again in Field Test Mode, if desired.

5

Refer to Chapter 3 for more information on using the infrared LEDs for test purposes. Table 9.1 Coil Factors

9-4

Form

Series

A Phase Only B Phase Only C Phase Only

3Æ, 3 Wire, Delta

2

1

-

1

3Æ, 4 Wire, Wye

3

1

1

1

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Testing and Maintenance

KYZ Pulse Output Calculations Follow these steps to test the operation of the KYZ pulse outputs. 1

Program the meter with a preselected Ke pulse output constant(s). Use a current-dependent quantity such as Watthours delivered.

2

Connect the KYZ output(s) to an external recorder for analysis purposes. Let the recorder and Q1000 record zero pulses for three (3) intervals.

3

Increase the load.

4

Record pulses on both the Q1000 and the recorder for a reasonable period of time—at least 15 minutes.

5

Decrease the load to zero.

6

Allow the recorder and Q1000 to count zero pulses for at least three (3) intervals.

7

Add the pulse counts for every interval in both devices.

Demand Reset Lockout Time Verifications The demand reset lockout time prevents the meter from being reset again for a programmed number of minutes after an initial demand reset. For example, if the demand reset lockout time is programmed to be 15 minutes, you must wait 15 minutes after a demand reset before another demand reset can be done. Follow these steps to test the demand reset lockout function. 1

Program the meter with a demand reset lockout time of zero minutes.

2

Press the demand reset button on the meter face. The maximum demand and peak instantaneous registers should reset to zero.

3

Wait unit the display has stopped flashing, and then press the demand reset button again. A message should appear again indicating another demand reset has occurred.

4

Reprogram the meter with a demand reset lockout time of one minute.

5

Press the demand reset button. The maximum demand registers should reset to zero.

6

Wait until the display has stopped flashing, and then push the demand reset button again. The display should indicate that the demand reset is locked out.

7

Wait until one minute has elapsed and press the demand reset button. The meter should allow a demand reset.

Alternate Display Mode Follow these steps to test the alternate display function. 1

Program the meter to display a few screens of information in the Alternate Display Mode.

2

Press the ALT button on the front of the meter. If the user has programmed a status line on the display, it will indicate alternate mode by the letters “ALT”.

3

Verify that all selected quantities are displayed in the Alternate Display Mode. Verify that the meter returns to the Normal Display Mode upon completion of all displays.

Field Test Mode Follow these steps to test the Field Test Mode function: 1

Program the meter to display a few screens of information in the Test Display Mode.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

9-5

Testing and Maintenance

2

Put the meter into Field Test Mode by sliding the Test button down on the meter nameplate. If the user has programmed a status line on the display, it will indicate Field Test Mode with the letters “TST”.

3

Verify that all selected quantities are displayed in the Test Display Mode.

Verification of Bidirectional Quantities Follow these steps to verify that the meter acknowledges changes in the direction of power flow. 1

Program the meter to display delivered and received quantities, such as present kilowatt demand delivered and received.

2

Apply power to the meter such that there is a delivered power flow.

3

Stop the display on the present kilowatt demand delivered register using the scroll lock button, and verify that it is incrementing properly. Verify that the kilowatt received demand register is not increasing.

4

Apply power to the meter such that there is received power flow.

5

Stop the display on the present kilowatt demand received register using the scroll lock button, and verify that it is incrementing properly. Verify that the kilowatt delivered demand register is not incrementing.

Cold Load Pickup (Demand Delay) Time The cold load pickup time is the number of minutes the meter will wait after a recognized power outage before restarting demand calculations. The cold load pickup time may be set for 0 to 255 minutes. 1

Program one meter with a cold load pickup time and one meter without. Reset the maximum demand for each meter and remove power from both meters.

2

Reapply power concurrently to both meters. Run the test for an appropriate number of intervals and record the maximum demand reading for each meter after each complete interval. Choose a demand delay time that is less than one interval (for example, five minutes for a 15-minute interval). The test should last only one interval.

3

Use the following equation to determine if the meter programmed with a cold load pickup time is displaying the proper demand: MAX1 = (1 - (cold load pickup time/interval length)) * MAX2 MAX1: maximum demand (meter with cold load pickup) MAX2: maximum demand (meter without cold load pickup)

Battery Carryover Verification Q1000 meters store the number of minutes left on battery. When the meter is first installed, this number of minutes on battery must be set to zero. From then on, the meter keeps the time on battery. Follow these steps to ensure proper battery carryover operations.

9-6

1

Program a meter to record mass memory data. The number of minutes on battery can be shown on the meter display. Let the meter run for a sufficient time to collect some interval data.

2

Record the interval data by hand. Remove power from the meter for at least ten minutes.

3

Reapply power to the meter. Verify that the time on battery carryover was accurately recorded by the meter.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Testing and Maintenance

4

Verify that the data was retained during the power down. Verify that the clock retained its proper time.

General Display Setup Follow these steps to ensure proper display operation. 1

Program a meter with a specified display sequence, including ID codes, annunciators, and data fields.

2

Record the sequence of screens that the meter displays. Verify that the displays are correct.

Infrared LED/Test Pulse Adapter Interface Testing the Q1000 meter is similar to testing standard solid-state meters with LEDs. Test pulses are available from the meter via two light-emitting-diodes (LEDs). The standard configuration comes with infrared LEDs; visible LEDs are available as an option. Any energy quantity (including analog or digital external input-hour and system loss compensated) can be assigned to either one of the LEDs in the Normal Mode. The energy assignments can also be different when the meter is in the Test Mode. The energy assignments are configured with the programming software via LED Operation and are made available with the Quantity Selection functions. The LEDs pulse at a rate proportional to the assigned energy quantity, with the ratio determined by an operator-programmed constant Kh. As in the energy quantity, each LED Kh is independently assignable in both the Normal and Test Modes.

The LEDs flash on and off for every KT watthours. Some pickup devices may sense these two changes of state as two pulses instead of one. Take this behavior into account when testing.

The LED pulses are detected by the use of an infrared (or visible) LED photopickup device. This device is the pulse sensor for a test pulse adapter. There are various types and manufacturers available on the market, each will have its own functionality and benefits.

Energy Register Correction The energy register readings of the QUANTUM Q1000 meter can be modified if necessary. The reset and modify operations are performed using the PC-PRO+ 98 master station software. This feature benefits the utility in the following applications: •

Energy register readings can be set to zero. This is done as part of a Reset Billing Registers command in PC-PRO+ 98. Reset Demand also clears all demand registers.

•

Energy register readings can be modified to reflect lost energy registration during an onsite field test or to match the readings of an existing meter that is being removed from the installation.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

9-7

Testing and Maintenance

The procedure for modifying or clearing energy registers is described in PC-PRO+ 98 documentation. Clearing or modifying energy registers requires that the user is logged on under the primary or secondary password (general write access).

Meter Adjustments The Q1000 meters features a versatile, four-line by 16-character display. The intensity of the display can be adjusted with the display adjustment potentiometer on the upper left corner of the rear part of the display board (Figure 9.1).

Display Contrast Adjustment Potentiometer

Figure 9.1 Rear of Display Board

Accuracy Equations and Load Curves The Q1000 is one of the most accurate meters, solid-state or otherwise, available to the market today. Its performance is achieved by the use of proven digital sampling techniques and proprietary enhancements. This advanced design accounts for the meter’s accurate performance over a wide dynamic range. Figure 9.2 shows a typical Class 2 load curve, Figure 9.4 shows a typical Class 10 load curve, and Figure 9.6 shows a typical Class 20 load curve.

Figure 9.2 Typical Q1000 Class 2 Amp Load Curve

9-8

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Testing and Maintenance

Figure 9.3 ANSI Meter; Class 2 Amp Certificate

Figure 9.4 Typical Q1000 Class 10 Amp Load Curve

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

9-9

Testing and Maintenance

Figure 9.5 IEC Meter; Class 5 (10) Amp Certificate

Figure 9.6 Typical Q1000 Class 20 Amp Load Curve

9-10

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Testing and Maintenance

Figure 9.7 ANSI Meter; Class 20 Amp Certificate

The Q1000 meets the error limits given in Table 1.5, Q1000 Meter High Current Error Limits and Table 1.6, Q1000 Meter Low Current Error Limits. Table 9.2 Balance Restrictions Measured Quantity

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Balance Restrictions 3Ph, 4W 3 Element

3Ph, 3W 2 Element

Wh

None

None

Varh

None

None

VAh

None

Load

Qh

None

None

Ah, Asqh

None

Load

Vh, Vsqh

None

None

9-11

Testing and Maintenance

Reference conditions for Rated Accuracy: Voltage:

Rated Voltage ±3%

Frequency:

As Rated (50 or 60Hz)

Waveform:

Distortion Factor less than 3%

Ambient Temperature:

23°C ± 3°C

The above accuracy specifications apply upon completion of 2 hour warmup period. Prior to completion of the warmup period, the meter conforms to IEC Publication 60687 Class 0.2 and ANSI C12.20.

Loss of Phase All auxiliary powered meters will continue to operate during loss of any phase provided that the auxiliary power is maintained. The internally powered DIN, Abase, Switchboard and Rackmount meters will continue to operate during loss of a phase for the 3 wire configuration and loss of two phases for the 4 wire configurations. The internally powered socket base meter requires phase A in order to operate but will continue to operate with loss of phase B and C. Loss of phase is checked once a second. The phase voltage is compared to the configured limit. If the voltage is less than the limit, a loss of phase diagnostic is noted. The loss of phase non-fatal error will appear on the display only while a phase is below its programmed limit.

Troubleshooting This section describes how to troubleshoot possible problems.

Display No Display Problem Meter Electronics Not Powered

9-12

Resolution Check power to meter electronics. Check to see if your meter has Auxiliary power or not; the auxiliary connection can be made either externally or internally. Refer to the auxiliary power connections in Chapter 2, Installation, for more information. A meter with auxiliary power is always powered from the auxiliary power leads. For meters without auxiliary power, the Socket meter powers up from A phase. The DIN, A-base, Switchboard and Rackmount meters have a three phase power supply and will retain power as long as at least one phase is active. Phase to ground voltages should be at least 80 volts. For 57.7 V or 63.5 V service types, a phase to phase connection is required to power the meter.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Testing and Maintenance

Problem

Resolution

Display not programmed

Check to see that the display of the meter has been programmed for the display mode (Normal, Alternate, or Test) that your meter is in. If no quantities have been programmed into the meter for that mode, then the display will be blank. Program at least one quantity to be displayed.

Display Time Set To Zero

Check to see that the meter has not been programmed with a display ON time of zero seconds. Program the register with a minimum display time on to 1 second.

Contrast Adjustment Not Set Correctly

Turn the display contrast adjustment potentiometer, R42 until the display should become clear. Refer to “METER ADJUSTMENTS” on page 9-15 for more information.

Display Module Not Seated Properly

Power down the meter. Make sure the display module is properly seated.

Display Frozen Problem

Resolution

Scroll Button Has Been Pressed

If the meter’s display is ‘scroll locked’ and the display is stopped on one display, then press the scroll lock button and hold it down for a second and the display will resume scrolling.

Error Condition

A fatal error may have occurred. This notification would be frozen on the display. A non-fatal error may have occurred that was selected to lock (freeze) on the display. This setting is made in PC-PRO+ 98.

Locked Display

If the meter is locked on a display, then power cycle the meter (power the meter down and then power it back up). If the condition has not cleared itself, then replace the display board. This condition should not occur without an error code.

Infrared LED Not Pulsing Properly Problem

Resolution

No Quantity Assigned

No quantity may have been programmed for the LED. Check the programmed state. Add a quantity assignment, if needed.

Pulse Rate Not Programmed Correctly

Check the programmed value of the pulse weight (Kh) for the LED. Each LED has its own pulse weight (Kh). Change if needed.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

9-13

Testing and Maintenance

Problem

Resolution

Wrong Display Mode

Two pulse rates are programmed into the meter for each LED, one for Normal Display Mode and one for Field Test Mode. If these values are different, then check the display mode in which the meter is operating. Change the pulse rates if needed.

Pickup Device Not Operating

Check photo pickup device by testing it on other meters. Repair if necessary.

LED Broken

Check to see if the LED is broken. Replace LED or display register board.

Wrong Value Programmed to LED

An energy value other than the one being tested may be programmed to the LED. Go online with the meter and check the meter’s programming.

Infrared LED Is Not Operational Problem

Resolution

No Power

Check to be sure the meter’s electronics are powered up.

Field Test LED is Disabled

Check to make sure that the LEDs are enabled in the Test Mode if you are trying to use the LEDs in the Test Mode.

Reset Mechanism RESET Push Button Does Not Initiate Demand Reset Problem

9-14

Resolution

Reset Switch Does Not Push Down

The Demand Reset Switch must be turned about 60 degrees clockwise before it can be pushed down. Also check the alignment of the cover with the reset switch.

Reset Mechanism Does Not Cause a Reset

Check the software program. Confirm that the Demand Reset Switch is enabled in the software program.

Reset Button Not Held Down Long Enough

The reset mechanism must be depressed for at least one second for the meter to recognize the pressing of the Reset button.

Demand Reset Lockout Window Not Expired

A previous demand reset may have occurred. Wait for the demand reset lockout time to expire and then try another demand reset.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Testing and Maintenance

ALT Push Button Does Not Initiate Alternate Display Mode Problem

Resolution

No Items Chosen For Alternate Mode

Check the software program for alternate display mode list. If there are no items selected, then the meter will not go into alternate mode.

Alternate Mode Switch disabled

Confirm that the Alternate Mode Switch is enabled in the software program. If it is not enabled, then enable and reprogram the meter.

Alternate Display Mode Button Not Held Down Long Enough

The alternate mode switch must be depressed for at least one second for the meter to recognize the pressing of the Alternate Display button.

Alternate Display Mode Mechanism Does Not Contact Switch

Check cover to ensure that it has been properly aligned. Realign the cover.

SCROLL Push Button Mechanism Does Not Initiate a Scroll Lock Problem

Resolution

Scroll Lock Button Not Held Down Long Enough

Depress the Scroll Lock button for at least one second for the meter to recognize the pressing of the Scroll Lock button.

Scroll Switch Disabled

Confirm that the Scroll Switch is enabled in the meter’s program. If it is not enabled, then enable it and re-program the meter.

Reset Mechanism Does Not Contact Scroll Lock Switch

Check cover to ensure that it has been properly aligned. Realign the cover.

Remote Demand Reset Not Operational Problem

Resolution

Incorrect Security Codes

To perform a remote demand reset, one of the primary, secondary or tertiary security codes must be downloaded to the meter. Change security codes as needed. The alternate mode switch must be depressed for at least one second for the meter to recognize.

Failure in Communication

Refer to Chapter 6, Communications, for troubleshooting communications.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

9-15

Testing and Maintenance

Initialization of Meter Cannot Initialize Meter Problem

Resolution

Incorrect Security Codes

To perform a meter initialization, a primary security code is required. Check current primary security code. Change as needed.

Failure in Communication

Refer to Chapter 6, Communications, for troubleshooting communications.

PC-PRO+ 98 screen does not show an initialization choice

Check software security clearances; verify that your access allows this function. You may need to check with your manager.

Meter Loses Its Program Problem Incorrect Switch Position

Resolution DIP Switch S6 pin number 3 enabled (toward the front of the meter) will return the meter to the factory default mode when the meter is powered off and then back on. This process will erase the program in the Q1000 meter and return it to the state it left the factory in. Return the switch to the off mode (away from the meter front). Reprogram the meter.

System Loss Compensation System Loss Compensation Not Operating Properly in Field Test Mode Problem

Resolution

Loss Constants Programmed Incorrectly

Recalculate programmed SLC constants in the meter program. Change as needed.

No SLC in Meter

Check meter program to see if SLC was enabled in meter program. Change and reprogram meter if necessary.

Input/Output (I/O) Module No Output Signals Problem

9-16

Resolution

Incorrect Connections

Check the wiring from the meter to the I/O modules. For more information, refer to the section on LonWorks.

Incorrect Pulse Constant

Check programmed multiplier constants in the program file.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Testing and Maintenance

Problem

Resolution

Incorrect Output Assignment

Check the program file to ensure that the assignment of the output types have been correctly configured.

Bad LonWorks Wiring Termination

Both ends of the twisted pair bus must be terminated. Check to confirm that the terminations are properly installed at both ends.

Wiring Failure

Check the twisted pair connections to make sure that the wiring is properly installed and that the wires have not been cut.

No Input Signals Problem

Resolution

Incorrect Connections

Check the wiring from the meter to the I/O modules. For more information, refer to the section on LonWorks.

Incorrect Pulse Constant

Check programmed multiplier constants in the program file.

Incorrect Input Assignment

Check the program file to ensure that the assignment of the input types have been correctly configured.

Bad LonWorks Wiring Termination

Both ends of the twisted pair bus must be terminated. Check to confirm that the terminations are properly installed at both ends.

Wiring Failure

Check the twisted pair connections to make sure that the wiring is properly installed and that the wires have not been cut.

No KYZ Outputs Problem Only half of the proper number of pulses are being recorded.

Resolution Refer to "LonWorks Circuits" on page 6-34.

Communication Problems The meter electronics must be powered in order to have communication. This power can come from the voltage terminals or through Auxiliary Power inputs.

Optical Port Problem

Resolution

Dead Battery

The optical port programing cable needs new batteries.

Dirty port

The port needs to be clean. Clean port with Q-Tip and water and try again.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

9-17

Testing and Maintenance

Problem

Resolution

Optical noise

The programming cable connector is not firmly seated on the connector.

Wrong protocol

Meter may have another protocol on the port. In order to program the meter, the protocol must be Mini-DLMS. Power down, and then power up to observe protocols for each port. Mini-DLMS can be put on all ports using a customer default. If a different protocol is seen (than the one that is desired on the port), then the meter will need to be re-programmed to change the optical port protocol.

Wrong baud rate

Higher baud rates may not be supported by you optical port cable. Try a 9600 bps communication.

Direct Connect Cannot connect to the meter Problem

9-18

Resolution

Cable problem

The meter and a typical computer are DTE devices. In order to connect two DTE devices, a null modem cable must be used.

Wrong baud rate

Meter may be programmed with a dedicated baud rate. Try another baud rate.

Wrong protocol

Meter may have another protocol on the port. In order to program the meter, the protocol must be Mini-DLMS. Power down, and then power up to observe protocols for each port. Mini-DLMS can be put on all ports using a customer default. If a different protocol is seen (than the one that is desired on the port), then the meter will need to be re-programmed to change the port’s protocol.

Security code failure

The meter has a security code. Set security codes either on logon screen or under options, global default, security codes.

Wrong computer port

Insure on the logon screen that the correct port is being used.

Hardware failure

Communication can also be checked with the HyperTerminal connection under Windows accessories. Enter in a configuration name, set for direct connect and no hardware flow. Send a capital I. If all hardware is working and the meter's port protocol is DLMS, then the meter will send back a SI QM110 response. This response will only work with DLMS protocol.

Handshake problems

Handshaking is not supported in the meter; disable hardware handshaking.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Testing and Maintenance

Problem

Resolution

Electrical noise

Extreme lengths from the computer to the meter can cause extra noise which will interfere with communications. Reduce the length or use a short haul modem to extend the distance. Also, try using low capacitance cable for distances greater than 50 feet.

Transient Lock-up

The meter is designed to withstand a 10kv level of surge. If there were extreme surges and the meter locks up, then an error will be on the display. Power down and power up the meter to clear the display.

Can connect to Port 1, but not to Port 2 Problem

Resolution

Wrong baud rate

Meter may be programmed with a dedicated baud rate. Try another baud rate or use port 1 to check the baud rate configuration of port 2.

Wrong protocol

Meter may have another protocol on the port. In order to program the meter, the protocol must be Mini-DLMS. Power down, and then power up to observe protocols for each port. Mini-DLMS can be put on all ports using a customer default. If a different protocol is seen (than the one that is desired on the port), then the meter will need to be re-programmed to change the port’s protocol.

Modem

An internal modem is connected to the second serial port; the user can not have a direct connect to the second port with this modem installed. Disconnect the two cables attached to the Modem board to remove it from service. Reprogram Port 2 for Direct Connect.

RS-485

See RS-485 on page 9-22

Wrong DB-25 connector used

The meter’s DB-25 connector has two RS-232 communication ports. A null modem cable can be used to connect to Port 1. The splitter cable can be used to log on to either port. See Chapter 2 for more cable and wiring information.

Modem Meter Will Not Answer Problem Modem Not Installed

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Resolution Check to make sure the modem is installed.

9-19

Testing and Maintenance

Problem

9-20

Resolution

Incorrect Programming

1 Check to see if the meter has been programmed to recognize the modem. If the meter is programmed for autosensing, it will recognize when a modem is connected. Also, check the program file for the ring answer delay. This setting determines how long the meter will wait before picking up after the phone starts to ring. Verify that the time the PC will wait for the meter to answer is at least 10 seconds longer than the meter’s ring answer delay. Lastly, check if the meter has been programmed to answer only within certain call windows and an attempt is being made to call outside the call window. Remedy any inappropriate settings. 2 Check the ring answer delay programmed into PC-PRO+ 98 and in the profile 0 of an external modem. These settings always require some number of rings: one (1) ring when the phone line is dedicated to the meter; any non-zero number of rings when the phone line is shared with a human-accessible handset. In this case, be sure to make the number of rings large enough to allow a person time to answer the phone.

PC Communication Ports Not Set Correctly

Verify that the software is trying to connect through the correct communication port. If you're not sure which port is in use, try one, then the other.

Incorrect Modem Initialization String

Check the modem initialization string programmed into the modem.

Incorrect Internal Cabling

Check to confirm that the two modem board cables are plugged into their respective connectors. The external tip and ring wires go from the RJ connector on the outside of the meter to the J2 connector on the modem board. The 10 position ribbon cable connects the J3 connector to the Main board.

Incorrect External Cabling

The meter connects to the phone line via a cable that extends from the base of the meter. Verify that this cable is correctly connected to the phone line.

Bad modem cable

Check the connection from modem board to the external connector. If it is bad, then replace it.

Bad Modem

Visually inspect the modem board for signs of blown components due to a surge or broken connections. If any are discovered, then replace modem card. Also, check the meter cabinet grounding connections. Read more about suggested grounding practices in the SchlumbergerSema Installation and Grounding of the QUANTUM Meters: A Suggested Practice Guide.

No power to the modem

Check pins 2 and 4 on the 10 pin ribbon cable. If there is no voltage, replace cable. If there is still no voltage, then replace the Main board.

No phone connection

Check the phone line connection to verify that it is working.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Testing and Maintenance

Meter answers, but will not communicate Problem

Resolution

Incorrect Internal Cabling

Check to confirm that the two modem board cables are plugged into their respective connectors. The external tip and ring wires go from the RJ connector on the outside of the meter to the J2 connector on the modem board. The 10 position ribbon cable connects the J3 connector to the Main Board.

Incorrect Baud Rate

Check the baud rate setting in the program file. The calling device and the meter must be attempting to connect at the same baud rate. See "BPS Rates" on page 6-11 for more information.

Incorrect Security Code

The PC that programmed the meter keeps the security code, if any, on file. If trying to connect with another PC, the security code must be entered manually. To verify security code error message, try communications two additional times. Enter the proper security codes manually, and then try communications again.

External Modem Configuration Not Compatible

Refer to the section on setting up an external modem to talk to the Q1000, and follow the suggested commands to configure the external modem.

Line is Busy Problem

Resolution

Meter Is Attempting To Dial Out

Has the meter been programmed to phone home on event? Check the program file.

Extension Phone In Use

Is there an extension phone in use at the meter site? If so, then the meter has detected an off-hook condition and will not try to use the phone line. Wait and retry the call later.

Off-hook detection does not work Problem Line still connected

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Resolution Once the modem has released the line as a result of a customer phone going off-hook, the customer will usually have to hit the phone's hook flash to obtain a dial tone. This action is required because a connection still exists over the telephone network between the master station modem and the customer's phone.

9-21

Testing and Maintenance

RS-485 Problem

9-22

Resolution

Cannot log on to meter

Check the wiring of the RS-485 connectors. Different connectors require various wiring. Refer to the RS-485 section for examples and your connector’s instructions. See "RS-485 Board" on page 6-8.

Wiring incorrect

Check Chapter 2 to ensure that your splitter cable wiring is properly connected.

Shield wire not properly grounded

The RS-495 bus includes a shield. This wire must be properly grounded at one end for the bus to function properly.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Chapter 10

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Meter Parts Part Number

Description SOCKET

441784-001

Polycarbonate Cover; ANSI Optical Port

441784-002

Polycarbonate Cover; IEC Optical Port

512638-001

Single Internal Battery

512638-005

Dual Battery

441768-001

Socket Base Shield DIN

441829-001

Polycarbonate Cover; ANSI Optical Port

441829-002

Polycarbonate Cover; IEC Optical Port

441829-003

Polycarbonate Cover; with battery hatch; ANSI Optical Port

441829-004

Polycarbonate Cover; with battery hatch; IEC Optical Port

512638-002

Single Internal Battery

512638-004

Battery Hatch Replacement Battery

512064-002

Terminal Cover Short

512064-004

Terminal Cover Extended

442316-001

Terminal Cover extended with Label Holder

441896-001

Schematic Sticker Form 5D with Aux. Power

441896-002

Schematic Sticker Form 9D with Aux. Power

441896-003

Schematic Sticker Form 5D

441896-004

Schematic Sticker Form 9D A-BASE

441829-001

Polycarbonate Cover ANSI

441829-002

Polycarbonate Cover IEC

441829-003

Polycarbonate Cover; with battery hatch; ANSI Optical Port

441829-004

Polycarbonate Cover; with battery hatch; IEC Optical Port

512638-002

Single Internal Battery

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

10-1

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Part Number

Description

512638-004

Battery Hatch Replacement Battery

512064-001

Terminal Cover

441896-005

Schematic Wiring Sticker (Form 5A with Aux. Power)

441896-006

Schematic Wiring Sticker (Form 5A)

441896-009

Schematic Wiring Sticker (Form 9A with Aux. Power)

441896-010

Schematic Wiring Sticker (Form 9A) SWITCHBOARD

442101-003

Polycarbonate Dust Proof Cover; ANSI Optical Port

442101-004

Polycarbonate Dust Proof Cover; IEC Optical Port

512638-003

Single Internal Battery

520120-003

One Paddle

513160-002

Schematic Wiring Sticker Form 5F with Aux. Power

513160-003

Schematic Wiring Sticker Form 9F with Aux. Power RACKMOUNT

512638-003

Single Internal Battery

512064-002

Terminal Cover

442241-001

Tamper Bracket

442271-001

Dummy Face Cover (black)

441896-001

Schematic Sticker Form 5R with Aux. Power

441896-002

Schematic Sticker Form 9R with Aux. Power MISCELLANEOUS

512874-001

DB-25 Dust Cover (DIN/A-base/Rackmount/Switchboard)

512944-001

DB-9 Dust Cover (Rackmount/Switchboard)

512495-003

Dangerous Voltage Label PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

K441838-017

PC-PRO+ 98; latest production version LITERATURE

7000-CCC

10-2

QUANTUM Q1000 Meter Technical Reference Guide; latest version

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Communications Splitter Cables (For DB-25 RS-485 bus and I/O connections.) Part Number

Description

441885-001

Splitter Cables, DB-25 Female to Two DB-25 Male Connectors, RS485 bus wires (5), and I/O Network Wires (2); (Socket/DIN/DIN Flushmount/A-Base, Rackmount)

441885-005

Splitter Cables, DB-25 Male to Two DB-25 Male Connectors, RS-485 bus wires (5), and I/O Network Wires (2); (Switchboard)

Optical Port Programming Cable Part Number

Description

440012-001

Optical Port Programming Cable, ANSI Port (Battery Powered)

512983-001

Optical Port Programming Cable, ANSI Port (PC Powered)

442381-001

Optical Port Programming Cable, IEC Port (PC Powered)

Q1000 Optional Kits Part Number K442177-001

DIN Flushmount Kit

K442211-001

External Network Termination Kit

K442208-001

I/O Mounting Kit

K512954-002

Switchboard Mounting Kit

K442386-002a

A-base Adapter Kit Socket Form 5S

b

A-base Adapter Kit Socket Form 5S

K442386-001a

A-base Adapter Kit Socket Form 9S

b

A-base Adapter Kit Socket Form 9S

K442386-004

K442386-003

a b

Description

Placement of AUX terminals on lower terminal. Placement of AUX terminals on upper terminal.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

10-3

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Modem Retrofit Kit For modem retrofit kit information, see "Internal Modem Kit" on page 2-44.

RS-485 Retrofit Kit For RS-485 retrofit kit information, see "Internal RS-485 Kit" on page 2-55.

I/O Modules Each I/O Module and the quantity must be specified as a separate line item on the purchase order.

Plug and Play Bindings I/O modules are currently offered in four standard plug and play binding configuration. For more information on I/O bindings, see "I/O Bindings" on page 6-35.

10-4

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Drawings and Schematics

Figure 10.1 Main Board Diagram

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

10-5

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.2 Display Board Diagram

10-6

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.3 Modem Board Diagram

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

10-7

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.4 RS-485 Board Diagram

10-8

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.5 Transducer Board Diagram

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

10-9

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.6 Power Supply Board Diagram

10-10

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.7 MOV Board Diagram (S-Base)

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

10-11

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.8 MOV Board Diagram (DIN/A-base/Switchboard/Rackmount)

10-12

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.9 Digital State Outputs (1-8) Module 1 (Universal Binding)

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

10-13

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.10 Digital State Outputs (9-16) Module 2 (Universal Binding)

10-14

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.11 Digital Pulse Outputs KYZ (1-4) and Digital State Output 1 Module 3 (Universal Binding)

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

10-15

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.12 Digital Pulse Outputs IEC 2-Wire KY (5-8) and Digital State Outputs (1-4) Module 4 (Universal Binding)

10-16

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.13 Analog Outputs (1-4) Module 5 (Universal Binding)

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

10-17

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.14 Analog Outputs (5-8) Module 6 (Universal Binding)

10-18

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.15 Digital Pulse Inputs KYZ or IEC 2-wire KY (1-4) Module 7 (Universal Binding)

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

10-19

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.16 Digital Pulse Inputs KYZ or IEC 2-wire KY (5-8) Module 8 (Universal Binding)

10-20

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.17 Digital State Inputs (1-8) Module 11 (Universal Binding)

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

10-21

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.18 Digital State Inputs (9-16) Module 12 (Universal Binding)

10-22

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Appendix A

Diagnostic Errors This appendix provides information on Diagnostic Errors. You can use the meter’s diagnostic and error displays to help you identify errors that require user action. You must first program the meter to display the errors you want to track. The diagnostics are grouped into default categories based on the summary number assigned to each diagnostic in the PC-PRO+ 98 Event Configuration component (use the Event Configuration Diagnostics tab of the Event Configuration component dialog to assign summary numbers for the diagnostics that can be configured by the user). Diagnostics that cannot be configured by the user are assigned to diagnostic category 8.

Diagnostic Errors When you have an error condition in the Q1000 meter, log on to the meter using PC-PRO+ 98, then go to the Device Status component, and then double-click DIAG_READINGS. The software will return the current status of all of the diagnostics. Note the diagnostics that are ON, and use the information in Table A.1 to review the diagnostic(s) and the corresponding recommended actions.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

A-1

A-2

Feature Not Present error

Front End EEPROM Write error

Reset Due to External Input

Reset Due to Power Up

<none>

<none>

<none>

Display

<none>

Error

Energy Restored from FR

Cause

<none>

Reset was caused by a meter power loss.

The last processor reset was caused by the hard reset pin being asserted or an epf signal is received and the power does not turn off soon enough.

Could not write calibration to the front end EEPROM.

None. The meter is operating normally. This flag is always set when the meter powers up.

None. The meter is operating normally. This flag is always set when the meter resets.

None. The meter is operating normally. Calibration data is now saved in backend flash so the meter calibration will be ok. However, if main board needs to be replaced the meter will have to be returned to the factory for calibration.

On power up

At power up

Non-Fatal

At powerup of front end

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Each second

At power up, after reconfigures

D8

D8

Configurable

Configurable

D8

Diagnostic Setting

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

D8

Calibration

Meter Key

Diagnostic Category

1) Change the configuration to not use the feature. Or 2) Contact SchlumbergerSema to order the feature.

None. The meter is operating normally. It indicates that energy was restored, which is normal in several circumstances.

At power up, after reconfigures

D7

D5

Default Summary #

A feature is configured to run when there is no meter key for that feature in the meter.

An energy register was restored from non-volatile memory because the normal register had a checksum error or because the total energy value in ferro ram and the value in the normal register is different.

Recommended Action Non-Fatal

Type

None. The meter is operating normally. It indicates that a demand value was restored, which is normal in several circumstances.

When Checked?

A demand summary was restored from non-volatile memory because the normal register had a checksum error or because the demand peak value in ferro ram and the value in the normal register are different

241

244

112

121

163

164

Error ID #

Demand Summary Restored From FR

1.01b

1.01b

4.01i

3.02m

1.01b

1.01b

FW Support

<none>

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Low battery

Low Battery Pin Asserted

Time on Battery Expired

Calibration Error

BAT

BAT

CAL

Display

BAT

Error

VQ Front End Sag Swell Overflow

Cause

<none>

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide There was a problem during calibration.

The accumulated time on the battery has exceeded the programmed limit.

The LOBAT processor input is asserted indicating that the battery may soon fail or already has.

The measured voltage provided by the front end is below a threshold indicating that the battery will soon fail. The measured value must be low four times in a row before this error is set.

Return the meter to the factory for calibration.

1) Check that the time on the battery was reset when first installed. 2) If yes, then replace the battery, check time synchronization and adjust if necessary, and reset the time on battery.

Check battery connection, or connect battery, or replace battery. Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Check battery connection, or connect battery, or replace battery. Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

At calibration

Each second

Each second

Each second

Each second

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Diagnostic Setting

Non-Fatal

D8

Calibration

Battery

Battery

Battery

User Program Configuration

Diagnostic Category

None. The meter is operating normally. 1) Check the electrical system's power quality further using the Harmonic and Voltage Quality detection capabilities in the Q1000 meter. 2) Voltage quality sags and or swells may be configured to tight for the installation. Change configuration to have different values of threshold and hysteresis.

At power up

D7

D2

D2

D2

D1

Default Summary #

More than 8 voltage quality event actions occurred on a phase during a 12 cycle period.

Recommended Action Non-Fatal

Type

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

When Checked?

The last reset was caused by a watchdog timer timeout; Transients could cause this error.

110

236

237

238

179

246

Error ID #

Reset Due to Watch Dog Timer

4.01i

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

FW Support

<none>

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

A-3

A-4

Error

Calibration Lost error

Configuration Checksum Error

Recording Data Checksum Error

Register Data Checksum Error

Clock Error Bad Time

Clock Error SPI

Clock Error Watch Dog Timer

Display

CALIBRATION LOST

CFG CKS

CKS

CKS

CLK

CLK

CLK

Cause Recover as much data as possible. Meter needs to be returned to the factory for repair.

Obsolete error. Contact SchlumbergerSema.

The 1 Hz signal from the real time clock is about a second late.

Recover as much data as possible. Meter needs to be returned to the factory for repair.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Meter could not communicate with the RTC using the serial peripheral interface. Timing will be continued by the processor; however, if an outage occurs after a clock error occurs the meter time will reset to a default time.

The current time is structurally invalid.

The calculated value of the checksum of the storage for some register data does not match the stored checksum value. Data storage is frozen.

Recommended Action

The calculated value of the checksum for some part of the recording data does not match the stored checksum value.

Type

Follow recommendations for other error(s). Reprogram the meter. If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

Non-Fatal

Each second

On every new message of this type

Each real time clock (RTC) access

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

At power up, on each update of the register data storage

Each second

By firmware when using the configuration record

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Fatal

When Checked?

The calculated checksum for a configuration record does not match the stored value.

Diagnostic Setting D8

D8

204

206

205

255

6

22

D8

D7

256

Calibration

D8

D8

D8

Configurable

Diagnostic Category

At powerup

Default Summary #

Fatal

Error ID #

Return the meter to the factory for calibration.

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

4.01i

FW Support

The calibration could not be recovered from the front end firmware.

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Comm Ports Defaulted

Illegal Configuration Error

RAM File Create No Room error

CPU Data Loss error

CONFIG

CONFIG

CPU DATA LOSS

Display

COM

Error

RTC Configuration Loss

Cause

CLK

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide The meter is overburdened by the configuration.

1) Reduce the CPU requirements of the configuration and reprogram the meter. Or, 2) Upgrade software to 2.3 or above and firmware to 5.x or above. Notify SchlumbergerSema if CPU Limit Exceeded error does not also happen.

1) Reduce the memory requirements of the configuration and reprogram the meter. Or, 2) Upgrade software to 2.3 or above and firmware to 5.x or above.

Reprogam meter. If errors repeats, then note programming actions that are causing the error and call SchlumbergerSema.

A configuration item stored in the flash disk contains an illegal value.

There is not enough room in the ram file system to create a file.

This error should not occur since we changed the programming software to require at least one port to have the Mini-DLMS protocol programmed. Reset the meter to Factory Default. Reprogram meter with at least 1 port having DLMS.

No DLMS port was configured. The meter can not be programmed. So the configuration was forced to DLMS on all ports.

Fatal

Fatal

Fatal

Non-Fatal

Every second

Initialization, reconfigure

At power up and after restarting after meter configuration

At power up, after reconfigures

During normal power up, not factory or user default or recovery

Configurable

Configurable

D8

Configurable

Configurable

Diagnostic Setting

Non-Fatal

D8

User Program Configuration

User Program Configuration

User Program Configuration

Battery

Diagnostic Category

Check battery connection, or connect battery, or replace battery. Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Each second

D1

D1

D1

D2

Default Summary #

During power up the RTC chip was discovered to have improper configuration even though the meter was going through a normal power up.

Recommended Action Non-Fatal

Type

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

When Checked?

The real time clock (RTC) firmware was stopped.

21

19

7

165

155

169

Error ID #

Clock Stopped

4.01i

3.02m

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

FW Support

CLK

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

A-5

A-6

Front End Message Checksum Error

Front End Message Skipped

Front End Silent Error

Meter Input 1 Silent

DAT

DAT

DAT

Display

DAT

Error

DSP Error Posting Message

Cause

DAT

Recommended Action

Diagnostics Loading Error

The meter input should be present according to the SLC configuration but no message has been seen for 3 seconds.

Each second

Each second

Non-Fatal Check Echelon connections. Check that the other meter is connected. Check the configuration.

Each second

Each second

Each second

At power up

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Contact SchlumbergerSema

An error occurred in the front end firmware or the meter is over burdened.

The front end processor has not sent expected messages.

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

A error occurred in the front end queue.

The checksum on a message from the front end firmware was not correct.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Diagnostics data could not be read from the backup file. There may be a problem with the RAM File System. Diagnostics prior to powerup have been lost.

Type

DAT

When Checked? Initialization, reconfigure, powerup

Configurable

D8

D8

D8

D8

D8

Configurable

Diagnostic Setting

Fatal

I/Os

User Program Configuration

Diagnostic Category

1) Reduce the CPU requirements of the configuration and reprogram the meter. Or, 2) Upgrade software to 2.3 or above and firmware to 5.x or above.

D3

D1

Default Summary #

The meter is overburdened by the configuration.

145

195

176

202

177

211

20

Error ID #

CPU Limit Exceeded error

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

4.01i

FW Support

CPU LIMIT

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Meter Input 5 Silent

Meter Input 6 Silent

Alarm Manager Off

DAT

DAT

DED

Display

Meter Input 4 Silent

Error

DAT

Cause

Meter Input 3 Silent

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide The alarms manager component is inactive.

The meter input should be present according to the SLC configuration but no message has been seen for 3 seconds.

The meter input should be present according to the SLC configuration but no message has been seen for 3 seconds.

The meter input should be present according to the SLC configuration but no message has been seen for 3 seconds.

The meter input should be present according to the SLC configuration but no message has been seen for 3 seconds.

Recommended Action

DAT

1) If the meter reset during a reconfigure or initialize, this error is normal. 2) If not, then recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Check Echelon connections. Check that the other meter is connected. Check the configuration.

Check Echelon connections. Check that the other meter is connected. Check the configuration.

Check Echelon connections. Check that the other meter is connected. Check the configuration.

Check Echelon connections. Check that the other meter is connected. Check the configuration.

Type Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Each second

Each second

Each second

Each second

Each second

Each second

When Checked?

Non-Fatal

D8

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Diagnostic Setting

Check Echelon connections. Check that the other meter is connected. Check the configuration.

I/Os

I/Os

I/Os

I/Os

I/Os

D3

D3

D3

D3

D3

Default Summary #

The meter input should be present according to the SLC configuration but no message has been seen for 3 seconds.

193

140

141

142

143

144

Error ID #

Meter Input 2 Silent

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

FW Support

DAT

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Category

A-7

A-8

DED

Energy Inactive

Display Inactive

Display

DED

Error

Demand Inactive

Cause

DED

Energy manager is inactive.

The display manager is inactive.

The demand manager is inactive.

Recommended Action 1) If the meter reset during a reconfigure or initialize, this error is normal. 2) If not, then recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

1) If the meter reset during a reconfigure or initialize, this error is normal. 2) If not, then recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

1) If the meter reset during a reconfigure or initialize, this error is normal. 2) If not, then recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Type

1) If the meter reset during a reconfigure or initialize, this error is normal. 2) If not, then recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Each second

Each second

Each second

Each second

When Checked?

The communications manager is inactive.

D8

D8

D8

D8

225

233

234

231

Error ID #

Communications Inactive

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

FW Support

DED

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

Default Summary #

Diagnostic Category

Diagnostic Setting

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Harmonics Inactive

I/O Inactive

DED

Display

DED

Error

Global EOI Inactive

Cause

DED

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide The I/O manager in inactive.

The harmonics manager is inactive.

The global end-of-interval source component is inactive.

Recommended Action 1) If the meter reset during a reconfigure or initialize, this error is normal. 2) If not, then recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

1) If the meter reset during a reconfigure or initialize, this error is normal. 2) If not, then recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

1) If the meter reset during a reconfigure or initialize, this error is normal. 2) If not, then recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Type

1) If the meter reset during a reconfigure or initialize, this error is normal. 2) If not, then recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Each second

Each second

Each second

Each second

When Checked?

The event manager component is inactive.

D8

D8

D8

D8

232

224

227

192

Error ID #

Eventlog Manager Off

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

FW Support

DED

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

Default Summary #

Diagnostic Category

Diagnostic Setting

A-9

A-10

DED

Power Quality Inactive

Load Profile #2 Inactive

Display

DED

Error

Load Profile #1 Inactive

Cause

DED

The power quality manager is inactive.

The mass memory #2 is inactive.

The mass memory #1 is inactive.

Recommended Action 1) If the meter reset during a reconfigure or initialize, this error is normal. 2) If not, then recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

1) If the meter reset during a reconfigure or initialize, this error is normal. 2) If not, then recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

1) If the meter reset during a reconfigure or initialize, this error is normal. 2) If not, then recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Type

1) If the meter reset during a reconfigure or initialize, this error is normal. 2) If not, then recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Each second

Each second

Each second

Each second

When Checked?

The information manager is inactive.

D8

D8

D8

D8

223

229

230

226

Error ID #

Information Inactive

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

FW Support

DED

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

Default Summary #

Diagnostic Category

Diagnostic Setting

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

TOU OFF

Abnormal Powerup

Calculated Quantity Range error

DIA

DIA

Display

DED

Error

Time Manager Inactive

Cause

DED

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide Non-Fatal

Change the calculation used to resolve this problem.

A calculated quantity calculation had an invalid argument and the result was set to 0.0. For example, in a divide, if the denominator is zero, this error will be set and the quotient will be set to 0.0.

User Program Configuration

Diagnostic Category

Diagnostic Setting Configurable

D8

D8

D8

D8

D1

Default Summary #

Each second

At power up

Non-Fatal

Each second if TOU is running or each time TOU stop command is sent to the meter.

Each second

Each second

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

1) Check meter program to make sure that TOU is enabled and configured correctly. 2) Confirm that your meter has the TOU meter key enabled. 3) If OK, then recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then contact SchlumbergerSema.

1) If the meter reset during a reconfigure or initialize, this error is normal. 2) If not, then recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

This is a catch all error to indicate that something was wrong at powerup.

Time of use is inactive. It has been stopped by a remote command or due to an error (if TOU stopped is set too).

The time manager is inactive.

Recommended Action Non-Fatal

Type

1) If the meter reset during a reconfigure or initialize, this error is normal. 2) If not, then recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

When Checked?

The self read manager is inactive.

113

251

228

235

200

Error ID #

Self Read Off

4.01i

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

FW Support

DED

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

A-11

A-12

Display Timeout

DLMS Read Stream Error

DIA

DIA

Diagnostics Posting Error

DIA

Display Bus Error

Diagnostics error

DIA

An error occurred putting an item into a DLMS message.

The LCD interface firmware timed out waiting for the LCD busy flag to be reset.

The display board may not be properly connected.

Diagnostics data could not be written to the backup file. There may be a problem with the RAM File System.

This is a catch all error to indicate that something was wrong in diagnostics.

An error occurred in the demand component of the meter.

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Recover as much data as possible. Meter needs to be returned to the factory for repair.

Contact SchlumbergerSema

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

1) Power meter down and check display board connection. 2) If problem still exists, then call SchlumbergerSema.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Non-Fatal

Each message

Before a byte is read to or written from the display

Each access to the display

At power up and on each meter update

As needed

Each second

Each command

D8

D8

D8

D8

D8

D8

Configurable

Diagnostic Setting

Change passwords in meter.

D8

User Program Configuration

Diagnostic Category

A debug command was sent to the meter. Possible tampering.

Every read and write to the queue

D1

Default Summary #

DIA

Demand Error

Display

DIA

Error

Debug Function Executed error

Cause

DIA

Recommended Action Non-Fatal

Type

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

When Checked?

Messages from the communications task have been lost.

178

252

254

250

170

212

120

216

Error ID #

Communication Queue Error

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

3.02m

1.01b

FW Support

DIA

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Echelon In Queue Full

Echelon Out Queue Full

Energy Error

Energy Quantum Late Error

EPF Incomplete

DIA

DIA

DIA

DIA

Display

DIA

Error

Echelon Chip Error

Cause

DIA

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Check battery connection, or connect battery, or replace battery. Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

1) Check meter program to make sure that I/O set correctly. 2) Check I/O connections. 3) Check LonWorks network traffic. If error repeats, then contact SchlumbergerSema.

At power up

On every new message of this type

Each second

Each LonWorks message

Each LonWorks message

Each minute

Configurable

D8

D8

Configurable

Battery

I/Os

D2

D3

167

214

201

172

173

D3

Configurable

I/Os

175

240

D8

Diagnostic Category

The meter was previously powered down abnormally. Meter time may now be incorrect.

The time limit for processing the new energy quantums message took too long.

An error occurred in the energy component of the meter.

A message from the main task to the LonWorks network was lost due to the queue being full or some other queue or memory error.

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

D8

Diagnostic Setting

1) Check meter program to make sure that I/O set correctly. 2) Check I/O connections. 3) Check LonWorks network traffic. If error repeats, then contact SchlumbergerSema.

Recover as much data as possible. Meter needs to be returned to the factory for repair.

At power up

Default Summary #

The queue of messages form the LonWorks network to the main task is full or there is some other error queueing the message. Network messages have been lost.

The LonWorks neuron chip is not communicating. The chip programming may be corrupted or the chip may have failed.

Recommended Action Non-Fatal

Type

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

When Checked?

A double bus fault occurred.

Error ID #

Double Bus Fault Error

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

FW Support

DIA

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

A-13

A-14

FE TSI Range Error

“Flash write pending, bad checksum

DIA

False Tick Error

DIA

Each second

Binding, reconfigure, logoff after reconfigure

Non-Fatal

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

“An error occurred saving the new configuration after the meter was reprogrammed.

Each second

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

On close of timesync period

Each second

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

An error occurred in the front end firmware.

The time in the meter has not been properly incremented. Also possible on entry to and exit from test mode with old firmware.

Check the timesynch source (GPS) connection. Or change time sync configuration to not expect a time sync.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

156

207

116

D8

D6

146

152

160

Time

Diagnostic Category

D8

D8

Configurable

D8

D8

Diagnostic Setting

There was no external timesynch received during a complete timesynch period.

The system loss compensation firmware had an error.

Flash RAM writes

Default Summary #

DIA

External Timesynch Signal Missed error

Display

DIA

Error

Error Setting Loss Compensation

Cause

DIA

Recommended Action Non-Fatal

Type

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

When Checked?

Programming of meter was not completed correctly.

Error ID #

Error Posting Flash

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

3.02m

1.01b

1.01b

FW Support

DIA

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Front End Rebooted

Front End Status Error

Global EOI Source Error

Harmonics Error

Harmonics Late Error

Info Manager Error

DIA

DIA

DIA

DIA

DIA

Display

DIA

Error

Front End Queue Error

Cause

DIA

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide An error occurred in the information manager firmware.

The time limit for processing the new harmonics message took too long.

An error occurred in the Harmonics firmware.

An error occurred in the global end-ofinterval source firmware.

Possible calibration errors.

An error occurred that triggered a front end reboot.

Front end messages have been lost due to a full queue.

Recommended Action Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

Upgrade firmware to 5.x or above.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

1) Reduce the memory requirements of the configuration and reprogram the meter. Or, 2) Upgrade software to 2.3 or above and firmware to 5.x or above.

As needed

On every new message of this type

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Each second

Each second

Powerup of front end

Each second

Each second

Each second

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Type

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

When Checked?

The amount of free memory is too small.

194

139

181

218

147

D8

159

213

Diagnostic Setting D8

Diagnostic Category 182

Default Summary #

D8

D8

D8

D8

D8

D8

Error ID #

Free Memory Low

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

FW Support

DIA

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

A-15

A-16

Line clock Period error

Load Profile #1 Error

Load Profile #10 Error

DIA

DIA

Line clock Missing error

DIA

A problem happened in extended load profile #8.

This is a catchall error for any error detected in the mass memory 1 code.

The line clock signal from the front end has a period that is out of range.

“The meter line signal from the front end is missing and the meter is line synched. If the meter is aux powered, there may be no voltage phases connected.

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

1) Check the installation and verify that the voltage inputs are OK. 2) Change to internal clock if local power questionable.

1) Check the installation and verify that the voltage inputs are OK. 2) Change to internal clock if local power questionable.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

Each second

Every second

Each second

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Each second

Each second

As each message is added to the queue

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

D8

D8

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

D8

D8

Diagnostic Setting

The line clock signal from the front end duty cycle is out of range.

Messages from the main task to the LCD task have been lost.

On power up and restart of communicatio ns

Time

Time

Time

D6

D6

D6

Default Summary #

DIA

Line Clock Duty error

Display

DIA

Error

LCD Queue Error

Cause

DIA

Recommended Action Non-Fatal

Type

If firmware is less than 5.00, ignore the error since nothing in these FW versions uses the OS information that is corrupt. If meter has FW 5.00 or greater report error SchlumbergerSema.

When Checked?

OS information is corrupt.

125

248

134

133

135

217

149

Error ID #

Invalid OS Information

3.02m

1.01b

2.00a

2.00a

2.00a

1.01b

1.01b

FW Support

DIA

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Category

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Load Profile #4 Error

Load Profile #5 Error

Load Profile #6 Error

Load Profile #7 Error

Load Profile #8 Error

Load Profile #9 Error

Main Loop Timing Error

DIA

DIA

DIA

DIA

DIA

DIA

Display

DIA

Error

Load Profile #3 Error

Cause

DIA

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide Each second

Each second

Configurable

D8

D8

D8

D8

D8

D8

D8

Diagnostic Setting

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Each second

Each second

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Each second

Non-Fatal

Each second

Each second

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Each second

Non-Fatal

D8

User Program Configuration

Diagnostic Category

1) Reduce the memory requirements of the configuration and reprogram the meter. Or, 2) Upgrade software to 2.3 or above and firmware to 5.x or above.

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

Every second

D1

Default Summary #

The time limit for traversing the main loop has been exceeded.

A problem happened in extended load profile #7.

A problem happened in extended load profile #6.

A problem happened in extended load profile #5.

A problem happened in extended load profile #4.

A problem happened in extended load profile #3.

A problem happened in extended load profile #2.

A problem happened in extended load profile #1.

Recommended Action Non-Fatal

Type

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

When Checked?

This is a catchall error for any error detected in the mass memory 2 code.

222

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

247

Error ID #

Load Profile #2 Error

1.01b

3.02m

3.02m

3.02m

3.02m

3.02m

3.02m

3.02m

1.01b

FW Support

DIA

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

A-17

A-18

Non-display Bus Error

Not Used

DIA

DIA

No EPF

DIA

This diagnostic is not used.

Error set when a bad address is used.

Could not synch to the second change at powerup.

The meter was previously powered down abnormally. Meter time may now be incorrect. This could be caused by a transient.

Contact SchlumbergerSema

Recover as much data as possible. Meter needs to be returned to the factory for repair.

Recover as much data as possible. Meter needs to be returned to the factory for repair.

Check battery connection, or connect battery, or replace battery. Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

N/A

Flag set in the bus handler when the bus error occurs

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Powerup

At power up

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Each second

Non-Fatal

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

D8

249

253

168

114

D8

D2

D1

119

Battery

User Program Configuration

219

151

105

D8

Configurable

Configurable

D8

D8

Diagnostic Setting

When second changed, the previous second change had not been processed.

Each second

Each allocation

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

1) Reduce the memory requirements of the configuration and reprogram the meter. Or, 2) Upgrade software to 2.3 or above and firmware to 5.x or above.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

D8

Diagnostic Category

No Tracker Sync error

New Second Missed error

DIA

The time limit for processing new second has been exceeded.

Not enough free memory is available.

Every second

Default Summary #

DIA

New Second Late Error

Display

DIA

Error

Memory Allocation Failed

Cause

DIA

Recommended Action Non-Fatal

Type

Data could be lost in this interval. Report to SchlumbergerSema.

When Checked?

A queue filled up forcing early processing of the queue entries.

Error ID #

Main to Acquisition Manager Work Queue Full Error

1.01b

1.01b

3.02m

1.01b

4.01i

1.01b

1.01b

5.00n

FW Support

DIA

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Power Down Line Sync error

Power Down Not Low Power error

Power Quality Late Error

Power Up Time Forced error

Priority Work Queue Full Error

Process the Outage Error

DIA

DIA

DIA

DIA

DIA

DIA

Display

Possible Time Loss

Error

DIA

Cause

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide An error occurred during firmware processing in power up after an outage.

A queue filled up forcing early processing of the queue entries.

A debug feature was used that sets the time on powerup. Possible tampering.

The time limit for processing a power quality message was exceeded.

The real time clock was not in low power mode on powerup. This could cause a drain on the battery if power was gone very long.

The real time clock was in line sync on powerup. It should be crystal sync. This could cause loss of time on battery.

The battery was low when checked during powerup per the power supply monitoring integrated circuit.

An error was noticed by an advanced protocol.

Recommended Action

PDS Protocol error

Data could be lost in this interval. Report to SchlumbergerSema.

Data could be lost in this interval. Report to SchlumbergerSema.

Change passwords in meter.

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

Check battery connection, or connect battery, or replace battery. Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Check battery connection, or connect battery, or replace battery. Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Type

DIA

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

When Checked? At power up

Every second

Powerup

Each second

Powerup

Powerup

At power up

Every 10 seconds

Each pds data update

D8

D8

Configurable

D8

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Diagnostic Setting

Non-Fatal

User Program Configuration

Battery

Battery

Battery

User Program Configuration

User Program Configuration

Diagnostic Category

Check PDS general info Mini-DLMS object for the cause of the status error and the point number that caused it.

D1

D2

D2

D2

D1

D1

Default Summary #

There was some error in a Protocol Data Server point other than offline.

106

109

122

221

117

118

150

136

124

Error ID #

PDS Point Data error

5.00n

5.00n

3.02m

1.01b

3.02m

3.02m

1.01b

2.00a

3.02m

FW Support

DIA

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

A-19

A-20

Reset Due to Soft Reset Instruction

Reset Due to Soft Reset Pin

DIA

DIA

Reconfigure Error

DIA

Reset Due to Loss of Clock

Raw Registers Late Error

DIA

The last processor reset was caused by the soft reset pin being asserted. This pin is unused.

The last processor reset was caused by the soft reset instruction being executed. This instruction is not used. This error could be caused by transients.

The last reset was caused by a loss of the processor clock (crystal).

An error occurred updating the configuration of a component.

The time limit for processing the new raw registers message took too long.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Recover as much data as possible. Meter needs to be returned to the factory for repair.

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

Non-Fatal

At power up

At power up

At power up

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

During reconfigure of a component

On every new message of this type

Reconfigure, initialization, factory and customer default powerups.

Each second

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

D8

D8

D8

D8

D8

Configurable

D8

Diagnostic Setting

None. The meter is operating normally. 1) Reduce the memory requirements of the configuration and reprogram the meter. Or, 2) Upgrade software to 2.3 or above and firmware to 5.x or above.

Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

D8

User Program Configuration

Diagnostic Category

This error would normally occur after initialization or reconfiguration. It is caused by a lack of room for the changes being programmed into the meter.

The server is inactive.

Each second

D1

Default Summary #

DIA

RAM File Create No Room

Display

DIA

Error

Protocol Data Server Inactive error

Cause

DIA

Recommended Action Non-Fatal

Type

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

When Checked?

An error was noticed by the protocol data server component.

242

243

245

157

215

161

137

138

Error ID #

Protocol Data Server error

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

2.00a

2.00a

FW Support

DIA

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Self Read Check Sum Error

Self Read Configuration Error

Self Read Data Error

Self Read Memory Error

DIA

DIA

DIA

Display

DIA

Error

RN Return Segment Failed

Cause

DIA

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide Error involving self read memory usage (stream).

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Error involving self read configuration.

Error involving self read freeze or self read data storage.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

The checksum on the self read configuration is bad.

An error occurred releasing memory.

Recommended Action Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Type

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

As needed

As needed

As needed

Read of self read configuration

Memory access

During reconfigure of a component

When Checked?

An error occurred restarting a meter component after it was reprogrammed.

D8

D8

D8

D8

D8

D8

197

198

199

196

162

158

Error ID #

Restart Error

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

FW Support

DIA

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

Default Summary #

Diagnostic Category

Diagnostic Setting

A-21

A-22

Standard Work Queue Full Error

Stop all modules command missing before reconfigure command

Timer Allocation error

Timing Error

TOU Stopped error

DIA

DIA

DIA

DIA

Display

DIA

Error

Stack Near Overflow

Cause

DIA

An error occurred in TOU module and TOU stopped.

This is a catchall error for timing errors that do not yet have a specific error.

Go online with meter, and look at the TOU status. Check: schedule expiration, schedule validity, attempt to switch to latent with no latent schedule. Reprogram TOU.

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

Each second

Each second

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Each allocation

Meter programming

Every second

Each second

Configurable

D8

Configurable

D8

D8

D8

Diagnostic Setting

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

D8

User Program Configuration

User Program Configuration

Diagnostic Category

Reprogam meter. If errors repeats, then note programming actions that are causing the error and call SchlumbergerSema.

Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Data could be lost in this interval. Report to SchlumbergerSema.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Each second

D1

D1

Default Summary #

Not enough timers are available.

Programming of meter was not completed correctly.

A queue filled up forcing early processing of the queue entries.

The stack usage is near the limit.

Recommended Action Non-Fatal

Type

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

When Checked?

An interrupt for the SPI message completion was not properly received.

115

220

123

153

108

148

171

Error ID #

SPI Done Int Failed

4.01i

1.01b

3.02m

1.01b

5.00n

1.01b

1.01b

FW Support

DIA

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

View Check Error Reset

View Dispenser Checksum Error

View Dispenser Error

View Dispenser Post Defaults

View Fix Error

DIA

DIA

DIA

DIA

Display

DIA

Error

Update Calibration Failed error

Cause

DIA

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide The view could not be opened properly after a check error reset.

An error occurred writing the default views to the RAM disk.

An error occurred in the view dispenser firmware.

The view dispenser default view Ids for each port had a checksum error.

A checksum error was detected in the view status information.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, Contact SchlumbergerSema.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Non-Fatal

On a check error reset

Each second

As needed

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

On power up

Each second

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

At calibration

D8

D8

D8

D8

D8

Configurable

Diagnostic Setting

Non-Fatal

D8

Calibration

Diagnostic Category

Return the meter to the factory for calibration.

At power up, time adjustment, programming

D7

Default Summary #

There was a problem during calibration.

Recommended Action Non-Fatal

Type

Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

When Checked?

Timed out waiting for the second to change when polling the real time clock chip.

186

191

190

189

187

111

154

Error ID #

Unable to Synch to Second Change

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

4.01i

1.01b

FW Support

DIA

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

A-23

A-24

Voltage Quality Error

Work Queue Error

DIA

View Open Error

DIA

DIA

View Object Open Error

Display

DIA

Error

View Object Error

Cause

DIA

An error occurred involving one of the work queues.

An error occurred in the voltage quality firmware.

An error occurred opening the view object file.

An error occurred opening the view object file.

An error occurred posting the view object record.

Recommended Action Data could be lost in this interval. Report to SchlumbergerSema.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Type

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Every second

As needed

On power up

On power up

As needed

Each second

When Checked?

A view object record for a view had a checksum error.

D8

D8

D8

D8

D8

D8

107

180

188

183

184

185

Error ID #

View Object Check Reset

5.00n

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

FW Support

DIA

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

Default Summary #

Diagnostic Category

Diagnostic Setting

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Flash File System FAT Error

Flash File System General Error

Flash File System Inactive

Flash File System Storage Error

EEPROM FS

EEPROM FS

EEPROM FS

Display

EEPROM FS

Error

Flash File System Directory Checksum Error

Cause

EEPROM FS

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema. Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema. Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

The Flash file system component is inactive.

The storage location for a directory entry is wrong.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

This is a catchall error for any other error detected in the Flash file system.

The file allocation table of the Flash file system has an unrecoverable error.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Fatal

Fatal

Fatal

Fatal

Fatal

Fatal

At power up

Each second

At power up

At power up

At power up and at each use of the directory entry

At power up

D8

D8

D8

D8

D8

D8

13

17

15

12

11

5

Error ID #

A directory entry on the Flash file system has a checksum error.

Recommended Action Check battery connection, or connect battery, or replace battery. Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Type

The calculated checksum value for the configuration or LonWorks bindings storage in the flash EEPROM did not match the stored value. This error might occur if a reconfiguration was interrupted by a reset and the battery was bad.

When Checked?

EEPROM error

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

FW Support

EEPROM

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

Default Summary #

Diagnostic Category

Diagnostic Setting

A-25

A-26

Loss of potential -B

Loss of potential -C

PHB

PHC

Loss of potential -A

PHA

Display

Echelon No Bindings

Error

NBD

Cause The C phase voltage is below the configured limit.

The B phase voltage is below the configured limit.

The A phase voltage is below the configured limit.

The LonWorks neuron chip is not properly bound with its LonWorks binding. It needs to be re-bound.

bad battery

Recommended Action

Low Battery Power Up

1) None. The meter is operating normally. Check voltage source. 2) Check meter's voltage connections. 3) Check low voltage level in the meter's program.

1) None. The meter is operating normally. Check voltage source. 2) Check meter's voltage connections. 3) Check low voltage level in the meter's program.

1) None. The meter is operating normally. Check voltage source. 2) Check meter's voltage connections. 3) Check low voltage level in the meter's program.

Recover as much data as possible. Meter needs to be returned to the factory for repair.

Check battery connection, or connect battery, or replace battery. Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Type

LOBAT PWRUP

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Fatal

When Checked? Each second

Each second

Each second

Each minute

At power up

Each second

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Configurable

Diagnostic Setting

Non-Fatal

Low Voltage

Low Voltage

Low Voltage

I/Os

Battery

User Program Configuration

Diagnostic Category

None. The meter is operating normally. Check the register full scale setting in the meter's program; increase the full scale limit.

D4

D4

D4

D3

D2

D1

Default Summary #

The peak kilowatts delivered aggregate exceeded the configured limit.

208

209

210

174

18

203

Error ID #

Register fullscale

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

FW Support

FS

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Ferro-RAM error

RAM Error

RAM File System Directory Checksum Error

RAM File System FAT Error

RAM

RAM FS

RAM FS

Display

RAM

Error

Ferro-RAM Checksum Error

Cause

RAM

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide The file allocation table of the RAM file system has an unrecoverable error.

A directory entry on the RAM file system has a checksum error.

Memory error.

A ferro-RAM location did not retain a value written to it during the last ferroRAM test.

The calculated checksum value for the ferro-RAM does not match the stored value. This error could be caused by a watchdog timer type reset during an update to the ferro-RAM, or by a bad ferro-RAM cell, or by a transient disrupting access to the memory.

Recommended Action Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Fatal

Fatal

Fatal

Fatal

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema. Recover as much data as possible. Meter needs to be returned to the factory for repair.

Fatal

Fatal

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Type

A microprocessor dual port Ram location did not retain a value written to it.

At power up

At power up and at each use of the directory entry

Factory and customer default powerup

During factory and customer reset

At power up

At power up

When Checked?

Dual Port RAM Error

2

D8

D8

D8

9

8

1

4

Diagnostic Setting D8

Diagnostic Category 3

Default Summary #

D8

D8

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

FW Support

RAM

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

Error ID #

A-27

A-28 A new error occurred during powerup after a watchdog timer reset.

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

Check battery connection, or connect battery, or replace battery. Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Non-Fatal

Non-Fatal

Fatal

Fatal

At power up

At power up

At power up

Each second

D8

Configurable

D8

D8

Diagnostic Setting

The meter's RAM file system had many errors. This error is usually caused by powering up the meter without a battery or with a battery whose voltage has dropped below the required level. Time in the meter was reset to default. Billing data (stored in non-volatile memory) should still be available.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

Follow recommendations for other error(s). If none, contact SchlumbergerSema.

D8

Battery

Diagnostic Category

Watch Dog Timer Error

Recovery Powerup

RCV

The storage location for a directory entry is wrong.

RAM file system component is inactive.

Each second

D2

Default Summary #

WDG

RAM File System Storage Error

Display

RAM FS

Error

RAM File System Inactive

Cause

RAM FS

Recommended Action Fatal

Type

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then return to SchlumbergerSema.

When Checked?

This is a catchall error for any other error detected in the RAM file system.

239

166

10

16

14

Error ID #

RAM File System General Error

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

1.01b

FW Support

RAM FS

Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Appendix B

Status Codes This appendix provides information on Status Codes.

Harmonics Status Codes The status codes in Table B.1 are used for Harmonics. These status codes provide information about the interval and may or may not indicate an error condition. Table B.1 Harmonics Status Codes Status Code

Meaning

Causes

Suggested Actions

A

Time Adjust

The meter’s clock was adjusted by time synchronization during this interval.

No action necessary; normal meter operation. The time was adjusted either by the GPS receiver or a user through the PC-PRO+ 98 software.

C

Clock Error

The meter recorded this interval while a non-fatal Clock Error was occurring.

Correct the condition causing the Clock Error. Re-initialization may be necessary. Look at on-line Diagnostics to see if any other flags have been set. If so, then see the software Diagnostics section Help for suggestions or see Appendix B of this manual.

D

Daylight Savings Time

The meter recorded this interval while in Daylight Savings Time (DST).

No action necessary. Normal meter operation.

E

External EOI

The meter closed this interval because of a received external EOI signal.

No action necessary. Normal meter operation. Note: This function is not currently supported.

I

Invalid

No data for this interval; no message received.

Harmonics possibly disabled or the MeterKey for harmonics is not set. Also, if harmonics is reconfigured or initialized and restarts close to the interval boundary, the first interval might have invalid status; a time adjustment might also cause an interval to be invalid.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

B-1

Status Codes

Table B.1 Harmonics Status Codes L

Long Interval

The meter’s time was adjusted backward during this interval, increasing the amount of time actually spent in the interval.

No action necessary; normal meter operation. The time was adjusted either by the GPS receiver or a user through the PC-PRO+ 98 software.

O

Outage

The meter experienced an outage to its power supply during this interval.

No action necessary; normal meter operation. Investigate outage if necessary.

R

Checksum Error

The data for this interval was not properly recorded by the meter.

Ignore the meter data for this interval. Look at on-line Diagnostics to see if any other flags have been set. If so, then see the software Diagnostics section Help for suggestions or see Appendix B of this manual.

S

Short Interval

(1) The meter completed a power-up sequence in the middle of this interval.(2) The meter’s time was adjusted forward during or over this interval, reducing the amount of time actually spent in the interval.

No action necessary. 1. Normal meter operation. 2. User changed meter time.

T

Test Mode

The meter was placed in Test Mode during this interval.

No action necessary. User placed meter in Test mode.

Voltage Quality Status Codes The status codes in Table B.2 and Table B.3 are used for Voltage Quality. These status codes provide information about the interval and may or may not indicate an error condition. Table B.2 Voltage Quality Status Codes Status Code

B-2

Meaning

Causes

Suggested Actions

C

Clock Error

The meter recorded this interval while a non-fatal Clock Error was occurring.

Correct the condition causing the Clock Error. Re-initialization may be necessary. Look at on-line Diagnostics to see if any other flags have been set. If so, then see the software Diagnostics section Help for suggestions or see Appendix B of this manual.

ED

End in Daylight Savings Time

This interval was recorded at the end of Daylight Savings Time (DST).

No action necessary. Normal meter operation.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Status Codes

Table B.2 Voltage Quality Status Codes Status Code

Meaning

Causes

Suggested Actions

R

Checksum Error

The data for this interval was not properly recorded by the meter.

Ignore the meter data for this interval. Look at on-line Diagnostics to see if any other flags have been set. If so, then see the software Diagnostics section Help for suggestions or see Appendix B of this manual.

SD

Start in Daylight Savings Time

This interval was recorded at the start of Daylight Savings Time (DST).

No action necessary. Normal meter operation.

Test Mode

The meter was placed in Test Mode during this interval.

No action necessary. User placed meter in Test Mode.

T

Table B.3 Voltage Interruption Reset Reasons Status Code

Meaning

Causes

Suggested Actions

DBF

Double Bus Fault

An internal error has occurred – possibly due to bad memory in the meter.

Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter to Factory Default. Reprogram meter. If error repeats then return to SchlumbergerSema.

HR

External Hard Reset

The meter received a hard reset due to a loss of supplied power.

No action necessary. Normal meter operation for intervals immediately following most outages. Investigate if necessary.

LC

Loss of Processor Clock

The meter failed to receive messages from the crystal used for processor speeds.

Ignore the data for this interval. Look at Diagnostics for other errors. If the error persists, contact Customer Support.

PU

Power Up

The meter completed its power-up routine during this interval.

No action necessary. Normal meter operation for intervals immediately following most outages. Investigate if necessary.

SR or SRI

Soft Reset or Soft Reset Instruction

The processor was reset due to a jump to an invalid instruction in the firmware code – possibly due to transients.

Retrieve any valid data from the meter, then contact Customer Support for assistance.

W

Watchdog Timeout

The meter missed an interval message between processors. Can be caused by anomalies on the supply voltage.

Ignore the data for this interval. Look at Diagnostics for other errors. If the error persists, contact Customer Support.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

B-3

Status Codes

Standard Load Profile Status Codes The status codes in Table B.4 are used for Standard Load Profiles. These status codes provide information about the interval and may or may not indicate an error condition. Table B.4 Standard Load Profile Status Codes Status Code

B-4

Meaning

Causes

Suggested Actions

A

Time Adjust

The meter’s clock was adjusted by time synchronization during this interval.

No action necessary; normal meter operation. The time was adjusted either by the GPS receiver or a user through the PC-PRO+ 98 software.

C

Clock Error

The meter recorded this interval while a non-fatal Clock Error was occurring.

Correct the condition causing the Clock Error. Re-initialization may be necessary. Look at on-line Diagnostics to see if any other flags have been set. If so, then see the software Diagnostics section Help for suggestions or see Appendix B of this manual.

D

Daylight Savings Time

The meter recorded this interval while in Daylight Savings Time (DST).

No action necessary. Normal meter operation.

E

External EOI

The meter closed this interval because of a received external EOI signal.

No action necessary. Normal meter operation. Note: This function is not currently supported.

L

Long Interval

The meter’s time was adjusted backward during this interval, increasing the amount of time actually spent in the interval.

No action necessary. No action necessary; normal meter operation. The time was adjusted either by the GPS receiver or a user through the PC-PRO+ 98 software.

O

Outage

The meter experienced an outage to its power supply during this interval.

No action necessary. Normal meter operation. Investigate outage if necessary.

R

Checksum Error

The data for this interval was not properly recorded by the meter.

Ignore the meter data for this interval. Look at on-line Diagnostics to see if any other flags have been set. If so, then see the software Diagnostics section Help for suggestions or see Appendix B of this manual.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Status Codes

Table B.4 Standard Load Profile Status Codes Status Code

Meaning

Causes

Suggested Actions

S

Short Interval

(1) The meter completed a power-up sequence in the middle of this interval. (2) The meter’s time was adjusted forward during or over this interval, reducing the amount of time actually spent in the interval.

No action necessary. (1) Normal meter operation. (2) User changed meter time.

T

Test Mode

The meter was placed in Test Mode during this interval.

No action necessary. User put meter in Test Mode.

V

Overflow

The meter’s Load Profile pulse count for this interval overflowed the upper limit of 65,535 pulses.

The pulse count per interval needs to be reduced. This can be accomplished either by increasing the pulse weight for this channel or by increasing the interval length for this set of load profile channels.

Extended Load Profile Status Codes The status codes in Table B.5 are used for Extended Load Profiles. These status codes provide information about the interval and may or may not indicate an error condition. Table B.5 Extended Load Profile Status Codes Status Code

Meaning

Causes

Suggested Actions

A

Time Adjust

The meter’s clock was adjusted by time synchronization during this interval

No action necessary; normal meter operation. The time was adjusted either by the GPS receiver or a user through the PC-PRO+ 98 software.

C

Clock Error

The meter recorded this interval while a non-fatal Clock Error was occurring.

Correct the condition causing the Clock Error. Re-initialization may be necessary. Look at on-line Diagnostics to see if any other flags have been set. If so, then see the software Diagnostics section Help for suggestions or see Appendix B of this manual.

D

Daylight Savings Time

The meter recorded this interval while in Daylight Savings Time (DST).

No action necessary. Normal meter operation.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

B-5

Status Codes

Table B.5 Extended Load Profile Status Codes Status Code

B-6

Meaning

Causes

Suggested Actions

E

External EOI

The meter closed this interval because of a received external EOI signal.

No action necessary. Normal meter operation. Note: This function is not currently supported.

L

Long Interval

The meter’s time was adjusted backward during this interval, increasing the amount of time actually spent in the interval.

No action necessary. No action necessary; normal meter operation. The time was adjusted either by the GPS receiver or a user through the PC-PRO+ 98 software.

O

Outage

The meter experienced an outage to its power supply during this interval.

No action necessary. Normal meter operation. Investigate outage if necessary.

R

Checksum Error

The data for this interval was not properly recorded by the meter.

Ignore the meter data for this interval. Look at on-line Diagnostics to see if any other flags have been set. If so, then see the software Diagnostics section Help for suggestions or see Appendix B of this manual.

S

Short Interval

(1) The meter completed a power-up sequence in the middle of this interval. (2) The meter’s time was adjusted forward during or over this interval, reducing the amount of time actually spent in the interval.

No action necessary. (1) Normal meter operation. (2) User changed meter time.

T

Test Mode

The meter was placed in Test Mode during this interval.

No action necessary; user put meter in Test mode.

V

Overflow

The meter’s Load Profile pulse count for this interval overflowed the upper limit of 65,535 pulses.

The pulse count per interval needs to be reduced. This can be accomplished either by increasing the pulse weight for this channel or by increasing the interval length for this set of load profile channels.

J

Rollover Minimum

Total Rolled Over Minimum

No action necessary. Normal meter operation.

K

Reconfigure

Indicates a parameter modification for the IEC-60870-5-102 protocols.

No action necessary; user programmed a IEC 60870-5-102 change in meter.

W

Access violation

An IEC 60870-5-102 protocol logon attempt failed.

No action necessary; user used bad IEC 60870-5-102 password.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Status Codes

Table B.5 Extended Load Profile Status Codes Status Code

Meaning

Causes

Suggested Actions

^

Loss of Phase A

Phase A voltage dropped below the limit

No action necessary. Normal meter operation. Investigate low voltage if necessary.

>

Loss of Phase B

Phase B voltage dropped below limit

No action necessary. Normal meter operation. Investigate low voltage if necessary.

<

Loss of Phase C

Phase C voltage dropped below limit

No action necessary. Normal meter operation. Investigate low voltage if necessary.

B

Total Reset

Value was reset to zero based on the reset schedule

No action necessary. Normal meter operation.

P

Loss of Potential

Voltage for Phase A, B, or C dropped below the limit.

No action necessary. Normal meter operation. Investigate low voltage if necessary.

Y

Loss of Time Synchronization

The meter detected that its clock was not synchronized with the time in the GPS device.

Check time synchronization.

Q

Time Adjustment <= to threshold

Time Adjustment was less than or equal to the Large Adjustment threshold (see "GPS Time Synchronization" on page 4-8).

No action necessary. Normal meter operation.

M

Rollover

Total Rolled Over Maximum

No action necessary. Normal meter operation.

6

Time Adjustment > threshold

Used by IEC-60870-5-102 protocols. Time adjustment was greater than the Large Adjustment threshold.

No action necessary. Normal meter operation.

7

Time Adjust Makeup

Time Adjustment Makeup Interval. Set when the time is adjusted forward out of the current interval into an interval more that one interval in the future. All intervening intervals are flagged.

No action necessary. Normal meter operation.

8

Backward Time Adjustment

Time Adjustment Backward out of interval. The time of the time adjustment was before the start of the current interval. For example, with a one minute interval, if at 1:03:15 the time was adjusted to 1:02:58, this status would be set.

No action necessary. Normal meter operation.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

B-7

Status Codes

Table B.5 Extended Load Profile Status Codes Status Code 9

B-8

Meaning Interval Overlap

Causes

Suggested Actions

If a backward time adjustment out of interval is done, this status is set in all already recorded intervals that ended after the new time.

No action necessary. Normal meter operation.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Glossary

alarm

An event or condition in the meter that can cause a digital state output to trigger or a call-home to occur, depending on its status. The status of an alarm is always stored in the meter so that other methods can check to see if the alarm has been triggered. The register threshold alarm is triggered whenever the attached data register's value strays above, or below, a programmed limit. Also see Threshold Alarm.

ALT

Alternate Mode Switch

alternate display

One of the three display modes. It is typically used to display quantities that are not needed on a regular basis. For example, Kh value. It is activated by the alternate mode switch or by communication using PCPRO+ 98. Also see Display Modes.

annunciator

A short label on the LCD that identifies particular quantities displayed by a register, for example Wh. Also, a text string up to 16 characters that can be used to describe an item or provide information on the LCD.

back end

The MC68360 or QUICC processor that processes data from the front end and other sources and makes that data available to communications and the display.

battery carryover

The amount of time that the registers and real time clock are energized by the battery when power supply voltage is absent.

block interval demand

Demand based on intervals from 2 to 60 minutes in length. All calculations of demand are based on rolling demand. To calculate block interval demand, program the register to have one subinterval of the same length as the demand interval.

BQ event

Refers to the basic quantities of watts and energy that are sent to the back end every 48 cycles of the line frequency.

calendar schedule

Schedule which determines seasonal changes, Daylight Savings Time changes, holidays, and daily switch points.

channel

The storage of a single quantity in each interval in load profile is referred to as a channel.

circular recording file

A viewable file that contains several records. Records are added to the file in sequential locations. When the file is full, the next record starts over at the beginning of the file and continues writing to sequential locations.

cold load pickup

See Demand Delay.

CLIENT

The CLIENT is usually the initiator of the communication session. In the case of Mini-DLMS, the CLIENT is the PC that programs and retrieve data from the meter which has the role of a SERVER.

complete reset

A reset that puts the meter in a known default configuration. All errors are cleared. The factory default reset and the customer default reset are complete resets.

G-1

Glossary

CT (Current) Ratio

A CT ratio is used to scale the value of the current from a secondary value up to the primary side of an instrument transformer.

current season

The season that defines the present rate schedule.

customer alerts

Digital State outputs that can be used, for example, to control external lights indicating the time of use rate which is in effect or when a self read has occurred.

customer default

The meter configuration that is in the meter when it is first sent to the customer from the factory. It can also be initiated with a three-button reset. This action sets the Optical, COM1, and COM2 ports to the MiniDLMS protocol. Note: All meter data is lost when this reset is executed.

DCD

Data Carrier Detect modem signal. Hardware signal defined by the RS232-C specification that indicates that a device such as a modem is online and ready for transmission.

DCE

Data Communication Equipment. A communications device that can establish, maintain, and terminate a connection (for example, a modem). A DCE may also provide signal conversion between the data terminal equipment (DTE) and the common carrier’s channel.

decimation

Division of the sampling frequency.

demand

The average value of power or a similar quantity over a specified interval of time.

demand delay

Cold Load Pickup (CLPU). The programmable amount of time required before demand calculations are restarted after a power outage.

demand interval

The specified time over which demand is calculated.

demand reset

Resets the current Maximum and Minimum Demand to zero. This action is activated with the demand reset switch or by communication with PCPRO+ 98.

demand subinterval

The smaller blocks of time that are used in rolling demand calculations.

demand threshold

A programmed value that, when exceeded by calculated demand, initiates an alarm.

Digital State Input Module

This module reads digital states on its inputs. These inputs can be read by the meter and used to trigger actions such as EOI, Register Freeze or Demand Reset. They can also be used to control SLC and TOU.

Digital State Output

An output that is either high or low. These outputs can be sent to other devices for EOI, alarms, and so forth.

Digital State Output Module

This module has 8 relay outputs that trigger when events occur in the meter. It is a high or low type of triggering. The output represented can be programmed through software.

Direct Connect

Describes the connection between a meter and a device (like a computer) through RS-232, RS-485, or other communication methods that can be configured to “look” like a direct connection, e.g., fiber-optic, radio, etc.

G-2

Glossary

display

Four-line user-configurable visual indication of data in the meter. Normal, Alternate, and Test display modes are available. Also see Screen.

display duration

A programmed number of seconds during which a quantity displays on the LCD before scrolling to the next quantity.

display modes

Three display modes are available—Normal, Alternate, and Test.

download

Transfer of a meter program or firmware from the PC to the meter.

DST time change

This time refers to the changing of time in the fall and spring to and from daylight savings time.

DSW

Data Status Word. These two bytes are used in the QDIP protocol to reflect some meter states such as bad function code received, device trouble, and device restart.

DTE

Data Terminal Equipment. End-user equipment, typically an Intelligent Electronic Device (IED), terminal, or computer that can function as the source or destination point of communication on the network.

Echelon

The company that started the LONWORKS network products.

EEPROM

Nonvolatile memory. Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory that retains its data during a power outage without the need for a battery. Also used to refer to the meter’s flash memory.

EOI

End Of Interval refers to the method of ending an interval, which on the Q1000 can be by an external input or by an internally driven time.

end-of-interval output

A Digital State output that can be initiated at the end of each interval. Also called Customer Alert.

error codes

Monitor operation of the meter. Error codes are divided into Fatal and Non-fatal errors.

error event

The occurrence of an error condition.

error event ID

An integer identifier indicating what error event occurred.

external modem

A modem outside of the meter connected to one of the meter’s RS-232 ports.

factory default

A default meter configuration that is used by the factory to reduce the requirements for reprogramming during the production process. This configuration is invoked by turning on the proper DIP switch and powering up the meter. Note: All meter data is lost when the meter is powered up with the DIP switch set on.

fatal error

A serious error. An error message is frozen on the screen. See the section on errors in this manual for more information.

fixed decimal

A programmable format that always displays the same number of digits to the right of the decimal.

G-3

Glossary

floating decimal

In the Q1000, float will always show at least 1 digit to the left of the decimal. If more digits are required to show significant digits to the left, they will be used. The remaining digits in the field width will be used for digits to the right of the decimal.

front end

The Digital Signal Processor (DSP) used to acquire data. It sends data messages to the back end through the Serial Peripheral Interface.

harmonics

The meter uses harmonics 2 - 32 to calculate its quantities. Harmonics 2 20 are made available to the user. Harmonics information includes the values of the fundamental current and voltage and percent of fundamental.

harmonics information

The harmonics related information obtained from Fast Fourier Transforms in the front end, transmitted to the back end, and processed. Included are the percent total harmonic distortion for both current and voltage, fundamental power and displacement power factor, fundamental voltage and phase angle with respect to phase A voltage, fundamental current and phase angle with respect to phase A voltage, magnitude and phase angle with respect to fundamental voltage for voltage harmonics 2 through 20, and magnitude and phase angle with respect to fundamental current for current harmonics 2 through 20.

Hayes Compatible Modem

A modem that supports the Hayes modem command set.

hysteresis

Threshold alarms have an upper and lower threshold. When these numbers are not equal, hysteresis is turned on. If the attached data register's value rises above the upper limit, then the alarm is turned ON until the data register's value falls below the lower limit. The hysteresis effect holds the alarm in the ON state until the alarm threshold's lowerlimit condition is met. Voltage quality has similar hysteresis usage. See the programming software’s online help for more information.

IEC 1107

A read/programming protocol used in Europe.

Input Modules

The Q1000 is designed to communicate with three types of Input Modules: Digital State Input Modules, Pulse Input Modules, and Analog Input Modules.

Internal Modem

The optional modem inside the meter's enclosure that connects to the RJ-11 telephone connector.

Internal RS-485 Board

A new option board for the Q1000 meter that can be configured to be RS485 4-wire or RS-232. This board uses meter COM port 2.

interruption

A meter power down. Interruptions that do not cause meter power down can be captured by level 1 or 2 sags.

interval

Load Profile consists of many intervals. Each interval has a time stamp, status information, and one or more integer values used to represent the accumulated value of some meter quantities.

interval length

Load Profile intervals can be ended by the clock, in which case, the interval length is the fixed length of each interval. A normal interval length is 15 minutes.

G-4

Glossary

invert mode

A method of reversing the logic of a threshold alarm. Unless otherwise noted, all threshold alarms referred to in this document are in normal mode, not invert mode.

Kh

Determines the rate at which the infrared LEDs pulse. This setting does not affect displayed values.

KYZ Input or Output

Input or output where the rate of changes between 1 and 0 reflects the magnitude of a metered quantity.

last season

The season immediately preceding the current season.

LCD

Liquid Crystal Display.

LED

Light Emitting Diode. Note: The LEDs typically installed on the meter may be ordered to either emit infrared light not visible to the eye or to emit visible light.

load profile

The functionality of a meter to accumulate pulses in proportion to accumulated energy in programmed intervals. This feature refers to the area of battery backed meter RAM that is used to store interval data. One or more meter quantities are stored in memory each interval. The meter stores a “pulse count” for each of the quantities programmed by the user once each interval, in battery backed RAM. Intervals are of fixed length, and aligned with the hour. So with a 15 minute interval, the interval times will always be at xx:00, xx:15, xx:30, and xx:45 for any hour xx.

LONWORKS Network Binding

The programming of the network variables in a LONWORKS network. For a meter and an I/O module to communicate, they must have the same binding.

maximum demand

The largest demand calculated during any interval over a billing period. The Maximum Demand quantity displayed in Test Mode is that value calculated over the test interval only (this can differ from the Normal Mode demand interval).

MC68360

The processor that is used in the Q1000. It is a 32-bit Motorola 68000 series microprocessor.

Mini-DLMS

A protocol subset of MMS. It provides basic services to retrieve data and write the meter program.

Network Variable

A LonWorks variable visible from any node on the network. It behaves as a global variable. For LonWorks devices to talk, they must use the same network variables.

non-fatal error

A less serious error than a fatal error. An error screen will display at the end of the display list. See the section on errors for more information. A non-fatal error will clear itself if the error-causing condition is cleared. For example, a phase voltage returning to its normal level.

Non-Hayes Modem

A modem that does not support the Hayes command set. An example is a Bell 202 modem or a fiber optic modem.

nonvolatile memory

See EEPROM.

G-5

Glossary

normal mode

One of the two operating modes of the meter. It includes all routine meter operations. Normal Mode includes the Normal and Alternate display modes. Also see Display Modes.

off state

A state in which the display is Off, meaning nothing is displayed. If no display is programmed for a display mode, then the display of the meter will be blank. Also, the off time between displays can be set using PCPRO+ 98.

on/off

Do not confuse an alarm's enable/disable with its ON/OFF state. The enable/disable is used to determine whether the Alarms Manager has enabled the alarm or not. The ON/OFF state is used to determine if an alarm has been triggered.

Optical Port

The port on the faceplate of the meter. ANSI and IEC forms are available. The meter can be programmed and communicated with through the optical port.

Output Modules

The Q1000 is designed to communicate with three types of Output Modules: Digital State Output Modules, Pulse Output Modules, and Analog Output Modules.

Percent (%) THD

Percent total harmonic distortion in the electricity flowing through the metering point.

power down

To de-energize the meter.

power up

To energize the meter.

primary/direct reading register

A register in which the readings take into account the register multiplier.

primary rated

Qualifies a register whose value is modified by a CT and/or VT ratio. The register's value reflects the electric quantity on the primary side of the instrument transformer(s).

pulse count

The value of a metered quantity in an interval is represented as an integer pulse count. The “pulse” part of the name refers to an old way of storing the information as flux changes on magnetic tape. It is an integer representation of the value of an integrated meter quantity, such as KWH. The pulse count value (units = quantity-hours per pulse) is obtained by dividing the accumulated value of the quantity-hours during an interval, by the pulse weight.

pulse initiator outputs

A Form C contact closure output that generates pulses per the programmed Ke value. See KYZ output.

Pulse Input, IEC 2-wire KY, Module

This module reads pulse inputs having a user selected pulse width.

Pulse Input, KYZ, Module

This module reads pulse inputs states. The module makes sure that only valid combination of KYZs are accounted for.

Pulse Output

An output that generates a pulse train. The method for outputing the pulses is either a toggle mechanism or a pulse width. Regardless of the physical means of outputing the pulses, a pulse output refers to the generic concept.

G-6

Glossary

Pulse Output, IEC 2-wire KY, Module

This module is designed to output pulses having a defined pulse width. This module does not saturate the network despite the (possibly) high pulse frequency on the outputs.

Pulse Output, KYZ, Module

This module is designed to output pulses on two relays with a toggling mechanism. This module does not saturate the network despite the (possibly) high pulse frequency on the outputs.

pulse speed

The pulse speed is expressed in pulses/sec (or Hz). The pulse speed may be different from the signal frequency on an output relay.

QDIP

QUANTUM Digital Interface Protocol—it is one of the protocols used by the Q1000 meter. The Q1000’s version of QDIP is a subset of the one in the QUANTUM meter.

QUICC

Quad Integrated Communications Controller—this is another name for the MC68360.

raw register

A quantity value from the front end or an external input that represents the instantaneous measure of the quantity.

reconfigure

This action is a change to the meter’s configuration. Reconfiguring allows the user to change one part of the meter’s program without having to perform a full initialization. Metering must be stopped before the meter can be reconfigured. The meter configuration specifies the options and parameters under which the meter should run. Note: Reconfiguring an area will erase the information for that area. Other (non-reconfigured) areas retain their information.

register full scale

The kilowatt demand value that defines the maximum rated demand. If this value is exceeded, a diagnostic is triggered.

register multiplier

A programmable value which is used in calculations of energy and demand. This number can be used by setting the register multiplier equal to the CT ratio times the VT ratio of the installation.

register rollover

The point at which a register reaches its maximum value and rolls over to zero.

rolling interval demand

A calculation of maximum demand derived from the moving average of the smaller consecutive subintervals.

RTS

Request To Send modem signal.

RX

Receive Line modem signal.

sag

A voltage quality event in which the rms voltage is lower than normal for a period of time, typically from 1/2 cycle to 1 minute.

screen

All the information on the four-line LCD. Also see Display.

SCROLL

Scroll Lock Switch.

Scroll Lock

This state is activated by the scroll lock switch. The display will freeze on the current screen when scroll lock is activated. While the scroll lock is on, the alternate display switch will advance the screen displayed every time it is pushed. To leave scroll lock, push the scroll lock button again.

G-7

Glossary

SCS

A proprietary protocol developed by SchlumbergerSema for reading and programming meters.

secondary rated

Any register or pulse output that does not use any CT or VT ratio.

self clearing error

A non-fatal error that appears on the non-fatal error screen only while the error condition is present. If the conditions for setting the error are not present, then the error will be cleared from the display. Examples include low battery and loss of phase.

Serial Port (SP)

Serial Port—this type of port is used to directly interface a PC with a serial port.

Serial Port 1 (SP1)

RS-232 Port number 1.

Serial Port 2 (SP2)

RS-232 Port number 2. This port can be used as an RS-232 port, as an internal modem port, or as an internal RS-485 port.

SERVER

The SERVER usually responds to requests from the CLIENT. In the case of Mini-DLMS, the SERVER is the meter.

SLC

System Loss Compensation

Standard Network Variable Type A standard type ensures that different products from different LonWorks (SNVT) manufacturers can interoperate. status

Each interval in load profile has status information. They are boolean values that indicate the presence or absence of some condition. Normally, they are used for abnormal conditions.

status Indicator

A symbol identifying a certain status or event. For example, EOI indicator or I/O port state indicator.

swell

A voltage quality event in which the rms voltage is higher than normal for a period of time, typically from 1/2 cycle to 1 minute.

TEST

Test Mode Switch.

test mode

One of the two modes of register operation. When configured, this mode allows testing of the meter without altering billing data. It is activated by the test mode switch or by communication using PC-PRO+ 98. Also see display modes.

THD

Total Harmonic Distortion

three button reset

This action is a meter reset that occurs when two buttons (ALT and RESET) on the face of the meter are depressed with the TEST switch on and held during power up. This reset sets the meter to the customer default configuration. Note: All meter data is lost when the reset is executed.

threshold alarm

G-8

The Q1000 allows a constraint to be set on an attached data register's value. If the attached data register's value surpasses the threshold alarm's limit, then the alarm is set to ON. Also see Alarm.

Glossary

timestamp

The meter stores timestamps that represent the time of an event. In the case of load profile, the timestamp normally contains the contents of the meter clock at the instant that the interval was ended. The time stamp includes year, month, day, hour, minute, and second. The interval also includes an indication of whether Daylight Savings Time was in effect.

TOU

Time of Use

translation system

A computer system that acquires metering information from the Q1000 meter.

TX

Transmit Line modem signal

voltage imbalance

The ratio of the voltage on a phase to the average voltage on all phases.

voltage quality

The meter stores the last n events of each of several event types, including voltage sags and swells, interruptions, and imbalances. The number of events (n) is programmable.

voltage quality event

An aberration of the voltage on a phase. The events tracked include interruptions, imbalances, sags, and swells.

VT Ratio

A VT ratio is used to scale the value of the voltage to the primary side of an instrument transformer.

G-9

Glossary

Notes:

G-10

Index

NUMERICS 900 MHz radio 6-2

A accuracy 9-8, 9-11 active transformer technology 8-6 address 6-19, 6-21 adjustments meter 3-1, 9-8 alarm 8-10 alarms threshold 8-10 ALT button 2-1, 3-1, 3-18, 9-5, 9-15 Alternate Display button 3-1 alternate display mode 8-5 switch 3-13 alternate mode 3-6 switch 9-3 Amperehours 4-3 analog input 1-3, 1-8, 1-10, 3-26, 3-34, 3-57–3-59, 4-3, 6-26, 6-32–6-34, 8-8, 8-10 analog output 1-10, 1-23–1-24, 1-27–1-28, 3-21, 3-26, 3-57–3-58, 3-74–3-76, 3-79, 6-26, 6-29–6-31, 6-33 annunciators 1-5 answer delay 6-12 ring 6-13 autobaud enable 6-19, 6-21 sensing 6-2, 6-11 auxiliary power 1-15, 9-12 auxiliary voltage supply 3-4

B battery 2-8 carryover 9-6 life 1-37 maintenance 9-1 memory retention 8-3 packaging 2-2 voltage 1-37 battery backed RAM 3-5, 3-7, 4-15 battery back-up 1-37 baud rate 3-81–3-82, 3-85, 6-3, 6-19, 6-21 optical port 6-2 billing data 8-4 billing registers 1-12, 3-4–3-5, 3-7 binding 1-23–1-25, 3-14, 3-80–3-81, 6-35–6-38, 6-41, 8-4–8-5, 10-4, A-14, G-5 block demand 9-4 registers 3-22 block interval demand 3-22, 8-8

board replacement 2-63–2-71 bonding meter enclosure 2-25

C cable null modem 6-2 calibration 8-7 call window 6-12, 6-15 configuration 3-60 call windows 6-12 circular file 4-15 clock error 4-15, 6-16 coincident demand values 8-8 cold load pickup 3-5, 5-1, 8-8, 9-6 communication problems 9-17 protocol support 1-9 settings 6-10 compensated registers 1-12 Varhours 4-3 Watthours 4-3 configuration customer 3-18, 6-11 default 3-18, 6-11 factory default 6-11 continuous cumulative peak 8-8 contrast adjustment screw 3-17–3-18 correction factors 3-85 phase angle 3-85 CT/VT Correction 3-40, 3-85 cumulative demand 3-23 peak 8-8 current transmission line 7-9 current transformer 3-40 customer configuration 3-18, 6-11

D data billing 8-4 loss 8-3 retention 3-4, 4-15, 8-3 Daylight Savings Time 4-15, 8-10 DB-25 connector pin assignments 6-2 DB-9 connector Switchboard/Drawout configuration 2-38

I-1

Index

dedicated phone line 6-13 default configuration 3-18, 6-11 demand cumulative 3-23 EOI 4-15, 6-16 interval 6-28 registers 1-28, 3-8, 3-12, 3-19, 3-33, 3-42–3-43, 6-1, 6-21–6-22, 6-32, 8-8, 8-10 reset 4-15, 6-16, 6-28, 8-5 reset button 9-5 reset lockout time 9-5 reset mechanism 2-1 reset switch 3-12 demand interval 8-8 demand interval length 9-4 demand quantities 8-8–8-9 demand registers 6-32 diagnostic checks 3-3 diagnostic events 3-53 diagnostics module 9-2 digital pulse input 3-58, 6-32 digital pulse output 3-57 digital signal processing 8-1 digital signal processor 8-4, 8-7 digital state input 1-3, 1-10, 1-24, 3-12, 3-58–3-60, 3-65, 3-69, 3-79, 4-16–4-17, 6-16, 6-26, 6-28, 6-32–6-34, 8-10 digital state output 1-3, 1-10, 1-23–1-25, 3-57–3-58, 4-17–4-19, 6-26, 6-28, 6-33–6-35, 8-10, 8-13, G-1–G-3, G-6 digital state output module 6-34 dimensions 1-29 DIP switch 3-1, 3-13, 6-11 direct link 1-11 display LCD 8-5 display adjustment 9-8 display annunciators 1-5 Display Board 8-5 display formats 3-9 display lists 3-8 display messages 3-11 display mode 3-8 DNP 3.0 protocol 1-39, 3-35–3-36, 3-39, 3-79–3-80, 6-1, 6-17, 6-22–6-25 DSP 8-4, 8-7 DST 4-15, 8-10 DTE device 6-2

E end of interval 3-5, 8-9 end-of-interval 1-14 demand 4-15 load profile 4-16, 6-16 energy quanta array 8-8

I-2

quantities 8-8 quantity IDs 8-8 registers 1-28, 3-6, 3-13, 3-19, 3-22, 3-32, 3-43, 6-1, 6-21–6-22, 6-32, 9-7 values 4-3 energy registers 6-32, 8-8 EOI 1-14, 3-5, 8-9 demand 6-16 EOI pulse 6-28 equipment rack 2-26 error codes 9-3 types 1-37 errors clock 4-15, 6-16 fatal 1-37, 9-2 non-fatal 1-37, 9-2–9-3, 9-12 event 1-9 log 4-1, 4-15 records 4-1, 4-15 summaries 4-15, 9-3 THD 5-11 events configuration 3-53 diagnostic 3-53 phone home 3-63, 6-16–6-17 threshold 3-54 voltage quality 8-9 external connectors 2-28 inputs 8-10 modem 6-2, 6-11

F factory default configuration 6-11 factory default configuration 3-14 Fast Fourier Transform 1-9, 8-1, 8-7, 8-9 fatal errors 1-37, 9-2 FFT 1-9, 8-1, 8-7, 8-9 firmware 1-11, 3-82, 6-19 upgrade 3-80, 3-85 FLVA 7-5 FLW 7-5 frame relay 6-2 full-load loss angle 7-5 loss phase angle 7-5 losses 7-4 var loss 7-5 voltamperes 7-5 full-load losses 7-5 full-load watts loss 7-5 fundamental

Index

varhours 4-3 vars 8-7 watthours 4-3 watts 8-7 fundamental power registers 5-11–5-12

G Global EOI 3-7, 4-2, 8-9 ground 2-27 grid wires 2-27 single-point 2-26 grounding 2-25 CT and PT circuits 2-27 hardware specification 1-37 group address 6-19

H hardware specification 1-37 harmonic analysis 5-1, 5-11 calculations 8-9 components 5-11 distortion 8-12 magnitude registers 5-11 measurements 1-12 phase angle registers 5-11 registers 3-9, 5-12 harmonics 3-49, 4-1 Hayes Accura 144 + Fax 144 Modem 6-5 hysteresis 1-9

I I/O module 2-23 IDs energy quantity 8-8 IEC 1107 protocol 6-1, 6-22 IEC 60870-5-102 Plus protocol 3-35–3-36, 6-1, 6-17, 6-22–6-25 IEC 60870-5-102 protocol 1-39, 3-35–3-36, 6-1, 6-17, 6-22–6-25 imbalances 1-9, 3-47, 5-1, 5-3, 5-8, 8-1 infrared LEDs 3-13, 8-5, 9-4, 9-7 input analog 1-3, 1-8, 1-10, 3-26, 3-34, 3-57–3-59, 4-3, 6-26, 6-32–6-34, 8-8, 8-10 configuration 3-58 digital state 1-3, 1-10, 1-24, 3-12, 3-58–3-60, 3-65, 3-69, 3-79, 4-16–4-17, 6-16, 6-26, 6-28, 6-32–6-34, 8-10 pulse 1-3, 1-8–1-10, 1-24–1-25, 3-7, 3-26, 3-59–3-60, 3-69, 3-71, 3-73, 4-3, 6-26–6-27, 6-32–6-35, 8-8, 8-10 input/output module 1-3, 6-33 inputs analog 3-58

digital pulse 3-58, 6-32 digital state 3-58 external 8-10 instantaneous demand registers 3-23 interval demand 3-23 registers 3-8, 3-19, 3-24, 9-5 instantaneous registers 1-13 instrument transformer correction 3-40 internal modem 6-2, 6-11 internal modem 1-10, 6-1 retrofit kit 2-37 interruptions 1-9, 3-47, 5-1, 5-3, 5-8, 8-1 interval length 1-3, 1-8, 4-2–4-3, 8-1, 8-10 make-up 3-5 interval data RAM storage 1-8 interval length 4-2

K Ke pulse output constants 9-5 values 6-26 kit internal modem 2-37 KYZ pulse outputs 9-5

L LCD 1-3, 3-1 LCD display 8-5, 9-8 LED 8-5 LED configuration 3-13 normal mode 3-44 test mode 3-44 LEDs 1-10, 3-1, 3-7, 8-3 infrared 3-13, 8-5, 9-4, 9-7 meter 3-44 line loss vars 7-9 watts 7-9 line losses 7-6 liquid crystal display 1-3, 3-1, 8-5 load profile 1-3, 1-8, 1-40, 4-1–4-2, 8-1 configuration 3-45 end-of-interval 6-16 EOI 6-16 interval length 4-3 memory channels 4-3 recorders 8-10 registers 1-9, 3-19, 3-24 load research 1-40 LONTALK protocol 6-34

I-3

Index

LonWorks 1-3, 1-9–1-10, 1-29, 1-37, 2-23, 3-57 circuit 6-34 LonWorks Binding 6-35, G-5 LonWorks I/O Module Mounting 2-25, 6-33 LonWorks Network 1-10, 8-3, 8-5 LonWorks port 6-19, 6-22 loss angle 7-5 loss of phase 9-12 loss phase angle 7-5

M Main Board 2-8, 8-2–8-4, 8-7 maximum demand 3-24 memory channels 4-3 memory retention battery 8-3 messages 3-11 meter address 6-19, 6-21 meter adjustment 9-8 meter case ground 2-27 meter cover removal 2-7 meter dimensions 1-29 meter enclosure bonding 2-25 meter events 3-53 Meter Interface Connector 2-31 meter register 1-14, 3-8 meter standards 1-22 meter termination 2-24 microprocessor 1-28, 8-4 Mini-DLMS protocol 2-36, 2-47, 3-34–3-37, 3-81, 3-84, 4-7–4-8, 4-14, 6-1, 6-10, 6-18–6-19, 9-18–9-19 minimum demand 3-24 MODBUS protocol 1-39, 3-35–3-36, 3-80, 6-1, 6-17, 6-22–6-25 modem 1-11, 6-2 external 6-2, 6-11 internal 1-10, 6-1–6-2, 6-11 rate 6-11 RS-485 bus 6-2 modem board 2-2, 2-28–2-29, 2-39, 2-47–2-48, 2-50–2-51, 2-71, 3-11, 3-34, 6-2, 6-11, 9-19–9-21 MOV Board 8-2 multi-drop networks 1-10

N Neuron chip 6-34 no-load loss phase angle 7-5 no-load var loss 7-5 non-circular file 4-15 non-fatal errors 1-37, 9-2–9-3 loss of phase 9-12 non-register values 3-25 normal mode 3-6

I-4

LED configuration 3-44 NOVRAM 1-37, 3-4, 8-3 null modem cable 6-2

O off-hook detect 6-11 parallel 6-13 operating modes 3-5 optical port 1-9, 1-11, 2-30, 3-1, 6-1, 6-16, 8-4–8-5 baud rate 6-2 problems 9-17 option boards modem 2-2, 2-28–2-29, 2-39, 2-47–2-48, 2-50–2-51, 2-71, 3-11, 3-34, 6-2, 6-11, 9-19–9-21 RS-485 1-10, 2-2, 2-29, 2-32, 2-39, 2-55, 3-34, 6-3, 8-7 output analog 1-10, 1-23–1-24, 1-27–1-28, 3-21, 3-26, 3-57–3-58, 3-74–3-76, 3-79, 6-26, 6-29–6-31, 6-33 configuration 3-57 digital state 1-3, 1-10, 1-23–1-25, 3-57–3-58, 4-17–4-19, 6-26, 6-28, 6-33–6-35, 8-10, 8-13, G-1–G-3, G-6 pulse 1-3, 1-10, 1-13, 1-24, 1-29, 3-21, 3-26, 3-57–3-58, 3-70, 6-26–6-27, 6-32–6-33, 8-5, 9-5 relay 6-34 outputs analog 3-57 digital pulse 3-57 digital state 3-57

P parallel off-hook detect 6-13 part numbers Standard External Meter Interface Cable 2-33 PC-PRO+ 98 2-12 call windows 6-12 CT/VT Correction 3-85 diagnostics readings 9-3 digital pulse inputs 6-32 energy registers 9-8 errors 9-2 firmware upgrade 3-80 Online Manual 3-29 phone numbers 6-15 peak cumulative 8-8 peak time of occurrence 8-8 phase angle 1-14 phase angle correction 3-85 phone home configuration 3-61 phone home event 6-16–6-17 configuration 3-63 phone line

Index

dedicated 6-13 pin assignments DB-25 connector 6-2 polyphase meter 2-13 port optical 6-1 RS-232 6-1 RS-485 6-1 power loss 8-3 power outage 3-4, 4-5, 4-16, 6-16 power quality 1-3, 1-12, 5-1, 8-11 power quality registers 3-9 Power Supply Board 8-2 power transformer losses 7-3 power up system checks 9-2 Practical Peripherals P114MT II 6-3 Pre-December 1999 Q1000 Meters 2-35, 2-53 previous demand 3-23 programming software 1-11, 2-12, 2-47, 2-57 projected demand 3-23 protocol DNP 3.0 1-39, 3-35–3-36, 3-39, 3-79–3-80, 6-1, 6-17, 6-22–6-25 IEC 1107 6-1, 6-22 IEC 60870-5-102 1-39, 3-35–3-36, 6-1, 6-17, 6-22–6-25 IEC 60870-5-102 Plus 3-35–3-36, 6-1, 6-17, 6-22–6-25 Mini-DLMS 2-36, 2-47, 3-34–3-37, 3-81, 3-84, 4-7–4-8, 4-14, 6-1, 6-10, 6-18–6-19, 9-18–9-19 MODBUS 1-39, 3-35–3-36, 3-80, 6-1, 6-17, 6-22–6-25 QDIP 3-36, 3-67, 6-1, 6-19, 6-21 protocol support 6-1 communication 1-9 pulse constant 4-4 count resolution 4-5 EOI 6-28 pulse input 1-3, 1-8–1-10, 1-24–1-25, 3-7, 3-26, 3-59–3-60, 3-69, 3-71, 3-73, 4-3, 6-26–6-27, 6-32–6-35, 8-8, 8-10 pulse output 1-3, 1-10, 1-13, 1-24, 1-29, 3-21, 3-26, 3-57–3-58, 3-70, 6-26–6-27, 6-32–6-33, 8-5, 9-5 constants 9-5 pulse outputs 6-26 pulse weight 6-27 minimum 4-5 multiplier 6-32

Q Q1000 Meters Pre-December 1999 2-35, 2-53 QDIP protocol 3-36, 3-67, 6-1, 6-19, 6-21 QDIP registers 6-19–6-20 Qhours 4-3 quantities

demand 8-9 QUANTUM STQ Meters retrofitting 2-72

R radians 3-86 RAM battery backed 4-15 RAM storage 1-8 ratio error corrections 1-14 recorders load profile 8-10 register meter 1-14, 3-8 parameters 3-6 register data 1-5 register freeze 3-11, 4-16, 6-19, 6-28, 6-32 register information 1-3 register multipliers 1-13, 3-40, 6-26 register self read 6-16, 6-28, 6-32 register threshold alarm 8-10 registers 1-13, 3-4–3-5, 3-7, 3-21, 5-1, 5-11 billing 1-12, 3-4–3-5, 3-7 block demand 3-22 compensated 1-12 demand 1-28, 3-8, 3-12, 3-19, 3-33, 3-42–3-43, 6-1, 6-21–6-22, 6-32, 8-8, 8-10 energy 1-28, 3-6, 3-8, 3-13, 3-19, 3-22, 3-32, 3-43, 4-3, 6-1, 6-21–6-22, 6-32, 8-8, 9-7 fundamental power 5-11–5-12 harmonic 3-9, 5-12 harmonic magnitude 5-11 harmonic phase angle 5-11 instantaneous 1-13, 3-8, 3-19, 3-24, 9-5 instantaneous demand 3-23 load profile 1-9, 3-19, 3-24, 4-2 non-register values 3-25 power quality 3-9 QDIP 6-19–6-20 rolling interval demand 3-23 THD 5-11 thermal demand 3-23 totalized 1-8–1-9, 8-10 uncompensated 1-12 remote modem 6-11 station rate 6-11 RESET button 3-1, 3-18, 9-14 RESET mechanism 2-1 retrofit installation QUANTUM STQ Meters 2-72 retrofit kit 2-37 revenue billing 1-12 ring answer delay 6-13

I-5

Index

RJ-11 connector 2-37 RMS Current 8-7 RMS Voltage 8-7 rolling interval demand registers 3-23 RS-232 1-11, 2-33, 8-4 port 6-1 serial ports 1-9, 8-5 RS-485 8-4 board 1-10, 2-2, 2-29, 2-32, 2-39, 2-55, 3-34, 6-3, 8-7 bus 6-2 module 1-10 port 6-1 RS-485 board 2-55 RTU 1-39, 6-1, 6-19, 6-24

S sags 1-9, 3-47, 5-1, 5-3, 5-8, 8-1 sampling process 8-7 SCADA Interface 1-39 SCROLL button 3-1, 9-15 SCROLL LOCK button 2-1 scroll lock switch 3-12 SCS protocol 6-22 secondary readings 4-4 security codes 1-11 self read 4-1 configuration 3-64 serial port 8-5 service configuration 3-66 service connections 2-17 shared line 6-11 single-point ground 2-26 SLC 8-9, 9-16 description 7-1 software programming 1-11, 2-12, 2-47, 2-57 Standard External Meter Interface Cable 2-33 standards 1-22 swells 1-9, 3-47, 5-1, 5-3, 5-8, 8-1 switch 3-44 alternate display mode 3-13 alternate mode 9-3 demand reset 3-12 scroll lock 3-12 test mode 3-13 system checks power up 9-2 System Loss Compensation 8-9, 9-16 description 7-1 system losses 7-7 system planning 1-40

I-6

T termination 2-24 TEST button 3-18 test LEDs 8-3 test mode 3-6, 8-5 LED configuration 3-44 test mode switch 3-13 Test Switch 3-1, 3-8 THD 1-9, 5-11 THD events 5-11 THD registers 5-11 thermal demand 8-8 thermal demand registers 3-23 thermal interval demand 3-23 three button reset 3-18 threshold 1-9, 5-9, 6-16 threshold alarms 3-54, 6-28, 8-10 threshold event 3-54 thresholds 3-54, 6-28 meter 3-54 time adjustment 1-10, 4-6 time of occurrence 8-8 time of use rates 6-32 Time-of-Use configuration 3-51 TOO 8-8 total harmonic distortion 1-9 totalized registers 1-8–1-9, 8-10 Transducer 1-37, 3-3 Transducer Board 8-2–8-4 transducers 6-32 transformer losses 7-4 transmission line current 7-9 losses 7-6 var loss 7-6 watt loss 7-6

U U.S. Robotics Sportster 33600 Fax Modem 6-7 uncompensated egisters 1-12 Varhours 4-3 Watthours 4-3 unterminated meters 2-24 user data 3-67

V VAarith 8-7 Vahours per quadrant 4-3 var loss 7-5 transmission line 7-6 Varhours lagging 4-3

Index

leading 4-3 vars fundamental 8-7 VAvect 8-7 voltage imbalance 8-11 voltage interruptions 8-12 voltage quality 1-9, 4-1, 5-1 imbalances 3-47, 5-1, 5-3, 5-8, 8-1 interruptions 3-47, 5-1, 5-3, 5-8, 8-1 sags 3-47, 5-1, 5-3, 5-8, 8-1 swells 3-47, 5-1, 5-3, 5-8, 8-1 voltage quality event 1-9, 8-9 voltage sag 8-12 voltage swell 8-12 voltage transformer correction 3-40 voltamperes 7-5 Volthours 4-3

W warranty 1-iv watt loss transmission line 7-6 Watthours delivered 4-3 received 4-3 watts fundamental 8-7

I-7

Index

Notes:

I-8